Home

DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARD PRACTICE

Contents

1. 198 Types of testing and troubleshooting 199 Aviation testing and troubleshooting category Aircraft Troubleshooting TMs only lt troubleaviationcategory gt 199 Standard testing and troubleshooting category lt troublecategory gt 200 DMWR NMWR testing and troubleshooting category depot only troubledmwrnriwrcategoFy ec Poe epidural due Boe 200 Master index testing and troubleshooting category masterimdexeable 200 Testing and troubleshooting work packages 200 Work package content cenae pudiendo taf uie Seems 200 Types of testing and troubleshooting work packages 200 Introduction work package Aircraft Troubleshooting TMs only US LT ETO Wy Mies an eu 201 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 201 Initial setup information lt gt 201 Technical description work packages lt techdescwp gt Aircraft Troubleshooting Manuals only nen 201 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 201 Initial setup information lt gt 201 Equipment descripti
2. 298 5 3 7 Repair parts for special tools list work package lt stl_partswp gt 298 5 3 7 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 298 F 5 3 7 2 298 5 3 7 3 Special tools repair parts items list lt pi category gt 298 F 5 3 7 3 1 Functional group header fncgrp 299 F 5 3 8 Kit parts list work package lt kitswp gt 299 5 3 8 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 299 5 3 8 2 Initial setup aM 299 5 3 8 3 Kits part items 299 F 5 3 8 3 1 Functional group header fncgrp 299 F 5 3 8 3 2 Kit part item group lt kititem gt 299 F 5 3 8 3 3 Kits part item quantity 299 5 3 9 Bulk items work package lt bulk_itemswp gt 299 5 3 9 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 299 5 3 9 2 Initial setup intormatio 299 5 3 9 3 Mtem et s 299 F 5 3 9 3 1 ITEM ol
3. C 5 2 3 4 Tabular option Description C 5 2 3 3 Copyright credit L s 5 2 26 Corrosion prevention and control a 5 2 7 Cost Conse ratlODiS u aa n eo 5 2 24 CVC Ia eta EU ELA 3 2 LT 5 2 2 6 Page mu SSS D u h 4 7 16 2 1 1 MSY TI ccs 5 3 5 3 4 Credit Ies deco qute tute 4 7 27 3 3 Critical safety Itens 7 5 9 3 Critical safety items CSI and Flight safety critical aircraft parts WB adinim S tabu G 5 9 Cross reference index work packa ges F 5 3 11 D DA Form 202988 24 o si rui a unu u 22 259 Data plalesze doe e cd E CAT m apaku qami ii qam akui qasata M Q BES aspa uk atus 5 2 1 1 12 List of effective pages work packages 5 2 1 5 11 D coded 5 3 10 3 3 Decal Gataplate 5 2 7 5 Decals and instruction data plates C 5 2 4 8 2
4. 208 D 5 5 8 5 7 Post operational shutdown procedures lt disconnect gt 209 D 5 5 8 6 Integrated system troubleshooting procedures work packages 209 PYG NOTES W MUR MI 209 E MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION S 218 EM SCOPB ugue EUER I 218 E 1 1 UN aid dhe 218 E2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENITS 218 ELE DEFINITIONS 218 EA GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 218 E 4 1 Generale eR ato Se 218 E 4 2 Development of maintenance 218 E 4 3 Maintenance level applicability 218 E 4 4 Depot Maintenance Work Requirement DMWR and National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWR 218 E 4 5 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery 2 9 xiv MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE E 4 6 Use ot the DTD XSLS unb S te n Gea ee es eee 2 9 E 4 7 Content structure and format teo etes n ehh oc 2 9 E 4 8 Style and formid
5. 5 2 1 C TOSS Tef wa cee E 5 3 11 AEA E E 4212232 Developmeht OT sioe 4 7 of 4 7 D vel opmentiof D 4 8 Development OT adiacet a Qa uta DU E 4 9 Development OF ices ossis CH n Red Ue F 4 6 D vel opimentofa ood exque V G 4 7 Eff ectivity mote auqa da ee ae 4 7 9 1c Formats Got rar tee ade S ae een tate pue EN 4 1 2 3 Identification THO n ren e iet Coe 4 7 91 Identification number eet nei etin 4 7 9 5 Initial setup TnFOLmiattOR codo ha ae EIN SE 4 1 9 2 a e 4 7 9 List of effective Pages 5 2 1 5 level e race tuit gemis 4 7 9 1a Pascn mbenig no E RU Oe 4 7 9 4 e m N 4 7 23 3 3 Sequential numbering New for a change 4 7 9 3 1 Volumized oet eut te 4 9 3 2 393 341 201 200 174 339 252 201 206 328 186 257 253 24 341 46 223 200 24 186 301 24 164 185 195 219 285 318 29 24
6. 5 3 1 Deleted figures and items 4 8 1 6a Deleted work Pack ate yuck eene et ose 4 8 1 6c Expendable and durable items F 5 3 6 5 Fig re UIDES s se e EON Sis eee oU ad aeui ume epis 4 7 27 4 2 Figuretifle 5 3 6 3 1 Identical assemblies c Ado F 5 3 12 4 yur u a edt an u aa qa Rui F 5 3 12 3 5 3 12 Index illustration and 5 3 5 4 Inserted work packages 4 8 1 6 lutreducHom WP n AS v toda 5 3 5 TESTA CHAN SES Np t 4 8 1 6b Kit parts list WP iios cerei tetra EA UT DI 5 3 8 5 3 6 3 2 6 Go estet dette deste Rete 5 3 8 lvo esa F 5 3 4 I ist oL effective PALES aan bove 5 2 1 5 8 NSN index WP ausos Gan ass 5 3 11 1 5 3 6 3 2 15 Part number index F 5 3 11 2 Parts information chapter F 5 3 2 Prepatalon OT 55 S y At dde 5 3 Reference designator index work package 5 3 11 3 part item er a Rae POM
7. seed aes uhu hani 4 8 4 8 1 1 Changed front and tear 4 8 1 3 Changed work packages tane eee einen ie Pese 4 8 1 2 Illustrations SytODOL vet 4 8 1 5 4 8 1 6 Symbols for text and tables 4 8 1 4 4 8 1 Chapters 4 7 2 2 Mets b 4 7 8 eee eee aa 4 7 8 2 m 4 7 8 1 Charts and tct eese qp aci m ERA AREE SES E 4 7 27 2 6 Checking unpacked E 5 3 2 3 3b Checklist D 5 5 7 4 Preshop atialysis D 5 5 6 5b CMC MI ANT enel asas 5 3 2 3 8 Classification of defects E 5 3 2 3 9 2 Classification of defects E 5 3 5 3 26 Cleanin unahan u yini E 5 3 5 3 8 Gleaning oio oed Saar Y adi e UR an ed es Pea E 5 3 14 1 5 EU NEP MP G 5 4 4 Color use of 4 7 27 4 8 Combined operator checkout and troubleshooting WP D 5 5 8 5 Common test sets systems requiring D 5 2 2 2 3 Common tools and 5 2 25
8. 263 cEmalbtecords check uuu potes iet theses 263 ESS 16 7 Signature sheets s es ee E I EUER a eed RES Ee 263 EG NOTES MM eco 263 REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST RPSTL 284 BL SCORE Ner 284 F 1 1 SCOPE J 284 F 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS 284 DEFINITIONS 5 284 GENERAL REQUIREMENITS 284 F 4 1 G neral 284 4 2 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery 284 F 4 3 Use orthe DTD X 284 4 4 Content structure and format iioii 285 F 4 5 Style dnd TOTAL Fd oae 285 4 6 Work package 285 F 4 7 Selective application and tailoring eene 285 F 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENT Si iieri tis tento ett oen enia oo Ue RE 285 F 5 1 General 285 E52 Parts information development e dose date 285 5 3 Preparation of RESTES ameet ue ph comoediae 285 5 3 1 Separate RPSTECEM s ecce neptis utt an i
9. 60 6 3 Tailoring guidance ee Oe 61 6 4 Data M 61 6 5 Subject Term Keyword Listing otio adero ets ee Fen o eT 61 A CONTENT SELECTION MATRIXES 93 ec 93 1 1 93 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS 93 A 3 DEFINITIONS ERU QUE 93 GENERAL 5555555 93 AS DETAILED REQUIREMENTS 93 A 5 1 Tailoring requirements for technical manuals 93 5 1 1 P blicalorn pQ 93 A 5 1 2 Technical content tables es R a 96 5 2 Intended use 96 5 3 Acquisition requirements secedere aeg eee eh Eee 97 B GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY ORFOPERATION 163 BI SCOPE e a Narr a eT SEED Ropa CER 163 B 1 1 OCODE accus ones facet OR ao eL as au Sani cM a 163 B 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENITS 163
10. 172 5 3 Equipment description and data work package descwp 172 5 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 172 5 3 2 Initial setup information lt gt 172 1X MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE B 5 3 3 Equipment characteristics capabilities and features lt gt 172 B 5 3 4 Location and description of major components Except Conventional Ammunition and Chemical Manuals only lt gt 173 5 3 5 Differences between models lt eqpdiff gt 173 B 5 3 6 Equipment data sto Rest eei 174 B 5 4 Theory of operation work package Except Conventional and Chemical Ammunition only lt thrywp gt 174 B 5 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 174 B 5 4 2 Initial setup information wpinfo esee 174 B 5 4 3 Th ory prese tation ru as Ried 174 B 5 5 General information work package Preventive Maintenance Services Manual only lt pms ginfowp gt HARI 175 B 5 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt
11. 175 B 5 5 2 Initial setup information lt gt 175 5 5 3 Maintenance activities 175 5 5 4 General information lt geninfo gt dpa dae 176 B 5 6 General information work package Phased Maintenance Inspection Manual only lt pm ginfowp gt 177 5 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 177 5 6 2 Initial setup information lt gt 177 5 6 3 General information geninfo 177 NOTES 182 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION S 184 CL SCOPE M cer co 184 C 1 1 OCODE TET UR 184 5 5 neenon e eo QUE ERN 184 III II 184 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 184 4 1 General 184 C 4 2 Maintenance level applicability 184 4 3 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery 1
12. WP 0002 2 B Baffle arid Spacer u caus n a saw WP 0034 7 Baffle Assembly usa n nnne ro eet tte rir E D FE erri br ree prede etae WP 0007 9 Bearings Anti friction CT WP 0041 2 2 ad tete ee pa OL dat WP 0041 3 Inspection EN Installations na aa WE ie oe ode ede i eee ooa eae unpu Nace irem toe e Mp one Dente d e EUR WP 0042 1 Bleed Control Limit cede i eoa carb De tei EL ead WP 0040 3 Breather Pressurizing Valve Disassembly Inspection xi Installation aee koe N etre Rear toS SON ne EE WP 0017 5 Carbon Seals I II WP 0008 2 Inspection WP 0008 1 Rel uri mee WP 0009 1 Combustion Chambers rE WP 0002 4 INDEX 1 FIGURE 23 Example of an alphabetical index 90 MIL STD 4005 1 2 X XXXX XXX XX By Order of the Secretary of the Army PETER J SCHOOMAKER General United States Army Chief of Staff Official Signature JOEL B HUDSON Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0232913 DISTRIBUTION To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number XXXXXX requirements for TM X XXXX XXX XX FIGURE 24
13. 240 E 5 3 5 3 11 Repair or replacement lt repalir rplc gt 241 E 5 3 5 3212 a oc T Sasa 241 3013 Panta lt ph Su 241 Lubrication lt li bes oed eet tede 241 E 5 3 5 3 15 Assembly assem uec een ED UTR NE 241 5 3 5 3 16 Test and inspection lt gt 1 21 2 2 2 4 1 0 1 4 1 4 4 4 242 E 5 3 5 3 16 1 Inspection and test of conventional and chemical ammunition or components containing radioactive materials DS GS and AVIM only 242 5 3 5 3 16 2 Pre embarkation inspection of material in units alerted for overseas reg use Dro DD DU ec a UE rt c 243 E 5 3 53 17 Bistala on ea cede et 243 E 5 3 5 3 18 Adjustment lt adjust gt FIAT eR ERE UR ts 244 E 5 3 5 3 19 Calibration calibration e e eee 244 E 5 3 5 3 20 Radio interference suppression s use eene tes ar oda vede vo eee nnda 244 E 5 3 5 3 21 Placing in s tvice pls 244 10 353205 Testing etest Dasso decocti Cos etae ta duci t eR 244 E 5 3 5 3 23 Preservation packaging and marking DMWR NMWR only ppm 245 5 3 5 3 24 Overhaul
14. E 5 3 2 3 8b Peculiar test sets systems requiring 5 2 222 Periods of ID VenlOLy 5 3 12 2 6 e desire usen d 4 7 9 2d Phased maintenance checklist E 5 3 16 4 Phased maintenance inspection WP E 5 3 16 Phased maintenance manual Gen Info WP B 5 6 Photographs mapan tl Dieta ze mo sedie cen ded que erede 4 7 27 2 3 Line drawings in place of 4 7 27 2 3 3 Bri rr 4 7 27 2 3 1 R touching o ERR RU a aaa 4 7 27 2 3 2 er 5 3 5 3 21 PMOS 5 3 4 ro M E 5 3 4 1 13 Data a 5 3 4 2 3 1 Equipment not ready available 11 2 E 5 3 4 2 3 1f Dilery als ico E 5 3 4 2 3 1b TAPER CLO 5 3 4 1 tem numibers E 5 3 4 2 3 1a Items to be checked or serviced uoo rc eeu E 5 34 52 3 Td Mandatory replacement parts for E 5 3 4 2 4 hung IP
15. E 5 2 375 220 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Maintenance Cont PMES am rear tater Eu asa 5 3 4 a anqas ieee ees E5212 PMI work pacKage u E 5 3 12 1 PMS Aviation category E 5 2 11 PMS Work PACK ACS ss enit BG us 5 3 15 Preliminary calibration 5 3 2 3 7 Preliminary checks amp 5 5 3 2 3 6 Preliminary servicing 5 3 2 3 5 Procedures eco a ime 4 2 OA eguirements WP o qose E 5 3 8 4 Service UPON receipt of matertel 5 3 2 3 3 serudce UPON Tecelpt 5 32 Shelter require melts tlg hay h aS uH a e diode 5 3 2 3 2 Shipment movement and storage category 5 2 9 jupe 5 3 2 3 1 Special applications iie eere ren Waves v eas qe to ide E 5 3 2 3 4 3 SOLAR ET of WP Site 5 3 12 3 Test Inspection category 5 2 8 Tor
16. 222 5 2 6 Auxiliary equipment maintenance lt auxiliarycategory gt 222 5 2 7 Ammunition maintenance lt ammunitioncategory gt 222 E 5 2 8 Test and inspection maintenance Conventional and chemical ammunition only testinspectioncategOry iu eis tueciste ee eris ideo 222 B5 2 9 Shipment movement and storage maintenance Conventional and chemical ammunition only shipmentmovementstoragecategory 222 E 5 2 10 Ammunition marking maintenance Conventional and chemical ammunition only Unit AVUM or above only lt ammomarkingcategory gt 223 E 5 2 11 Preventive maintenance services Aircraft preventive maintenance services only UO ludens Ru eU 223 5 2 12 Phased maintenance inspections Aircraft phased maintenance inspection only lt checklisteate SOry ss 223 5 3 Maintenance work 2 MH 223 E 5 3 1 Work package Contents node aee oc i ci dde qe enfer 223 5 3 2 Service upon receipt work package Unit AVUM only lt gt 223 5 3 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 222 5 3 2 2 Initial setup information lt gt 222 5 3 2 3 Service upon receipt tasks 223 E3231 gt
17. 204 Initial setup information lt gt 204 Introduction lt InBfr0 gt dined haa ail 204 Component checklist lt compchklist gt 204 Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures work packages 204 Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures content 204 xiii MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE D 5 5 8 2 Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedure work package addens t E 205 D 5 5 8 3 Operational checkout work package lt opcheckwp gt 205 D 5 5 8 3 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo 205 D 5 5 8 3 2 Initial setup information lt gt sese eene 205 D 5 5 6 3 3 IntroOd ctio9f EO edo nen ooi To eee 205 D 5 5 8 3 4 General procedures and precautions proc 205 D 5 5 8 3 5 Pretest setup procedures lt hookup gt 205 D 5 5 8 3 6 Operational checkout procedures lt opcheckproce gt 205 D 5 5 8 3 7 Post operational shutdown procedures lt disconnect gt 206 D 5 5 8 4 Troubleshooting work packa
18. 45 4 7 27 45 Foldout figure numbering 45 4 1 21 4 4 Multisheet numbering Ica tsi tal bem de 45 ATZA Sega tesi ma ape b E 45 4 7 27 4 5 1 Figure title format 45 4 18 1 4952 Figure title placement 46 4 7 27 4 6 Illustration identification numbers 46 4 7 27 4 7 Portraying signal HOW cs 46 472148 Color in illustrations 46 4 8 Changes REViISIONS NET 46 4 8 1 Changes dass eaae 46 4 8 1 1 AC Cee mR ee bas 46 4 8 1 2 Changed work packages 1e iter 46 4 8 1 3 Changed front and rear matter pages 2 47 4 8 1 4 Change symbols for text and 47 4 8 1 5 Change symbols for illustrations 2 47 4 8 1 6 Changes to RPS TL work packages 47 4 8 2 Complete TM oet 48 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENIT S 48 5 1 Technical content 48 2
19. 228 Ammunition markings lt gt 228 Classification of defects lt 229 Handling lt ammo handlin gt 229 Procedures needed to activate ammunition mine etc lt arm gt 229 Other service upon receipt task lt other surtsk gt 229 Follow on maintenance lt followon maintsk gt 229 Equipment user fitting instructions work package Unit AVUM or above lt gt 229 Preventive maintenance checks and services PMCS including lubrication instructions Except for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition aircraft TMs DMWR and NMWR only 229 PMCS introduction work package lt pmcsintrowp gt 229 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 230 Initial setup information lt gt 230 PMCS CAL soto quib tre tb DI 230 PMCS work package lt gt 0000 eene enne een nennen 231 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 231 Initial setup information lt gt 231 PMES tes bass uu ia u
20. 4 7 16 2 1 1 37 Preparation 5 2 49 Promulgation leter e NA 222 51 Supersed re notice revisions 2x 5 2 1 1 5 50 Table OR contents 5 2 1 8 57 Title block E i 5 2 1 6 54 Warming SUTHTTADY vac 5 2 1 3 51 Weapon system name ih ca 3 241 AS 50 Functional Group Code oe 5 3 6 3 2 296 369 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER G General ae ah anti 4 1 General information 5 6 3 General information PMS 5 5 4 Preparati n Of B 5 1 Required WPs tete idi mede a us tue uit B 5 1 1 General information and introduction 5 3 12 1 3 General information work package 5 2 General information work package PMI B 5 6 General information work package PMS B 5 5 General information storage of aircraft eese 5 3 12 3 3 General information weighing amp loading 5 3 12 4 3 General maintenanc
21. R R PROCEDURES NOTE The notation indicates that at least one of the these content items shall be included TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK tsindxwp PACKAGE OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT WORK TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 5 5 8 4 WORK PACKAGE lt opcheck tswp gt COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X PMCS MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE PMCS is required as a minimum in one maintenance chapter PMCS INTRODUCTION WORK R 5 3 4 1 lt pmcsintrowp gt PACKAGE PMCS INCLUDING LUBRICATION R E 5342 lt pmcswp gt INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE D333 lt mim gt lt pmcscategory gt 108 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for TM Content CHAPTER X MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS SERVICE UPON RECEIPT WORK Shelter requirements Service upon receipt of materiel Installation instructions Preliminary servicing of equipment equipment Circuit alignment Additional service upon receipt task Follow on maintenance EQUIPMENT USER FITTING INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE PERSONAL USE EQUIPMENT IPMCS INTRODUCTION WORK IPMCS INCLUDING LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below criteria
22. ohne 4 7 13 7 Tailorih B 4 11 0 eus C 4 11 aedes AS DARIN antag Ma D an taeda tua D 4 12 clap X E 4 13 TALONS tata ope 4 7 PAVING G 4 8 Requirement for TMS 5 caede A 5 1 387 PAGE 23 23 50 29 171 341 336 334 340 337 318 340 318 318 341 339 190 228 38 38 38 38 202 57 37 34 36 34 34 34 40 35 34 36 164 185 196 220 285 318 93 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Technical content preparation v5 0 5 1 Technical content preparations 5 1 Technical content tables 5 1 2 Technical description work packa ee D 5 5 4 Test and Inspection 522 ttd Rata Qu 5 3 5 3 16 Test equipment et 4 7 9 2 Test set message word index D 5 5 8 3 6b E 5 3 5 3 22 Inteerated Sy SLI cg s N 22 22 M EE D 5 2 1 Phi
23. 224 E 5 3 2 3 2 Shelter requirements lt gt 4i sen 224 E 5 3 2 3 3 Service upon receipt of materiel lt surmat gt 224 E 5 3 2 3 4 Installation instructions 225 XV E 5 3 2 3 4 1 E 5 3 2 3 4 2 E 5 3 2 3 4 3 E 5 3 2 3 4 4 E 5 3 2 3 5 E 5 3 2 3 6 E 5 3 2 3 7 E 5 3 2 3 8 E 5 3 2 3 9 E 5 3 2 3 9 1 E 5 3 2 3 9 2 E 5 3 2 3 9 3 E 5 3 2 3 9 4 E 5 3 2 3 10 E 5 3 2 3 11 E 5 3 3 E 5 3 4 E 5 3 4 1 E 5 3 4 1 1 E 5 3 4 1 2 E 5 3 4 1 3 E 5 3 4 2 E 5 3 4 2 1 E 5 3 4 2 2 E 5 3 4 2 3 E 5 3 4 2 3 1 E 5 3 4 2 4 E 5 3 4 3 E 5 3 5 E 5 3 5 1 p 352 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 5 3 2 5 3 5 3 3 5 3 5 3 4 5 3 5 3 5 5 3 5 3 6 5 3 5 3 7 5 3 5 3 6 5 3 5 3 9 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PAGE Assembly of equiprmaent i eret eed ER 226 Installation of the equipment 226 eres 227 Van and shelter iInstallations nee 227 Preliminary servicing of equipment lt gt 227 Preliminary checks and adjustment of equipment prechkadj 227 Preliminary calibration of equipment lt 228 Circuit alignment lt calion 228 Ammunition service upon receipt 5
24. 4 7 27 4 4 Multiview Multisheet drawings 4 7 27 2 2 cL ciue 4 7 27 4 Photographs 4 7 27 2 3 Placement in pocket TMs au ere ed 4 7 15 2 Placement f ance cen rest dct recens 4 7 15 Proced res on sane a i tes erede eed ibus edis 4 7 27 3 6 Referencing index numbers 4 7 23 3 8 HE 4 7 23 3 7 Repeating 4 7 15 3 370 22 177 176 164 165 253 165 177 175 256 257 247 205 206 208 51 59 42 44 44 47 44 44 43 43 44 43 45 42 44 44 45 45 42 45 43 45 43 36 36 45 41 41 36 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Graphics Cont Rotating illustrations 4 7 15 1 RPS TU figure numbers cie p pectet dati Min ide 472142 RPS TL illustrations F 5 3 12 Nor 4 7 27 4 Titles 4 7 27 4 5 Tools and Test equipment 4 7 27 2 7 TYPES siete sn mu Sut Seta 4 7 27 2 Use of color In 4 7 27 4 8 Ground SSS 5 3 5 3 4 EEind tecetpt manuals eese een testa B 5 2 6 lario rA n 5 3 2 3 9 3 Mai C
25. 3 3 3 3 lt inspinstitm gt m Dd repair rplc Inspection of installed items Removal Disassembly Cleaning Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI Repair or replacement 147 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 14 MIL STD 40051 2 Content Reference Element Name Calibration Radio interference suppression Preparation for storage or shipment Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt Handling ammunition Ammunition markings Procedures for ammunition activation Additional maintenance task GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK 5 3 6 lt maintwp gt PACKAGE UBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS EXT Klubewp WORK PACKAGE LLUSTRATED LIST OF 5 5 9 lt manuwp gt ANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK PACKAGE TORQUE UMTS WORK PACKAGE T WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK E31 lt wiringwp gt PACKAGE CHAPTER X TEST AND INSPECTION lt testinspectioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS WAINTENANCE WORK Packaces P P Es35 Esaa lt mim gt 148 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content Reference Element Name CHAPTER X lt mim gt SHIPMENT MOVEMENT AND A lt shipmentmovementstoragec STORAGE ategory gt MAIN
26. 163 B 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENT S 163 B 4 1 Genetal a qa Si 163 4 2 Maintenance level ete tec 163 4 3 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery 163 B 4 4 Use f the DEDE SES to tpe stt bct o itu got eub ctn of ae 163 B 4 5 Content structure and format 2 eiie e redit ene 164 B 4 6 Styleand TOETHIAL 164 4 7 Work package 1 ieee 164 4 8 Safety devices and INterlOCK Sy EHI 164 B 4 9 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive 164 B 4 10 Nuclear hardness 164 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE B 4 11 Selective application and tailoring eese 164 BS DETAILED REQUIREMENI S 164 B 5 1 Preparation of general information equipment description and theory of He BATON neat ME ope 164 B 5 1 1 Required general information equipment description and theory of operation data work packages estne RH HORA ER RUE ANSE EN eS VOS 165 B 5 2 General information work pack
27. ee REPAIR PARTS LIST WORK PACKAGE E536 REPAIR PARTS FOR SPECIAL TOOLS partswp 177 PARTS LIST WORK PACKAGE LIST WORK PACKAGE Es a 3 SPECIAL TOOLS LISTWORK PACKAGE INSNINDEXWORKPACKAGE R sn P N INDEX WORK PACKAGE R R R 8842 REFERENCE DESIGNATOR INDEX WORK F 5 3 11 3 lt refdesindxwp gt PACKAGE CHAPTER X SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly REFERENCES WoRK PackxGE amp amp B3 INTRODUCTION FOR STANDARD MAC lt macintrowp gt WORK PACKAGE FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR 5 3 TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY 160 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A XIV TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 23 amp P 24 amp 34 amp P Reference Element Name IMAC WORK PACKAGE 5 2 5 4 lt macwp gt FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS lt explistwp gt WORK PACKAGE TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST WORK PACKAGE ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK PACKAGES CHAPTER X SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here an
28. 67 Figure 4 Example of a chapter title page 69 Figure 5 Example of a work package title 70 Figure 6 Example of a foldo t page 71 Figure 7 Example of a page with security classification markings 72 Figure 8 Example of emergency page 73 Figure 9 Example of a change transmittal page nne 74 Figure 10 Example of a TM front Covet Ee Do dabei deba tegens 75 Figure 11 Example of a phased maintenance TM front 77 Figure 12 Example of a DMWR front cover 78 Figure 13 Example of a DMWR cover for a DMWR with Overhaul Standards 79 Figure 14 Example of a NMWR Cover 80 Figure 15 Example of a list of effective pages for a new publication 81 Figure 16 Example of a list of effective pages for a manual with changes 82 Figure 17 Example of a list of effective pages for a revised manual 83 Figure 18 Example of a list of effective pages for multi volume manual 84 Figure 19 Example of a title block page
29. 38 Metric symbols a a et 38 Nuclear hardness hardness critical processes marking 38 Electrostatic Discharge ESD sensitive marking 39 Quality Assurance QA 4 iiid eese tene tacere aiias 39 Security classification emergency page and protective markings 39 Security classification markings sso 39 Overall security classifiCatOh iis reserere ttr tenen risen 39 Blank page backing a classified 40 Em rtsency page E a a E I 40 Protective markiis socios epar ede nasi a spa NEA 40 protective 40 40 Other ooo e C did 40 Government specifications and standards 40 Referencing within the 40 etae scient on mee cete 40 bou TER 40 MODE ACK ADCS ess EE 40 Maintenance tasks procedures and paraeraphs 40 Ho 40 41 Figures and Mm ltisheet 41 ee eed eke 41 Items
30. 5 2 1 9 1 Enters als d bets cet E 5 3 4 2 3 b Introduction AU oc a epa ue prb uM 5 5 3 Aircraft Inventory 5 3 12 2 3 Aircraft troubleshooting D 5 5 3 PR TAO MA O e a qp ee dS G 5 3 2 BI G 5 4 3 Combined operational checkout troubleshooting D 5 5 8 5 3 Component checklist zc D 5 5 7 3 Depot mobilization WP E 5 3 8 3 3 PAGE 60 44 41 252 188 29 31 30 31 30 30 30 30 29 29 251 48 242 244 262 231 242 240 243 225 226 190 198 209 198 198 198 96 190 228 59 232 336 255 201 322 334 208 204 249 MIL STD 4005 1 2 337 340 251 192 205 229 253 287 319 339 253 206 328 253 201 255 296 295 232 232 239 191 50 29 299 302 291 299 299 299 45 45 42 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE Introduction Cont Expendable durable items G 5 6 3 Mandatory Replacement Parts G 5 8 3 Manufactured items WP 5 3 9 3 On vehicle loading 5 2 8 3 Operational checkout D 5 5 8 3 3 PMES un aa m uM dieu n Tawa m Cala a E 5 3 4 1 PMIL WP E 5 3 12 1 3 dw dj 5 3 5 3 Saida G 5 3 1 TOOL ID Stie at E G 5 7 3 Torque Limits WP ettet RH ia E 5 3 10 3 Troubles
31. D 5 5 5 3 DA EET OLO all Sh eie D 5 2 1 1 Master malfunction symptom D 5 5 5 4 Methods eee D 5 2 1 M ltipl x r ad n cenit D 5 5 8 4 6c Philbsopbiy ose ama deals ca D Procedure Content 2 re a Seti eee D 5 3 toi D 5 5 8 4 6 D 5 2 1 2 derive Tales au Pee Pha NU S cola MM D 5 2 1 4 System subsystem D 5 5 5 5 Text logic method OF ierra D 5 5 8 4 6a GE eese denied vedete h uhu a a uM h D 5 5 8 4 6b Types OR WPS Soon san sa aa u Saa D 5 5 2 TYPOS 5 2 2 Z sala P 5 2 1 3 Work packages oid eei edendi a A E Mendel D 5 5 8 4 Work DU D 5 5 Troubleshooting procedure D 5 5 8 4 6 Type size and 4 7 3 Types of pages to be included 5 2 1 5 3 Types OF PUD CALIONS 5 2 1 5 1 U Unitof ISSUE ice 5 3 6 3 2 11 Unit Of measure iei oe rri Mee dete 5 3 6 3 2 10 LU pac ta EA 5 3 2 3 3 E E 5 3 2 3 9 3a Un
32. gt A statement similar to the following shall be prepared CORROSION PREVENTION AND CONTROL CPC Corrosion Prevention and Control CPC of Army materiel is a continuing concern It is important that any corrosion problems with this item be reported so that the problem can be corrected and improvements can be made to prevent the problem in future items Corrosion specifically occurs with metals It is an electrochemical process that causes the degradation of metals It is commonly caused by exposure to moisture acids bases or salts An example is the rusting of iron Corrosion damage in metals can be seen depending on the metal as tarnishing pitting fogging surface residue and or cracking Plastics composites and rubbers can also degrade Degradation is caused by thermal heat oxidation oxygen solvation solvents or photolytic light typically UV processes The most common exposures are excessive heat or light Damage from these processes will appear as cracking softening swelling and or breaking SF Form 368 Product Quality Deficiency Report should be submitted to the address specified in DA PAM 738 750 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS For aircraft TMs this information shall include a reference to TM 1 1500 343 23 Avionic Cleaning and Corrosion Prevention Control B 5 2 8 Ozone depleting substances ODS lt odsdata gt The use of ozone depleting sub
33. gt u u u n pea 258 Cleaning and painting servICe os oris qo db eeu sa dee o ER edens 258 Ammunition marking information work package Unit AVUM or above only lt ammo markingwp gt 258 Foreign ammunition NATO work package Unit AVUM or above only 259 Preventive maintenance services inspection work packages aircraft preventive maintenance services only pms inspecwp 259 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 260 Initial setup information wpinfo 260 Mandatory safety of flight inspection 260 T NS 260 Standard checklist statements a 260 Phased maintenance inspection work package aircraft phased maintenance checklist only lt pmi cklistwp gt 261 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 261 xix MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE E 5 3 16 2 Initial setup information lt gt seen eene 262 E 5 3 16 3 Inspection area diagrams figure 262 E 5 3 16 4 Phased maintenance checklist inier etia eee 262 E 5 3 16 5 MTF form and rotor smoothing record
34. DP Deb 5 3 5 3 29 Classification OF deleets 5 3 5 3 26 Classification of defects E 5 3 2 3 9 2 Foreign Ammunition WP E 5 3 14 3 Handie eza a S E E ne Ce i 525 221 MISS CHO TG Eset 5 3 5 3 16 1 NIamitenanee E 5 3 14 1 Marking information WP E 5 3 14 2 oe uitio ameti be bas E 5 3 5 3 28 Markio ete p T a ha ae 5 3 2 3 9 1 Service UPON receipt tasks iiec toda eade re Eae E 5 3 2 3 9 Art diagrama quet acutus ttd asse E 5 3 15 4 PRET OW De AGES oorr oma ae eaves 4 7 27 3 4 2 Assembled Items dod eu e ie uQ F 5 3 6 3 2 6f E 5 3 5 3 15 Assembly and preparation for C 5 2 4 6 Assembly and preparation for 5 3 5 3 2 Assembly OF equipment tee 5 3 2 3 4 1 Authentication Dage 5 2 2 5 Automatic testing and troubleshooting eene D 5 2 1 2 Auxiliary equipment maintenance E 5 3 13 Auxiliary equipment operating C 5 2 4 9 AVallabrDty 5 2 1 1 4 362 337 336 38 168 253 168 251 38 247 48 341 244 172 255 241 228 229 247 246
35. 332 G 5 3 4 2 Initial set p informations sse istisi 332 G 5 3 4 3 E 332 G 5 3 4 4 333 G 5 3 5 Tools and test equipment requirements lt tereqtab gt 333 G 5 3 6 Remarks remarktab hse Geese ea heeds 333 G 5 4 Components of end item and basic issue items lists work package operator only coeibiiwp 334 G 5 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 334 G 5 4 2 Initial setup mfOormatlON cr 334 G 5 4 3 Introduction for and lists work package intro 334 G 5 4 4 uS onibus SER tee 336 G 5 4 4 1 List CCOEIGID aud Neo I gue 336 G 5 4 5 336 G 5 5 AAL work package operator only lt aalwp gt 336 G 5 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 336 G 5 5 2 Initial Setup o uere D ete edite ta 336 G 5 5 3 Introduction TiO oaa eR 336 G 5 5 4 Y VENEZ I I 337 G 5 6 Expendable and durable items list work package
36. B 5 2 21 365 PAGE 201 187 187 172 167 171 49 60 37 239 44 341 340 301 60 191 51 54 300 191 190 190 258 36 250 191 47 48 218 249 286 296 186 33 51 168 218 205 194 170 MIL STD 4005 1 2 43 260 262 46 41 43 43 253 173 23 163 184 195 219 284 317 239 50 51 50 204 249 50 249 202 250 286 286 200 133 133 127 127 50 31 23 163 185 195 219 284 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE M 4 7 27 2 5 PEO os Sag carat e A 5 3 15 4 t bote 5 3 16 3 Portraying signal TlOW ntt ne 4 7 27 4 7 Retereneme 16 s OD a asua 412329 SPE CUNIC ALI ons om u death ye 4 7 27 2 5 1 4 7 27 2 5 2 Wiring work package 5 3 11 Differences between models B 5 3 5 Digital data Lou e ed ud 4 4 Preparation for delivery B 4 3 Preparation Tor delivery C 4 3 Preparation for delivery pedea D 4 4 Preparation dor dell Very suia lib aN 4 5 Preparation f r d liVerVu soe e etes
37. Test access time Test time D 5 2 Information to be provided Troubleshooting information shall be provided in combination with test procedures This testing and troubleshooting information shall guide the technician in as practical a manner as possible to the system subsystem equipment weapons replacement assembly shop replacement assembly SRA or further to the replaceable part interconnecting wire or mechanical linkage which caused the malfunction or failure information required to perform the tests and evaluate probable malfunctions of the assembled systems or equipment shall be provided 196 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 2 1 Methods of testing and troubleshooting The number of interrelated systems assemblies subassemblies and components types of equipment and maintenance plan shall be taken into consideration as to the type and depth of testing and troubleshooting instructions to be developed Based on the complexity of the system or equipment manual non automatic semi automatic or automatic testing and troubleshooting methods shall be used Functional testing is usually performed using a test set or test console whereby technicians make end to end checks of the system or equipment to ensure it will perform the function it was intended to do D 5 2 1 1 Manual nonautomatic troubleshooting Troubleshooting procedures using nonautomatic test equipment shall be established on a system tes
38. deine Ration nien ine WP 0052 Reference De signator Index aei WP 0053 iii FIGURE 22 Example of RPSTL table of contents 89 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM X XXX XXXX XX INDEX Subject WP Sequence No Page No ES A Accessory Section DeSCriptlon yeti As et cH IER WP 0002 9 ISP SCHON 2 E A Seeds E WP 0045 3 Installation Et n rem a tected WP 0045 10 Removal WP 0045 1 P WP 0045 6 Actuating Pilot Valve Leakage Check a WP 0011 10 Actuator Compressor Bleed Valve Assembly terion i eee EL t LE UU A ud WP 0012 5 cu idet e dh oe udder BE d qe Disassembly INSPOCtON REIR RT EE Adapter Compressor Repair U u u in ete rh rere need E aE nae WP 0022 9 Afterburner Description iis hss A eA en eh WP 0002 1 Inspection WP 0047 1 as temo ote See toe TA Ne AS Aa ET DRE WP 0048 5 Removal eet deii UD ett tnc WP 0004 1 Bere sone M RE WP 0060 1 Air System WP 0004 6 Airseal sur WP 0016 4 Anti icing Air System
39. e j Fe K jo em Coop quis uia pee 525 5 2 lt modification gt Engineering change proposals ECP Mobilization requirements R Flight safety critical aircraft parts Aircraft only lt fscapreq gt R lt cost gt Cost considerations Supporting information for repair parts special tools TMDE and support equipment Copyright credit line 133 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWKR with DMWR with Overhaul Overhaul Standards MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content Standards with RPSTL Reference Element Name EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA R lt descwp gt WORK PACKAGE BE p Equipment characteristics capabilities and features R 8533 R pas r ss THEORY OF OPERATION WORK PACKAGES CHAPTER S lt tim gt DEPOT troubledmwrnmwrcate TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES gory TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK 1 5 5 5 lt tsindxwp gt IPACKAGE COMPONENT CHECKLIST WORK PACKAGE D 5 5 8 3 D 5 5 8 4 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT WORK opcheckwp PACKAGES TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK 58 PACKAGES opcheck tswp COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND 3 3 8 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK lt troublecategory g
40. eB 4 7 9 2h DTDs Style sheets obtaining 4 6 DTDs Style 4 4 DTDs Style sheets use of C 4 4 DIDS e sheets use Of c D 4 5 DEDS Styl E 4 6 DTDs Style sheets use Of F 4 3 DTDs Styl G 4 4 366 317 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER E Effectivity notice 4 7 9 1c Electronic countermeasures ae AR 5 2 5 3 5 Electrostatic discharge marking 4 7 20 Electrostatic discharge sensitive parts B 4 9 Electrostatic discharge sensitive 4 9 Electrostatic discharge sensitive parts D 4 10 Electrostatic discharge sensitive parts E 4 11 Emergency page es ye teretes esee 4 7 22 4 Emergency procedures WP us eiiecee e C 5 2 6 Operation A T 5 2 6 3 SHOU Wi 5 2 6 4 End of figure statement esce tein nn F 5 3 6 3 2 61 Engineering change proposal
41. 1 s E 5 3 5 3 10 Overhaul retirement snese ete reacted eei huhu 5 3 5 3 24 Packaging HE 5 3 5 3 23 PAULIN casa bus 5 3 5 3 13 PLAGUING TI SEL VICE u sinc to tesi 5 3 5 3 21 Preembarkation inspect E 5 3 5 3 16 2 Preparation for storage and 5 3 5 3 25 5 3 5 3 23 Radio 5 3 5 3 20 Radioactive Aimtn nitlOR sees eroe einn eroe eran e neo E 5 3 5 3 16 1 m 4 7 23 3 4 Removal ceat ordeo eie ee ardet enirn ebd ae eee E 5 3 5 3 6 ieri rM NEN IN CE ENDE 5 3 5 3 11 aussi has 5 3 5 3 11 FOGG TING ILS fons 5 3 5 3 1 Service pon u cle andes den ee 5 3 2 3 lu ss 5 3 5 3 3 2 tebe ms 5 3 5 3 16 Testing E 5 3 5 3 22 Maintenance test flight form amp rotor record E 5 3 16 5 Maintenance work packages E 5 3 5 Malfunction symptom index D 5
42. es hie Sese de nda o sed bad cetus pee a bs 254 Special INSPEC ONS 254 xviii 85 3 12 2 5 3 12 2 1 5 3 12 2 2 5 3 12 2 3 5 3 12 2 4 5 3 12 2 5 5 3 12 2 6 5 3 12 3 5 3 12 3 1 5 3 12 3 2 5 3 12 3 3 5 3 12 3 4 5 3 12 4 E 5 3 12 4 1 5 3 12 4 2 E 5 3 12 4 3 E 5 3 12 4 4 E 5 3 12 4 5 E 5 3 13 E 5 3 13 1 E 5 3 13 2 E 5 3 13 3 E 5 3 14 E 5 3 14 1 E 5 3 14 1 1 E 5 3 14 1 2 E 5 3 14 1 3 E 5 3 14 1 4 E 5 3 14 1 5 E 5 3 14 2 E 5 3 14 3 E 5 3 15 E 5 3 15 1 E 5 3 15 2 E 5 3 15 3 E 5 3 15 4 E 5 3 15 5 E 5 3 16 E 5 3 16 1 MIL STD 40051 2 CONTENTS PAGE Aircraft Inventory master guide work package aircraft only LIVEN Ory jor MT 255 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 255 Initial setup information wpinfo esee nennen 255 Introd ctio into s su 255 Security M 255 Inventoriable items inventoriable esee 255 Periods of inventory uii dcr adapt a 256 Storage of aircraft work package aircraft storagewp 256 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 256 Initial setup information lt gt 256 General information for storage of aircraft w
43. 222 Illustrations of manufactured items lt gt 232 Torque limits work package Unit AVUM level or above only PORQUE gp E usss 252 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 252 Initial setup information lt gt 252 Introductio lt No oc oa tto rre ER HIE re MAPA 253 Torque instructions torqueval eese 253 Wiring diagrams work package Unit AVUM level or above only Z 253 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 253 Initial setup information wpinfo 253 MAROC EON dm 253 Wire identification lt wireid gt 253 Abbreviations lt ab Brey gt sic 253 Wiring diagrams lt wiringdia gt enne enne 253 Aircraft specific maintenance work packages 253 Preventive maintenance inspections work package aircraft only lt OP e 253 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 253 Initial setup information lt gt 209 General information and introduction lt gt 253 Standards of serviceability
44. 31 Assignment of new work packages sequence numbers for a change 31 Assignment of work package sequence numbers in volumized TMs 31 Work package page numbering i erdt es e ea 32 Work package identification number 32 Maintenance tasks and descriptive information 33 ParasraphSt aap REN 33 Paragraph n mberinp 3 tide eden urea ansa Ere en 33 Paragraphs and subparagraph 33 aes 33 Procedutal do macte tu 33 Procedural step Tevels fede pag T ESES 33 Procedural step titles e desee esas hU Rec PER RH n 34 34 34 Table numbering 34 PADS titles mc H A 34 format EE 34 188 35 motos atate ioc 36 Tabular Information 36 LIS amp e
45. 5 3 8 4 8 Inserted RPSTL work packages 4 8 1 6d nspecti6BWa retulisse domi era op en tata uad iu tef E 5 3 5 3 16 hts AM ER 5 3 5 3 22 Inspection area Cid STAM 5 3 16 3 Inspection of installed items 5 3 5 3 5 Inspection of radioactive E 5 3 5 3 16 1 Inspection acceptance amp rejection 5 3 5 3 9 LOM 5 3 5 3 17 Installation 1 5 3 2 3 4 Installation of the 5 3 2 3 4 2 5 2 4 8 2 Integrated system troubleshooting 2 D 5 2 2 2 Integrated system troubleshooting WP D 5 5 8 6 Integrated systems requiring common test D 5 2 2 2 3 Integrated systems requiring peculiar test D 5 2 2 2 2 Integrated systems w self test or built in D 5 2 2 2 1 Intended use Appendix A asc er 5 2 Interim NBC decontamination procedures C 5 2 5 3 4 ite rial u usu a DNE e Ru tess E 5 3 2 3 8b International standardization agreements
46. maintwp SEEKERS ei lt ammo defect gt 152 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Chemical Ammunition 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp P 30 amp P 40 amp P Reference Element Nam Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI E 5 3 5 53 10 Repair or replacement E 5 3 5 5 11 lt gt Test and inspection Installation lt install gt Adjustment lt adjust gt Radio interference suppression iss Placing service Preparation for storage or shipment Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt Handling ammunition lt ammo handling gt Ammunition markings lt ammo markings gt Procedures for ammunition activation lt arm gt Other maintenance task E 5 3 5 3 30 lt other surtsk gt Follow on maintenance 5 3 5 3 31 Ll ope ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED E 5 3 9 ITEMS WORK PACKAGE TORQUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE Eum jew WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK Package CHAPTER X a mim TEST AND INSPECTION m lt testinspectioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE 153 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Chemical Ammunition 20 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 40 amp P Reference Element Name CHAPTER X E mim SHIPMENT MOVEMENT AND 5 2 shipmentmovementstoragec STORAGE
47. ot oa ed een 4 7 16 2 1 3 Border rules DOXGS 4 7 27 3 1 Bound publications Changes to 4 8 2 Built in tests systems with D 5 2 2 2 1 Bulk TElIe see Sabe bi Loue F 5 3 11 4 B lk Tenis a 5 3 9 3 Bulk items WP 5 3 9 CAGEG RPS TL nti aetati i i siue 5 3 6 3 2 4 Calibration ete votes aq ka eM 5 2 18 Calibration 5 3 5 3 19 4 7 27 3 4 Index nubes soon ghey ed 4 7 27 3 4 1 Leader lines and arrowheads 4 7 27 3 4 2 Care and handling ammunition eese 5 3 14 1 13 4 7 7 4 7 7 2 a 4 7 7 4 Equipment damage with Icons a 4 7 7 5 4 TOONS CL 4 7 7 5 Certification requirements tO Deck ede io EARN E 5 3 8 4 6 Change n mbeftsa 3 2 1 5 5 Change transmittal pages ici S Nu la 5 2 1 4 Page 4 7 16 2 1 1 Changed items RPS TLS 4 8 1 6b 363 48 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER
48. 5 3 6 3 2 13 NMW R 4 4 PV ATLA ULL yO CC ended E aas 5 2 1 1 4 Component checklist work packa ge D 5 5 7 Depot mobilization requirements 5 3 8 3 National overhaul standards statement 5 2 1 1 2 QIP Work package a u Da aa E 5 3 8 2 Preshop analysis work D 5 5 6 OA requirements WP E 5 3 8 4 5 3 3 2 1 RPSTL WPs included s s at ain ate eee 5 3 3 2 Testing and troubleshooting 55 D 5 4 3 378 PAGE 167 51 297 40 39 40 38 40 39 39 200 202 30 197 207 207 207 38 42 170 250 170 239 207 53 45 43 53 190 298 218 50 204 249 50 249 202 250 286 286 200 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER NMWR Requirement Matrix NMWR with RPS ition Mone tM TABLE A VII NMWR TABLE A VII Nomenclature eiii oos Ot abi Potest a 4 1 25 Automatic test equip terms 4 7 25 4 Consistency amp applicability 4 7 25 1 Milit ry IeEHIS tette cute au Een ta iuto but de 4 7 25 3 Official apptoved eet cere tree o vorn a e Ea 4 7 25 2 Nomenclature cross
49. E 5 3 4 2 3 1c 8 0 n an aa er E 5 3 4 2 3 PROCEDURES 5 3 4 2 3 1 PMCS work 5 3 4 2 PIM arn 5 2 17 PMS warning data eere 5 2 1 7 Pocket TM placement of text and 1 0 4 7 15 2 Portraying signal aceti 4 7 27 4 7 Post operational shutdown procedures D 5 5 8 3 7 Post operational shutdown procedures D 5 5 8 4 7 Post operational shutdown D 5 5 8 5 7 Pre embarkation Inspection E 5 3 5 3 16 2 Preliminary calibration of equipment E 5 3 2 3 7 Preliminary checks and adjustments E 5 3 2 3 6 Preliminary servicing of equipment 5 3 2 3 5 Preparation for 5 2 4 10 Preparation for storage or 5 2 10 Preparation for storage or shipment 5 3 5 3 25 Preparatom fOr Use uuu ua 5 2 4 6 301 285 295 300 285 228 198 256 30 262 261 177 43 43 43
50. asnu 4 7 12 1 Procsdural 4 7 12 2 Procedural SUC DS ac a apa 4 7 12 Procedures on illustrations eran 4 7 27 3 6 Processing unpacked equipment 5 3 2 3 3 aa u aha m2 1 Proptietars name B 5 2 26 1 Proteeluve mark Tg Sd otc esit A E E EP Das Sedes 4 7 22 5 Publication titles ii eee IRE eiie E deed A 5 1 1 Publications ooo ues dead G 5 2 4 Q OA requirements work package E 5 3 8 4 Quality ASSUTANICE e a B 5 2 14 Quality assurance symbol 4 7 21 Quality OF Teen Eds od boots UM peto Des ese enira seed 5 2 15 Quality protam 5 3 8 4 7 Quantity RPS Vs 5 3 6 3 2 7 Quantity per 5 3 6 3 2 8 R Radio interference suppression E 5 3 5 3 20 Random list iieri 4 7 13 8b Rear matter Zxuthentication DAS QNA 5 2 2 4 Bach anu u au Nhau 5 2 2 6 Changed
51. 232 PMCS data preparation lt pmcstable gt 232 Mandatory replacement parts lt mrplpart gt 234 Preventive Maintenance Checklist PMC operator only 234 Maintenance work packages Not required for aircraft PM and PMS manuals only maintWpo 235 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 236 Initial setup information lt gt 236 Maintenance tasks lt maintsk gt ee side tese 236 Maintenance task requirements 237 Assembly and preparation for use aviation only lt prepforuse gt 238 SEL VICE gt E EET 238 Ground handling groundtsk 239 Inspection of installed items lt gt 239 Remoyal FOTO VCH anf 239 Disassembly lt disassen ecd sedi e 239 Cleaning cod 240 Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria lt gt 240 xvi MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE E 5 3 5 3 10 Nondestructive Testing Inspection NDTI lt ndti gt
52. B 5 2 19 Engineering drawings n n Bato 4 7 27 2 4 Environment weather unusual C 5 2 5 3 2 Se UI 4 7 24 Equipment characteristics capabilities B 5 3 3 Equipment compoBetits een ae av decals E 5 3 2 3 3b 2 Equipment conditions Jo dese ot 4 7 9 21 Equipment damage caution IC OMS E q y 4 7 7 5 4 Equipment 5 3 6 Equipment description and data D 5 5 4 3 Equipment description and data WP B 5 3 Equipment description preparation of B 5 1 Equipment Improvement Recommendations B 5 2 5 Equipment lubrication instructions E 5 3 7 Equipment not ready available if E 5 3 4 2 3 1f Equipment user fitting instructions 5 3 3 Estimated time to complete task 4 7 9 21 Exempted PACES fc u n 5 2 1 5 4 Exempted publications usu QU ES 5 2 1 5 2 Expendable and durable items ME 5
53. Table of contents How to use this manual R 5 2 1 9 lt howtouse gt Few 1 5 1 lt gim gt GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK B 5 2 lt ginfowp gt PACKAGE Scope Maintenance forms records and reports R R R R ps24 Reporting equipment improvement 5 2 5 eir recommendations WETTER EIL M prevention and control CPC m B527 lt gt Destruction of Army materiel to prevent 529 lt destructmat gt enemy use Preparation for storage or shipment R R R R gt u List ofabbreviations acronyms R R RJ R Bs2133 Quality of material MM Pn Calibration 1528 Supporting information for repair parts B 5 2 25 lt supdata gt special tools TMDE and support equipment Copyright credit line Bs226 pepy 99 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 12 13 14 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P 14 amp P Reference Element Name QUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND 5 3 lt descwp gt DATA WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities 5 3 3 Keqpinfo gt and features Location and description of major 5 3 4 Klocdesc gt components Ln sos Differences between mo
54. nos edd idee ctii ua 36 uo se en cC 36 Placement of illustrations t ipd e coc deba cis iid s 36 Rotating 36 Placement of text and related illustrations for pocket TMs 36 AUS treat ins oed e attese Hv vas ae A t eet U SQ 36 Margin lala iip bep tentes uad is 36 Headet d 37 Footers Mr TU 37 Page innin maa uma 37 Front matter seernes iieii esinin 37 Rear RENTEN 37 laksa mast E es 37 Foldout pape n mberS 37 Abbreviations and acronyms a 38 iv 4 7 18 4 7 18 1 4 7 18 2 4 7 19 4 7 20 4 7 21 4 7 22 4 7 22 1 4 7 22 2 4 7 22 3 4 7 22 4 4 7 22 5 4 7 22 6 4 7 23 4 7 23 1 4 7 23 2 4 7 23 3 4 7 23 3 1 4 7 23 3 2 4 7 23 3 3 4 7 23 3 4 4 7 23 3 5 4 7 23 3 6 4 7 23 3 7 4 7 23 3 8 4 7 23 3 9 4 7 23 4 4 7 23 5 4 7 23 6 4 7 23 7 4 7 23 8 4 7 23 9 4 7 24 4 7 25 4 7 25 1 4 7 25 2 4 7 25 3 4 7 25 4 4 7 26 4 7 27 4 7 27 1 4 7 27 2 4 7 27 2 1 4 7 27 2 2 4 7 27 2 3 MIL STD 40051 2 CONTENTS PAGE Symbols hannsin n 38 General information for symbols
55. Spark plugs fine wire remove and inspect Instrument range markings for accuracy and legibility all gage lens for cracks cleanliness looseness and slippage Static discharge wicks for overall length of 6 inches maximum and 1 inch minimum exposed wick beyond plastic sheath Static discharge ground for condition and security Spark plugs massive electrode remove and inspect 2nd Starter brushes for wear specify and freedom of movement in brush holder Brush leads for deterioration or evidence of chafing Commutator for evidence of arcing and presence of oil or metal particles Electrical connections for security Magneto breaker compartment for cleanliness Breaker points for pitting ventilator plugs or screens for cleanliness and cam wiper for lubrication Pitot and static system for absence of foreign material and moisture Fixed fire extinguishers for accessibility broken or missing seal and extinguisher and bracket for security Weight check cylinder less valve f Include the following statement as the last item of the checklist Forms and Records Completion Ensure that all entries on forms records and work sheets have been completed or updated and new forms initiated as required DA PAM 738 751 E 5 3 16 Phased maintenance inspection work package aircraft phased maintenance checklist only lt pmi cklistwp gt Phased maintenance inspection data shall be prepared and include the information described i
56. in the third position of the SMR code indicates the replace function for this level of maintenance An O appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the unit maintenance level 3 150 Usable on code UOC A three position alphanumeric code representing the applicable configuration in which an item is used When an item is used on all configurations or when only one configuration is covered by the RPSTL UOCs should not be shown 3 151 User A person using the technical manual 21 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 152 Wiring diagram Diagram illustrating signal flow or wiring connections Where appropriate voltage readings should be shown 3 153 Work packages WP Presentation of information functionally divided into individual task packages in the logical order of work sequence These WPs should be stand alone general information description theory operating maintenance troubleshooting parts and supporting information units containing all information required for directing task performance 3 154 XML stylesheet language XSL A language for transforming XML documents into other XML documents such as HTML 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4 1 General This standard provides the technical content requirements and mandatory style and format requirements for the preparation of page based technical manuals TMs and subsequent revisions covering operation and maintenance at all levels of mainte
57. u s n E 4 8 1 3 D fined aa M 35222 Foldout pag s 5 2 2 5 382 245 202 203 203 203 203 203 202 203 203 205 206 208 234 239 259 33 34 33 45 225 51 172 40 93 318 250 168 39 168 250 297 297 244 36 60 60 47 59 60 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Rear matter Cont 522221 Index CE 922 222 PagemumbDeru u 4 7 16 2 1 2 Preparation Of Ve invece ass 5 2 Preparation Of a sua p SS 3 2 2 Reporting errors and recommending improvements DA Form 2028 rites dues cles cdit 5 2 2 3 5 3 6 3 2 12 Reference desgnator index F 5 3 11 3 Referen es gus usya Aa 4 7 9 2e References work package G 5 2 tu Susu Mo La 4 7 23 Equipment panel markings siet eae 4 7 23 7 Equipment components amp parts 4 7 23 5 la utis su aa Sanaba 4 7 23 3 7 teen eed acide 4 7 23 3 6 Iudex D tlbers cioe et 4 7 23 3 8 Items On Gia grains nace te degen 4 7 23 3 9 Maintenance tasks pro
58. 2 MC Maintenance forms and records used by Marine Corps personnel are prescribed by TM 4700 15 1 3 F Maintenance forms and records used by Air Force personnel are prescribed in AFI 21 101 and the applicable TO 00 20 Series Technical Orders 4 Navy users should refer to their service peculiar directives to determine applicable maintenance forms and records to be used d A Army conventional and chemical ammunition The following statement shall be added Accidents involving injury to personnel or damage to material will be reported on DA Form 285 U S Army Accident Report in accordance with AR 385 40 Explosives and ammunition malfunctions will be reported in accordance with AR 75 1 e When applicable add references to SB 742 1 Inspection of Supplies and Equipment Ammunition Surveillance Procedures B 5 2 5 Reporting equipment improvement recommendations lt eir gt The following statement shall be included REPORTING EQUIPMENT IMPROVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS EIR If your insert equipment short item name needs improvement let us know Send us an EIR You the user are the only one who can tell us what you don t like about your equipment Let us know why you don t like the design or performance If you have Internet access the easiest and fastest way to report problems or suggestions is to go to https aeps ria army mil aepspublic cfm scroll down and choose the Submit Quality Deficiency Report
59. 249 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt 249 Introduction for depot mobilization requirements work package lt intro gt 249 Mobilization requirements mobilreq 250 QA requirements work package DMWR NMWR only qawp 250 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 250 Initial setup information lt gt 250 Statement of responsibility responsibility 250 Definitions lt definitions gt ite Fe tonos etr oae I 250 Special requirements for inspection tools and equipment specialreq 250 Certification requirements certreq aaa escent 250 Quality program lt quality program gt 250 In process inspections lt gt 251 Acceptance inspections lt gt 251 First article inspection Tirst a oie ee ier ees 251 Illustrated list of manufactured items work package Unit AVUM level or above only 251 Work package identification information wpidinfo 251 Initial setup information lt gt 251 Introduction for illustrated list of manufactured items work package 251 Index of manufactured items lt gt
60. 5 3 7 3 Lubrication dod qucd 248 5274 Lubrication SS Ene Se eee ea 248 5 3 8 DMWR NMWR specific maintenance work packages 248 E 5 3 8 1 Facilities work package DMWR NMWR only lt facilwp gt 248 5 3 8 2 Overhaul inspection procedures work package DMWRs NMWRs Only lt 06IpWD2 gt u n a aaah asas 249 E 5 3 8 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 249 E 5 3 8 2 2 Initial setup information lt gt 249 E 5 3 8 2 3 Overhaul Inspection Procedures OIP 249 5 3 8 3 Depot mobilization requirements work package DMWR NMWR only mobi 249 XVil 5 3 8 3 1 E 5 3 8 3 2 E 5 3 8 3 3 E 5 3 8 3 4 E 5 3 8 4 E 5 3 8 4 1 E 5 3 8 4 2 E 5 3 8 4 3 E 5 3 8 4 4 E 5 3 8 4 5 E 5 3 8 4 6 E 5 3 8 4 7 E 5 3 8 4 8 E 5 3 8 4 9 E 5 3 8 4 10 E 5 3 9 E 5 3 9 1 E 5 3 9 2 E 5 3 9 3 E 5 3 9 4 E 5 3 9 5 E 5 3 10 E 5 3 10 1 E 5 3 10 2 E 5 3 10 3 E 5 3 10 4 E 5 3 11 E 5 3 11 1 E 5 3 11 2 E 5 3 11 3 E 5 3 11 4 E 5 3 11 5 E 5 3 11 6 E 5 3 12 E 5 3 12 1 E 5 3 12 1 1 E 5 3 12 1 2 E 5 3 12 1 3 E 5 3 12 1 4 E 5 3 12 1 5 MIL STD 40051 2 CONTENTS PAGE Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt
61. 53 Dates oF Issue fof CHAM BES ao bee ERE NER RAMS 54 Title block page lt titleblk gt 54 Reporting errors and recommending improvements statement reporting 54 Preventive maintenance services and phased maintenance inspection manuals title block page with warning data Aviation only 57 Table of contents lt contents gt ete osten cde UR QAO NE CRAT EE 57 How Use This Manual information Except RPSTLs DMWRs NMWRs only howtouse 58 International standardization agreements 59 Rear matter duode Dl Na Wes od Dvd IR 59 Glossary Except RPSTL only lt glossary gt 59 Alphabetical index Except RPSTL only lt aindx gt 60 Reporting errors and recommending improvements DA Form 2028 50020055 ET NE ERN 60 Authentication page lt authent gt a ees 60 Foldout pages Except RPSTL only lt foldsect gt 60 COV Oi do c mM PER 60 vii MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE 60 6 1 Intended 60 6 2 Acquisition Requirements
62. 66 gt MIL STD 4005 1 2 BIOLOGICAL abstract symbol bug shows that a material may contain bacteria or viruses that present a danger to life or health CHEMICAL drops of liquid on hand shows that the material will cause burns or irritation to human skin or tissue CRYOGENIC hand in block of ice shows that the material is extremely cold and can injure human skin or tissue EXPLOSION rapidly expanding symbol shows that the material may explode if subjected to high temperatures sources of ignition or high pressure EYE PROTECTION person with goggles shows that the material will injure the eyes FIRE flame shows that a material may ignite and cause burns FIGURE 3 List of approved hazardous materials warning icons 67 MIL STD 4005 1 2 POISON skull and crossbones shows that a material is poisonous or is a danger to life RADIATION three circular wedges shows that the material emits radioactive energy and can injure human tissue VAPOR human figure in a cloud shows that material Re te vapors present a danger to life or health por E lt oy mU 1 FIGURE 3 List of approved hazardous materials warning icons Continued 68 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM 3 665 339 10 CHAPTER 6 UNIT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS FOR 155 MM M109A6 HOWITZER FIGURE 4 Example of a chapter title page 69 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM NUMBER 0017 DIRECT SUPPORT MAI
63. INITIAL The person correcting the indicated fault shall enter his initials in the initial column opposite the first line of the Action Taken entry FINAL RECORDS CHECK After all corrective actions have been completed and following completion of the phased inspection the Technical Inspector or designated supervisor shall verify that all applicable forms and records have been properly updated uncorrected faults shall be entered on DA Form 2408 13 prepared for that date or to the DA Form 2408 14 A Final Records Checklist shall be used is to ensure forms and records have been inspected for completeness and accuracy prior to release of the aircraft from the phased maintenance inspection The inspector verifying the final records check shall enter his initials adjacent to the indicated form or record on the Final Records Checklist The initials entered shall be registered on the Signature Sheet adjacent to that person s signature SIGNATURE SHEET All personnel performing inspection and or maintenance tasks shall place their signatures and initials on the signature sheet The purpose of the signature sheet is to provide a correlation between initials entered on the individual checklist sheets and the actual names of the personnel accomplishing these tasks MAINTENANCE OPERATIONAL CHECKS After the completion of any required corrective actions to any of the components of a functional system of the aircraft maintenance operational checks
64. When specified by acquiring activity this work package shall be developed The following data described in G 5 9 1 through G 5 9 4 shall be included in the work package G 5 9 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 9 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package 340 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G G 5 9 3 Critical safety items CSI csi As applicable this work package shall include a tabular listing provided by the acquiring activity Each CSI and associated characteristic s shall be clearly identified within overhaul repair procedures The location of the critical safety procedures or processes within the depot maintenance work packages shall be referenced G 5 9 4 Flight safety critical aircraft parts FSCAP aviation only lt fscap gt For aircraft Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts FSCAP and installations identified under the FSCAP program shall require special handling during overhaul A critical characteristic is any feature throughout the life cycle of a FSCAP such as dimension tolerance finish material or assembly manufacturing process inspection process operation field maintenance requirement depot overhaul requirement or other feature that if nonconforming missing or degraded could cause failure or malfunction of a FSCAP FSCAPs shall be l
65. ie dI indies con eom qe 85 Figure 20 Example of a title block page with warning data for phased maintenance inspection and preventive maintenance services 87 Figure 21 Example of table of contents eicere ceci retia 88 Figure 22 Example of RPSTL table of contents te tbt ead receta 89 Figure 23 Example of an alphabetical index ea odere edi caa depot 90 Figure 24 Example of an authentication 91 Figure B 1 Example of a station diagram eese ne eee ec per eg 183 Figure C 1 Example of controls and indicators esee 193 Figure D 1 Example of a cover sheet for preshop analysis checklist 210 Figure D 2 Example of a preshop analysis checklist eene 211 Figure D 3 Example of a component checklist 212 Figure D 4 Example of content for an operational checkout procedure 213 Figure D 5 Example of content for a troubleshooting procedure Method A 2 4 Figure D 6 Example of content for a troubleshooting procedure Method B 215 Figure D 7 Example of content for a troubleshooting procedure Method C 216 Figure D 8 Example of content for a combination testing and troubleshooting proe dure B
66. indicates that if required at least one of the these content items shall be included TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES CHAPTER X IPMCS MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE PMCS is required as a minimum in one maintenance chapter PMCS INTRODUCTION WORK 5 3 4 1 lt pmcsintrowp gt PACKAGE PMCS INCLUDING LUBRICATION 5 3 4 2 lt pmcswp gt INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE PMCS is required as a minimum in one maintenance chapter ctim lt masterindexcategory gt lt pmcescategory gt mim K lt maintenancepmcscategory gt lt maintenancecategory gt Installation instructions Preliminary servicing of equipment R R R 33235 101 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 12 13 14 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P 14 amp P Reference Element Name Preliminary checks and adjustment of PAR lt prechkadj gt equipment Preliminary calibration of equipment P Circuit alignment P Ammunition markings P 32301 kammo markings Classification of defects P mma oee P Other service upon receipt task Follow on maintenance QUIPMENT USER FITTING IE 5 3 3 lt perseqpwp gt INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE PERSONAL USE EQUIPMENT PMCS INTRODUCTION WORK E 541 pmcsintr
67. multi volume manual that goes in part 1 Each volume except volume 1 shall include a list of effective pages listing the pages provided in that particular volume 23 MIL STD 4005 1 2 5 2 1 5 11 Dates of Issue for changes At the top of the list of effective pages work packages the date of the basic manual and the date of each change that appears in the change number column shall be listed 5 2 1 6 Title block page lt titlebIk gt A title block page shall be prepared and follow the list of effective pages work packages Refer to FIGURE 19 The title block page shall include the reporting errors and recommended improvement statement lt reporting gt When depot level repair parts are included in a lower level RPSTL the following statement shall be added to the RPSTL title Including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts When the publication contains National Overhaul Standards the title block shall include the National Overhaul Standards Statement in accordance with 5 2 1 1 2 5 2 1 6 1 Reporting errors and recommending improvements statement lt reporting gt A reporting errors and recommending improvements statement Refer to FIGURE 19 shall appear below the prime title NSN EIC and subtitle if any on the title block page The mailing address e mail address and fax number of the responsible proponent shall be inserted in the statement Additional information may be added as required by the acquiring activity e g how
68. 4 Inspects troubleshoots performs diagnostic tests repairs adjusts calibrates and aligns aircraft system modules com ponents AVIM units will have capability to determine the serviceability of specified modules components removed prior to the expiration of the Time Between Overhaul TBO or finite life Module component disassembly and repair will support the DX program and will normally be limited to tasks requiring cleaning and the replacement of seals 0439 1 FIGURE G 3 Example of an aviation MAC introduction 344 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0437 UNIT MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC INTRODUCTION The Army Maintenance System MAC This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the two maintenance levels under the Two Level Maintenance System concept This MAC immediately following the introduction designates overall authority and responsibility for the performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component The application of the maintenance functions to the end item or component levels which are shown on the MAC in column 4 as Field includes two subcolumns Unit maintenance and Direct Support maintenance The Unit maintenance column is divided into two more subcolumns C for Operator or Crew and O for Unit maintenance Sustainment includes two subcolumns general support and depot D The tools
69. 5 2 1 5 Numbering Blank page 4 7 16 2 1 3 Numbering i 4 7 16 2 1 4 Numbering Front Mater o iip 4 7 16 2 1 1 Numbering Rear 4 7 16 2 1 2 NUM oda 4 7 16 2 1 o ou ee eoe e 4 7 4 jp AA T uta 4 7 4 dnm S 5 3 5 3 13 Painting ammunition aa E 5 3 14 1 5 P tagtaphS aa buana as 4 7 11 a S eas 4 7 11 1 S 4 7 11 2 5 3 5 3 4 Part n miber column 5 3 6 3 2 5 Part number index work F 5 3 11 2 Parts breakdown reference uoo ete tite d eet di dis 5 3 6 3 2 14 380 298 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Parts information CCrOSSstel ere nce 1306 X68 o oe plots dudo Gees rena di F 5 3 11 Development OF iulio na fatte aaah adi oni 5 2 Repair parts list WP isset es an ERR UD 5 3 6 Special tools list WAP s a aun nawa unun 5 3 10 Parts 5 3 2 Patch panel connections
70. BULK F 5 3 10 Special tools list work package lt stlwp gt A special tools list work package shall be prepared for special tools special TMDE and other special support equipment authorized for maintenance of the end item assembly Refer to FIGURE F 10 All repair parts for special tools listed in this work package that have their own TM shall not be listed in the repair parts for special tools list work package see F 5 3 7 These tools shall be listed in the format and data requirement in F 5 3 10 1 through F 5 3 10 3 6 F 5 3 10 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 5 3 10 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package F 5 3 10 3 Special tools list lt pi category gt The special tools list requirements in F 5 3 6 3 shall be used except as specified in F 5 3 10 3 1 through F 5 3 10 3 5 F 5 3 10 3 1 Item number column The ITEM NO column shall be left blank F 5 3 10 3 2 Functional group header lt fnegrp gt The functional group header shall precede the first bulk item in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column The functional group number and title lt fnecode gt shall be SPECIAL TOOLS appearing on the top line s The next line s below shall be the figure number and the figure title lt fnctitle gt 5 3 10 3 3 D coded items When a de
71. C 4 2 Maintenance level applicability Requirements contained in this standard are applicable to all maintenance levels unless specifically noted in bold and in parentheses 1 Direct Support The labeled requirements shall be applicable to all TMs containing that maintenance level An explanation of all applicable Department of Army maintenance levels is provided in section 3 C 4 3 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery Technical manual data prepared and delivered digitally in accordance with this standard shall be Extensible Markup Language XML tagged using the Document Type Definition DTD for Maintenance Instructions and the XML Stylesheet Language XSL or style sheets in accordance with MIL STD 2361 Refer to 4 6 for information on obtaining or accessing this DTD XML tags used in the modular DTD are noted throughout the text of this standard in bracketed bold characters 1 ctrlindwp as convenience for the TM author and to ensure that the tags are used correctly when developing a document instance 184 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C C 4 4 Use of the DTD XSLs DTD referenced in this standard interpret the technical content and structure for the functional requirements contained in this standard and are mandatory for use The XSLs referenced herein interpret the style and format As specified by the contracting activity XSLs or style sheets may be used to produce final reproducible paper copy f
72. GENERAL In addition to the Introduction work package this RPSTL is divided into the following work packages 1 Repair Parts List Work Packages Work packages containing lists of spares and repair parts authorized by this RPSTL for use in the performance of maintenance These work packages also include parts which must be removed for replacement of the authorized parts Parts lists are composed of functional groups in ascending alphanumeric sequence with the parts in each group listed in ascending figure and item number sequence Sending units brackets filters and bolts are listed with the component they mount on Bulk materials are listed by item name in FIG BULK at the end of the work packages Repair parts kits are listed separately in their own functional group and work package Repair parts for reparable special tools are also listed in a separate work package Items listed are shown on the associated illustrations 2 Special Tools List Work Packages Work packages containing lists of special tools special TMDE and special support equipment authorized by this RPSTL as indicated by Basis of Issue BOI information in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column Tools that are components of common tool sets and or Class VII are not listed 3 Cross Reference Indexes Work Packages There 3 cross reference indexes work packages in this RPSTL the National Stock Number NSN Index work package the Part Number P N Index work packag
73. Maintenance Code F H L MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX F Application Explanation Unit AVUM is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item Direct support AVIM is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item General support is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item Specialized repair activity enter specialized repair activity designator is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item Depot is the lowest level that can do complete repair of the item Both afloat and ashore intermediate levels are capable of complete repair of item Navy only Complete repair is done at contractor facility Nonreparable No repair is authorized No repair is authorized No parts or special tools are authorized for maintenance of B coded item However the item may be reconditioned by adjusting lubricating etc at the user level Recoverability Code Recoverability codes are assigned to items to indicate the disposition action on unserviceable items The recoverability code is shown in the fifth position of the SMR code as follows Recoverability Code Application Explanation Nonreparable item When unserviceable condemn and dispose of the item at the level of maintenance shown in the third position of the SMR code Reparable item When uneconomically reparable condemn and dispose of the item at the unit level Reparable item When uneconomically reparable con
74. PagenumberIng a 4 7 16 2 1 le say ease 5 2 1 5 5 pc M E aa 4 7 13 4 7 13 8 4 13 8 Random 4 7 13 8 4 7 13 8c NR HR 5 1 5 3 12 4 5 Location and description of major parts B 5 3 4 Looseleaf pubs Changes 4 8 21 5 3 5 3 14 UMA E 5 3 5 3 22b 2 Lubrication charts 5 3 7 4 Lubrication Instructions E 5 3 7 3 Lubrication instructions alrcraft E 5 3 7 3 Lubrication instructions WP 5 3 3 374 337 338 336 338 340 168 168 52 53 54 53 52 53 53 53 53 37 53 52 52 37 37 53 34 36 36 36 36 48 257 173 48 241 244 248 248 248 248 MIL STD 4005 1 2 49 322 332 333 333 319 333 328 332 247 255 229 222 258 223 258 228 226 222 258 222 228 229 221 249 248 229 248 229 247 259 247 229 225 226 318 220 221 251 249 229 261 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE M 5 1b Aviation MAC int
75. Repair parts figure title Ute QN IV 295 F 5 3 6 3 2 Repair part lt 295 F 5 3 6 3 2 1 Item number column lt callout gt 295 F 5 3 6 3 2 2 SMR c de COL URI SITIES l alqu 295 5 3 6 3 2 3 NSN 295 5 3 6 3 2 4 Commercial and Government Entity Code lt cageno gt column 296 F 5 3 6 3 2 5 Part number lt partno gt column 296 F 5 3 6 3 2 6 Description and UOC 296 Quantity o tol edes 297 F 5 3 6 3 2 8 MC USMC Quantity per equipment column 297 F 5 3 6 3 2 9 Mandatory Replacement ie 298 NICasue a asan upaqas ure 298 f 5 3 6 3 2 11 UmtotrlIssue uiii edet arn EE 298 1 5 3 0 3 2 12 Reference Designation D ud ia eoe Ah e RE eR NIRE 298 F 5 3 6 3 2 1 S Next He hier edente sedie nu ea eec uu cee 208 5 3 6 3 2 14 Parts Breakdown Reference 298 F 5 3 6 3 2 1 5 Oth r os tool ated ia Sed aure 298 5 3 6 4 Basic Issue Items BID repair 298 5 3 6 5 Expendable and durable items
76. The header WARNING CAUTION or NOTE shall be bold and centered above the appropriate text Headers shall not be numbered Warnings may have safety or hazard icon s and shall appear below the warning header Caution may have icon s depicting equipment damage and shall appear below the caution header When a warning caution or note consists of two or more paragraphs the header WARNING CAUTION or NOTE shall not be repeated above each paragraph Warnings cautions and notes on unrelated topics that pertain to the same task procedure or step s may be grouped under one heading When grouping warnings cautions or notes each warning caution or note shall be separated by at least one line and may be bulleted Warning caution and note text shall be indented on the right and left Layout shall not result in warnings cautions and notes divided so first lines of text or groups of icons appear on one page and remaining lines or groups of icons on another page Layout shall avoid warnings cautions and notes being placed on a different page than the paragraph to which they apply Warnings shall include basic first aid instructions guidance in the event of exposure injury e g flush eyes with water seek medical attention cleanse affected area with soap and water etc Notes shall be allowed in the manual other than a task a procedure or a step 4 7 7 5 Icons use of standardized icons to improve readers recognition of h
77. as a convenience for the TM author and to ensure that the tags are used correctly when developing a document instance D 4 5 Use of DTD XSLs The DTD referenced in this standard interpret the technical content and structure for the functional requirements contained in this standard and are mandatory for use The XSLs referenced herein interpret the style and format As specified by the contracting activity XSLs or style sheets may be used to produce final reproducible paper copy for all TMs prepared in accordance with this standard For additional information on the DTD and specific XSL or style sheets refer to MIL STD 2361 D 4 6 Content structure and format The examples provided herein are an accurate representation of the content structure and format requirements contained in this appendix and shall be followed to permit the effective use of the DTD for Troubleshooting Procedures D 4 7 Style and format This standard provides style and format requirements for the technical content requirements described in this appendix These requirements are considered mandatory and are intended for compliance D 4 8 Work package development Technical manual data developed in accordance with this appendix shall be divided into individual stand alone units of information called work packages A work package shall consist of descriptive operational maintenance troubleshooting support or parts information for the weapon system or equipment
78. bulk items work package shall be prepared whenever bulk items are required in the repair of any parts listed in a parts list special tool list or repair kit The work package shall not have an illustration The work package data requirements are specified in F 5 3 9 1 through F 5 3 9 3 F 5 3 9 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 5 3 9 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package F 5 3 9 3 Bulk item lt pi item gt Items in the bulk items list shall be listed alphabetically by item name in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column Refer to FIGURE F 9 The requirements defined in F 5 3 6 3 2 shall be used except as specified in F 5 3 9 3 1 and 299 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F F 5 3 9 3 1 ITEM column lt callout gt Numbers in the ITEM column of bulk material list apply to the FIG BULK only and shall not be associated with item numbers callouts appearing on the illustrations figures 5 3 9 3 2 Functional group header fncgrp The functional group header shall precede the first bulk item in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column The functional group number and title fnccode shall be BULK MATERIAL appearing on the top line s The next line s below shall be the figure number and the figure title fnctitle and titled FIG
79. explistwp 337 G 5 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 337 xxiii G 5 6 2 G 5 6 3 G 5 6 4 G 5 7 G 5 7 1 G 5 7 2 G 5 7 3 G 5 7 4 G 5 8 G 5 8 1 G 5 8 2 G 5 8 3 G 5 8 4 5 5 9 G 5 9 1 6 5 92 G 5 9 3 G 5 9 4 G 5 10 G 5 10 1 G 5 10 2 G 5 10 3 G 5 10 4 G 5 11 G 6 G 6 NOTES MIL STD 40051 2 CONTENTS PAGE Initial setup information uci cose Goa e ce ut dere 337 Introduction for expendable and durable items list work package intro 337 Expendable and durable items list explist 338 Tool identification list work package Unit AVUM level or above only SAG OLN W gt 339 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 339 Initial setup informato usse phat 390 Introduction for tool identification list work package intro 339 Tool identification list toolidlist eee 340 Mandatory replacement parts work package Unit AVUM level or above only LW ale ee Que ae dede 340 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 340 Initial setup information 340 Introductio
80. lo 2 Supporting information for repair parts special 2 tools TMDE and support equipment en c alre 151 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Chemical Ammunition 20 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 40 amp P Reference Element Nam EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA 5 3 lt descwp gt WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities and features Location and description of major components Differences between models Ft B 5 2 5 p lt eqpdiff gt Equipmentdata R R F pls femia CHAPTER X MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Service upon receipt of materiel 5 lt mim gt lt maintenancepmcscategory gt 52 lt maintenancecategory gt SERVICE UPON RECEIPT WORK P P 53234 lt siting gt Installation instructions R P P 253234 Preliminary servicing of equipment Preliminary checks and adjustment of equipment Additional service upon receipt task Preliminary calibration of equipment Follow on maintenance MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria O uui Pree eae C pa P P 532391 lt ammo markings gt P 532392 ammod pines emm P 15323 94 LL eus heu o umm
81. odi aser 317 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS a eve Nae rS ey xoa esi enar 317 G 3 DEFINITTIONS t rr TN 317 G 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENIT S 317 4 1 General MM PH 317 G 4 2 Maintenance level applicability decies 317 G 4 3 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery 317 G 4 4 Ese ofthe 98 Le Sina a ins usos nose s basi iude 317 G 4 5 Content Structure and format a aie cd 318 G 4 6 Terima sz etes Uit rebas AR e a GR tU 318 G 4 7 Work package 1 ea nce EAE de 318 G 4 8 Selective application and tailoring eene 318 xxii MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE G 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENIT S 318 G 5 1 Preparation of supporting information 318 G 52 References work package eo acea dan er aet ede a aee audes 318 G 5 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 318 G 5 2 2 Initial setup information insect 318 G 5 2 3 SCOPE LSCOPE M PER 318 G 5 2 4 Publig
82. refer to FIGURE E 9 Alternatively if the actions are already listed in another work package or packages a statement shall be made that includes references to those actions refer to FIGURE E 9 Alternatively if the actions are already listed in another work package or packages a statement shall be made that includes references to those actions E 5 3 8 4 QA requirements work package DMWR NMWR only lt qawp gt This work package shall be prepared and include the data described in E 5 3 8 4 1 through E 5 3 8 4 10 5 3 8 4 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 8 4 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 8 4 3 Statement of responsibility lt responsibility gt The following information shall be included STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY The depot contractor is responsible for complying with the quality assurance requirements contained in this work package and in accordance with ISO 9000 Series standards or equivalent The commodity manager reserves the right to perform inspections or make changes that ensure the depot work being done meets the quality standards of the DMWR and preserves the inherent reliability of the item E 5 3 8 4 4 Definitions definitions Definitions shall be prepared for all QA terms extensively used in
83. 1 A description of system areas and compartments shall be prepared and the system equipment and components contained in the areas shall be identified To identify and locate the listed system equipment the configuration description shall be supported by separate illustrations of each compartment and area For aircraft only a station diagram showing fuselage station water line and butt line etc shall be included refer to FIGURE B 1 2 The subsystems or equipment comprising the system shall be identified and described Other equipment which is installed in the subject system compartments and areas need not be listed in the text or called out in the illustrations if they do not directly affect the operation or maintenance of the subject system Descriptions of operator attended equipment shall include general statements about the nature and purpose of the controls and indicators The text shall be supported by illustrations 3 Descriptions and illustrations of associated system equipment shall be limited to the major units of that equipment The descriptions shall be more concise than those of the subject system equipment otherwise the same requirements shall apply In the descriptions emphasis shall be placed on associated systems equipment that constitutes operational or functional interfaces with the subject system Such units shall be included in the system illustrations b Illustrate the use of the equipment Only information pert
84. 2 Ozone depleting substances ODS a 5 lt destructmat gt B 2 2 2 2 Destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy 2 6 a 8 29 Preparation for storage or shipment lt pssref gt 5 2 11 lt wrntyref gt Warranty information lt nomenreflist gt N N N Nomenclature cross reference list R B5213 R 5 List of abbreviations Quality of material Safety care and handling 72 Nuclear hardness Calibration Supporting information for repair parts special lt supdata gt tools TMDE and support equipment 113 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A IV TM Requirements Matrix for 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 23 amp P 24 amp P 34 amp P Reference Element Name EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA B 5 3 lt descwp gt WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities and B 5 3 3 lt eqpinfo gt features R R Location and description of major components 5 3 Differences between models Bas lt eqpdiff gt THEORY OF OPERATION WORK B 5 4 lt thrywp gt IPACKAGE 5 lt tim gt TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK D PACKAGE lt masterindexcategory gt TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES NOTE The notation indicates that if required at least one of the these content items shall be included TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT WORK ACKAGES TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PAC
85. B 5 2 4 Maintenance forms records and reports lt mfrr gt a A Army Only TM The following statement shall be include MAINTENANCE FORMS RECORDS AND REPORTS Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by as applicable DA PAM 738 750 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS DA PAM 738 751 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management Systems Aviation TAMMS A or AR 700 138 Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability b MC Marines Only TM The following statement shall be include 165 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B MAINTENANCE FORMS RECORDS AND REPORTS Maintenance forms and records used by Marine Corps personnel are prescribed by TM 4700 15 1 c Multi Service TM The following statements shall be included only for multi service technical publication and use only applicable services e g if the Navy does not use the publication do not include a statement for that Service MAINTENANCE FORMS RECORDS AND REPORTS 1 A Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by as applicable DA PAM 738 750 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS DA PAM 738 751 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management Systems Aviation TAMMS A or AR 700 138 Army Logistics Readiness and Sustainability
86. C 5 2 4 8 Operation under unusual conditions WP 25 Operation under usual conditions C 5 2 4 Operational checkout procedurces D 5 5 8 3 6 Operational checkout procedurces D 5 5 8 5 6 Operational checkout test D 5 5 8 3 6a Operational checkout work package D 5 5 8 3 Operational checkout troubleshooting D 5 5 8 Operator instruction WPs Types of C322 Operator instruction preparation C 5 1 Operator instructions oe C52 Other service upon TeCIe DEISE os eco ds ee E 5 3 2 3 10 Overall security Caton au o oie e Cedo Rec anis Reg 4 7 22 2 Overhaul and retirement schedule esee 5 3 5 3 24 Overhaul inspection procedures 5 3 8 2 Ozone depleting deiude Lar 5 2 8 Packagino material E 5 3 2 3 3b 1 M E 5 3 2 3 9 3b ls xp rH ETE E 5 3 5 3 27b Page List of effective work packages
87. D 5 5 8 Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures work packages A series of work packages shall be developed containing operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures for integrated weapon systems and for each independent system and subsystem of the weapon system as applicable DMWR NMWR shall include these work packages as required by the acquiring activity The content and development requirements for these work packages are provided in D 5 5 8 1 through D 5 5 8 6 D 5 5 8 1 Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures content Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures shall guide a technician in as practical a manner as possible in detecting isolating and correcting system or equipment failure malfunctions Procedures shall ultimately lead to isolating faults to an appropriate adjustment replaceable parts interface wires or mechanical linkage Instructions shall direct repair or replacement of parts authorized for repair or replacement at the maintenance level covered Procedures shall be accompanied by schematics signal flow diagrams waveforms tables and other illustrations for comprehensive understanding of the procedures When schematics are required as backup data they shall be referenced or may be contained in the same WP The schematics shall integrate fluid mechanical electrical and electronic components Illustrations may also be included that locate and identify the controls and displays used t
88. Decontamination procedures NBC 5 2 5 3 4 Defective ammunition 5 3 14 1 4 Definition stesse co 4 7 13 8 5 3 8 4 4 Degraded operation procedures 5 2 5 3 6 Deleted figures items 5 8 0000 4 8 1 6a Deleted RPSTL work packages 4 8 1 6c Depot maintenance work requirements eee E 4 4 Depot mobilization requirements WP E 5 3 8 3 DepotTrepalr e Posee gi quio 8 5 3 92 Description and usable on code column RPSTL F 5 3 6 3 2 6 Description amp use of controls indicators WP 5 2 3 Descriptive information UE 4 7 10 NOWCE T irene ieee 5 2 1 1 9 Destruction to prevent enemy B 5 2 9 Development of maintenance 4 E 4 2 Development of operational checkout WP D 5 5 8 2 Development of troubleshooting procedures D 4 2 Deviations and exceptions
89. E 5 3 12 1 5 Special inspections a Definition and general information The following paragraph shall be inserted This information supplements scheduled inspections as outlined in the applicable aircraft inspection checklists Inspection of items which are required to be inspected at intervals not compatible with airframe operating time or airframe inspection intervals is also included Refer to DA PAM 738 751 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System Aviation TAMMS A for applicable forms records and worksheets required for these inspection intervals Typical examples of this type of inspection are as follows 1 Inspections which are solely contingent upon specific conditions or incidents that occur e g hard landings over speed or sudden stoppage wherein immediate inspection is required to ensure safe flight 2 Inspection of components or airframe on a calendar basis e g first aid kits weight and balance check aircraft inventory b Requirements Components and other items which qualify under the criteria for special inspections e g hard landings sudden stoppage over speed shall be included These inspections shall be grouped under specific aircraft areas A line drawing of the aircraft or accessory showing sequence for inspection by area shall be included The area identified shall include all surfaces materials components and equipment pertaining to that specific location The followi
90. Illustrations to identify and locate the spare and repair parts RPSTLs shall be prepared for weapon systems major components and applicable support and interface equipment This information shall be contained in one of the following a A separate RPSTL Technical Manual TM b RPSTL work packages included in a maintenance RPSTL work packages included in a Depot Maintenance Work Requirement DMWR or d RPSTL work packages included in a National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWR 5 3 1 Separate RPSTL TM Separate RPSTL TMs shall consist of front and rear matter and a Parts Information Chapter pim containing the work packages described below F 5 3 2 Parts information chapter pim Unless otherwise specified the PIM chapter shall contain the work packages listed below in the order specified a A single introduction work package lt introwp gt see F 5 3 5 285 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F b One or more repair parts list work packages lt plwp gt see F 5 3 6 When there is a special tools work package and the special tools have repair parts a repair parts for special tools work package lt stl_partswp gt see F 5 3 7 shall be prepared d When kit parts are listed as described under option 2 see F 5 3 6 3 2 6 h 3 a kit parts list work package lt kitswp gt shall be prepared see F 5 3 8 e When bulk items are listed in the parts list a bulk items work package lt bulkitemswp gt shall be prep
91. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS PARTS INFORMATION 10 THROUGH 14 I2 amp P THROUGH 14 amp P SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly INTRODUCTION FOR STANDARD MAC WORK PACKAGE FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY 154 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 20 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 40 amp P Reference Element Nam FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS WORK PACKAGE 11 lt genwp gt TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST WORK PACKAGE ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK 6 3 11 PACKAGES 1 lt glossary gt N N y lt aindx gt 3 lt da2028 gt N N E IA EA NPM TN TI i9 Is EN MEN NE _ s mu mis K m six Km sis Authentication page 4 lt authent gt 6 Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 155 MIL STD 4005 1 2 This page intentionally left blank 156 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A XIV TM Requirements Matrix for Chemical Ammunition 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 34 amp P Reference Element Nam FRONTMATTER TR RP pee Eronteover R Change transmittal page 5 2 1 4 Titleblockpage R R jo Tableofconten
92. MOC shall be performed on that system to determine the effectiveness of the maintenance actions performed and to verify the proper operation of that system These MOC shall be performed in accordance with TM 1 1500 328 23 Copies of supplemental sheets DA Form 4676 R may be used to record and sign off the Maintenance Operational Checks performed MAINTENANCE TEST FLIGHT When all required inspections have been accomplished and initialed in accordance with the above procedure a daily inspection in accordance with the TM specified in the inspection checklist work package will be performed on the aircraft to permit performance of a maintenance test flight MTF The MTF shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of insert applicable aircraft technical manuals and TM 1 1500 328 23 using the MTF form in the MTF technical manual 181 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B CHECKLIST DISTRIBUTION The completion of each phased maintenance inspection shall be recorded on DA Form 2408 13 as prescribed by TM 38 750 The signed checklist together with all continuation sheets shall be attached to DA Form 2408 13 and filed for the six months period as required by TM 38 750 At the end of the six months period these records shall be transferred to and filed with the aircraft historical records until that same phase is repeated during the next cycle e g the checklist added continuation sheets and DA Form 2408 13 for Phase 1 Cycle 1 shal
93. NSN s in this index are listed in National Item Identification Number NIIN sequence STOCK NUMBER Column This column lists the NSN in NIIN sequence The NIIN consists of the last nine digits of the NSN When using this column to locate an item ignore the first four digits of the NSN However the complete NSN should be used when ordering items by stock number For example if the NSN is 5385 01 574 1476 the NIIN is 01 574 1476 292 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F FIG Column This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified located The figures are in numerical order in the repair parts list and special tools list work packages ITEM Column The item number identifies the item associated with the figure listed in the adjacent FIG column This item is also identified by the NSN listed on the same line 2 Part Number P N Index Work Package Part numbers in this index are listed in ascending alphanumeric sequence vertical arrangement of letter and number combinations which places the first letter or digit of each group in order A through Z followed by the numbers 0 through 9 and each following letter or digit in like order PART NUMBER Column Indicates the part number assigned to the item FIG Column This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified located in the repair parts list and special tools list work packages ITEM Column The item number is the number assigned to the item as
94. Records Weapon Record Data Equipment Control Record Uncorrected Fault Record Oil Analysis Log Accident Identification Card Motor Vehicle Accident Report Product Quality Deficiency Report Ammunition General Hand Set Microphone Destruction of TACOM Equipment 0438 1 FIGURE G 1 Example of references 342 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0439 UNIT MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC INTRODUCTION The Army Maintenance System MAC This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at various maintenance levels under the standard Army Maintenance System concept The MAC immediately following the introduction designates overall authority and responsibility for the performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component The application of the maintenance functions to the end item or component shall be consistent with the capacities and capabilities of the designated maintenance levels which are shown on the MAC in column 4 as Unit includes two subcolumns C operator crew and O unit maintenance Direct Support includes an F subcolumn General Support includes an H subcolumn Depot includes a D subcolumn The tools and test equipment requirements immediately following the MAC list the tools and test equipment both special tools and common tool sets required for each maintenance function as referenced
95. Reference to parts of the equipment and to equipment components may be by nomenclature model type reference designator and figure and item number as applicable Reference shall be made only to models or types of equipment covered by the manual To facilitate coverage of modified or additional models or types at a later date references shall be held to a minimum 4 7 23 6 National Stock Numbers NSNs and Part Numbers P Ns Reference to NSNs shall be made only in tables other tabular material and lists Reference to NSNs shall not be made on illustrations or in illustration legends Reference to P Ns shall not be made in the narrative portions of the TM procedural steps illustrations or legends except when essential for identification Reference to P Ns may be made in tables other tabular material and lists 4 7 23 7 Equipment panel markings placarding Reference shall be made to panel markings and switch positions exactly as marked on the equipment However symbols on panel markings shall be spelled out when they cannot be produced by the software composing equipment or printers used in producing the manual such as the symbol for ohm infinity etc 4 7 23 8 Metric and U S standard measurements Unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity all measurements shall be expressed in both U S standard units e g ounces pounds gallons inches feet knots miles etc and metric units U S standard measurements shall
96. bar The Internet form lets you choose to submit an Equipment Improvement Recommendation EIR a Product Quality Deficiency Report PQDR or a Warranty Claim Action WCA You may also submit your information using an SF 368 Product Quality Deficiency Report You can send your SF 368 via e mail regular mail or facsimile using the addresses facsimile numbers specified in DA PAM 738 750 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS We will send you a reply 166 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B B 5 2 5 1 MC Additional reporting equipment improvement recommendations Marine Corps TMs The following statement shall be added for Marine Corps TMs For Marine Corps users Quality deficiency reports QDR shall be submitted on SF 368 in accordance with MCO 4855 10 A reply will be furnished to you B 5 2 6 Hand receipt HR manuals Unit AVUM or below only lt handreceipt gt The following statement may be included in operator s unit maintenance manuals HAND RECEIPT HR MANUALS This manual has a companion document with a TM number followed by HR which stands for Hand Receipt TM X XXXX XXX 10 HR consists of preprinted hand receipts that list end item related equipment i e COEI BII and AAL that must be accounted for As an aid to property accountability additional HR manuals may be requisitioned through normal publication channels B 5 2 7 Corrosion prevention and control lt
97. c Alignment procedures lt alignproc gt Instructions shall be prepared for all alignment procedures including any variations required for different installation options and modes of operation E 5 3 2 3 9 Ammunition service upon receipt tasks Procedures shall be prepared for performing visual inspection of ammunition received from the ammunition supply facility This inspection shall include verification that ammunition received was that requisitioned Instructions shall be prepared for a condition check of the shipment pallets containers boxes and legibility of markings Instructions shall be prepared to note the quantity of each lot for recording purposes E 5 3 2 3 9 Ammunition markings lt ammo markings gt Instructions shall be prepared for marking ammunition and ammunition containers 228 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 5 3 2 3 9 2 Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt Procedures shall be prepared for performing visual inspection of ammunition containers pallets boxes etc and shall include classification and disposition of defective ammunition containers 5 3 2 3 9 3 Handling lt ammo handling gt Procedures shall be prepared for handling ammunition a Unpacking lt ammo unpacking gt As a minimum the following information shall be prepared 1 Any special sequence of action necessary to protect the ammunition 2 special design reusable container is involved for either the end item or
98. components and applicable support and interface equipment Troubleshooting procedures and supporting illustrations shall be prepared so that operator crew and maintenance personnel can perform all required operator through depot level overhaul troubleshooting D 4 2 Development of troubleshooting instructions Troubleshooting instructions shall cover all items comprising the weapon system equipment such as assemblies subassemblies components wiring junction boxes and accessories Troubleshooting procedures shall isolate faults to the part s authorized by the RPSTL for repair or replacement at the maintenance level addressed Tasks shall be presented in the order in which they are performed Approved Logistics Management Information LMI and service experience performance data on similar equipment other reliability maintainability and supportability RMS and operational availability Ao data available shall be used in the preparation of specific troubleshooting procedures Troubleshooting procedures shall begin with testing observed problems a fault symptom or malfunction and shall diagnose to a single fault failure Troubleshooting shall refer to specific maintenance or repair tasks to correct the fault Instructions where applicable shall flow from operator level through unit AVUM direct support AVIM and general support until the fault is isolated Procedures shall include schematics and illustrations as needed or shall reference
99. e 5 3 2 3 2 Signal flow portraying 4 7 27 4 7 Signature zs ann iw a uapa E 5 3 16 7 wu aska E 5 3 2 3 1 Siting requirements C 5 2 4 4 Sline loading 5 3 5 3 4 SMR code column RPSTL a a 5 3 6 3 2 2 Source data TOLL ete ap ie dia etd deci ted 5 1 Spectalapplicatlons uu E 5 3 2 3 4 3 Special environmental conditions 4 7 9 2g Special IBSpeeti hSu u u a 5 3 12 1 5 Special requirements for inspection 18 E 5 3 8 4 5 Special tool set nio cis as he F 5 3 10 3 1 Special tool set 5 3 10 3 5 Special tools list work packa ge F 5 3 10 Special tools repair parts items list F 5 3 7 3 Special tools TMDE amp support equipment 5 2 25 2 Standard checklist statements E 5 3 15 5 Standard information tables 4 7 13 5 Standards
100. inerat terae ete 5 2 1 6 1 Classified WM 5 2 1 6 1 Oversize 5 5 2 1 6 1b Pocket size 5 5 2 1 6 1b TMs with less than 8 de o ce ite tees 5 2 1 6 1b 383 PAGE 59 60 37 49 59 60 298 301 30 318 40 41 41 40 41 41 41 40 40 41 40 41 40 40 41 40 40 40 40 333 239 241 172 298 295 36 41 241 54 56 55 55 55 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Reporting errors statement Cont Unclassified TMs 5 2 1 6 1 1 Marin Corps only C u a 5 2 1 6 1 2 See Bs A au Ss eee 5 2 1 6 1 3 5 2 1 6 1a ReVISIODSd cocti E M de LIS DLE 4 8 Complete 5 4 8 2 Rotatng ee eati ete AS de 4 7 15 1 RPSTLs Arrangement of illustrations essere eene ennt 5 3 12 1 Basic Issue Items repair parts F 5 3 6 4 Bulk item Functional group headetu 5 3 9 3 2 Hem 5 3 9 3 1 E 5 3 9 3 Bulk items WES mM nue Ger 5 3 9 CHANGES saa 4 8 1 6 C ross reference 1
101. lt torquewp gt lt wiringwp gt E3313 SOR 0 5 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A IV TM Requirements Matrix for 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 23 amp P 24 amp P 34 amp P Reference Element Name CHAPTER X ES mim AMMUNITION es lt ammunitioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AMMUNITION MAINTENANCE WORK E 5 3 14 1 lt ammowp gt AMMUNITION MARKING INFORMATION 5 3 14 2 lt ammo markingwp gt WORK PACKAGE FRAG pim PARTS INFORMATION 23 24 34 23 amp P 24 amp P 34 amp P lt stl_partswp gt SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly INTRODUCTION FOR STANDARD FORMAT MAC WORK PACKAGE FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY IMAC WORK PACKAGE FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY 117 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A IV TM Requirements Matrix for 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 Content 23 amp P 24 amp P 34 amp P Reference Element Name EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS G 5 6 lt explistwp gt WORK PACKAGE TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST WORK G 5 7 lt toolidwp gt IPACKAGE MANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS G 5 8 lt mrplwp gt WORK PACKAGE CRITICAL SAFETY ITEMS AND FLIGHT G 5 9 lt csi fscap wp gt SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS WORK PACKAGE ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK
102. m callout dee reri 300 F 5 3 9 3 2 Functional group header fncgrp 300 F 5 3 10 Special tools list work package lt stlwp gt 300 F 5 3 10 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo 300 F 5 3 10 2 Initial setup Information e enne een 300 F 5 3 10 3 Special tools list pLCategOLyos 300 Item number ruere es dee el es 300 5 3 10 3 2 Functional group header fncgrp 300 9 41 1 loeis n cu 300 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE 5 3 10 3 4 Basis of Issue lt gt 2 2 2 11 1 0020 0000 300 FS 3 10 3 5 Quantity COLUMN 300 E 5 3 10 3 6 Components list ite ie Aguada 300 5 3 11 Cross reference index work 301 5 3 11 1 National stock number NSN index work package lt nsnindxwp gt 301 F 5 3 11 1 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo 301 F 5 3 11 1 2 Initial setup Infortmation a eene bo 301 Eo 1T T 3 INSN mex nsmnndax Giada 301 5
103. scientiis rs 4 7 22 1 Master index testing and troubleshooting D 5 4 4 Master malfunction symptom index D 5 5 4 sat t 4 7 9 2 Methods of testing and troubleshooting D 5 2 1 Method Test n ii D 5 5 8 4 6a Method Be Text sa annassa ua dulu D 5 5 8 4 6b Method C Multiplex read codes method D 5 5 8 4 6c Metric SyMD0S e sasawa 4 7 18 2 Military 47 25 3 Mobilization requirements eec o god 5 2 22 Mobilization requirements a E 5 3 8 3 Modification 5 2 20 5 3 5 3 44 Multiplex read codes method D 5 5 8 4 6c NL lti setyice 5 2 1 5 9 Multisheet figure numbers a 4 7 27 4 4 Multiview Multisheet drawings 4 7 27 2 2 Multi volute manuals cata 5 2 1 5 10 N NBC Decontaminaiton procedures esee 5 2 5 3 4 Next higher assembly
104. sources lt link gt lt extref gt lt xref gt that are needed to complete the operating tasks shall be listed here Only references not listed in equipment conditions shall be listed For example References TM 9 1015 252 20 amp P WP 0100 f Equipment conditions lt eqpconds gt Any special equipment conditions required before the procedure can be started shall be listed here and cross referenced to the appropriate source lt link gt lt extref gt or lt xref gt for setting up the condition condition For example Equipment Condition Firing mechanism removed WP 0010 g Special environmental conditions lt specenv gt Any special environmental conditions such as ventilation lighting or temperature lt condition gt that are required shall be listed here The reason lt reason gt that such conditions are needed shall be explained For example Special Environmental Condition Darkened area required for testing lights 30 MIL STD 4005 1 2 h Drawings required lt dwgreq gt When necessary all drawings which are not included in the work package required to complete the maintenance tasks shall be listed here Drawings shall be listed by title lt dwgname gt and drawing number lt dwgno gt For example Drawings Required Power Supply Schematic 132E470092 i Estimated time to complete the task lt time to complete gt If required by the acquiring activity the estimated time it will take to complete the
105. specific maintenance instructions that was initially developed for the M270 Armored Vehicle Mounted Rocket Launcher 9 1425 646 Identifies the M270 Armored Vehicle Mounted Rocket Launcher TM This is the TM under which this WP was initially developed 02000 1 1520 238 T Identifies a WP containing troubleshooting procedures 02000 Identifies the 2000th work package containing specific troubleshooting procedures that was initially developed for the AH 64A Helicopter 32 MIL STD 4005 1 2 1 1520 238 Identifies the AH 64A Helicopter TM This is the TM under which this WP was initially developed 4 7 10 Maintenance tasks and descriptive information Procedural maintenance tasks or descriptive information contained in a WP shall have a paragraph title When it is necessary to divide a maintenance task into subtasks for clarity subparagraph titles shall be used refer to 4 7 11 2 The words END OF TASK shall be placed at the end of any task within a work package For RPSTLs the words END OF FIGURE shall be placed after each parts list The words END OF WORK PACKAGE shall be placed below the last data item i e text illustration etc at the end of any WP except the following RPSTL WPs Repair Parts List Kits Part List Bulk Items Repair Parts for Special Tools List and Special Tools List the words END OF FIGURE shall be placed after the parts list 4 7 11 Paragraphs 4 7 11 1 Paragraph numbering Para
106. to submit an electronic 2028 a Unclassified standard TM Except for classified TMs oversize TMs pocket size TMs and TMs with less than eight pages the following statement shall precede the table of contents title 1 Army Only TM The following statements shall be included REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms located in the back of this manual directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you 2 Marine Only TM The following statements shall be included REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Submit by NAVMC form 10772 directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you 54 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 Multi Service TM The
107. when appropriate Lists may be unnumbered numbered sequentially or lettered alphabetically They may have an optional title Three types of lists are identified below a Definition list The definition list shall consist of the term and the definition The definition list may have headers Term and Definition above the appropriate sections of the list b Random list The random list shall consist of one or more items in a random order c Sequentiallist The sequential list shall consist of one or more items in a specified order such as alphabetic numeric or alphanumeric 4 7 14 Placement of text a Preferred text format for 82 by 11 inch manuals is single column page wide although double column can be used Both single and double column formatted WPs can be included in a single TM if it would make the data more readable or comprehensible however both formats should not be used in the same chapter Text is single spaced double spaced between procedural steps b Procedural step text shall not be placed on an illustration c Text shall always be positioned within the image area within margins The text shall be positioned above and below the illustration and not on the illustration left or right sides d The first line of a paragraph shall not be located at the bottom of the page or column The last line of a paragraph shall not be placed at the top of a new page Do not place the title or header on the la
108. 1 Component ch cklist a D 5 5 7 4 Introduction M mc D 5 5 7 3 Component checklist work package D 5 5 7 CORIO ES TSE ati S u ua S a F 5 3 10 3 6 Components of End Item Work Package G 5 4 ComprehensibilifY a aqanassassnaysaisqhusqassasasqasaysqashaasqussayassqassa 4 7 26 i eaae editum cse Dono 5 2 1 1 13 COMSEC protective markings 4 7 22 6 Content Operational checkout tete iie so ec PO Bi sedi D 5 5 8 1 Preparation Ota 5 1 Content Selection siio APPENDIX A Content structure and format B 4 5 Content structure and format C 4 5 Content structure and format D 4 6 Content structure and format E 4 7 Content structure and format teste F 4 4 Content structure and format inet buen G 4 5 364 PAGE 46 46 47 46 47 47 47 46 24 28 28 28 44 225 204 203 228 229 246 240 258 336 46 208 198 171 204 204 204 300 334 42 51 40 204 48 98 164 185 195 2 9 285 318 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER u N D 5 5 4 4 Narrative option Description
109. 12 Alignment lt align gt Detailed instructions shall be prepared for alignment procedures to adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance E 5 3 5 3 13 Painting lt paint gt Instructions shall be prepared for required painting refinishing and marking of assembled components assemblies subassemblies or end item Reference may be made to TM 55 1500 345 23 TM 1 1500 204 23 SB 11 573 TB 43 0209 TB 43 0118 TM 43 0139 or others as appropriate E 5 3 5 3 14 Lubrication lt lube gt a Pertinent mandatory lubrication instructions CPC procedures and general lubrication instructions not contained elsewhere shall be prepared and appear here b DMWR NMWR and aviation only Lubrication procedures which have a major quality assurance effect shall be immediately preceded by a statement such as check to identify them E 5 3 5 3 15 Assembly assem Step by step procedures shall be prepared for assembling items disassembled or removed that make up the components assemblies or subassemblies Illustrations shall be used to support and clarify the text a Instructions shall be prepared for assembling precision matched or mated parts marked during disassembly b Instructions shall be prepared for checking and recording gear wear patterns backlash shimming requirements and the indexing of parts to ensure proper alignment during assembly The purpose of shims shall be given e g
110. 2 APPENDIX F F 5 3 11 3 3 Reference designator index lt refdesindx gt Each line entry lt refdesindxrow gt shall list each reference designators assigned to applicable repair part or special tool items figure number and item number lt callout gt The reference designator lt refdes gt line entry shall identify the first figure number and item number lt callout gt for which the reference designators is applicable The reference designators shall not be repeated on the same page of the index for each additional figure number and item number lt callout gt identified by that reference designator When reference designator references carry over to another page the carried over reference designator entry shall appear at the top of the list F 5 3 11 4 Bulk figure reference When entries in either the NSN or part number index references bulk material the word BULK shall appear in the FIG column The numbers in the ITEM No column shall refer to the item number list in the bulk figure located in the bulk functional group list and shall not refer to item numbers on an illustration F 5 3 11 5 Sets and kits Part numbers for sets kits shall be cross referenced to NSN figure and item number for the set kit When Option 1 is selected the ITEM column shall either be left blank or list an alphabetical character e g for KIT S for SET etc Refer toF 5 3 6 3 2 6 h 1 When Option 2 is selected the FIG column shall list the wo
111. 2 3 10 lt other surtsk gt E 5 3 2 3 11 lt followon maintsk gt E535 lt maintwp gt CHAPTER X MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE PMCS is required as a minimum in one maintenance chapter SERVICE UPON RECEIPT WORK Siting Shelter requirements Service upon receipt of materiel Installation instructions Preliminary servicing of equipment Preliminary checks and adjustment of equipment Preliminary calibration of equipment Circuit alignment Ammunition markings Classification of defects Ammunition handling Procedures to activate ammunition Additional service upon receipt task Follow on maintenance MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Servicing lt groundtsk gt Ground handling Inspection of installed items lt inspinstitm gt Removal lt remove gt Disassembly lt disassem gt 158 TABLE A XIV TM Content Cleaning Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI Repair or replacement Alignment Painting Lubrication Assembly Test and inspection Installation Adjustment Calibration Radio interference suppression Placing in service Testing Preparation for storage or shipment Classification of defects Handling ammunition Ammunition markings Pro
112. 2 5 Circ it alte BEBE s oreet chere aq E 5 3 2 3 8 Classification of defects uode u uns E 5 3 2 3 9 2 Depot cat gory ss EE 5 2 4 Depot mobilization requirements E 5 3 8 3 Equipment lubrication umn aha eR door E 5 3 7 Equipment user fitting instructions WP 5 3 3 Facilities ote i ores 5 3 8 1 Follow on Service upon reciept 5 3 2 3 11 Follow on maintenance 185 44 5 3 5 3 31 Foreign ammunition iat ci 5 3 14 3 General 5 3 6 a t 5 3 2 3 9 3 Installation 5 3 2 3 4 Installation of the equipment 5 3 2 3 4 2 yide G 5 3 Maintenance and PMCS category 5 2 2 Maintenance without PMCS category E 5 2 3 Manufact red items WP H9 QIP Work package se ns lees qa cia inde Eva E 5 3 8 2 Other service upon reciept task Pn bt E 5 3 2 3 10 Phased maintenance E 5 3 16 PMCS only
113. 28 32 29 29 52 29 32 40 31 31 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE Work packages Cont Sequential Imberifigu u sted case shirt tpe aba Qs 4 7 9 3 31 v7 4 7 2 3 1 24 SUpersedure MOU CE n al a u dea a S 4 7 9 1d 29 eee eden aym u aQ ua 4 7 9 1b 29 Types of troubleshooting D 5 5 2 200 CONCLUDING MATERIAL Custodians Preparing Activity Army TM Army TM Marine Corps MC Review Activities Project Number Army AR AT TMSS 0337 CR EA MI PT 394
114. 3 6 5 Expendable and durable items 18 0 00 G 5 6 4 Expendable and durable items list 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 G 5 6 Export control dr coe ket 5 2 1 1 8 External Connections uie ceat ted E 5 3 2 3 8a External ANS PSECU p AAAS LS SM S Sas D 5 5 6 4c External oeque ectetuer E 5 3 5 3 4h 367 PAGE 29 191 37 164 185 195 219 40 191 191 191 297 170 43 190 41 172 225 30 28 173 201 172 164 166 248 234 229 31 53 52 298 338 337 51 228 203 239 MIL STD 4005 1 2 248 197 197 206 197 45 45 45 46 245 263 26 245 52 251 171 341 256 45 37 26 60 247 229 37 41 36 190 259 23 38 24 28 33 23 45 26 26 42 36 287 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE F Facilities work packages eee sett 5 3 8 1 AS S SS D 5 2 1 5 Failures sensor derived D 5 2 1 4 Fault code reference iIndex lela ieee D 5 5 8 3 6c Ie eee ads D 5 2 2 1 Figure Tate TOEDUd E Sot ate Ete e 4 7 27 4 5 1 Figure HUmbErS ostiis Quy 4 7 27
115. 335 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G G 5 4 4 COFI list lt coei gt This list shall be prepared as an illustrated tabular list of components of the end item spare repair parts that are removed from the major end item and separately packaged or stowed for transportation or movement includes on board spares The illustrations shall be placed above the list Method A or within the list Method B The arrangement of the illustrations and list shall be similar to that shown in FIGURE G 10 Method A or FIGURE G 11 Method B G 5 4 4 1 List lt coeitab gt The COE list standard information shall include the headings and basic content shown in FIGURE G 10 or FIGURE G 11 applicable to the specific equipment The description of each item shall consist of the approved Federal item name desc followed by a short description when needed Items shall be listed alphabetically The part number lt partno gt shall be located below the item The Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC lt cageno gt shall follow the part number and in parentheses The stowage location of COFI shall also be included in the description column When more than one model or configuration is applicable and Usable On Codes UOC uoc are assigned the UOC shall appear in a separate column adjacent to the description column refer to FIGURE G 10 or FIGURE 6 11 When on board spares lt on board spares gt apply there shall be a break in the text of the list and a new
116. 34 Photograph quality uie daa haar dias i ae 43 4 22 8 2 a 43 4 7 27 2 3 3 Use of photographs in place of line 43 AT 272A Engineering dEAWIDBS 43 43 4 7 27 2 5 1 Diagram SpecifiCauonDs usse ec ER QUIE ERR I ARE ESAE SI asss asss 43 415212 0 2 Types OF deo bns Ie Dur MOI uec sdb bs adus 43 472126 SMALLS ANA OAD NSS asset 44 4 7 27 2 7 Tools and test equipment illustrations 44 4 7 27 3 Elements 44 4 7 27 3 1 Border rules and Dores 44 41 21 37 Miseobtbe human ch 44 Ado Ae WINES Camis cect satel ct 44 4727224 NN TE IR CEN RHET QI AS bea a 44 aeo ive a esee 44 4121 34 25 Leader lines and arrowheadsa ei ue odds 45 4 7 27 3 5 Illustration legends nate Len de a o dnsdeaeandebante 45 4 1 21 3 6 Procedures on illustrations 45 4 7 27 4 Graphic TECHNIQUES 45 4 7 27 4 1 45 4 7 2742 RPSTL figur numbering
117. 43 244 229 230 232 234 232 229 232 232 234 232 232 233 231 57 57 36 46 206 208 209 243 228 227 227 190 168 246 188 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Preservation packaging amp marking 5 3 5 3 23 PES HOS AWAY S19 i EM 5 5 6 Checking attached documents nu pe cire de eee D 5 5 6 4a 6 24 dI D 5 5 6 5b Cleaning and teo iive Cone pistes peo rese den D 5 5 6 4d Introduction Table of tests and inspections D 5 5 6 5b 2 Narrative pEOCOOUEES o oi sete un Qa asian i mee D 5 5 6 5a SCOPE quii meme pU D 5 5 6 3 Table of tests and inspections D 5 5 6 5b 2 Unpacking and special D 5 5 6 4a Pretest setup procedures S u us D 5 5 8 3 5 Pretest setup procedures eicere t socii o esie Cs Ea VUL AER ONU D 5 5 8 4 5 Pretest setup pEoCedurBs s eiu eet e b tu ui oc a ici duae tss D 5 5 8 5 5 Preventive maintenance checklist E 5 3 4 3 Preventive maintenance inspection WP E 5 3 12 1 Preventive maintenance services inspection E 5 3 15 Procedural step levels_
118. 5 3 4 287 SVEIBOIS x 4 7 18 38 Tables a a 4 7 13 4 34 doque 4 7 14 36 TN dINISISD OT TSE 4 7 2 23 DY Pe Size P 4 7 3 25 Volume size and COMME 4 7 2 1 24 Warnings Cautions 4 7 7 26 Work Packages 4 7 2 3 24 PLONE COVGE 5 2 1 1 49 Front cover ao mena 4 7 16 2 1 1 37 Front matter Availability eu is 5 2 1 1 4 50 Change transmittal page een ee ena Nae eaa tee ena ca 5 2 1 4 52 4 8 1 3 47 Denes re esau u mua RC 5 2 1 49 Destr ctiOD NOU CO sis et IER 5 2 1 1 9 51 Disclosure NOCE rosae qe sita a 5 2 1 1 6 50 Distrib tion s ale EIEHE una 9 21 17 51 Export control warning cesa en tete tede ae n 5 2 1 1 8 51 FROME RO VCE os 5 2 1 1 49 General purpose DotlCe ecce es netta eed etes eerte s 5 2 1 1 10 5 How to use this manual ro oan eiie ct ortho De eS MINES 5 2 1 9 58 List of effective pages work packages 25 2 1 5 52 Irsa
119. 6 PAOZZ 7 PAOZZ 8 PAOZZ 9 PAOZZ 10 PAOZZ 11 XAOZZ 3 NSN 53 10 00 894 3637 5310 00 5 15 7449 5315 00 127 8038 5305 00 958 3409 5340 01 257 1761 5315 01 008 7083 5315 00 288 2478 5340 00 132 3718 5310 00 844 3302 5310 00 781 9483 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F TM X XXX XXXX 24P 4 CAGEC 80205 88044 82577 96906 82577 82577 96906 82577 80205 80205 82577 5 PART NUMBER NAS1291 AN960C416L 3210472 524694552 3210471 3210473 MS24665 1011 964037 1C NAS1291C3 NAS620C10L 6019031 0092 3 4 blank 6 DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC GROUP 6025 FIG 91 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RACK FMT 3234023 100 CAM NUT SELF LOCKING EX UOC DCT DCU WASHER FLAT OC DCT DCU IN REAR GUIDE OC DCT DCU CREW MACHINE OC DCT DCU INGE RACK OC DCT DCU U PIN HINGE OC DCT DCU U PIN COTTER OC DCT DCU U FASTENER SELF LOCK UOC DCT DCU NUT SELF LOCKING UOC DCT DCU WASHER FLAT UOC DCT DCU RACK SUBASSEMBLY T END OF FIGURE FIGURE F 5 Example of a repair parts list work package 308 0092 7 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F TM X XXX XXXX 24P 0025 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 ITEM SMR PART DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON NO CODE NSN CAGEC NUMBER CODE UOC QTY GROUP 14 ENGINE ASSEMBLY FIG 24 OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY BOLT MACHINE WASHER LOCK STRAINER P
120. 7 39 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 22 3 Blank page backing a classified page Blank pages normally require no copy However if the reverse side of a blank page contains classified material security markings for the blank page shall be bold and at the top and bottom center of the blank page The blank page shall reflect the highest classification of the reverse side and include the statement This page is unclassified 4 7 22 4 Emergency page markings When specified by the acquiring activity emergency pages shall be prepared Pages containing emergency information shall have a dark border that indicates to the user that they are emergency pages The border should go to the edge of the page if the composition system allows it and should be made up of characters such as large Xs large asterisks or large slashes Refer to FIGURE 8 for examples of emergency page markings 4 7 22 5 Protective markings When specified by the acquiring activity a FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FOUO protectively marked manual shall be prepared Refer to DOD 5400 7R for protective markings FOUO 4 7 22 6 COMSEC protective markings Unless requirement is specifically excluded by the acquiring activity Army Communications Security COMSEC Equipment Manuals shall contain the protective marking FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY 4 7 23 Referencing 4 7 23 1 Other documents Reference shall be made only to other documents available and authorized to the user Refer
121. 7 27 3 3 Credit lines a The photographer s or illustrator s name shall not appear on any illustration b A manufacturer s name symbol or trademark shall not appear on illustrations for the purpose of identifying the illustration 4 7 27 3 4 Callouts Index numbers reference designators nomenclature leader lines sweep arrows legends and other identifiers shall be used when necessary to identify significant features Both index numbers and nomenclature can be used in the same document However they shall not be used together in the same illustration Refer to MIL HDBK 1222 for examples of the use of these types of identifiers 4 7 27 3 4 1 Index numbers Index numbers shall start with Arabic numeral 1 and continue consecutively within an illustration For multisheet illustrations index numbers shall continue in sequence from one sheet to another a Index numbers shall be in clockwise sequence beginning at 11 o clock b Within a multisheet illustration if an item that already has been assigned an index number is used in more than one illustration in that multisheet illustration 1t shall retain the same index number c Allitems shown as exploded shall be identified Items drawn in phantom need not be identified d Index numbers shall not be contained within circles 44 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 27 3 4 2 Leader lines and arrowheads Leader lines shall be uniform short as straight as possible avoid the use of do
122. 7 5 COWS 27 4 7 7 5 1 Developinent of ICONS 27 4 7 7 5 2 Safety warnings with icons lt gt 28 4 7 7 5 3 Hazardous materials warnings warning 28 iii 4 7 7 5 3 1 4 7 7 5 3 2 4 7 7 5 4 4 7 8 4 7 8 1 4 7 8 2 4 7 9 4 7 9 1 4 7 9 2 4 7 9 3 4 7 9 3 1 4 7 9 3 2 4 7 9 4 4 7 9 5 4 7 10 4 7 11 4 7 11 1 4 7 11 2 4 7 11 2 1 4 7 12 4 7 12 1 4 7 12 2 4 7 13 4 7 13 1 4 7 13 2 4 7 13 3 4 7 13 4 4 7 13 5 4 7 13 6 4 7 13 7 4 7 13 8 4 7 14 4 7 15 4 7 15 1 4 7 15 2 4 7 15 3 4 7 16 4 7 16 1 4 7 16 2 4 7 16 2 1 4 7 16 2 1 1 4 7 16 2 1 2 4 7 16 2 1 3 4 7 16 2 1 4 4 7 17 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PAGE Format for hazardous materials warnings with icons icon 28 Abbreviated format hazardous materials warnings with icons icon 28 Equipment damage caution icons lt 1 gt gt 28 diviso 28 Chapter title pape 28 Chapter numb eribg ns etc RE OI REESE RU QU ESI SU aede S RERO eda 28 Work DIC KASS coc esto Mtem phia dud E MS EI DE 28 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 28 Initial setup information wpinfo nennen 29 Work package sequential
123. 7 9 8 8 12 15 JANTXIN1206A 17 12 27 23 JANTXIN4102 1 16 54 JANTX1N4106 1 16 44 JANTXIN4109 1 10 7 JANTXIN4150 1 14 16 16 65 5 17 8 29 ao ag JANTX1N4572A 1 id JANTX1N4626 1 ds JANTX1N4627 JANTX1N4627 1 15 16 JANTXINS419 15 15 3 1 JANTXINS5420 8 19 ELA JANTXIN5645A 9 44 JANTX1N5656A 12227 JANTX1N5806 Pie EB 15811 3 5 10 JANTX1N6075 JANTXIN647 1 32 2 JANTX2N2219A aL S JANTX2N2222A 15 18 0102 6 315 0102 FIG ITEM 3 5 32 4 31 10 31 9 21 3 22 5 26 2 12 1 4 3 14 98 9 31 4 2 9 4 10 1 14 2 28 1 10 86 10 90 28 8 10 85 14 99 9 12 2 9 30 10 2 4 28 5 10 29 4 31 10 30 4 34 11 12 9 13 23 3 24 25 10 89 8 7 10 3 MIL STD 4005 1 2 UNIT REFERENCE DESIGNATOR INDEX APPENDIX F MAINTENANCE REFERENCE DESIGNATOR FIG ITEM 51 1 15 2 1 27 W2 L 3 2A1A28 2ATI 2 309 2A1A29 2 10 2 552 2 1 4 2 2 699 2A1A6 2ATI2 2 699 2 1 7 2 13 2 479 2A1A8 2AT14 2 479 2A1A9 2AT2 2 309 2AIDLI 2AT3 2 558 2AIDL2 2 4 2 564 2A1DL3 2 5 2 705 2A1DL4 2 5 2 479 2A1DL5 2AT6 2 494 2A1DL6 2 7 2 675 2 1720 2 8 2 624 2 1725 2 9 2 552 2A1J29 2 1 2 489 2A1W10 2 1 2 71 30 2A1W12 2A1AT3 71 33 2A1W14 2 1 1 70 2A1W30 2A1A10 70 2A1W31 2 1 11 70 12 2A1W32 2 1 13 70 13 2A1W33 2 1 14 70 14 2A1W34 2 1 15 70 14 2A1W35 2 1 16 70 15 2A1W36 2 1 17 70 16 2 10 2 1 18 70 13 2 10 1 2 1 19 70 14 2 10 10 2 1 20 70 14 2A10A11 2A
124. 8 Safety devices amp interlocks C 4 8 Safety devices amp mterlock s o vehe advenae tide ere D 4 9 Safety devices oio d etes edis ld eon h Ma Rotes E 4 10 Safety Warnlngs eco tesi rid UTC ERE ERE CIR V ends 4 7 7 5 2 OC DE e Litus t laa B 1 1 SUDDEN caverta eost hash s totali moa eU 1 1 General information WP ees 5 2 3 WP ion sete C523 E 5 3 12 2 4 BlankepagpesSku 4 7 22 3 COMSEC markiligSu usa 4 7 22 6 Emergency markings a 4 7 22 4 Marking 4 7 22 1 OveralbeclassrTeattoDo ait 4 7 22 2 PrOIBCU VE WAL KINGS soos a 4 7 22 5 Security classification 4 7 22 1 Security measures for electronic data 6 52345 Security measures for electronic 5 2 5 3 1 Selective application and tailoring eee 4 3 Selective application amp tailoring 2 2 B 4 11 Selective application amp tailoring C 4 1
125. A type of illustration in which symbols are connected by lines to show relationships among the symbols The symbols may be rectangles or other shapes standard electronic symbols representing components or functions or pictorials representing equipment or components Where appropriate voltage readings are shown The lines may represent procedures or processes such as signal or logic flow and physical items such as wires Functional diagram includes schematics wiring and piping diagrams logic diagrams flow charts and block diagrams 3 57 Functional Group Code FGC A basic usually two position group code assigned to identify major components assemblies and subassemblies to a functional system Subordinate subfunctional groups subassemblies are coded to relate back to the basic top position FGC in a sequential Next Higher Assembly NHA relationship i e top down breakdown structure 3 58 General support maintenance GS Maintenance accomplished on a component accessory assembly subassembly plug in unit or other portion either on the system or after it is removed The letter appearing in the third position of the SMR code indicates the replace function for this level of maintenance An H appearing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the general support maintenance level 3 59 Grade Level GL Level of reading comprehensibility to which a document is written The require
126. Chart MAC 2 3 4 5 6 MAINTENANCE LEVEL GROUP COMPONENT MAINTENANCE AVUM AVIM DEPOT EQUIPMENT REMARKS NUMBER ASSEMBLY FUNCTION D REF CODE CODE POWER PLANT 0401 ENGINE TURBINE Inspect 1 Test Test Test Service Remove Install Replace Repair Repair Overhaul 040101 EXTERNAL LINES amp Inspect 3 HOSES Test Remove Install Replace Repair 0402 COMPRESSOR Inspect SECTION COLD SECTION MODULE Inspect Test Service Repair Repair Overhaul 0440 1 FIGURE G 6 Example of an aviation MAC 347 GROUP NUMBER 0101 010101 010102 COMPONENT ASSEMBLY TSEC ST 34 Inspect Replace Test Repair gt Repair 2 0 Repair n Overhaul POWER UNIT STP 34 Inspect n Test Repair 1 2 Repair 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 Repair E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PRINT CIRCUIT BOARDS STP 34 0 1 Inspect Test 1 2 Test 1 2 3 6 7 8 1 Repair i 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 SWITCHING Inspect I 1 ASSEMBLY Replace 3 1 Test L 1 2 3 6 7 8 Repair 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 LOGIC UNIT STB 34 Inspect Test Repair 4 Repair 2 0 0440 1 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0440 UNIT MAINTENANCE TSEC ST 34 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC Table 1 MAC for TSEC ST 34 MAINTENANCE LEVEL FIELD SUSTAINMENT DIRECT GENERAL TOOLS AND MAINTENANCE UNIT SUPPORT SUPPORT DEPOT EQUIPMENT REMARKS FUNCTION
127. D REFCODE CODE FIGURE G 7 Example of two level MAC 348 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0440 Table 2 Tools and Test Equipment for TSEC ST 34 TOOLS ORT MAINTENANCE NATIONAL STOCK EQUIPM LEVEL NOMENCLATURE NUMBER TOOL NUMBER Automatic test system ST 51 5810 00 089 4599 TSEC ST 51 Multimeter digital 6625 01 139 2512 5 45 Multimeter digital 6625 01 145 2430 AN USM 486 Oscilliscope 6625 01 187 7847 AN USM 488 Power supply 0 35 VDC 2 4A 6130 00 006 5224 6434 86 Power supply tester NOT APPLICABLE ON502427 Repari and soldering center page 4940 01 031 4541 PRC 350C equip m m m Tool kit electronic equipment 5180 00 610 8177 TK 105 6 Table 3 Remarks for TSEC ST 34 CODES REMARKS External Preventive maintenance checks and services PMCS Replace rack installed unit 0 4 hrs Bench top use only 0 1 hrs Self test Repair by PMA and authorized component replacement only Complete unit and subassembly repair except STP 34 switching assembly and E EBO 1 Complete unit and subassembly repair In compliance with TSEC ST 34 CIDOS Function performed by specialized repair activity SRA Theater COMSEC Logistics Support Center Europe or Lexington Blue Grass Army Depot END OF WORK PACKAGE 0440 2 FIGURE G 8 Example of a standard and two level MAC tools and test equipment and remarks tables 349 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM
128. Example of an authentication page 91 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A APPENDIX A CONTENT SELECTION MATRIXES A 1 SCOPE A 1 1 Scope This appendix lists technical content requirements for technical manuals for all major weapon systems and all types of equipment including test and support equipment This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for compliance These requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including DMWRs NMWRs A 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS This section is not applicable to this appendix A 3 DEFINITIONS This section is not applicable to this appendix A 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS This section is not applicable to this appendix A 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS A 5 1 Tailoring requirements for technical manuals Tailoring of the technical content requirements contained in Appendix through Appendix is provided in TABLE through TABLE A XIV content matrix tables The tables list all applicable technical content requirements for the development of the following page based TMs This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for compliance Copies of the applicable tables will be completed and added as an attachment to the Document Summary List of the contract A 5 1 1 Publication Titles a All TM titles except DMWR NMWR shall start with the words TECHNICAL MANUAL
129. INSPECTION MAINTENANCE TEST FLIGHT MTF A pre inspection MTF to duplicate non hazardous equipment problems determine unsatisfactory conditions determine equipment operation problems etc is recommended prior to start of aircraft disassembly for phased maintenance inspection The decision to perform the pre inspection MTF however shall be the responsibility of the unit Maintenance Officer SPECIAL INSPECTIONS CALENDAR INSPECTIONS AND LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS Special inspections calendar inspections and lubrication requirements contained in insert applicable aircraft technical manual and those listed on the aircraft s DA Form 2408 18 shall be reviewed and accomplished in accordance with the inspection due requirements specified in those documents TIME BETWEEN OVERHAUL TBO AND RETIREMENT LIFE ITEMS CHECK Prior to start of the applicable phased maintenance inspection a check will be made of components and their remaining operating hours prior to removal The latest issue of the aircraft s insert applicable aircraft technical manual and DA Form 2408 16 shall be referred to for a complete listing of components and their TBO and retirement life USING THE PHASED INSPECTION CHECKLIST 1 new checklist shall be used each time phased maintenance is due on the aircraft This checklist is arranged such that it can be separated by area and distributed to the maintenance crew Space is provided on each checklist form for en
130. MI e E L 5 1 48 Style and format 4 7 23 Tailoring requirement for A 5 1 93 Technical content tables u 5 1 2 96 Types Ofen aia 4 2 22 Tool identification list G 5 7 4 340 Toolidentification list WP oerte neto estes e edu tgo ius G 5 7 339 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Tools and sp cial 10018 sasisisiscsiccedcetasasiaaeacdgedacasnseadeasecduataaesbaacesseededennoeaa 4 7 9 2b Tools and test equipment requirements G 5 3 5 Torque mstr ct ONS 5 3 10 4 Torque limits work packa ge E 5 3 10 TOWNS aside cc ved pev iU S E 5 3 5 3 4a Transmittal page Een or ge 5 2 1 4 Troubleshooting Developmeht OF v unitas D 4 2 Factors to be considered eves ose netten ENSURE Rea D 5 1 D 5 2 2 1 Index work package Neale D 5 5 5 Information to be provided D 5 2 Integrated Systemi D 5 2 2 2 cts rag e
131. Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI MIL STD 40051 2 Reference Element Nam 5 lt maintenancepmcscategory gt lt maintenancecategory gt m re cu 1 P P P P 153233 pome P P 653234 P P 5 3 2 3 6 lt prechkadj gt P P 15324 P P 532352 P P 532392 P P 532394 gt P P 5 3 2 3 10 lt other surtsk gt lt pmcsintrowp gt a m 5 3 5 lt maintwp gt lt groundtsk gt 109 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 30 amp P 40 amp P Reference Repair or replacement Alignment Painting Lubrication S DUM Assembly m RM Radio interference suppression 3 3 5 3 20 Placing in service 544494 Testing 5 3 5 3 22 Preparation for storage or shipment lt pss gt Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt Handling ammunition Procedures for ammunition activation Additional maintenance task Follow on maintenance REREKAI lt maintwp gt PACKAGE lt lubewp gt PACKAGE ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK TORQUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGE ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK PACKAGE TOROUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE WIRING D
132. Number NIIN the last nine digits of the NSN This index shall be listed in the format and data requirement in 5 3 11 1 1 through F 5 3 11 1 3 F 5 3 11 1 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 5 3 11 1 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package F 5 3 11 1 3 NSN index lt nsnindx gt Each line entry lt nsnindxrow gt shall list the complete NSN for each NSNs assigned to applicable repair part or special tool items figure number and item number lt callout gt The NSN nsn line entry shall identify the first figure number and item number lt callout gt for which the stock number is applicable The NSN shall not be repeated on the same page of the index for each additional figure number and item number lt callout gt identified by that NSN When NSN references carry over to another page the carried over NSN entry shall appear at the top of the list 5 3 11 2 Part number index work package lt pnindxwp gt This work package refer to FIGURE F 12 shall be prepared The index standard information shall be in ascending numeric sequence by part number This index shall be listed in the format and data requirement in E 5 3 11 2 1 through F 5 3 11 2 3 F 5 3 11 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information
133. PACKAGES REAR MATTER Glossary Alphabetical index DA Form 2028 Authentication page Foldout pages Back cover Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 118 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE A V TM Requirements Matrix for AVIM AVUM AVIM 20 30 23 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp P O amp P 23 Reference Element Name FRONTMATTER eerie s MC Promulgation leter Change transmittal page 2 1 List of effective pages work packages 1 lt loepwp gt Excluding pocket TMs and publications with less than eight pages Reporting equipment improvement recommendations EIR CHAPTER 1 lt gim gt GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK e lt ginfowp gt PACKAGE Maintenance forms records and reports OR 3 2 ES R Preparation for storage or shipment Warranty information Safety care and handling 52 lt sft Supporting information for repair parts lt q sf ca fs su special tools TMDE and support equipment info gt yinfo gt Flight safety critical aircraft parts FSCAP 2 2 B pyrt gt a Copyright credit line Ss 119 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A V TM Requirements Matrix for AVIM AVUM A VIM 20 30 23 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp P 30 amp P 23 amp P Refere
134. PARTS heavy object on human figure shows that heavy parts present a danger to life or limb HEAVY PARTS heavy object pinning human figure against wall shows that heavy moving parts present a danger to life or limb HELMET PROTECTION arrow bouncing off head with helmet shows that falling parts present a danger HOT AREA hand over object radiating heat shows that part is hot and can burn LASER LIGHT laser light hazard symbol indicates extreme danger for eyes from laser beams and reflections FIGURE 2 List of approved safety warning icons Continued 65 MIL STD 4005 1 2 MOVING PARTS human figure with an arm caught between gears shows that the moving parts of the equipment present a danger to life or limb MOVING PARTS hand with fingers caught between gears shows that the moving parts of the equipment present a danger to life or limb MOVING PARTS hand with fingers caught between rollers shows that the moving parts of the equipment present a danger to life or limb SHARP OBJECT pointed object in hand shows that a sharp object presents a danger to limb SHARP OBJECT pointed object in hand shows that a sharp object presents a danger to limb SHARP OBJECT pointed object in foot shows that a sharp object presents a danger to limb SLICK FLOOR wavy line on floor with legs prone shows that slick floor presents a danger for falling FIGURE 2 List of approved safety warning icons Continued
135. Table 1 Overhaul Inspection Procedures for Spur Gear Item 5 fig 4 QA INSP g CHARACTERISTIC METHOD REQUISITE Serviceability Visual measure Examine for nicks gouges burrs and corrosion identified below repair damaged areas 0 020 inch 0 508mm or less deep by blending Metal fatigue Magnetic No fractures or cracks particle inspection Tooth wear Visual No pitting scuffing scoring metal flow or wear steps allowed Journal wear Measure Minimum diameter 0 9841 inch 24 99mm Repair WP 0052 Figure 1 Spur Gear END OF WORK PACKAGE FIGURE E 5 Example of an OIP table 269 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 0109 TEST AND INSPECTION CONTINUED Table 1 Classification of Materiel Defects INSPECTION CATEGORIES OF WP NO OR TM METHODS AFTER DEFECTS COMPONENTS WITH CORRECTIVE CORRECTIVE ACCEPTABLE AND DEFECTS ACTION ACTION QUALITY LEVEL CRITICAL 1 Fuze not set on SAFE Visual Fuze set on SAFE 2 Fuze wellliner missing Visual Fuze well liner in place MINOR 1 Fuze stake missing Visual Fuze stake replaced 2 Supplementary charge spacer Visual Supplementary charge missing spacer replaced 3 Supplementary charge damaged Visual Supplementary charge replaced 4 Explosive on fuze well threads Visual Fuze well threads without caked explosive 5 Shear or twist pin above flush Visual Shear or twist pin flush END OF TASK END OF WORK PACKAGE 0109 2 FIGURE E 6 Example of a cl
136. WP 0007 GROUP 0201 Storage Batterye H WP 0008 GROUP 0202 Ammunitionm Chute coo aan WP 0009 GROUP 0203 Element Chute WP 0010 GROUP 0204 Mount Component Assembly Detail Illustrations eese nns WP 0011 GROUP 020401 Drum Assembly u na aa WP 0012 GROUP 020402 Azimuth Drive Assembly WP 0013 GROUP 020403 Azimuth Drive Friction Clutch enne WP 0014 GROUP 03 Automatic Lead Computing Sight 61 202 2242404 0 00001000000 000 WP 0015 GROUP 0301 Motor and Electromagnet Assemblies een ennemi WP 0016 GROUP 0302 Combining Glass and WP 0017 GROUP 0303 Caging Device and Cable Assembly sss eene nennen WP 0018 GROUP 0304 Housing Support Assembly nn ntn wni OSSEE tain tina WP 0019 GROUP 09 Special Tools Repair Parts eicere WP 0045 GROUP 0901 NE NAR ER D ERU WP 0046 GROUP 0902 Storage Drum Slot Gauge with en eren WP 0047 GROUP 99 Bulk Materials BIS eoe Oe D e RH S YO a pd eb MER WP 0048 Special Tools ee Ne E UE RR ER RENI Rs WP 0049 Special Tools for Direct Support Stowed with Case Special Tools 1180 WP 0050 National Stock Number Index ettet eee ee ree ae o ee red tse erae aste Ea eben edens WP 0051 Part Number Index
137. When the work package does not apply to all configurations of the weapon system equipment the applicable configurations lt name gt covered by the work package shall be listed Omit this requirement if the same tasks procedures apply to all configurations If certain configurations require different tasks procedures separate work packages shall be prepared Supersedure notice lt wpsupersede gt If applicable a supersedure notice shall be placed below the effectivity notice If the WP supersedes a WP in the same manual the supersedure notice shall be as follows This WP supersedes WP number dated If the superseded WP is contained in another manual the notice shall include the publication number as follows This WP supersedes WP number dated contained in TM X XXXX XXX 20 If an unclassified or classified WP supersedes a classified WP the notice shall be as follows This WP supersedes WP number dated which should be destroyed in accordance with applicable security regulations Joint use When TMs are acquired and specified by the Army for joint use with another or other Services Joint Service TMs work packages in joint publications which do not apply to all Services concerned shall be marked to indicate the Services to which they apply for example LANDING GEAR MAINTENANCE ARMY 4 7 9 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Unless otherwise specified herein all work packages shall contai
138. Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 b Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 258 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 14 3 Foreign ammunition NATO work package Unit AVUM or above only lt natowp gt A work package to describe foreign ammunition shall be prepared when applicable The requirements of E 5 3 14 2 shall apply a Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 b Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 15 Preventive maintenance services inspection work packages aircraft preventive maintenance services only lt pms inspecwp gt A work package shall be developed for each specific inspection interval i e daily intermediate periodic 10 hour 14 day 30 hr 42day etc as applicable to the aircraft Inspection checklists shall be divided by areas of the aircraft 1 nose fuselage tail etc All items requiring inspection shall be listed in the logical sequence of inspection that would require a minimum of time and motion on the part of the individual performing the inspection The checklist data shall be contained in a table refer to FIGURE E 14 a Power On and Power Off inspection requirements shall be separated so that power will only have to be applied to the aircraft one time during
139. a completely serviceable operational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical publications Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army Overhaul does not normally return an item to like new condition 320 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G 11 Rebuild Consists of those services actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards Rebuild is the highest degree of materiel maintenance applied to Army equipment The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age measurements e g hours miles considered in classifying Army equipment components Explanation of Columns in the MAC Column 1 Group Number Column 1 lists Functional Group Code FGC numbers the purpose of which is to identify maintenance significant components assemblies subassemblies and modules with the Next Higher Assembly NHA Column 2 Component Assembly Column 2 contains the item names of components assemblies subassemblies and modules for which maintenance is authorized Column 3 Maintenance Function Column 3 lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in column 2 For a detailed explanation of these functions refer to Maintenance Functions outlined above Column 4 Maintenance Level Column 4 specifies each level of maintenance authorized to perform each functio
140. aa 5 3 6 3 2 RG patie part list 5 3 6 3 Repair parts for special tools F 5 3 7 PAGE 54 54 55 54 46 48 36 302 298 300 300 299 299 47 301 47 48 298 45 295 302 302 302 295 48 287 48 299 297 299 287 53 301 298 301 282 285 301 295 295 298 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER RPSTLs Cont Repair parts list CAGEC column nuusan De Iun 5 3 6 3 2 4 Description and usable on code column F 5 3 6 3 2 6 Herm number colmo ua d 5 3 6 3 2 1 hio ides 5 3 6 3 2 3 Part number col ib 5 3 6 3 2 5 Quantity F 5 3 6 3 2 7 SMR Code Coluinn enu ER qe eis F 5 3 6 3 2 2 USMC Quantity per equipment column F 5 3 6 3 2 8 R pair parts list WP estos n iecit es nS 5 3 6 En 5 3 1 Special 5 3 10 Use of Iysa e ae Ree F 5 3 12 2 Work package requirements a F 5 3 3 WPs included n a DMWR NMWR F 5 3 3 2 WPs included in a maintenance TM F 5 3 3 1 S Safety care and handling 5 2 16 Safety devices amp interlocks 4
141. aal gt A tabular list standard information of all additional authorized items shall be prepared The format and general content of the list shall be prepared as shown in FIGURE G 12 The headings and subsequent information for this list shall be the same as the and lists except the ILLUS NUMBER column required for the COEI and lists shall not apply since there are no illustrations used and the QTY column shall be QTY RECM quantity recommended The items shall be listed alphabetically G 5 6 Expendable and durable items list work package lt explistwp gt This work package shall be prepared to provide the TM user a list of all expendable and durable items called out in the TM text that are necessary to operate and or maintain the equipment The following data described in G 5 6 1 through G 5 6 4 shall be included G 5 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 6 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 6 3 Introduction for expendable and durable items list work package lt intro gt The following introduction text below within the quotation marks shall be prepared and included verbatim Refer also to FIGURE G 13 337 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists expendabl
142. adjust backlash prevent metallurgical reaction etc 241 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E Torque requirements values and sequences shall be indicated Only critical torques lt torque gt shall be indicated in task steps All non critical torques will be covered by the Torque Limits work package refer to E 5 3 10 Torque values shall be given for all structural attaching hardware fluid couplings fuel oil hydraulic pneumatic etc and connections Torque values shall include torque correction factors when crowfoot extensions thread lubricants and cadmium plated screws or nuts are used Torque values identified in the tasks must reflect torque wrenches authorized to personnel targeted to perform tasks Upon completion of torque action instructions shall be prepared on use of an orientation mark striping Instructions such as reverse the disassembly procedure shall not be used ESD standards ESD sensitive items along with the protective and control measures to be taken and CPC procedures shall be identified DMWR NMWR and aviation only Assembly procedures which have a major quality assurance effect shall be preceded by a statement such as check to identify them E 5 3 5 3 16 Test and inspection lt test inspect gt Procedures shall be prepared for testing and inspection during or after assembly to ensure proper assembly of the item Correct methods of testing procedures for making tolerance
143. all TM pages Classified COMSEC TMs shall be appropriately marked at the level of classification 5 2 1 2 MC Promulgation letter promulgation A promulgation letter provided by the acquiring activity shall be included 5 2 1 3 Warning summary including first aid data warnsum When required a warning summary shall be prepared for all TMs containing warnings The warning summary shall appear on the first right hand page immediately after the front cover The warning summary shall include first aid data lt first_aid gt explanations of all general safety warning icons and hazardous materials icons lt haz icons gt used in the manual It shall also include descriptions of the general safety warnings lt warninfo gt and hazardous materials warnings lt hazard gt that have major 51 MIL STD 4005 1 2 impact throughout the manual Only warnings that meet this criteria shall be included Refer to MIL HDBK 1222 for a typical example of a warning summary As applicable the warning summary shall consist of the following in the order specified below First aid data lt first_aid gt Warning icons lt safety gt Warning description lt warning gt ao gt Hazardous materials icons lt haz icons gt e Hazardous materials descriptions lt hazard gt 5 2 1 3 1 First Aid lt first_aid gt First aid data shall be included in warning summary The first paragraph shall reference FM 4 25 11 First Aid Any additional first aid data
144. also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you b Pocket size TMs oversize TMs and TMs with less than eight pages For pocket size TMs oversize TMs and TMs with less than eight pages the following statement shall precede the table of contents title 1 Army Only TM The following statements shall be included REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you 55 MIL STD 4005 1 2 2 Marine Only TM The following statements shall be included REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Submit by NAVMC form 10772 directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Ou
145. and ESD labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure ESD sensitive parts are not damaged or degraded during maintenance and operation Refer to 4 7 20 for requirements on labeling with ESD Actions which could damage ESD sensitive parts but which are not directly related to handling or operation of ESD sensitive parts shall not be annotated with the ESD acronym but shall be preceded by a caution statement B 4 10 Nuclear hardness If the weapon system equipment has nuclear survivability requirements for example over pressure and burst thermal radiation electromagnetic pulse or transient radiation effects on electronics cautions and Hardness Critical Processes HCP labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure the hardness of the equipment is not degraded during handling or operation Refer to 4 7 19 for requirements on labeling with HCP Actions which could degrade hardness but which are not directly involved in establishing nuclear hardness shall not be annotated with the acronym but shall be preceded by a caution statement B 4 11 Selective application and tailoring This standard contains some requirements that may not be applicable to the preparation of all technical manuals Selective application and tailoring of requirements contained in this standard are the responsibility of the acquiring activity and shall be accomplished using Appendix A Technical Manua
146. and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code Repair The application of maintenance services including fault location troubleshooting removal installation disassembly assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage fault malfunction or failure in a part subassembly module component or assembly end item or system NOTE The following definitions are applicable to the repair maintenance function Services Inspect test service adjust align calibrate and or replace Fault location troubleshooting The process of investigating and detecting the case of equipment malfunctioning the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test UUT Disassembly assembly The step by step breakdown taking apart f a spare functional group coded item to the level of its least component that is assigned an SMR code for the level of maintenance under consideration i e identified as maintenance significant Actions Welding grinding riveting straightening facing machining and or resurfacing 326 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G 11 Overhaul That maintenance effort service action prescribed to restore an item to a completely serviceable operational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical publications Overhaul is normally
147. and deformation WP 0125 Reject container if damage prevents it from functioning properly Control Surfaces Inspect for dents and scratches on post trailing edge NEP OR phenolic skin and closure plate Reject control surface a If post dents or scratches exceed 0 002 in 0 051 mm b Iftrailing edge phenolic dents exceed 0 040 in 10 160 mm c If skin dents exceed 0 030 in 7 620 mm within 2 in 50 800 mm of post d Ifclosure plate dents exceed 0 030 in 7 620 mm within 2 in 50 800 mm of post Control Surfaces Inspect for dents and scratches on post and skin Skin dents or scratches up to 0 050 in 12 700 mm are allowable but should be blended Reject control surface if post dents or scratches exceed 0 002 0 051 mm END OF TASK END OF WORK PACKAGE 0109 2 FIGURE E 1 Example of checking unpacked equipment table continued 265 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 0006 Table 1 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services for Model M2A3 M3A3 Before Continue ITEM TO BE EQUIPMENT CHECKED OR NOT READY INTERVAL SERVICED PROCEDURE AVAILABLE IF WARNING Hydraulic fluid is poisonous and can be absorbed through your skin Never service hydraulic system when fluid is hot or under pressure Avoid skin contact Wash hands with soap immediately after servicing and wash off any fluid which comes in contact with skin If fluid gets into eyes wash eyes immediately and get medical
148. and overall condition Inspect for legibility unwanted paint and general condition Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Check sensor and electrical connector for damage Check sensor and electrical connector for damage Inspect for damage to threads and mounting surfaces Check that assembly is magnetized APPENDIX D TM NUMBER 0085 3 211 Preshop Analysis Checklist Date External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection External Visual Inspection 0085 Checked by MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX D TM X XXX XXXX XX 0080 DEPOT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT CHECKLIST INITIAL SETUP NOT APPLICABLE SCOPE This work package includes list which is to be copied for each item received for a preshop analysis After c
149. and tailoring 22 4 4 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery 23 4 5 Use of the SHOES di odit ae E 23 4 6 Obtaining DTDs Style sheets 23 4 7 Style and formats 23 4 7 1 Examples of style and 23 4 7 2 TIN VISIOWS e st 23 4 7 2 1 Molume sized contentos seed ea 24 4 7 2 2 ChapterSu a sn 24 4 7 2 3 ERR 24 4 2 3 1 Work package S176 MR PDC 24 4 7 2 3 2 Work Dackage 24 4 7 2 3 3 Development of individual work packa es 24 4 7 3 Type size and 25 4 7 4 Page size and orientation ada 25 4 7 5 Doldout Stati o u ase saa asso ae 26 4 7 6 Final reproducible copy FRC RR eg a 26 4 7 7 Warnings Cautions and notes 26 4 7 7 1 Warning Watling uy u Sas Sa 26 4 7 7 2 Caution e cau ONE 26 4 7 7 3 S EE 27 4 7 7 4 Display of warnings Cautions and 27 4 7
150. are identified below Code Used on XXX Model XXX XXX Model XXX Model XXXXX Column 5 U I Unit of Issue U D indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column 2 Column 6 Qty Rar Indicates the quantity required OR Select method B text Column 1 Item Number Gives you the reference number of the item listed Column 2 National Stock Number NSN and Illustration Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes and provides an illustration of the item Column 3 Description Part Number CAGEC Identifies the Federal item name in all capital letters followed by a minimum description when needed The stowage location of COEI and is also included in this column The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 4 Usable On Code When applicable gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of equipment Add the following only as applicable Replace Xs with appropriate codes and model numbers These codes are identified below Code Used on XXX Model XXX XXX Model XXXX XXX Model XXXXX Column 5 U I Unit of Issue indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column 2 Column 6 Qty Rqr Indicates the quantity required
151. be followed by the metric conversion in parentheses unless the equipment instrument or tool etc is calibrated in metric units In that case metric units shall be first followed by the U S standard units For example 169 5 Nm 125 Ib ft 4 7 23 9 Temperature Reference shall be made to temperature readings as calibrated on the equipment If other than Fahrenheit the equivalent in Fahrenheit shall follow in parentheses General temperature references such as room temperature shall be given in degrees Fahrenheit for example 78 F 4 7 24 Equations The use of equations shall be held to the minimum use required by the needs of the TM user 41 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 25 Nomenclature 4 7 25 1 Nomenclature consistency and applicability Nomenclature other terms and names shall be consistent within a manual and throughout the RPSTL MAC and other directly related manuals Statements that explain applicability for individual items of equipment shall use specific serial numbers block designations model designations or similar identification Such terms as later equipment and on early serial numbers shall not be used 4 7 25 2 Official approved nomenclature Unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity only approved names and official nomenclature shall be used Official nomenclature shall be the nomenclature used in the RPSTL If unofficial nomenclature common name is approved an appropria
152. be made to tables in a different work package by work package sequence number and table number for example WP 0012 Table 2 Reference shall be made only to tables within the same manual or another volume of the same manual 40 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 23 3 6 Footnotes Reference shall be made to footnotes when essential for reference explanation comments or other information 4 7 23 3 7 Figures and multisheet figures Reference shall be made to figures within a work package by figure number for example Figure 2 and the sheet number for multisheet illustrations when applicable for example Figure 17 Sheet 1 Reference shall be made to figures in a different work package by work package sequence number and figure number for example WP 0012 00 Figure 2 References shall be made only to figures within the same manual or another volume of the same manual 4 7 23 3 8 Index numbers Reference shall be made to a figure number followed by the index number for example Figure 6 Item 34 4 7 23 3 9 Items on diagrams Reference shall be made to parts on diagrams by enough of their description or reference designator to identify the item for example resistor A6R11 4 7 23 4 Repeating information Repeating information shall be allowed to ensure the work package information is complete Information two pages or less may be repeated information more than two pages shall be referenced 4 7 23 5 Equipment components and parts
153. bearings seals external lines and hoses ACCESSORY GEAR BOX ACCESORY SECTION MODULE Input and output gears seals chip detector housings drive shaft bearings FUEL SYSTEM Fuel control fuel boost pump governors fuel filter assembly sequence valve fuel manifold fuel nozzle external lines and hoses ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Electrical control units exciters thermocouples ignition harness electrical cables history record torque over speed sensor Np sensor external lines and hoses OIL SYSTEM Tanks oil filter oil cooler lube and scavenger pumps oil filter bypass sensor external lines and hoses Column 3 Maintenance Function Column 3 lists the functions to be performed on the items listed in column 2 327 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G Column 4 Maintenance Level The maintenance levels AVUM AVIM and DEPOT are listed on the MAC with individual columns that include the work times for maintenance functions at each maintenance level Work time presentations such as 0 17 indicate the average time expressed in manhours in whole hours or decimals it requires a maintenance level to perform a specified maintenance function If a work time has not been established the columnar presentation will indicate Maintenance levels higher than the level of maintenance indicated are authorized to perform the indicated function Column 5 Tools and Equipment Reference Code Column 5 specifies by co
154. catastrophic failure or increased maintenance at a later date Therefore the use of special lettering to emphasize Mandatory Safety of Flight Items is not to be construed as authority for deferral of other inspections 5 2 1 8 Table of contents lt contents gt A table of contents listing all chapters work packages figures and tables shall be prepared for all TMs DMWRs NM WRs They shall have the exact same title and shall be listed in the same order they appear in the TM Figures and tables shall be listed in order as they appear under the corresponding work package except for foldouts which shall be listed separately at the end of the table of contents The content and format of the 37 MIL STD 4005 1 2 table of contents is shown in FIGURE 21 The table of contents shall begin on the first available page following the title block page a The security classification if any of chapters work packages figures and tables shall be indicated Figures in the table of contents shall be listed under the corresponding work package by the figure number title and page number of each figure A RPSTL TM shall not include figures in the table of contents When a TM includes the parts information chapter the listing of RPSTL figures is optional Tables in the table of contents shall be listed under the corresponding work package by the table number title and page number of each table Each volume of a multi volume manua
155. change numbers shall all be changed back to zero See FIGURE 17 for a sample of a revised publication list of effective pages work packages 5 2 1 5 6 Listing the pages All pages in the book shall be listed except as noted in 5 2 1 5 4 List each work package by number and put the total number of pages in the work package in parentheses next to the WP number The words deleted added or blank may be placed next to the page numbers when applicable See FIGURE 16 for sample usage of these words 5 2 1 5 7 Numbering the list of effective pages work packages The list of effective pages work packages shall have a page number A for the first page and B C D etc for additional pages 5 2 1 5 8 List of effective pages work packages for RPSTLS A list of effective pages work packages for a RPSTL shall be prepared similarly to other manuals For RPSTLs prepared entirely in work package format the work package numbers shall listed 5 2 1 5 9 Multi service manuals For multi service manuals the abbreviation of the acquiring service e g USA USN USMC or USAF shall be placed in the lower right hand corner of the page See FIGURE 18 for sample 5 2 1 5 10 Multi volume manuals A list of effective pages work packages covering all volumes shall be prepared and included in volume 1 Each volume number shall be listed followed by the pages in that volume See FIGURE 18 for sample of an overall list of effective pages for
156. characteristics to specified parameters 5 Align To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance 6 Calibrate To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test measuring and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement Consists of comparisons of two instruments one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared 7 Remove Install To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance functions Install may be the act of emplacing seating or fixing into position a spare repair part or module component or assembly in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system 8 Replace To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place Replace is authorized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code 9 Repair The application of maintenance services including fault location troubleshooting removal installation disassembly assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage fault malfunction or failure in a part subassembly module component or assembly end item or system NOTE The following definit
157. coded as expendable in the applicable stock lists 2 Personal issue or items furnished on unit allowance or other authority 3 Items or components considered as basic or integral parts of the airframe or basic aircraft such as engines propellers wheels and standard instruments 4 Equipment publications checklists and aircraft forms 255 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 12 2 6 Periods of inventory lt prdinv gt The following text shall be included verbatim PERIODS OF INVENTORY Inventoriable items shall be checked against the Aircraft Inventory Record DA Form 2408 17 at the following periods 1 Upon receipt 2 Prior to transfer of the aircraft to another organization 3 Upon placing aircraft in storage and upon removal from storage Aircraft need not be inventoried while in storage 4 Twelve months after last inventory E 5 3 12 3 Storage of aircraft work package aircraft only lt storagewp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and information described in E 5 3 12 3 1 through E 5 3 12 3 4 shall be included 5 3 12 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 5 3 12 3 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 5 3 12 3 3 General information for storage of aircr
158. commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent d F Air Force By Air Force AFTO Form 22 directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you c Classified TMs For classified TMs the following statement shall precede the table of contents title 1 Army or Marine Only TM The following statements shall be included REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve this manual write and tell us about it Address your correspondence to name and address of proponent When dealing with classified information make sure that 56 MIL STD 4005 1 2 your correspondence is properly marked and is handled in accordance with current security regulations 2 Multi Service TM The following statements shall be included only for multi service technical publication and use only applicable services e g if the Navy does not use the publication do not include a statement for that Service REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve this manual write and tell us about it Service
159. compliance F 4 6 Work package development Technical manual data developed in accordance with this standard shall be divided into individual stand alone units of information called work packages A work package shall consist of descriptive operational maintenance troubleshooting support or parts information for the weapon system or equipment F 4 7 Selective application and tailoring This standard contains some requirements that may not be applicable to the preparation of all technical manuals Selective application and tailoring of requirements contained in this standard are the responsibility of the acquiring activity and shall be accomplished using Appendix A Technical Manual Content Selection Matrixes The applicability of some requirements is also designated by one of the following statements unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity as when specified by the acquiring activity or when specified by the acquiring activity F 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS F 5 1 General The requirements provided in this appendix provide the technical content requirements for the preparation of RPSTL data F 5 2 Parts information development F 5 3 Preparation of RPSTLs RPSTL requirements include a Introductory information b Listings of all authorized spare and repair parts special tools special test measurement and diagnostic equipment TMDE and other support equipment required for performance of maintenance and c
160. component assembly and subassembly maintenance lt depotcategory gt The depot maintenance category contains the following work packages in specified order unless otherwise indicated a b ro Equipment User Fitting Instruction work package lt perseqpwp gt refer to 5 3 3 The following work packages occur in no specific order 1 Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 5 2 General Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 6 3 Lubrication instructions work package lt lubewp gt refer to E 5 3 7 4 Preventive Maintenance Inspections work package lt pmiwp gt aircraft only refer to E 5 3 12 1 Facilities work package lt facilwp gt refer to E 5 3 8 1 Overhaul Inspection Procedures OIP work package lt oipwp gt refer to E 5 3 8 2 Depot Mobilization Requirements work package lt mobilwp gt refer to E 5 3 8 3 Quality Assurance QA Requirements work package lt qawp gt refer to E 5 3 8 4 Illustration List of Manufactured Items work package lt manuwp gt refer to E 5 3 9 Torque Limits work package lt torquewp gt refer to E 5 3 10 The following work packages are for aircraft only 1 Aircraft Inventory Master Guide work package lt inventorywp gt refer to E 5 3 12 2 2 Storage of Aircraft work package lt storagewp gt refer to E 5 3 12 3 Wiring Diagrams work package lt wiringwp gt refer to E 5 3 11 221 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDI
161. contracting activity XSLs or style sheets may be used to produce final reproducible paper copy for all TMs prepared in accordance with this standard For additional information on the DTD and specific XSLs refer to MIL STD 2361 163 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B B 4 5 Content structure and format The examples provided herein are an accurate representation of the content structure and format requirements contained in this appendix and shall be followed to permit the effective use of the DTD for General Information Equipment Description and Theory of Operation B 4 6 Style and format This standard provides style and format requirements for the technical content requirements described in this appendix These requirements are considered mandatory and are intended for compliance B 4 7 Work package development Technical manual data developed in accordance with this standard shall be divided into individual stand alone units of information called work packages A work package shall consist of descriptive operational maintenance troubleshooting support or parts information for the weapon system or equipment B 4 8 Safety devices and interlocks Information shall be prepared pertaining to the purpose and location of all safety devices and interlocks in conjunction with the pertinent procedures B 4 9 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts If the equipment contains ESD sensitive parts components or circuits cautions
162. dna 4 7 27 2 3 3 373 43 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER List G 5 5 4 ERE cae G 5 4 5 COED G 5 4 4 1 Expendable and durable items G 5 6 4 Tool ID itor Ted diuidi eque el aga iG va G 5 7 4 PASC UAbDrevIatl nS so d ao metu ohio ib eM io secte oido B 5 2 13 List of abbreviations acronyms 5 2 13 List of effective pages work packages 5 2 1 5 Change HUTA ST Seg eos ideo sarc acts to n enu dte dal 312523 Dates Of issue for Chan Ges y Au uu a 5 2 1 5 11 Exempted pages esee ttr RES A Vena 5 2 1 5 4 Exempted publications Wades cage ee ha eu 5 21 35 2 Listine CIE PC E EER 5 2 1 5 6 M lti service 5 2 1 5 9 M ulti volume 5 2 1 5 10 E 5 2 1 5 7 Pas eG ASTM uu ushana 4 7 16 2 1 1d 5 2 1 5 8 Types of pages to be included 5 2 1 5 3 Types of PUBICATONS te gota 22 15 1 List of illustrations a E 4 7 16 2 1 1 List of tables
163. established by the depot or the commodity manager E 5 3 8 4 9 Acceptance inspections lt acceptance gt The following statement shall be included ACCEPTANCE INSPECTIONS Items overhauled in accordance with this DMWR will be accepted based on the following criteria 1 Conformance to quality of material requirements 2 Conformance to all in process quality assurance inspections 3 Conformance to all final assembly testing requirements 4 Conformance to the preservation packaging and marking requirements E 5 3 8 4 10 First article inspection lt first gt When applicable first article inspection test shall be prepared for the DMWR NMWR in accordance with ISO 9000 Series standards or equivalent E 5 3 9 Illustrated list of manufactured items work package Unit AVUM level or above only lt manuwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and identify and include technical information for each item authorized to be manufactured or fabricated by unit AVUM direct support AVIM general support maintenance or depot personnel e g all MO and MD source coded items When applicable external reference may be made to fabrication instructions for tools and equipment The work package shall include the data described in E 5 3 9 1 through E 5 3 9 5 E 5 3 9 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is req
164. following statements shall be included only for multi service technical publication and use only applicable services e g if the Navy does not use the publication do not include a statement for that Service REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Service should be submitted as follows a A Army Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms located in the back of this manual directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent b MC Marine Corps By NAVMC form 10772 directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent c N Navy By letter directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent d F Air Force By Air Force AFTO Form 22 directly to name and address of proponent You may
165. follows 1 Inspect To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical mechanical and or electrical characteristics with established standards through examination e g by sight sound or feel This includes scheduled inspection and gagings and evaluation of cannon tubes 2 Test To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical pneumatic hydraulic or electrical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards a scheduled basis 1 load testing of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses 3 Service Operations required periodically o keep an item in proper operating condition e g to clean includes decontaminate when required to preserve to drain to paint or to replenish fuel lubricants chemical fluids or gases This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms The following are examples of service functions a Unpack To remove from packing box for service or when required for the performance of maintenance operations b Repack To return item to packing box after service and other maintenance operations c Clean To rid the item of contamination d Touch up To spot paint scratched or blistered surfaces e Mark To restore obliterated identification 4 Adjust To maintain or regulate within prescribed limits by brining into roper position or by setting the operating characteristics to specified parameters
166. for bulk material are also referenced in the Description Column of the line item entry for the item to be manufactured fabricated Detailed fabrication instructions for items source coded to be manufactured or fabricated are found in enter applicable TM number 293 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F Index Numbers Items which have the word BULK in the figure column will have an index number shown in the item number column This index number is a cross reference between the NSN Part Number P N Index work packages and the bulk material list in the repair parts list work package For a combined narrative RPSTL manual associated publications shall not be included Associated Publications The publication s listed below pertains to the enter item name Publication Short Title The following paragraph shall appear only in the unit maintenance RPSTL special instructions Illustrations List The illustrations in this RPSTL contain unit authorized items Illustrations published in enter applicable TM number for the higher maintenance level RPSTL e g for direct support general support etc that contain unit authorized items also appear in this RPSTL The tabular list in the repair parts list work package contains only those parts coded in the third position of the SMR code therefore there may be a break in the item number sequence HOW TO LOCATE REPAIR PARTS 1 When or Part Numbers Are Not Known First Using the table o
167. fourth positions of the SMR code as follows Third Position The maintenance code entered in the third position tells you the lowest maintenance level authorized to remove replace and use an item The maintenance code entered in the third position will indicate authorization to the following levels of maintenance Maintenance Code Application Explanation O Unit level AVUM maintenance can remove replace and use the item F Direct support A VIM maintenance can remove replace and use the item General support maintenance remove replace and use item L Specialized repair activity can remove replace and use the item G Afloat and ashore intermediate maintenance can remove replace and use the item Navy only K Contractor facility can remove replace and use the item Z Item is not authorized to be removed replace or used at any maintenance level D Depot can remove replace and use the item NOTE Army may use C in the third position However for joint service publications Army will use O Fourth Position The maintenance code entered in the fourth position tells you whether or not the item is to be repaired and identifies the lowest maintenance level with the capability to do complete repair perform all authorized repair functions NOTE Some limited repair may be done on the item at a lower level of maintenance if authorized by the Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC and SMR codes 290
168. from the MAC The remarks immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements contain supplemental instructions and explana tory notes for a particular maintenance function Maintenance Functions Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows l Inspect To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical mechanical and or electrical char acteristics with established standards through examination e g by sight sound or feel This includes scheduled inspection and gagings and evaluation of cannon tubes 2 Test To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical pneumatic hydraulic or electrical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a scheduled basis i e load testing of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses 3 Service Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition e g to clean includes decontaminate when required to preserve to drain to paint or to replenish fuel lubricants chemical fluids or gases This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms 4 Adjust To maintain or regulate within prescribed limits by bringing into proper position or by setting the operating characteristics to specified parameters 5 Align To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance 6 Calibrate To determine and cause
169. help b Check ramp hydraulic power unit 1 Lower ramp WP 0090 2 Remove ramp hydraulic power unit cover and check sight glass If fluid level is below ADD mark add FRH MIL H 46170 as needed Never fill over halfway between ADD and FULL with ramp down Ramp hydraulic power unit will be overfilled with ramp up 3 Install ramp hydraulic power unit cover 4 Raise ramp WP 0090 Before Hull Drain Plugs s ae ee Front hull drain plug a Check for open or missing ront hull drain plug an is missing or bridge that bridge plates are fully seated plates will not seat Before Internal Fire Driver Extinguisher a Check engine compartment fire extinguisher 1 Check wire or lead seals on engine compartment fire extinguisher Wire or lead seals on engine compartment fire extinguisher are missing broken or improperly laced 2 Check that pressure gage on engine compart NET AAT Pressure gage on ment fire extinguisher is in green or yellow zone engine compartment fire extinguisher reads in red zone NOTE If engine compartment fire extinguisher is in yellow zone notify unit maintenance after mission is completed 0006 3 FIGURE E 2 Example of a PMCS table 266 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E TM X XXX XXXX XX 0006 Table 1 PMCS Mandatory Replacement Parts List AO A1 PART NUMBER CAGEC NOMENCLATURE SEMI ANNUAL 1500 MILE 05 19 2353 4240 01 026 3112 PRECLEANER AND PART A1 ONLY 42765 MS2466
170. helpful but is not mandatory 6 1 Intended use MIL STD 40051 2 prescribes requirements applicable to various types of technical manuals and the revisions for these manuals 6 2 Acquisition Requirements Acquisition document should cite the following a Title number and date of this standard b Title number and date of MIL HDBK 1222 c Title number and date of MIL STD 2361 and MIL HDBK 2361 d Filled out functionality and content selection matrixes 60 MIL STD 4005 1 2 6 3 Tailoring guidance The acquiring activity should tailor any required options offered herein in accordance with Appendix A Content Selection Matrixes 6 4 Supersession Data The following documents are superseded by MIL STD 4005 1 1 a MIL STD 40051B TM w Change 1 dated 30 November 2003 b MIL PRF 63015C TM dated 17 July 1997 c MIL PRF 63016B TM dated 17 Jul 1997 6 5 Subject term key word listing The following terms are to be used to identify the MIL STD 4005 1 2 documents during retrieval searches sm me ao P lt z lt eos Additional authorization list AAL Basic issue items BID Basis of issue BOI Continuous Acquisition Life cycle Support CALS raster Computer graphics metafile CGM Components of end item COET Depot maintenance work requirement DMWR Expendable and durable items list Extensible Markup Language XML Illustrations Initial Graphics Exchange Specification
171. insert DMWR or NMWR standard The cost to repair restore any individual item with an established Maintenance Expenditure Limit MEL to the insert DMWR or NMWR standard shall not exceed the MEL unless a waiver has been approved in accordance with AMC R 750 51 This requirement does not apply to items exempted from MEL in accordance with AMC R 750 51 B 5 2 25 Supporting information for repair parts special tools TMDE and support equipment Unit A VUM and above only lt supdata gt When applicable the following information shall include a reference to the common tools and equipment special tools TMDE and support equipment and the repair parts as shown below The information in B 5 2 25 1 through B 5 2 25 3 applies only to unit maintenance A viation Unit Maintenance A VUM and above 5 2 25 1 Common tools and equipment The following statement shall be included COMMON TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT For authorized common tools and equipment refer to the Modified Table of Organization and Equipment MTOE CTA 50 970 Expendable Durable Items Except Medical Class V Repair Parts and Heraldic Items CTA 50 909 Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment or CTA 8 100 Army Medical Department Expendable Durable Items as applicable to your unit B 5 2 25 2 Special tools TMDE and support equipment A reference to the Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL and MAC shall be included When no special tools or equipment are req
172. instrument range markings for accuracy X scratches and cracks and legibility All gage lens looseness and slippage 16 Test FAT gage TM 55 1500 204 25 1 X 2 9 Deleted FOD REMINDER TM 55 1520 238 PMS Check work area for tools and parts after completion of maintenance and inspection FIGURE E 14 Example preventive maintenance services 279 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E AREA NO 1 CANOPY CREW STATION AVIONICS COMPARTMENTS FOWARD FUSELAGE AREA NO 2 RIGHT FUSELAGE WING PYLONS RIGHT MAIN LANDING GEAR NO 2 ENGINE AND NACELLE BATTERY COMPARTMENT AREA NO 3 AFT FUSELAGE TAIL ROTOR DRIVE AND CONTROLS AREA NO 4 STABILIZER STABILATOR TAIL WHEEL TAIL ROTOR DRIVES AND CONTROLS AREA NO 5 AFT EQUIPMENT BAY ALL EQUIPMENT AREA NO 6 MAIN ROTOR AND CONTROLS AREA NO 7 LEFT FUSELAGE WING PYLONS LEFT MAIN LANDING GEAR NO 1 ENGINE AND NACELLE AMMO COMPARTMENT FIGURE E 15 Example of an area diagram 280 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E AREA TITLE 1 FORWARD FUSELAGE 2 CREW STATIONS 3 LEFT FORWARD AVIONICS BAY AND MAIN LANDING GEAR 4 RIGHT FORWARD AVIONICA BAY AND MAIN LANDING GEAR 5 LEFT WING AND PYLONS 6 RIGHT WING AND PYLONS 7 LEFT ENGINE AND NOSE GEARBOX 8 RIGHT ENGINE AND NOSE GEARBOX 9 MAIN TRANSMISSION 10 MAIN ROTOR 11 AFT EQUIPMENT BAY 12 MID AND LOWER FUSELAGE 13 AFT FUSELAGE 14 EMPENNAGE TAIL ROTOR AND TAIL LANDING GEAR FIGURE E 16 Example of an inspection area diagr
173. interval the total functional life of a population of an item divided by the total number of failures within the population during the measurement interval The definition holds for time rounds miles events or other measure of life units 3 87 Modified table of organization and equipment MTOE A modified version of a TOE that prescribes the unit organization personnel and equipment needed to perform an assigned mission in a specific geographical or operational environment 3 88 Modification work order MWO Detailed instructions including text and graphics for making changes improvements to a particular system in order to bring the system up to date and or to improve its overall efficiency 16 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 89 Module A subassembly that in the area of electronic systems may be removed and replaced without use of soldering equipment or special tools a module may be encapsulated 3 90 National Item Identification Number NIIN The last nine digits of the National NATO stock number The first two digits of the NIIN identify the country assigning the number and the remaining seven digits are a serially assigned number 3 91 National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWR A maintenance serviceability standard for depot level reparables that do not have an existing depot maintenance work requirement and for field level reparables that are repaired by maintenance activities below the depot level maintainers for return to
174. item operating 1 to clean includes decontaminate when required to preserve to drain to paint or to replenish fuel lubricants chemical fluids or gases 3 130 Set A unit and necessary assemblies subassemblies and parts connected together or used in association to perform an operational function e g radio receiving set measuring set radar or homing set which includes parts assemblies and units such as cables microphones and measuring instruments 3 131 Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code The five position code containing supply requisitioning information maintenance level authorization criteria and disposition instruction The first two positions of the SMR code determine how to get an item The third position represents who can install replace or use the item The fourth position dictates who can do complete repair on the item The fifth position represents who determines disposition action on unserviceable items 3 132 Spare part Those support items that are an integral part of the end item or weapons system that are coded as repairable 1 reparable items Spares include those equipments authorized by TOE line item plus equipments assemblies and modules designated as operational readiness float TOE training equipment is excluded 3 133 Special tools Those tools that have single or peculiar application to a specific end item system 3 134 Specialized Repair Activity SRA A level of ma
175. list standard information shall be prepared in tabular format as shown in FIGURE G 13 and include the following information a Item number Lowest maintenance level National Stock Number NSN Item name or nomenclature If applicable a description Part number Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC Unit of Issue U I roe No illustrations shall be prepared for these items Items appearing in the tabular list shall appear in alphabetical sequence by item name Items to be listed shall be those approved by the acquiring activity 338 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G 5 7 Tool identification list work package Unit A VUM level or above only lt toolidwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by the acquiring activity and shall include a list of the tools authorized to the levels of maintenance covered in the narrative portion of the TM and as referenced by the initial setups For DMWRs NMWRS a list of all special tools and test measurement and diagnostic equipment not contained in lower level technical manuals or in the RPSTL and required to perform the procedures in the DMWR NMWR shall be included This list shall include any special inspection equipment used only for the item that the DMWR NMWR covers The following data described in G 5 7 1 through G 5 7 4 shall be included G 5 7 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this w
176. list an alphabetical character s The QTY column qty for kits shall be a V variable when the exact quantity may vary Refer to FIGURE F 7 2 Option 1 parts kititem Option 1 kit repair parts shall be listed with their applicable figure and appear in item number sequence The statement part of Kit P N enter kit P N shall follow item name lt name gt Kit repair parts shall also be listed under the kit list at the end of the parts list Refer to FIGURE F 7 Parts of the kit list shall be indented and listed alphabetically by item name or in item number sequence immediately below the kit item name The quantity qty in parentheses figure number and item number lt callout gt shall follow the repair part item name 3 Option 2 kits lt kitswp gt Option 2 kits shall be listed in the kit parts list work package lt kitswp gt see F 5 3 4 4 Option 2 parts lt pi item gt Option 2 kit repair parts shall appear in the parts list by item number as shown on the associated figure They shall be listed in item number sequence The statement PART OF KIT P N enter kit part number shall follow the item name i End of work package statement The statement END OF FIGURE shall appear below the last item described in the column for each figure of the tabular lists in the repair parts list and the special tools list work packages F 5 3 6 3 2 7 Quantity column qty The number in the QTY column shall repr
177. listed in a functional group titled lt fnctitle gt BASIC ISSUE ITEMS REPAIR PARTS Items listed in functional and subfunctional groups shall be listed and identified with the same basic columnar data required for the end item repair parts BII shall be supported by illustrations F 5 3 6 5 Expendable and durable items Expendable and durable items shall not be listed in the RPSTL These items shall appear in the expendable and durable items work package lt explistwp gt see G 5 6 in the Support Information Chapter F 5 3 7 Repair parts for special tools list work package lt stl_partswp gt The special tools repair parts list work package shall be prepared when all of the following conditions in a through c are met The work package shall follow the last repair parts list work package lt plwp gt and shall precede the kit parts list work package lt kitswp gt and bulk items work package lt bulk_itemswp gt The work package data requirements are specified in F 5 3 7 1 through a RPSTL identifies special tools in the special tools list work package see 5 3 10 b The special tool has repair parts that may be replaced at any maintenance level covered in the TM c The special tool does not have repair instructions and parts listed in another technical manual for the special tool F 5 3 7 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work pa
178. lt gt RUN SUN 191 C 5 2 7 Stowage and decal data plate guide work package stowagewp 191 C27 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 191 C 5 2 7 2 Initial setup information wpinfo eese 191 C 5 2 7 3 Introductio c nutans al qusa asss 191 C 5 2 7 4 Stowage SUIS bo rss pe 191 X1 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE C 5 2 7 5 Decal data plate guide lt decalinfo gt 191 C 5 2 8 On vehicle equipment loading plan work package lt eqploadwp gt 191 C 5 2 8 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 192 C 5 2 8 2 Initial setup information lt gt 192 C 5 2 8 3 IIO 192 5 2 8 4 Illustrated loading plan list s lt gt 192 LEA Mr 192 D TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES 194 D ISCOPE 194 D 1 1 SCOPE J 194 D 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTITS 194
179. lt v 3 How to use this manual CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK PACKAGE Scope Maintenance forms records and reports Reporting equipment improvement recommendations EIR Hand receipt HR manuals lt handreceipt gt Corrosion prevention and control CPC Ozone depleting substances ODS Destruction of Army materiel to prevent lt destructmat gt enemy use Preparation for storage or shipment Warranty information Nomenclature cross reference list List of abbreviations Quality of material lt qual mat info gt Safety care and handling Nuclear hardness Calibration lt calref gt Supporting information for repair parts special tools TMDE and support equipment Copyright credit line lt copyrt gt 5 M pum 107 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 20 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp P 30 amp P 40 amp P Reference Element Nam EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND R 5 3 descwp DATA WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities R B 5 3 3 lt eqpinfo gt and features Location and description of major R B 5 3 4 lt locdesc gt components Differences between models B 5 5 5 lt eqpdiff gt THEORY OF OPERATION WORK R 5 4 lt thrywp gt PACKAGE D 5 1 lt tim gt D 5 4 4 lt masterindexcategory gt tim lt troublecategory gt
180. lt calibration gt Equipment that requires calibration after assembly or installation shall be indicated and reference shall be made to the publication containing the applicable calibration procedure The calibration procedures contained in other publications may be included in the task when approved by the acquiring activity E 5 3 5 3 20 Radio interference suppression lt ris gt a Instructions shall be prepared for primary components in the suppression system and replacement of these primary components b Secondary components shall be referenced to pertinent maintenance procedures containing removal and installation instructions c Instructions shall be prepared for testing radio interference suppression components E 5 3 5 3 21 Placing in service lt pis gt Instructions shall be prepared for actions not previously noted that may be required for an assembly component or end item Instructions shall be prepared such as removal of an item from storage and preparation for installation on an end item Final servicing checks calibration leak checks charging pressurizing and operational checks shall be prepared E 5 3 5 3 22 Testing lt test pass gt Instructions shall be prepared as applicable to test the performance of components assemblies and subassemblies prior to installation in the end item The following instructions are required for depot and aviation maintenance DMWR NMWR and aviation only Instructions shal
181. modification MWOs and ECPs shall be identified for all modifications which have been incorporated into the work required by the DMWR NMWR MWOSs shall be reported as outlined in DA PAM 738 750 The applicable MWOS and the ECPs shall be listed title and number This listing shall be supplied by the major subordinate command MSC Alternatively a statement shall be made stating that the modifications must be applied during the overhaul of the item For example MODIFICATIONS Modification Work Orders MWOs all minor alteration procedures MAP specified in the contract work directive and all ECPs listed in the insert DMWR or NMWR must be applied during the overhaul of the item Refer to DA PAM 25 30 and DA PAM 750 10 for all published MWOs B 5 2 21 Deviations and exceptions DMWR NMWR only deviation The following statement shall be included DEVIATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS Requests for deviations or exceptions to this insert Depot Maintenance Work Requirement DMWR or National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWR will be processed in accordance with ISO 9000 Series standards or equivalent B 5 2 22 Mobilization requirements DMWR NMWR only mobreq The following statement shall be included MOBILIZATION REQUIREMENTS All requirements of this insert DMWR or NMWR will be exempted or revised in the event of mobilization Only those procedures necessary to return the insert equipment name to a servicea
182. new condition 3 101 Overhaul Inspection Procedure OIP Routine maintenance inspection conducted just prior to period specified for removal of aircraft for overhaul or retirement 3 102 Page based technical manual A technical manual consisting of text illustrations and tabular data presented in a standard page oriented format 3 103 Part Number P N A primary number used to identify an item used by the manufacturer individual company firm corporation or Government activity that controls the design characteristics and production of the item by means of its engineering drawings specifications and inspection requirements 17 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 104 Phased maintenance inspection aircraft A thorough and searching examination of the aircraft and associated equipment Removal of access plates panels screens and some partial disassembly of the aircraft is required to complete the inspection Inspections are due after an appointed number of flying hours since new or from the completion of the last inspection 3 105 Pictorial A type of illustration showing the physical appearance of equipment or component parts This term is used instead of such general terms as illustration drawing and diagram 3 106 Portrait mode To print an image the regular way so that the longest edge of the form corresponds to the vertical axis 3 107 Preshop analysis To determine prior to beginning maintenance activities the extent of maint
183. not the same for different models of equipment Column 4 Unit of Issue indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column 1 Column 5 Qty Recm Indicates the quantity recommended Table 1 Additional Authorization List 1 2 3 National Stock Usable On Number NSN Description Part Number CAGEC Code 6665 01 105 5623 ALARM CHEMICAL AGENT 8762101 19200 1240 01 207 5787 BINOCULARS MOD CON M22 9370122 19200 2590 01 148 7961 CABLE KIT SPECIAL PURPOSE 223592 2000 19200 1080 00 623 7295 CAMOUFLAGE SCREEN WOODLAND DST POLES 11655722 34623 1080 00 103 1246 CAMOUFLAGE SCREEN WOODLAND RAD SCT 11655720 34623 6665 01 199 4153 CHEMICAL AGENT MONITOR CAM 11645620 34623 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0442 1 2 blank FIGURE G 12 Example of an additional authorization list 357 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0059 UNIT MAINTENANCE NBCRS FOX M93A1 EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists expendable and durable items that you will need to operate and maintain the NBCRS FOX M93A1 This list is for information only and is not authority to requisition the listed items These items are authorized to you by CTA 50 970 Expendable Durable Items Except Medical Class V Repair Parts and Heraldic Items CTA 50 909 Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment or CTA 8 100 Army Med
184. operating task shall be included Approved Logistics Management Information LMI and service experience performance data on similar equipment and all other reliability availability and maintainability RAM data available shall be used to estimate the time required to complete the task For example Time to Complete 8 Hours 4 7 9 3 Work package sequential numbering To maintain a sequential order in the TM and to facilitate referencing each work package WP shall initially be assigned a four digit number beginning with the number 0001 The work package sequence numbers shall run consecutively throughout the TM For example the first work package in Chapter 2 will be assigned the number immediately following the last work package number in Chapter 1 e g if 0010 is the last WP in Chapter 1 0011 will be the first work package in Chapter 2 WP sequence numbers shall be assigned in numerical sequence refer to FIGURE 1 4 7 9 3 1 Assignment of new work packages sequence numbers for a change A new WP that is added to the end of a non volumized TM or to the end of the last volume of a multi volume TM shall use the next available four digit WP number For example if 0098 is the number of the last WP in the TM 0099 shall be the number of the new WP A new WP that is inserted between two WPs shall use a point numbering scheme to create a new sequence number that logically fits between the two existing WP numbers Point numbers shall start w
185. or incomplete to the extent that it should be replaced or repaired shall be stated Procedures shall be prepared for inspecting solder joints on an electronic item welds on an armored vehicle fluid leakage on vehicles connectors on electronic devices and other items to identify defects that must be corrected E 5 3 5 3 6 Removal lt remove gt a Instructions shall be prepared in the logical removal sequence prescribed by the FGC Illustrations shall be used to support and clarify the text Instructions shall be prepared for checking and recording gear wear patterns backlash ESD protective control measures measurements and tolerances for determining thickness of shims and purpose for shims and separating and indexing parts for the assembly Procedures shall identify items which must be matched or precision mated when installed at a later time b DMWR NMWR only Instructions shall be prepared for recording the condition of the item assembly marking handling and storing the item 5 3 5 3 7 Disassembly lt disassem gt Instructions shall be prepared for disassembly of components assemblies or subassemblies to the extent specified by the MAC and SMR coded items Illustrations shall be used to support and clarify the text Instructions shall be prepared for precision matched or mated components assemblies subassemblies or parts other than common hardware including ESD sensitive items to insure they will be marked handled and
186. overhaul or repair procedures based on usage intervals such as miles time or rounds fired or replaced on a time between overhaul TBO interval shall be included in the parts list table A reference shall be made to the TM that covers the equipment The following data described in G 5 8 1 through G 5 8 4 shall be included G 5 8 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 8 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 8 3 Introduction for mandatory replacement parts work package intro This work package shall include an introduction G 5 8 4 Mandatory replacement parts list mprl This work package shall include a tabular list lt gt standard information of mandatory replacement parts Mandatory replacement parts shall be listed standard column headings in quotes by item number lt itemno gt Item No part number partno and Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC cageno CAGEC Part Number CAGEC National Stock Number NSN nsn National Stock Number NSN nomenclature lt name gt Nomenclature and quantity qty Qty Items shall be listed in alphanumeric order by part number refer to FIGURE G 15 G 5 9 Critical safety items CSI and flight safety critical aircraft parts FSCAP work package csi fscap wp
187. package identification number A unique number shall be assigned to each work package This identifier may be used for data base retrieval purposes This WP identification number will not appear on the printed page and shall not be confused with the WP sequence number in 4 7 9 3 It shall be assigned when preparing the document instance in accordance with the modular DTDs and shall not be changed throughout the life of the WP The WP identification number shall consist of an alpha designation for the type of information contained in the work package a five digit block number assigned by the acquiring activity and the TM number less the maintenance level dash numbers The TM number is used only to provide uniqueness and avoid duplication of a WP identification number other than that it shall not have significance When reusing a WP the same WP identification number shall be used from TM to TM a The following alpha designators shall be assigned to the specific types of information contained within the work packages Descriptive information and theory of operation Inspection Operator instructions Troubleshooting procedures Maintenance instructions Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL Supporting Information AA b Examples of work package data base identification numbering are shown below M00432 9 1425 646 M Identifies a WP containing maintenance instructions 00432 Identifies the 432nd work package containing
188. package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and contain the requirements outlined in E 5 3 12 1 1 through E 5 3 12 1 5 5 3 12 1 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 12 1 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 12 1 3 General information and introduction lt geninfo gt The following paragraph shall be inserted 253 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E GENERAL INFORMATION This work package contains complete requirements for special inspections overhaul and retirement schedule and standards of serviceability applicable to the aircraft The inspections prescribed in this work package shall be accomplished at specified periods by AVUM activities with the assistance of AVIM activities when required Complete Daily Intermediate Periodic or Phased inspections are contained in the insert applicable aircraft inspection checklist TM 5 3 12 1 4 Standards of serviceability The following paragraph shall be inserted Standards of serviceability to be utilized in the day to day inspection and maintenance of the aircraft can be found as fits tolerances wear limits and specifications in the aircraft maintenance manuals Standards of serviceability for transfer to aircraft are contained in TM 1 1500 328 23
189. pages for multi volume manual 84 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM NUMBER SERVICE NOMENCLATURE CITY STATE TM DATE TECHNICAL MANUAL TYPE OF PUBLICATION MAINTENANCE LEVELS NOMENCLATURE OF EQUIPMENT TYPE MODEL PART NUMBER NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER EIC OR SUBJECT SUBTITLE WEAPON SYSTEM NAME REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to im prove the procedures please let us know Mail your letter DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to insert name and address of pro ponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail ad dress is insert e mail address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you AVAILABILITY STATEMENT SUPERSEDURE NOTICE DISCLOSURE NOTICE DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT WARNING DESTRUCTION NOTICE FIGURE 19 Example of a title block page 85 MIL STD 4005 1 2 MANUAL NUMBER HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY WASHINGTON D C 1 JUNE 1996 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR S MANUAL NUCLEAR BIOLOGICAL CHEMICAL RECONNAISSANCE SYSTEM NBCRS FOX M93A1 NSN 6665 01 372 1303 EIC 60 REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to im prove the procedures
190. please let us know Mail your letter DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to Technical Director Edgewood Research Development and Engineering Center ATTN SCBRD ENL V Aberdeen Proving Ground MD 21010 5423 You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert e mail address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific authority of the Department of the Army of the United States that it will be used for military purposes only that individual or corporate rights originating in the information whether patented or not will be respected that the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected compromise and that the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security afforded it by the Department of Defense of the United States Also regardless of any other markings on the document it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the originating United States agency This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific authority of the Department of the Army of the United States that it will be used for military purposes only that individua
191. proper positioning 8 Instrument gage markings for accuracy and legibility all gage lens for cracks cleanliness looseness and slippage 9 Static discharge wicks for overall length of 6 inches maximum and 1 inch minimum exposed wick beyond plastic sheath 10 Static discharge ground for condition and security 260 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E d Include the following statements as applicable in the intermediate inspection requirements If the intermediate inspection is not required the inspections listed below shall be included as periodic inspection requirements as determined by the acquiring activity 1 2nd Compass correction card for availability and legibility 2 2nd Safety belts and shoulder harness for damage corrosion cuts fraying and security 3 2nd Inertial reels for damage security and positive locking and unlocking 4 2nd Seats for damage security and positive movement and locking in all positions 5 Every intermediate inspection First aid kits for completeness of side pocket contents and legible identification markings 6 2nd Battery nicad and lead acid for leakage Battery compartment interior for cleanliness and corrosion Battery and connections for security cleanliness and corrosion Battery vent for obstructions proper positioning e Include the following statements as applicable in the periodic inspection requirements 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
192. remarks and the SRA complete repair application is explained there 321 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G Column 5 Tools and Equipment Reference Code Column 5 specifies by code those common tool sets not individual tools common Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment TMDE and special tools special TMDE and special support equipment required to perform the designated function Codes are keyed to the entries in the tools and test equipment table Column 6 Remarks Code When applicable this column contains a letter code in alphabetical order which is keyed to the remarks table entries Explanation of Columns in the Tools and Test Equipment Requirements Column 1 Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code The tool or test equipment reference code correlates with a code used in column 5 of the MAC Column 2 Maintenance Level The lowest level of maintenance authorized to use the tool or test equipment Column 3 Nomenclature Name or identification of the tool or test equipment Column 4 National Stock Number NSN The NSN of the tool or test equipment Column 5 Tool Number The manufacturer s part number model number or type number Explanation of Columns in the Remarks Column 1 Remarks Code The code recorded in column 6 of the MAC Column 2 Remarks This column lists information pertinent to the maintenance function being performed as indicated in the MAC G 5 3 2 Introduction for three level Army a
193. shall be provided to illustrate how specific troubleshooting volumes and work packages are used together to locate and isolate faults 5 2 1 9 1 International standardization agreements When specified by the acquiring activity the How To Use This Manual information shall contain the following NOTE Certain provisions of this technical manual identify by chapter work package paragraph or similar manner if appropriate are the subject of international standardization agreement insert the ABCA or ASCC standard number the NATO STANAG NETR or NEPR number or appropriate documentary reference When revision or cancellation of this technical manual is proposed which will modify the international agreement concerned the technical manual management activity will take appropriate action through international standardization channels including departmental standardization offices to change the agreement or make other appropriate accommodations 5 2 2 Rear matter rear As applicable material following the last text page shall consist of the following a Glossary RPSTL not required lt glossary gt b Alphabetical index when required RPSTL not required lt aindx gt c Reporting errors and recommending improvements DA Forms 2028 lt da2028 gt d Authentication page lt authent gt Foldout pages when required RPSTL not required lt foldsect gt f Back cover lt back gt 5 2 2 1 Glossary Except R
194. stored to preclude damage and to ensure assembly and installation in their matched positions 239 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 5 3 8 Cleaning clean Cleaning procedures methods special equipment and materials that are required shall be specified Instructions shall be prepared for corrosion prevention treatment of metal parts after cleaning a materials used in the cleaning and corrosion prevention of equipment components or parts shall be referenced and contained in the expendable and durable items list refer to G 5 6 Procedures shall include cautions to avoid damage of components and to prevent the entrance of water or other solvents into electrical components ducts or like openings Warnings and cautions shall be prepared whenever chemicals or cleaning compounds are used or combined which may result in a dangerous or hazardous mixture Whether the danger is to personnel or equipment shall be identified and the effect e g gases fumes caustic and fire shall be stated For aircraft detailed instructions shall be prepared for cleaning and washing the entire aircraft Instructions shall be prepared for the removal of the battery relief tube power plant and armament exhaust deposits or other items or material as necessary Instructions shall also be prepared regarding components which require relubrication after the aircraft has been washed or steam cleaned E 5 3 5 3 9 Inspection acceptance and re
195. the Depot Maintenance Work Requirement DMWR and National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWR Alternatively if the definitions are listed in another publication that publication shall be referenced E 5 3 8 4 5 Special requirements for inspection tools and equipment lt specialreq gt Any special requirements for the maintenance and calibration of tools and test equipment used for QA inspections shall be listed E 5 3 8 4 6 Certification requirements certreq Any certification or licensing requirements for processes procedures materials equipment or personnel skills shall be listed The list shall include appropriate standards specifications regulations or laws that apply The list shall reference the text in the DMWR NMWR where there is a requirement for a soldering welding or magnetic particle inspection certification radioactive substance or test driver licenses E 5 3 8 4 7 Quality program lt quality program gt Any requirements for a quality program shall be listed 250 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 8 4 8 In process inspections lt inprocess gt The following statement shall be included IN PROCESS INSPECTIONS In process quality assurance inspections are contained throughout the overhaul procedures of this DMWR These inspections are immediately preceded by a statement such as QA check to identify them and they are the minimum inspections required Additional quality assurance inspections may be
196. the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army Overhaul des not normally return an item to like new condition 12 Rebuild Consists of those services actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards Rebuild is the highest degree of material maintenance applied to Army equipment The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age measurements e g hours miles considered in classifying Army equipment components Explanation of Columns in the MAC Columns 1 Group Number and 2 Component Assembly The functional groupings in the sample below identify maintenance significant components assemblies subassemblies and modules with the next higher assembly Group Number 04 0401 0402 0403 0404 0405 0406 0407 0408 Component Assembly Description POWER PLANT ENGINE GENERAL Servicing handling inspection requirements overhaul and retirement schedules External lines and hoses As applicable COMPRESSOR SECTION COLD SECTION MODULE Rotor blades vanes impeller stators inlet guide vanes mainframe particle separator bleed valve bearings seals external lines and hoses COMBUSTION SECTION HOT SECTION MODULE Liners nozzles stators rotor seals couplings blades POWER TURBINE POWER TURBINE MODULE Nozzles rotors blades exit guide vanes exhaust frame drive shaft
197. their revised version Work Package Number WP 0154 WP 0042 7 Add the following new work packages Work Package Number WP 1625 1 WP 1700 1 FIGURE 9 Example of a change transmittal page 74 MIL STD 4005 1 2 SECURITY CLASSIFICATION TM NUMBER S TYPE OF PUBLICATION MAINTENANCE LEVELS FOR NOMENCLATURE OF EQUIPMENT TYPE MODEL PART NUMBER NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER EIC OR SUBJECT SUBTITLE WEAPON SYSTEM NAME ILLUSTRATION AVAILABILITY STATEMENT SUPERSEDURE NOTICE DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT DESTRUCTION NOTICE SERVICE NOMENCLATURE DATE SECURITY CLASSIFICATION FIGURE 10 Example of a TM front cover 75 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 6665 339 10 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR S MANUAL FOR NUCLEAR BIOLOGICAL CHEMICAL RECONNAISSANCE SYSTEM NBCRS FOX M93A1 NSN 6665 01 372 1303 EIC Y60 This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific authority of the Department of the Army of the United States that it will be used for military purposes only that individual or corporate rights originating in the information whether patented or not will be respected that the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected compromise and that the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security afforded it by the Department of Defense of the United States Also regardless of an
198. to FIGURE F 6 lt uoc gt When an item has multi configurations or multi models use the three position alphanumeric UOC representing the applicable configuration in which the item is used shall be placed on the last line under the item description The letters UOC followed by the applicable UOC shall be indented Refer to FIGURE F 5 When an item is used on all configurations or when only one configuration is covered by the RPSTL UOCs shall not be shown Serial number application lt usbefserno gt When part numbers of spare repair items are not the same for all serial numbered equipment of the same model a statement identifying the Usable Effective USBL EFF serial numbers shall be placed on the last line under the item description The letters USBL EFF followed by the applicable serial numbers shall be indented e g USBL EFF SER NOS 1719 1941 When an item is used on all models or when only one configuration is covered by the RPSTL serial number shall not be shown Assembled items Spare and repair parts that are part of a nonstocked assembled item source coded AO AF AH or AD shall be assigned item numbers on illustrations and shall be listed in item number sequence on the repair parts list These items parts shall be listed immediately below the item to be assembled on the repair parts list When a particular illustration does not show the parts breakdown of the nonstocked assembly reference shall b
199. whenever it is transferred between property accounts BII may be packed with COMSEC equipment 3 15 Basis of Issue BOI The quantity of an item special tool authorized for the end item density spread or for the unit level specified 3 16 Block diagram A modified schematic diagram in which each group of maintenance significant components that together performs one or more functions is represented by a single symbol or block The block or symbol representing the group of components shows simplified relevant input and output signals pertinent to the subject diagram 3 17 Built in Test Equipment BITE Any identifiable device that is a part of the supported end item and is used for testing that supported end item 3 18 Bulk material Material issued in bulk for manufacture or fabrication of support items e g sheet metal pipe tubing bar stock or gasket material excludes expendable items 3 19 Calibrate To determine and cause corrections or adjustments to be made to instruments or test measuring and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement Consists of comparisons of two instruments one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared 3 20 Callout Anything placed on an illustration to aid in identifying the objects being illustrated such as index numbers nomenclature leader lines and arrows 3 2 Continuous Acquisition Life
200. 0 amp P sae d eate eut eade ee TABLE A V 119 AVUM 20 and 20 amp P e ERRARE TABLE A V 119 AV UM AVIM 23 and 23 amp P TABLE A V 119 Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 12 and I12 amp P iiis esiti im EPA TABLE A XII 145 13 and en aute watts tatem TABLE A XII 145 14 amp 4 50 TABLE A XII 145 3 bane oum Montes TABLE 151 23 23 amp sos tu TABLE 157 24 And 2A RP i p M TABLE A XIV 157 230 and 308 dea det SERERE TABLE A XIII 151 ad Pis aaa a UIs edits pd TABLE A XIV 157 40 and 40 amp J ek TABLE A XIII 151 145 TABLE 99 TABLE 125 5 2 25 171 TMs 4 8 1 46 Complete FE VISIONS TOD u a un AE Maton dan 4 8 2 48 geo i 4 7 16 2 37 Headers ss tfta 4 7 16 1 37 set se redit Ree RH 4 7 16 2 1 37 Publication A 5 1 1 93 So rce data a EI eL
201. 051 2 APPENDIX D TM X XXX XXXX XX 1264 DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE ARRESTING HOOK ACTUATOR PROPERLY SERVICED INITIAL SETUP Test Equipment References cont Multimeter WP 0234 Item 4 WP 0061 References WP 0046 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE 916 CODE DISPLAYED WITH ARRESTING HOOK ACTUATOR PROPERLY SERVICED CAUTION To prevent damage to low level devices switches relay contacts do not test for continuity with multimeter on the RX scale Pin to pintests that do not go through switches relay contacts may use scale The question used in logic tree Does continuity exist means to test for the items listed below l Pinto pintest per procedural step Shorts to ground Shorts between surrounding pins on connectors Shorts between shield and conductors 5 Shield continuity When testing for resistance also test for shorts to ground STEP 1 Do substeps below sure arresting hook is up and latched b Open door 32R WP 0061 c Disconnect 85P NOO2C from signal Data Converter 3493 6 12 CONDITION INDICATION Does continuity exist between 85 002 pin 32 and aircraft ground DECISION NO Step 2 YES Step 5 STEP 2 Do substeps below a Manually raise speed brake and install speed brake aircraft ground safety lock WP 0046 b Removedoor 103 WP 0061 c Disconnect 19P TO12 from temperature compensation pressure switch CONDITION INDICATION Does conti
202. 1 CPR102201 HHPI51 10287823 7 CPR104394 CPR102235 CPR102232 738942 CPR103203 1 7036787 D11076 4A7 QQ T 830 CS4710 0004GB M3520 B70E02G ASTM 305087 0116 CPR109328 1 858976 1 22 CPR109328 2 CPR102229 13486 1 14 13486 1 15 M13486 1 3 MS20995C47 0016 3 4 blank 6 DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC GROUP 95 GENERAL USE STANDARDIZED PARTS GROUP 9501 BULK MATERIAL FIG 15 BULK ASBESTOS SHEET WOVE CHAIN WELDLESS 3 8 ID CONDUIT NONMETALIC GLASS LAMINATED GLASS LAMINATED HOSE AIR DUCT NOSE ASSEMBLY NONME HOSE NONMETALLIC HOSE NONMETALLIC HOSE NONMETALLIC HOSE NONMETALLIC HOSE NONMETALLIC HOSE PREFORMED INSULATION BOARD TH NONMETALLIC SPECIAL RUBBER SHEET SOLID RUBBER STRIP SEAL RUBBER CHANNEL SEAL RUBBER SPECIAL SEAL RUBBER SPECIAL SPACER SLEEVE TUBE ASSEMBLY METAL TUBE METALIC TUBE METALIC TUBE METALIC TUBE METALIC TUBE METALIC B280 TUBE METALIC TUBE METALIC TUBING TUBING NONMETALLIC TUBING RUBBER WEATHERSTRIP DOOR WIRE ELECTRICAL WIRE ELECTRICAL WIRE ELECTRICAL WIRE NONELECTRICAL END OF FIGURE FIGURE F 9 Example of a bulk material list 312 0016 7 QTY D 2 ITEM SMR NO CODE 1 PEODD 1 PEODD 2 XBOZZ 3 XBOZZ 4 XBOZZ 5 XBOZZ 3 NSN 6625 01 169 5333 6625 0
203. 1 Selective application amp tailoring e D 4 13 Selective application amp tailoring tede E 4 13 385 PAGE 296 296 295 295 296 297 295 297 295 285 300 302 286 286 286 169 164 185 195 219 28 163 317 165 318 255 40 40 40 39 39 40 39 187 190 22 164 185 196 220 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Selective application amp tailoring 4 7 Selective application amp tailoring G 4 8 5 2 4 7 Self test systems with D 5 2 2 2 1 Semi automatic testing and troubleshooting D 5 2 1 2 Separate operational checkout procedures D 5 5 8 5 6b Separate troubleshooting procedures D 5 5 8 5 6c SEQUentidl listenu ted 4 7 13 8c Serial number appliCatiQns iui eter sete basa en se esa tunes ae F 5 3 6 3 2 6e Service MOMENC La LUT o ede connus S odi du de e 3 2 T 1 1 11 Service upon receipt of materiel E 5 3 2 3 5 Service upon receipt work package E 5 3 2 SOEVICIDES a ER E 5 3 5 3 3 Sets and F 5 3 11 5 Shelter Pete TNC ES m 5 2 4 5 Shelt er Tequire mefits
204. 1 258 5 3 14 2 258 5 3 13 258 5 3 2 322 5 3 9 299 G 5 4 334 D 5 5 8 5 208 D 5 5 7 204 G 5 9 340 E 5 3 8 3 249 C 5 2 3 186 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE llena C 5 2 6 191 Equipment description amp data B 5 3 172 Work package Cont Equipment user fitting instructions 1 2 2 een E 5 3 2 3 11 229 Expendable amp durable G 5 6 337 aysa EE 5 3 8 1 248 Foreign ammunition ae eee E 5 3 14 3 259 General information PMI I Vr teur AER i e pe B 5 6 177 General information 85 0 B 5 5 175 General Ti LR LA SASS B 5 2 165 General TALENT ANOS sesh OA E E qe ae St degen 5 3 6 247 Integrated system trouble D 5 5 8 6 209 Introduction D 5 5 3 201 Kit paris kasaae hasa F 5 3 8 299 Lubrication Instructions E 5 3 7 247 MAG G 5 3 4 332 Maintenance ei needed Het eed e doe ee rede et E 5 3 225 osa usto on 5 3 5 235 Mandatory replacement patts G 5 8 340 Manufactured items G illus E 5 3
205. 1 266 1636 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F TM X XXX XXXX 24P 0255 4 5 6 7 PART DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CAGEC NUMBER CODE UOC QTY 30 SPECIAL TOOLS FIG 254 80058 TS 3920A ASM TEST SET STABILIZATION BOI 1 AUTH PER 15 AIRCRAFT 80058 TS 3920B ASM TEST SET STABILIZATION 1 AUTH PER 15 AIRCRAFT 80063 43012556 WEDGE 30 60 90 DEG BOI 1 AUTH PER TEST SET 80063 3012557 WEDGE 05 85 90 DEG BOL 1 AUTH PER TEST SET 80063 3012558 PIN ALIGNMENT BOL 1 AUTH PER TEST SET 80063 A3012559 FIXTURE PROTRACTOR 0255 3 4 blank BOL 1 AUTH PER TEST SET END OF FIGURE FIGURE F 10 Example of a special tools list work package 313 STOCK NUMBER 5365 00 003 6807 5935 00 005 2826 5315 00 012 0123 5310 00 016 7216 5340 00 021 3495 5310 00 027 7247 5310 00 030 0580 3110 00 034 5257 5305 00 038 9048 5310 00 045 3296 5310 00 045 4007 5305 00 052 6456 5310 00 054 0041 5305 00 054 5637 5305 00 054 5638 5305 00 054 5647 5305 00 054 5648 5305 00 054 5649 5305 00 054 5650 5305 00 054 5651 5305 00 054 5652 5305 00 054 5653 FIGURE F 11 Example of a national stock number index work package MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F 65 28 77 85 51 69 72 75 77 79 81 84 85 45 77 85 55 24 88 33 51 10 33 29 33 51 52 89 51 28 90 52 28 FIG ITEM 12 20 15 N N OO NO tA 11
206. 15 o Q Wor Wr CO Ne UNIT MAINTENANCE NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER INDEX STOCK NUMBER 5305 00 054 6653 5305 00 054 6654 5305 00 054 6655 5305 00 054 6657 5305 00 054 6666 5305 00 054 6669 5305 00 054 9263 5305 00 056 9961 53 10 00 057 0573 5310 00 058 1823 5315 00 058 6062 5305 00 059 3657 5305 00 059 3658 5305 00 059 3661 5310 00 061 7326 5305 00 066 7327 5305 00 066 7369 5365 00 067 3836 5305 00 068 0543 5365 00 068 8011 5975 00 074 2072 5970 00 074 8780 5320 00 076 4071 5360 00 079 1713 5305 00 079 5835 5306 00 080 1537 5305 00 103 2994 5905 00 104 8368 0101 4 314 0101 FIG ITEM 89 17 28 23 29 8 29 4 88 21 29 18 51 29 1 10 60 4 9 3 33 16 88 35 33 8 523 2 90 2 29 1 61 4 45 18 2 14 1 3 51 26 29 19 88 37 34 1 46 17 45 9 70 2 80 2 61 12 88 33 28 15 59 19 2 5h 5722 88 28 32 28 45 14 2 25 PART NUMBER AN960C10L AN960C4L AN960C416L AN960C516L AN960C6 AN960C6L AN960C616 AN960C8 AN960C816 AP373 95 AP373 96 B3 14 CA4342 CA4440 4 CD2 Z147 1 CKROSBX102M CMROSF201JPDR DB 3 DBMSWSP DBMS5WSS DBM50906 1 DDMSOPE DM53744 21 DM53744 24 DM53744 25 DM53745 25 DM53745 27 FIGURE F 12 Example of a part number index work package MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX F UNIT MAINTENANCE PART NUMBER INDEX FIG ITEM PART NUMBER 12 20 8 oH DM53745 28 DSC7900 10 C 6 8 66 8 74 EP15160 27 6 1 O 100 00000 z 2 8 4
207. 1A21 70 15 2 10 13 2 1 22 70 16 2 10 14 2 1 23 70 17 2 10 15 2 1 24 70 13 2 10 2 1 25 70 14 2 10 5 2 1 26 70 14 2 10 7 0103 8 REFERENCE DESIGNATOR 0103 FIG ITEM 70 15 70 16 70 18 70 70 70 70 10 70 11 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 70 25 71 27 71 36 7 34 71 46 71 44 71 45 70 31 70 29 70 30 70 28 70 26 70 27 70 35 2 590 80 2 80 2 80 3 80 4 80 2 80 5 80 2 80 2 80 2 FIGURE F 13 Example of a reference designator index work package 316 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TECHNICAL MANUALS SUPPORTING INFORMATION G 1 SCOPE G 1 1 Scope This appendix establishes the technical content requirements for the preparation of supporting information for major weapon systems and their related systems subsystems equipment weapons replacement assemblies WRAs and shop replacement assemblies SRAs This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for compliance The requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs G 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The applicable documents in section 2 apply to this appendix G 3 DEFINITIONS The definitions in section 3 apply to this appendix G 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS G 4 1 General Supporting information shall be prepared for weapon systems major equipment components and
208. 2 4 Publication list publist Individual paragraphs shall be prepared for each publication type related referenced publications with the exception of those publications that are currently unpublished shall be listed This list shall identify the publication by number lt name gt lt extref gt lt link gt and title title in alphanumerical sequence If publication is non government the source shall be given and the publications shall be listed alphabetically by title refer to FIGURE G 1 If a List of Applicable Publications LOAP exists it may be referenced G 5 3 Maintenance allocation chart MAC Unit level only The MAC shall be prepared and include an introduction work package and MAC work package 318 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G G 5 3 1 Introduction for standard format MAC work package lt macintrowp gt G 5 3 1 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt This information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 3 1 2 Initial setup information This initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 3 1 3 Introduction lt intro gt The following text shall be prepared and included verbatim refer to FIGURE G 2 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC INTRODUCTION The Army Maintenance System MAC This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at various maintenance levels under the standard Army Main
209. 2 Preparation of front and rear 4 49 5 2 1 Front matter lt 49 5 2 1 1 Eronbcover eT COVOI a 49 5 2 1 1 1 TM number for joint service TMs lt tminfono gt 50 5 2 1 1 2 5 2 1 1 3 5 2 1 1 4 5 2 1 1 5 5 2 1 1 6 5 2 1 1 7 5 2 1 1 8 5 2 1 1 9 5 2 1 1 10 5 2 1 1 11 5 2 1 1 12 5 2 1 1 13 522212 2451 3 5 2 1 3 1 5 2 1 4 5 2 1 5 5 2 1 5 1 5 2 1 5 2 5 2 1 5 3 5 2 1 5 4 5 2 1 5 5 5 2 1 5 6 5 2 1 5 7 5 2 1 5 8 5 2 1 5 9 5 2 1 5 10 5 2 1 5 11 5 2 1 6 5 2 1 6 1 5 2 1 7 5 2 1 8 5 2 1 9 5 2 1 9 1 2 22 5 2 2 1 22 22 52 23 5 2 2 4 5 2 2 5 5 2 2 6 MIL STD 40051 2 CONTENTS PAGE National Overhaul Standards statement NMWR DMWR with NMP Overhaul Standards Only a 50 Weapon system name lt gt 50 Availability statement DMWR NMWR only lt avai gt 50 Supersedure notice for revisions only lt super gt 50 Disclosure notice lt disclos gt tei ecc pred 50 Distribution statement uis uoo eon ore 51 Export Control Warning co det eria 51 Destruction notice lt d
210. 229 259 247 242 258 258 247 228 228 260 45 296 241 188 238 226 60 197 258 190 50 MIL STD 4005 1 2 255 322 261 253 259 256 201 194 201 257 60 334 298 300 336 40 37 44 48 198 302 299 299 296 170 244 44 44 45 258 26 26 27 28 27 250 53 52 37 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE Aviation Aircraft inventory guide sete Aud tt 5 3 12 2 MAC a akaun 533 2 Phased maintenance WD sese essen Ee Nen E 5 3 16 PMI Work PACKAGE obo eret t e HT E 5 3 12 1 PMS work package ied aa edu pae 5 3 15 SLIoras e of 5 3 12 3 Technical description work D 5 5 4 Testing and 1 D 5 4 1 Troubleshooting introduction D 5 5 5 Weighing and loading work package E 5 3 124 B BRAC KOO VET Gossau e Ru 5 2 2 6 Basic Issue Item Work Package G 5 4 Basic Issue Items 5 5 0 00 00000 is supa F 5 3 6 4 Of 15508 dette Dolce e ande Reta 5 3 10 3 4 G 5 4 5 Blank page backing a classified 4 7 22 3 Blank page number
211. 26793 1 GASKET PART OF KIT P N 31766 1 UOC NB4 5 NB6 1 55820 31766 1 SEAL KIT TURBINE 1 10 7 GASKET 1 10 9 PACKING PREFORMED 10 10 5 END OF FIGURE 0011 3 4 blank FIGURE F 7 Example of kits breakdown option 1 310 2 ITEM SMR NO CODE 1 PAOZZ 2 PAOZZ 3 PAFZZ 4 PAFZZ 3 NSN 2540 00 255 0775 2540 00 255 0777 2990 01 065 7617 4320 01 133 4069 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 APPENDIX F 5 PART CAGEC NUMBER 78385 78385 19207 62983 G704528 G704529 12259821 421242L 0095 3 TM X XXX XXXX 24P 0095 6 7 DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC QTY GROUP 94 REPAIR KITS FIG KITS PARTS KIT HEATER VE PERSONNEL HEATER 1 BURNER ASSEMBLY 1 252 6 SCREW MACHINE 1 252 8 PARTS KIT HEATER VE PERSONNEL HEATER 1 SCREW MACHINE 1 252 8 VAPORIZER 1 252 11 WASHER FLAT 1 252 9 WASHER FIBER 1 252 10 WASHER FLAT 1 252 12 WICK 1 252 13 MOUNT ENGINE TO BE INSTALLED ONLY AS A SET 1 CAP ENGINE MOUNT 1 1 14 MOUNT ENGINE 1 1 18 PARTS KIT HYDRAULIC 1 GASKET 1 239 5 PACKING PREFORMED 1 239 4 PACKING PREFORMED 1 239 6 PACKING SEAL 4 239 8 PARTS KIT ROTARYPU 2 239 9 PARTS ROTARY PU 10 239 10 PIN 20 239 14 PLATE INLET SUPPORT 1 239 13 PLATE OUTLETSUPPORT 1 239 7 RETAINER PACKING 1 239 12 RING 1 239 12 ROTOR 1 239 11 SCREW 2 239 15 END OF FIGURE FIGURE F 8 Exa
212. 3 11 2 number index work package lt pnindxwp gt 301 F 5 3 11 2 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo 301 2 Initial setup information anei iae 301 F 5 3 11 2 3 Part number index 301 F 5 3 11 3 Reference designator index work package lt refdesindxwp gt 301 F 5 3 11 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 301 F 5 3 11 3 2 Initial Setup arnfortialtlon ea eu ee edet ati 301 F 5 3 11 3 3 Reference designator index lt refdesindx gt 302 ESGILA Bulkfigurereference isse e 302 gt CIS ANG Kits 302 5 3 12 a ua a Qa sS a Sau ceases 302 F 5 3 12 1 Arrangement of illustrations deal 302 F 5 33 122 Use f e eii 302 F 5 3 12 3 Identical parts item nNUMberS cccessccssscsssssccessssccsensccsenecessccesesscesneceses 302 5 3 12 4 Identical 302 HG NOTES 2 2058 5 RT 302 TECHNICAL MANUALS SUPPORTING INFORMATIONN 317 GE SCOPES SNB LU 317 G 1 1 DUODE deduc RORIS UN E tac nau
213. 3 11 3 lt refdesindxwp gt WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly REFERENCES WORK PACKAGE EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST WORK PACKAGE TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST WORK PACKAGE nsnindxwp 131 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR NMWR DMWR with NMWR with MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content RPSTL RPSTL Reference Element Name IMANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS 6 5 8 WORK PACKAGE CRITICAL SAFETY ITEMS CSI AND FLIGHT SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS FSCAP WORK PACKAGE SUPPORT ITEMS WORK PACKAGE ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK 6 5 11 5 KAGES REAR MATTER sd MATTER mese F js Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 132 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR with DMWR with Overhaul Overhaul Standards MIL STD 40051 2 Standards with RPSTL Reference Element Name DMWR NMWR Content Change transmittal page List of effective pages work packages CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION recommendations EIR lt paper frnt gt lt frntcover gt lt promulgation gt je w pe j R R
214. 4 1 Figure tiles 4 7 27 4 5 Figure titles placement 4 7 27 4 5 2 Final painting refinishing amp marking E 5 3 5 3 22b 4 Final records check eee ed E 5 3 16 6 Binal reproducible copy 4 7 6 Pinal test procedure iu noe reca aD acu E 5 3 5 3 22b 3 PE MM 5 2 1 3 1 First ar cle InSpectI n qu siae ei t Oe E Eas dad E 5 3 8 4 10 Flight safety critical aircraft parts ceteris 5 2 23 Flight safety critical aircraft parts 1 eee seti G 5 9 4 Etyable SCOFBges 5 3 12 3 4 Foldout figure n mbets oe itr 4 7 27 4 3 Foldout page numbering 4 7 16 2 1 4 F ld t Pa CCS asd unn ened 4 7 5 D225 Follew on maintenance 1 epe terit td ere estne teens 5 3 5 3 31 Follow on maintennace service upon reciept task 5 3 2 3 11 NCU ER cad 4 7 16 2 Footnotes REFERENCING 4 7 23 3 6 TO fables ahs Seated 4 7 13 6 Fording and SWMMIN S 2252505 5 2 5 3 3 Foreign ammu
215. 5 Align To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance 329 10 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G Calibrate To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test measuring and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement Consists of comparisons of two instruments one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared Remove install To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance functions Install may be the act of emplacing seating or fixing into position a spare repair part or module component or assembly in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system Paint To prepare and spray color coats of paint so that the ammunition can be identified and protected The color indicating primary use is applied preferably to the entire exterior surface as the background color of the item Other markings are to be repainted as original so as to retain proper ammunition identification Replace To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place Replace is authorized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code Repair The application of maintenance services including fault lo
216. 5 285 5315 01 061 2060 PIN COTTER 42765 MS35333 42 5310 00 595 7237 WASHER LOCK 42765 MS35338 43 5310 00 045 3296 WASHER LOCK 42765 MS35338 44 5310 00 582 5965 WASHER LOCK 42765 MS35338 46 5310 00 004 5033 WASHER LOCK 42765 MS51922 1 5310 00 088 1251 NUT SELF LOCKING 42765 MS51922 17 5310 00 087 4652 NUT SELF LOCKING 42765 11628247 5330 01 109 1925 GASKET 42765 12294872 5310 01 107 3356 WASHER FLAT 42765 2585163 57 5306 00 163 2850 BOLT SELF LOCKING 42765 ANNUAL 3000 MILE 1 D5 19 2353 4240 01 026 3112 PRECLEANER AND PART A1 ONLY 01 42765 2 MS24665 283 5315 00 842 3044 PIN COTTER 02 42765 3 MS24665 285 5315 01 061 2060 PIN COTTER 01 42765 4 MS35333 42 5310 00 595 7237 WASHER LOCK 03 42765 5 MS35338 43 5310 00 045 3296 WASHER LOCK 01 42765 6 MS35338 44 5310 00 582 5965 WASHER LOCK 16 42765 7 MS35338 46 5310 00 004 5033 WASHER LOCK 09 42765 8 MS51922 1 5310 00 088 1251 NUT SELF LOCKING 08 42765 0006 4 FIGURE E 3 Example of a PMCS mandatory replacement parts list 267 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E Table 2 Requirements for XXX System sytem me Table 3 Maintenance for XXX System 0 35 Unit DS GS Depot 0 10 0 05 0 08 0 07 EXAMPLE OF TABULAR RAMDATA Requirements for XXX System Maintainability When maintenance procedures shown in the technical manuals are followed the mature maintainability data ar
217. 5 5 3 Mandatory replacement RE goo 5 3 6 3 2 9 Mandatory replacement parts G 5 8 Mandatory safety of flight inspection items 5 2 12 2 Man 5 3 4 2 3 1 Manual pA 4 7 4 Manual troubleshooting e eade ee i ied D 5 2 1 1 TESTIS st pa F 5 3 6 3 2 6g Manufactured items illustrations E 5 3 9 5 Manufactured items index E 5 3 9 4 Margin data edited uu gated caa ae 4 7 16 3T PAGE 244 246 240 247 239 239 247 239 242 240 243 241 245 240 245 245 241 244 243 246 245 244 242 40 239 241 241 237 223 238 242 244 263 235 202 298 340 260 232 25 197 297 252 252 36 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Marine Corps Equipment improvement recommendations EIRs 5 2 5 1 Promuleation letter ion ea as 92 12 Quantity per equipment column 5 3 6 3 2 8 Marking COMMS tree Bale tino ta 4 7 22 6 4 7 20 4 7 22 4 Nuclear 4 7 19 e RTL ed 4 7 22 5 QA informati n aa aya 4 7 21 Security classification
218. 84 C 4 4 Wse of the DTD XSI S u kap n aga 185 C 4 5 Content structure and format 185 4 6 Style and su 185 C 4 7 Work package development 185 C 4 8 Safety devices and 185 4 9 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive 185 C 4 10 Nuclear 185 4 11 Selective application and tailoring 185 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE C 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENITS 186 C 5 1 Preparation of operator iInstructions 186 C22 Operator instructions work packages 186 5 2 1 Workpackasecontent dE 186 C522 Types of operator instructions work packages 186 5 2 3 Description and use of controls and indicators work package lt ctrlindwp gt 186 C525 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 186 22223 2 Initial setup information wpinfo eese nennen 186 252 33 Con
219. 9 251 NSN eir 5 3 11 1 301 O vehi le loading 5 2 8 191 Operation under unusual conditions 5 2 5 190 Operation under usual conditions 5 24 187 Operational checkout D 5 5 8 3 205 Operator d0St bl toD C52 186 Overhaul Inspection Procedure O P E5 3 82 249 Part number Ind X estet I dS 5 3 11 2 301 5 3 16 261 PNMICSBEroductloli 5 3 4 1 229 5 3 4 2 231 S s naka ka E 5 3 12 1 253 E 5 3 15 259 Pieshop analysts 5 5 6 202 No e Md M eq danda tir E 5 3 8 4 250 Reference designator index 5 3 11 3 301 2 4 uu G 5 2 318 Repair parts for special tools F 5 3 7 298 GC su a an n Gun F 5 3 6 295 Required geninfo Equipment description amp theory 5 B 5 1 1 165 RPSTL IntroductiOn euet eas ana Na PES eis 5 3 5 287 DervICe dPOD S HS SS SASI ia E 5 3 2 223 Specialitools ist a Q
220. A a E nama e e sao w bo Cria DT eue 5 5 5 Backeover Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 124 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE A VI TM Requirements Matrix for MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content RPSTL Reference Element Name Change transmittal page R 5 2 1 4 lt chgsheet gt List of effective pages work packages 5 2 15 Title block page 21 lt titleblk gt Table of contents 1 8 lt contents gt SS REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST FOR ENTER EQUIPMENT NAME 22 REFERENCE DESIGNATOR INDEX WORK PACKAGE 23 lt da2028 gt CA N Jag Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 2 4 lt authent gt rj AAAS JS if ie wi 125 MIL STD 4005 1 2 This page intentionally left blank 126 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR NMWR DMWR with NMWR with MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content RPSTL RPSTL Reference Element Name movwarmm F F MO Promigaiontener Change transmittal page lt chgsheet gt lt paper frnt gt lt frntcover gt lt promulgation gt List of effective pages work packages R R Title block page Table
221. AL NAME DASECSTATUS WORD ASE BIT MEMORY LOCATION 002150 MEMORY DATA BIT S 11 BINARY CONDITION None SIGNAL FUNCTION Indicates last FD LS test ASE bit status REMARKS DASEC to PASS If thirddigit displayed on HODis 1 goto Step 27 FAIL Locationof fault replace DASEC 1 1520 238 23 Series 27 SIGNAL NAME DASECSTATUS WORD VD TEST MEMORY LOCATION 002150 MEMORY DATA BIT S 10 CONDITION None SIGNAL FUNCTION Indicates last FD LS test VD bit status REMARKS DASEC PASS If thirddigit displayed on HOD is 3 or 4 goto Step 28 FAIL Locationof fault replace DASEC TM 1 1520 238 23 Series 28 SIGNAL DASECSTATUS WORD AGD BIT MEMORY LOCATION 002150 MEMORY DATA 5 9 BINARY CONDITION None SIGNAL FUNCTION Indicates last FD LS test AGD bit status REMARKS DASEC PASS If thirddigit displayed on HOD is 3 or 6 goto Step 29 FAIL Locationof fault replace DASEC TM 1 1520 238 23 Series 0327 5 FIGURE D 7 Example of content for a troubleshooting procedure Method C 216 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX D TM X XXX XXXX XX 0481 DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE COMPUTER PROCESSOR OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING INITIAL SETUP Test Equipment Test set WP 0654 Item 4 References WP 0005 COMPUTER PROCESSOR TEST PROCEDURE STEP 1 Remove computer processor top cover WP 0005 2 Apply power to test set and place test s
222. B SC SGML SKO SMR SRA SRAs SRU TAMMS TAMMS TB TBO TDA TMDE TOE U I UOC URL UUT WP WRAs WTB MIL STD 40051 2 Preliminary Maintenance Allocation Chart Preventive Maintenance Checklist Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services Phased Maintenance Inspection Preventive Maintenance Services Preshop Analysis Quality Assurance Quantity Reliability Availability Maintainability Reliability Centered Maintenance Reading Grade Level Reliability Maintainability and Supportability Repair Parts and Special Tools List Supply Bulletin Supply Catalog Standard Generalized Markup Language Sets Kits and Outfits Source Maintenance and Recoverability Specialized Repair Activity Shop Replacement Assemblies Shop Replacement Units Total Army Maintenance Management System Total Army Maintenance Management System Aviation Technical Bulletin Time Between Overhaul Tables of Distribution and Allowances Technical Manual Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment Table of Organization and Equipment Unit of Issue Usable On Code Uniform Resource Locator Unit Under Test Work Package Weapons Replacement Assemblies Warranty Technical Bulletin MIL STD 4005 1 2 XML Extensible Markup Language XSL XML Stylesheet Language 3 2 Acquiring Activity The DOD component activity or organization of a using military service or that organization delegated by a using service that is responsible for the selection
223. COPE ELBOW 118 1 in mount M146 10559855 19200 0441 2 FIGURE G 10 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method A Continued 352 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0441 Y Table 2 Basic Issue Items 2 3 4 National Stock Usable On Number NSN Description Part Number CAGEC Code 1290 00 535 7629 LIGHT AIMING POST M14 7197188 19200 4930 00 766 3545 LUBRICATING GUN HAND high pressure in tool bag 102758 36251 8415 00 266 8843 MITTENS CLOTH pair M1942 in oddment tray 11655982 19207 4930 00 262 8868 HAND steel pump type spout 9 lg in left cab door stowage box 328 72798 7240 00 160 0455 PAIL UTILITY 14 qt capability on vehicle floor RRP35 81348 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0441 3 4 blank FIGURE G 10 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method A Continued 353 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0441 UNIT MAINTENANCE M198 HOWITZER COMPONENTS OF END ITEM COEI AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS BII LISTS INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists COEI and BII for the M198 howitzer to help you inventory items for safe and efficient operation of the equipment General The COEI and BII information is divided into the following lists Components of End Item COELI This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to requisition replacemen
224. Control Act Title 22 U S C Sec 2751 et seq or the Export Administration Act of 1979 as amended Title 50 U S C App Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DOD Directive 5230 25 5 2 1 1 9 Destruction notice lt destr gt All TMs marked with distribution statements D or X shall be marked with the destruction notice provided by the acquiring activity from DOD 5230 24 refer to FIGURE 10 5 2 1 1 10 General purpose notice lt general_purpose_notice gt When specified by the acquiring activity additional notice s may be included that are not addressed by the notices in 5 2 1 1 4 through 5 2 1 1 9 The notice shall have a title followed by the notice text 5 2 1 1 11 Service nomenclature lt servnomen gt All TMs shall include the service or acquiring activity s nomenclature 5 2 1 1 12 TM Publication date lt date gt The TM publication date shall be the official publication date assigned by the acquiring activity If the publication is produced in more than one media the date must be the same on all media refer to FIGURE 10 5 2 1 1 13 For Army communications security COMSEC manuals use Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity unclassified COMSEC TMs shall contain the notice FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY The notice shall be placed at the bottom center of the front cover and
225. D 4 9 Safety devices and interlocks Information shall be prepared pertaining to the purpose and location of all safety devices and interlocks in conjunction with the pertinent procedures D 4 10 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts If the equipment contains ESD sensitive parts components or circuits cautions and ESD labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure ESD sensitive parts are not damaged or degraded during maintenance and operation Refer to 4 7 20 for requirements on labeling with ESD Actions which could damage ESD sensitive parts but which are not directly related to handling or operation of ESD sensitive parts shall not be annotated with the ESD acronym but shall be preceded by a caution statement 195 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 4 11 Nuclear hardness If the weapon system equipment has nuclear survivability requirements for example over pressure and burst thermal radiation electromagnetic pulse or transient radiation effects on electronics cautions and Hardness Critical Processes HCP labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure the hardness of the equipment is not degraded during handling or operation Refer to 4 7 19 for requirements on labeling with HCP Actions which could degrade hardness but which are not directly involved in establishing nuclear hardness shall not be annotated with the acronym but shall be preceded by a cautio
226. D 5 5 4 5 Theory of operation thryproc When theory of operation is required to support the troubleshooting procedures it shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements provided in B 5 4 3 Theory of Operation as applicable If this information is provided in another TM a reference to the TM may be included in lieu of including the theory data D 5 5 5 Troubleshooting index work package lt tsindxwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and consist of either a malfunction symptom index lt tsindx symptom gt lt tsindx messageword gt or a system subsystem index lt tsindx system gt D 5 5 5 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 5 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package 201 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 5 5 3 Malfunction symptom index lt tsindx symptom gt lt tsindx messageword gt When all probable faults have been determined and described prepare a malfunction symptom index work package using the exact description of the fault or symptom as was used in the troubleshooting procedures Group symptoms to common system areas both in the malfunction symptom index and in the troubleshooting procedures For example if a system has a data link communications radar display and tracking systems the symptoms
227. DG DEFINITIONS 5 a 194 D 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENIT S 194 D 4 1 C 194 0 42 Development of troubleshooting 8 194 D 4 3 Maintenance level applicability dot ger apes eta duces 195 D 4 5 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery 195 D 4 5 Ese f DTDEXSDS quise 195 D 4 6 Content Structure and format edid sent eee 195 4 7 Styleand format 195 D 4 8 Work package development EUR QE 195 D 4 9 Safety devices and 195 D 4 10 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts 195 2 4 11 196 2 4 12 Selective application and 196 D5 DETAILED REQUIREMENI S 196 D 5 1 Testing and troubleshooting philosophy eee 196 D 5 2 Informigtiomitobe providedu uu NS QN act 196 D 5 2 1 Methods of testing and 197 D 5 2 1 1 Manual nonautomatic t
228. Do not remove radiator cap until coolant temperature gauge reads in bottom one quarter of green zone Turncap slowly to release pressure b Check coolant level WP 0040 STEP2 Open power unit access door WP 0041 0251 1 FIGURE D 6 Example of content for a troubleshooting procedure Method B 215 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX D TM X XXX XXXX XX 0327 23 SIGNAL NAME DASECSTATUS WORD DC ANALOG OUTPUT BIT MEMORY LOCATION 002150 MEMORY DATA BIT S 15 CONDITION None SIGNAL FUNCTION Indicates status of DC analog circuits REMARKS From DASEC to FCC PASS If seconddigit displayedon HOD is 7 goto Step 24 FAIL Locationof fault replace DASEC 1 1520 238 23 Series 24 SIGNAL NAME DASECSTATUS WORD AD DA BIT MEMORY LOCATION 002150 MEMORY DATA BIT S 13 CONDITION None SIGNAL FUNCTION Indicates status of analog to digital and digital to analog circuits REMARKS From DASEC to FCC PASS If thirddigit displayedon HODis 1 3 5 or 7 goto Step 25 FAIL replace DASEC TM 1 1520 238 23 Series 25 SIGNAL NAME DASECSTATUS WORD FD LS TEST MEMORY LOCATION 002150 MEMORY DATA BIT S 12 CONDITION None SIGNAL FUNCTION Indicates FD LS ground testis being run REMARKS From DASEC to FCC PASS If thirddigit displayed on HODis or 5 goto Step 26 FAIL Locationof fault replace DASEC TM 1 1520 238 23 Series 26 SIGN
229. E Parts and Special Tools List DMWR Depot Maintenance Work Requirement TABLE DMWR w RPSTL Depot Maintenance Work Requirement including Repair TABLE A VII Parts and Special Tools List DMWR Containing Depot Maintenance Work Requirement containing National Overhaul Standards Maintenance Repair Standards DMWR Containing Depot Maintenance Work Requirement containing National Overhaul Standards Maintenance Repair Standards including Repair Parts and w RPSTL Special Tools List NMWR National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWR w RPSTL National Maintenance Work Requirement including Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL Repair Parts and Special Tools List Aircraft Aviation Unit Troubleshooting Manual Troubleshooting Aviation Intermediate Troubleshooting Manual Aviation Unit and Intermediate Troubleshooting Manual Aircraft PMS Preventive Maintenance Services Manual Aircraft PM Phased Maintenance Inspection Checklist CONVENTIONAL AND CHEMICAL AMMUNITION 10 Operator s Manual 12 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual 12 amp P Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 13 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual 13 amp P Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 14 Operator s Unit Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual 14 amp P Operator s Unit Direct Suppo
230. E TM Requirements Matrix for 12 13 14 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P 14 amp P Reference Element Name PARTS INFORMATION 10 THROUGH 14 12 amp P THROUGH 14 amp P NTRODUCTION WORK PACKAGE P R R 535 fintrowp gt REPAIR PARTS LIST WORK PACKAGE P R 43 REPAIR PARTS FOR SPECIAL TOOLS 3 7 _ _ partswp WORK PACKAGE IT PARTS LIST WORK PACKAGE 5 3 8 E538 BULK ITEM WORK PACKAGE BULK ITEM BULK ITEM WORK PACKAGE PACKAGE 3 9 Kbulkitemswp gt SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK 3 10 ELM PACKAGE SN INDEX WORK PACKAGE P N INDEX WORK PACKAGE lt pnindxwp gt 527 DESIGNATOR INDEX tes a eee 527 SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly perenences work INTRODUCTION FOR STANDARD WORK PACKAGE FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY 84 OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY WORK PACKAGE G 5 3 4 Kmacwp FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY COMPONENTS OF END ITEM COEI Kcoeibiiwp D BASIC ISSUE ITEMS BII LISTS WORK PACKAGE ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST 6 5 5 GENE AAL WORK PACKAGE XPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS G 5 6 IST WORK PACKAGE TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIS
231. E C AND D 1 AND 63 7900 THRU 63 7921 WITHOUT HIGH FLOATATION LANDING GEAR HAVE 4 FITTINGS 2 PER GEAR 2 LUBRICATION INTERVAL SHOWN IS FOR AVERAGE CONDITIONS MORE FREQUENT LUBRICATION MAY BE NECESSARY UNDER EXTREMELY DUSTY CONDITIONS TABLE OF LUBRICANTS SYMBOLS FREQUENCY METHOD OF APPLICATION IDENTI TYPE OF FICATION SPECIFICATION LUBRICANT O 100 Hours BRUSH NA GENERAL PURPOSE WIDE TEMPERATURE IX 500 Hours RANGE MJ L G 813228 C221 GREASE AIRCRAFT FIGURE E 8 Example of a lubrication chart 272 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 0071 Table 1 MOBILIZATION REQUIREMENTS WORK PACKAGE ACTION WP 0088 Materials and Fabrication Step 6 Add Depending on the urgency of requirements availability of mate rials and fabrication lead time provisions of this work package may be relaxed When that occurs any practical method may be used to inscribe or attach the data to the equipment i e decals Cleaning Step 3 Add Clean only to the extent necessary to perform preshop analysis Cleaning Step 8 Add Clean only to the extent necessary to inspect components Painting Step 3 Add Painted surfaces will be treated for corrosion and scratches that expose bare metal Touch up painting need not correlate in hue and gloss Delete END OF WORK PACKAGE 0071 2 FIGURE E 9 Example of depot mobilization requirements 213 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDI
232. E E 11 Example of torque limits data 275 er dq IS MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX E FORM 8 AIRCRAFT WEIGHING RECORD Rene AND AEs age eee DATE WEIGHED YYMMDD MODEL DESIGN SERIES SERIAL NUMBER PLACE WEIGHED WEIGHT AND BALANCE TECHNICIAN DUTY PHONE NUMBER last first M I anm 4102 7 4101 5 LEFT MAIN 21003 RIGHT MAIN 3998 6 4002 3 4006 0 1 j TOTAL 12 as weighed 11089 5 208 9 Not to be posted on Chart C PLUMB BOB ANGLE MEASUREMENTS The distance from the jib point to the center line of the main reactions Obtain by measurements The distance from the reference datum to the jib point of the aircraft from which A plumb bob can be dropped to the ground Obtain from the aircraft diagram in Chart E The distance from the reference datum to the center line of the main reactions E 1 B E 1 B If the jib point is aft of the center line of the main reactions The distance between the main and nose tail reaction Obtain by measurement The distance from the reference datum to the center line of the nose or tail reaction F E D for nose reaction F E D for tail reaction ARM AS WEIGHED CORRECTED ARM _206 0 3 5 NOSE UP FOR LEVEL ATTITUDE TAIL REACTION DIAGRAMS FOR MEASURING VARIOUS TYPES OF REACTIONS TO DETERMINE ARM OF SUPPORT POINTS Check dimensions E and F against approximate dimensions listed on Chart E DD JAN 365 2 REPLACES DD FORM 3658 SEP WH
233. E asas asas sassa WP 0006 Hydraulic System Theory of WP 0007 Amphibious System Theory of Operation essent WP 0008 Bilge Pumps and Drain Valves Theory of Operation sse eene eene nennen nne WP 0009 Fire Extinguisher System Theory 2 WP 0010 3 Chapter 2 Operator Instructions Expendable Supplies and Materials List tee tee ener teer pe re MA E WP 0123 Table 1 Expendable and Durable Items List eese 0123 1 Foldout Figures Wiring Schematic a i iier RERO o e RR ERR TERCERO INI Rien FP 1 EO 2 Hydraul Flow oett tr rette t e Rer Ie eR ERR ehe FP 3 Glossary Index FIGURE 21 Example of table of contents 88 MIL STD 4005 1 2 MANUAL NUMBER TABLE OF CONTENTS WP Sequence No m WP 0001 00 20 mm Self Propelled Air Defense Artillery Gun M163A sse WP 0002 GROUP 01 20 mm Air Defense Gun Cannon 168 1 WP 0003 GROUP 0101 Recoil Adapter Assembly certet e ec Y ere tete eee fena expendere ate WP 0004 GROUP 0102 Breech Bolt Assembly ornnes e e e eee e e WP 0005 GROUP 0103 Center Clamp Assembly eene en HR RC e ee ete WP 0006 GROUP 02 20 mm Gun Mount Assembly 157 1
234. EI and BII for the M198 howitzer to help you inventory items for safe and efficient operation of the equipment General The COEI and information is divided into the following lists Components of End Item COET This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to requisition replacements These items are part of the M198 howitzer As part of the end item these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts Items of COEI are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment only when necessary Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items Basic Issue Items These essential items are required to place the M198 howitzer in operation operate it and to do emergency repairs Although shipped separately packaged BII must be with the M198 howitzer during operation and when it is transferred between property accounts Listing these items is your authority to request requisition them for replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE MTOE Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items Explanation of Columns in the List and List Column 1 Item Number Gives you the reference number of the item listed Column 2 National Stock Number NSN and Illustration Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes and provides an illustration of the item Column 3 Descr
235. FGCs assemblies only the identical parts with identical SMR codes within each FGC assembly shall have the same item number 5 3 12 4 Identical assemblies When two or more identical assemblies same part number exist in different places 1 in the equipment a breakdown of the parts shall be illustrated only once i e the first time the assembly appears in the RPSTL For subsequent times that the identical assembly appears the assembly item name shall appear in the description and UOC column and be followed by the statement SEE FIG FOR BREAKDOWN Refer to FIGURE F 5 F 6 NOTES The notes in section 6 apply to this appendix 302 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F i Three Sheet Illustrations FIGURE F 1 RPSTL page layout scenarios 303 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F 0001 UNIT MAINTENANCE M198 HOWITZER INTRODUCTION SCOPE This RPSTL lists and authorizes spares and repair parts special tools special test measurement and diagnostic equipment TMDE and other special support equipment required for performance of unit maintenance of the M198 howitzer It authorizes the requisitioning issue and disposition of spares repair parts and special tools as indicated by the source maintenance and recoverability SMR codes
236. Final painting refinishing and marking Procedures shall be prepared for any final painting refinishing and marking that could not be done during the overhaul procedures The materials and tools required to do the job shall be identified Depot level maintenance shall include data plate replacement data For data plates which require replacement the type of material shall be indicated Detailed preparation and attachment instructions shall be prepared The instructions for stamping data plates shall include the initials of the facility performing the overhaul or modification the contact number if applicable the date of overhaul or modification the part number and the total operating time since new if applicable The instructions shall specify the letter and figure sizes and indicate their placement adjustment to manufacturer s data The following statement shall be inserted When sufficient space is not available on the existing data plate to add information the plate shall be replaced and all pertinent data transferred to the new plate Data shall not be stamped directly on any part assembly or item of equipment except when approved by the Government 5 3 5 3 23 Preservation packaging and marking DMWR NMWR only ppm The following instructions shall be prepared a Packaging information The following statement shall be included verbatim Refer to the packaging segment of the Army Master Data File Retrieval Mi
237. HDBK 1222 b Method B Text lt faultproc gt Troubleshooting procedures shall consist of an all inclusive series of specific fault symptoms for the system equipment being troubleshot For each fault symptom lt symptom gt the probable malfunction or series of malfunctions lt malfunc gt that may have caused the fault shall be listed For each probable malfunction identified a corrective action lt action gt shall be stated with a reference to the work package or paragraph lt xref gt lt link gt that contains the data to perform the corrective action refer to FIGURE D 6 c Method C Multiplex read codes lt muxproc gt This method of troubleshooting is based on the use of computer generated multiplex MUX read code data The MUX read code data are listed in troubleshooting sequence order by signal name 1 Signal data For each signal name lt signame gt the following MUX read code data shall be provided refer to FIGURE D 7 a Memory location lt memloc gt b Memory data bit s lt memdata gt c Condition lt condition gt d Signal function lt sigfunc gt Remarks lt remarks gt f Pass lt criteria gt g Fail lt criteria gt 2 The MUX read code data The MUX read code data is used in conjunction with a malfunction symptom index refer to D 5 5 4 and an operational checkout procedure refer to D 5 5 8 3 6 For each system or equipment the MUX read code data shall be listed under the system
238. IAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE p eee 110 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 5 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 30 amp P 40 amp P Reference Element Nam CHAPTER X 8 lt mim gt n AMMUNITION 54 lt ammunitioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AMMUNITION MAINTENANCE WORK 5 3 14 1 lt ammowp gt IPACKAGE AMMUNITION MARKING 5 3 14 2 lt ammo markingwp gt INFORMATION WORK PACKAGE FOREIGN AMMUNITION NATO E 5 3 14 3 lt natowp gt WORK PACKAGE PARTS INFORMATION 20 30 40 E E 20 amp P 30 amp P 40 amp P 5 3 3 EN 5 2 WORK PACKAGE SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK PACKAGE P N INDEX WORK PACKAGE F lt pnindxwp gt REFERENCE DESIGNATOR INDEX 2 285 lt refdesindxwp gt WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X 22 lt sim gt SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly REFERENCES WORK PACKAGE edis lt refwp gt INTRODUCTION FOR STANDARD lt macintrowp gt FORMAT MAC WORK PACKAGE FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY 53 OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY 53 WORK PACKAGE 5 3 lt macwp gt FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY 111 lt stlwp gt MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 Content 30 amp P 40 amp P Reference El
239. ICH WILL BE USED FRONT SIDE FIGURE E 12 Example of an aircraft weighing record DD Form 365 2 276 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E AIRCRAFT WEIGHING RECORD Lowe uu ee E 5 From Col 1 below 248 4525 IRCRAFT WHEN WEIGHED From Col Il below BASIC AIRCRAFT 29 COLUMN Il WEIGHED BUT WEIGHT MOMENT BASIC WEIGHT WHEN WEIGHED REACTION USED TYPE SCALE SERIAL NUMBER E 1202 CALIBRATION DATE YYMMDD 4500 CALIBRATED ACCURACY REMARKS HELICOPTER WEIGHED ON JACKS 35 NOSE UP BASIC WEIGHT CORRECTED 0 LEVEL ATTITUDE V Enter constant used DD Form 365 2 Reverse J AN 82 U S Government Printing Offices 1987 181 032 66608 REVERSE SIDE FIGURE E 12 Example of an aircraft weighing record DD Form 365 2 Continued 277 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 100 2 BLO a 100 105 238 srATIONS 0 100 200 300 400 250 5 LEVELING gt Hl M Se 200 a NOSE ELECTRONIC e AFT FUEL TANK RH AFT 13 97 FT 24 11 68 FT y EP BAY 5 100 21 T mw nm Ey IN vO oe AFT J ACK PAD LH STORAGE BAY FWD JACK PADS rs F S 120 2 BL 16 5 _115 00 55 8 FS F S 0 200 280 540 DIM E DIM D DIM F COMPARTMENTS A NOSE ELECTRONICS F FUEL AMMO K LH NACELLE FWD AVIONICS G UPPER DECK RH AFT AVIONICS C LHFwD avionics H RH WING M LH
240. IGES Introductory information Maintenance allocation chart MAC Maintenance instructions National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWR Operator instructions Quality assurance QA Repair parts and special tools lists RPSTL Security classification Standard Generalized Markup Language SGML Supporting information Theory of operation Troubleshooting procedures Work package WP Work package identification number 61 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM X XXX XXXX XX 0029 DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE 24 VOLT CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE REPAIR ASSEMBLY REPAIR REASSEMBLY INITIAL SETUP Tools and Special Tools Materials Parts cont Pliers diagonal cutting WP 0060 Item 3 Solder non acid WP 0059 Item 17 Screwdriver flat tip 3 inch WP 0060 Item 43 Soldering iron gun type WP 0060 Item 48 Personnel Required Stripper wire hand WP 0060 Item 55 One Materials Parts References Alcohol denatured WP 0059 Item 2 WP 0023 Bruce acid swabbing WP 0059 Item 4 0030 Flux rosin WP 0059 Item 8 Equipment Condition 24 volt connector receptacle removed WP 0038 DISASSEMBLY NOTE Tag wires to aid in installation WP 0023 If circuit marker bands are missing or not readable replace WP 0038 1 Unscrew and pull back bushing retaining nut Figure 1 Item 1 from shell Figure 1 Item 4 2 Using screwdriver pry off shell Figure 1 Item 4 from busing Figure 1 Item 2 3 Using pliers pull out 12 i
241. ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK PACKAGE TOROUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE 4411 CHAPTER 5 mim AMMUNITION des lt ammunitioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AMMUNITION MAINTENANCE WORK 5 3 14 1 lt ammowp gt IPACKAGE AMMUNITION MARKING INFORMATION E 5 3 14 2 lt ammo markingwp gt WORK PACKAGE FOREIGN AMMUNITION NATO WORK 5 3 14 3 lt natowp gt IPACKAGE 136 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWKR with DMWKR with Overhaul Overhaul Standards MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content Standards with RPSTL Reference Element Name CHAPTER lt pim gt PARTS INFORMATION DMWR WITH OVERHAUL STANDARDS DMWR WITH OVERHAUL STANDARDS WITH RPSTL E nv 3 5 3 REPAIR PARTS FOR SPECIAL TOOLS WORK 5 3 7 lt stl_partswp gt PACKAGE pur pus puces REFERENCE DESIGNATOR INDEX WORK x 5 3 11 3 lt refdesindxwp gt PACKAGE CHAPTER X R G 5 1 lt sim gt SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS LIST G 5 6 lt explistwp gt WORK PACKAGE TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST WORK G 5 7 lt toolidwp gt PACKAGE MANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS WORK G 5 8 mrplwp PACKAGE CRITICAL SAFETY ITEMS CSI AND FLIGHT G 5 9 lt csi fscap wp g
242. Introduction lt intro gt The following text shall be prepared and included verbatim refer to FIGURE G 4 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC INTRODUCTION The Army Maintenance System MAC This introduction provides a general explanation of all maintenance and repair functions authorized at the two maintenance levels under the Two Level Maintenance System concept 328 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G This MAC immediately following the introduction designates overall authority and responsibility for the performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component The application of the maintenance functions to the end item or component levels which are shown on the MAC in column 4 as Field includes two columns Unit maintenance and Direct Support maintenance The Unit maintenance column is divided again into two more subcolumns C for Operator or Crew and O for Unit maintenance Sustainment includes two subcolumns general support H and depot D The tools and test equipment requirements immediately following the MAC list the tools and test equipment both special tools and common tool sets required for each maintenance function as referenced from the MAC The remarks immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements contain supplemental instructions and explanatory notes for a particular maintenance function Maintenance Functions Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as
243. KAGES COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT lt opcheck tswp gt AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES CHAPTER X 5 lt mim gt PMCS d lt pmescategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE PMCS is required as a minimum in one maintenance chapter PMCS INTRODUCTION WORK PACKAGE s341 7 epmcsintrowp gt IPMCS INCLUDING LUBRICATION E 5 3 4 2 lt pmcswp gt INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE 114 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A IV TM Requirements Matrix for 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 23 amp P 24 amp P 34 amp P Reference Element Name CHAPTER X MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS NOTE PMCS is required as a minimum in one maintenance chapter Shelter requirements Installation instructions Preliminary servicing of equipment Preliminary checks and adjustment of equipment Preliminary calibration of equipment Circuit alignment Ammunition markings Classification of defects Ammunition handling Procedures to activate ammunition Additional service upon receipt task Follow on maintenance EQUIPMENT USER FITTING INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE PERSONAL USE EQUIPMENT IPMCS INTRODUCTION WORK PACKAG IPMCS INCLUDING LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Servicing Ground handling Inspection of installed items Removal Disassembly Cleaning Inspection acceptance a
244. LMI The selective application of scientific and engineering efforts undertaken during the acquisition process as part of the systems engineering process to assist in acquiring the required support and providing the required support during the operational phrase at minimum cost 3 81 Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC A list of equipment maintenance functions showing maintenance level The MAC is arranged in functional group code sequence or in top down breakdown sequence in the logical order of disassembly following the RPSTL order of assembly subassembly listings 3 82 Maintenance level The separation of maintenance activities or functions in the U S Army according to the required skills and available facilities 3 83 Maintenance task A series of related maintenance procedures with a definite beginning and end 3 84 Maximum Time to Repair MTTR The total elapsed time clock hours for corrective maintenance divided by the total number of corrective maintenance actions during a given period of time 3 85 Mean time between corrective maintenance For a particular interval the total functional life of a population of an item divided by the total number of failures within the population during the measurement interval The definition holds for time rounds miles events or other measure of life units Used only when referring to depot level maintenance 3 86 Meantime between failures MTBF For a particular
245. M A list of personnel protective devices should also be included Hazardous materials warnings may be presented in the standard warning format without an icon or in conjunction with an icon or a combination of icons as described in 4 7 7 4 The acquiring activity shall approve the use of icons other than those presented in FIGURE 3 Hazards that result from a combination of materials must clearly be identified to indicate that mixing or combining the materials creates the hazard 4 7 7 5 3 1 Format for hazardous materials warnings with icons lt icon gt Hazardous materials warnings with icons consist of a WARNING header the icon s and a full description of the hazardous material and the precautions to be taken 4 7 7 5 3 2 Abbreviated format hazardous materials warnings with icons lt icon gt For commonly used substances only e g dry cleaning solvent hydraulic fluids paints etc an abbreviated format may be used for hazardous materials warnings The abbreviated format consists of the WARNING header refer to 4 7 7 4c the icon s and the signal word s e g ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL TT I 735 of the hazardous material The full description of the warning shall be placed in the warning summary Icons may be used in technical manuals warnings either singly or in combination When icons are used in combination the placement and format should adhere to the methods provided in MIL HDBK 1222 4 7 7 5 4 Equipment damage caution icons l
246. MDE Any system or device used to evaluate the operational condition of an end item or subsystem thereof or to identify and or isolate any actual or potential malfunction TMDE includes diagnostic and prognostic equipment semiautomatic and automatic test equipment with issued software and calibration test or measurement equipment 3 146 Time Between Overhaul TBO items Those items having a definite retirement schedule within a defined overhaul interval e g those items which must be replaced within a system assembly subassembly or component between scheduled overhauls 3 147 Title Block Page The first page after the warning summary in the front matter portion of a TM It identifies the TM by publication number date title and NSN part number model of equipment covered in the manual 3 148 Top down generation breakdown The pyramidal breakdowns of an end item with the top item being the complete end item The process of breakdown is established from the engineering drawing structure in an NHA progression until the lowest reparable in each family tree group is identified All nonreparables spare parts can be identified in like manner to establish their NHA relationships 3 149 Unit maintenance The responsibility of a using organization to perform maintenance on its assigned equipment It normally consists of inspecting servicing lubricating adjusting and replacing parts minor assemblies and subassemblies The letter
247. Ms used in electronic display mode instead of paper makes this consistency extremely important Exceptions may be made only if essential for proper grouping of information for the user s benefit Otherwise information shall be formatted or reformatted so that all pages have the same orientation 25 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE I Manual styles and trim sizes Maximum Style Trim Size Orientation Printing Area Pocket 4 x 5 Vertical 3l x 5 5 4 Horizontal 5x 31 Logbook 615 x 9 Vertical 515 x 8 915 x 6 Horizontal 80 x 515 Standard 84x 11 Vertical 7 10 11 x 81 Horizontal 7 10 Double Standard 17x 11 1534 x 9 4 7 5 Foldout pages a Foldout pages if needed shall be the same height as regular pages in the standard manual only and shall be folded 2 4 or 6 times depending on the width necessary Each foldout shall have a blank apron wide enough for the user to look at the data while reading text elsewhere in the TM Foldouts shall not be used in repair parts and special tools lists RPSTL or operator only TMs b TABLE lists the foldout maximum trim sizes and foldout maximum printing area for foldout pages The minimum margin is 2 inch top and bottom and 2 inch on the side opposite the binding edge c Foldout pages shall be the last printed material in the TM or volume TABLE II Foldout maximum page sizes in inches Foldout Maximum Foldout Maximum Manual Trim Size Page Trim Size Including Ap
248. NANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY COMPONENTS OF END ITEM G 5 4 lt coeibiiwp gt COEI AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION G 5 5 lt aalwp gt IST AAL WORK PACKAGE XPENDABLE AND DURABLE G 5 6 lt explistwp gt TEMS LIST WORK PACKAGE TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST G 5 7 lt toolidwp gt WORK PACKAGE ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK G 5 11 lt genwp gt REAR MATTER R b22 1 DA Form 2028 E223 ES 1 e But mee ar Bue C Che Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 150 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Chemical Ammunition 20 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 40 amp P Reference Element Nam Ee pee c s jJ Change transmittal page 2 2 1 4 lt chgsheet gt ee mue O _ Table of contents R m pane pum CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK ginfowp PACKAGE recommendations EIR Hand receipt HR manuals 2 2 lt handreceipt gt Corrosion prevention and control CPC A cpcdata Ozone depleting substances ODS 2 2 odsdata Destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy 12 4 lt destructmat gt use Preparation for storage or shipment 2 4 Nomenclature cross reference list 2 t
249. NED OPERATIONAL p 355 CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES CHAPTER X DSL TROUBLESHOOTING D 5 4 2 PROCEDURES NOTE The notation indicates that if required at least one of the these content items shall be included TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK 0 5 5 3 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT WORK 3 3 8 3 PACKAGES 128 Element Name lt supdata gt lt copyrt gt lt descwp gt lt eqpinfo gt lt locdesc gt lt eqpdiff gt lt eqpdata gt lt thrywp gt lt tim gt lt troubledmwrnmwrcategory gt lt tsindxwp gt lt pshopanalwp gt lt compchklistwp gt lt opcheckwp gt lt tswp gt lt opcheck tswp gt lt tim gt lt troublecategory gt lt tsindxwp gt lt opcheckwp gt MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR NMWR DMWR with NMWR with MIL STD 40051 2 RPSTL RPSTL Reference DMWR NMWR Content TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES Element Name lt tswp gt lt opcheck tswp gt lt mim gt lt depotcategory gt MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Assembly and preparation for use aviation only Servicing Ground handling Inspect
250. NOT MEASUREMENT SENSITIVE MIL STD 40051 2 15 October 2004 SUPERSEDING See 6 4 DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE STANDARD PRACTICE PREPARATION OF DIGITAL TECHNICAL INFORMATION FOR PAGE BASED TECHNICAL MANUALS AMCS 7542 AREA TMSS DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT Approved for public release distribution is unlimited MIL STD 4005 1 2 FOREWORD 1 This standard is approved for use by the Department of the Army and the Department of the Marine Corps and is available for use by all Departments and Agencies of the Department of Defense DoD 2 This standard establishes the technical content requirements and mandatory style and format requirements for the preparation of technical manuals TMs and subsequent revisions required to support the various types of equipment and weapon systems within the Department of the Army and Department of the Marine Corps The requirements contained in this standard cover operation and maintenance at all levels through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs 3 This 2 part book form consists of the following parts MIL STD 40051 1 Preparation of Digital Technical Information for Interactive Electronic Technical Manuals IETM 5 40051 2 Preparation of Digital Technical Information for Page Based Technical Manuals 4 Comments suggestions or questions should be addressed to USAMC Logistics Support Activity A
251. NSN column nsn The NSN column shall include the NSN assigned to the applicable item 205 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F 5 3 6 3 2 4 Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC lt cageno gt column The applicable five digit CAGEC number as listed in Catalog Handbook H4 H8 shall appear in the CAGEC column F 5 3 6 3 2 5 Part number lt partno gt column The part number is listed in the PART NUMBER column 5 3 6 3 2 6 Description and UOC column The DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column shall include the following information a Functional group header lt fncgrp gt The functional group header shall precede the first repair part item in the description column The header shall consist of the functional group number and title fnccode appearing on the top line s The next line s below shall include the figure number and the figure title lt fnctitle gt Item name The item name shall consist of the federal item name lt name gt taken from Federal Supply Cataloging Handbook H6 and if necessary a minimum description desc to further identify the item When provisioning data is used the desc shall consist of the data from the provisioning document If the item is a Hardness Critical Item the symbol HCI shall precede the item name Indentions The item name listed in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column shall be indented to show components of assemblies and next higher assemblies Refer
252. NTENANCE 24 VOLT CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE REPAIR DISASSEMBLY REPAIR REASSEMBLY EFFECTIVITY NOTICE Model A1 This WP supersedes 0018 dated 14 January 2001 which should be destroyed in accordance with applicable security regulations 0017 1 FIGURE 5 Example of a work package title block 70 MIL STD 4005 1 2 FOLD MANUAL NUMBER 1 Sheet 1 of 2 FP 1 FP 2 blank FIGURE 6 Example of a foldout page 71 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONFIDENTIAL THIS PAGE IS UNCLASSIFIED TM NUMBER 0003 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE START ENGINE WITH OUTSIDE POWER SOURCE OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS INITIAL SETUP Tools and Special Tools References Slave cable TM X XXX XXX XX 24 volt power source or other vehicle Equipment Condition Personnel Required Vehicle unable to start under own power Driver 2 Operational vehicle engine stopped WP 0021 START ENGINE WARNING Using ether to start engine can result in engine explosion Personnel can be injured or killed Never use ether to assist starting an engine CAUTION Battery or electrical damage can occur if electrical switches are left on Turn off all electrical switches in both vehicles NOTE Steps 1 8 should be done in both operational and disabled vehicles 1 Check that master power switch is OFF Check that engine accessory switch is OFF Check that turret power switch is OFF See TM X XXX XXX XX Check that fire suppression switch is in m
253. OF ServieeabLlty istos n E 5 3 12 1 4 Statement of responsibility E 5 3 8 4 3 Storage of aircraft work package 5 3 12 3 Stowage amp Decal Data Plate Guide WP 5 7 St wage E IO uius od serene u s e dase aoe 5 2 7 4 S S 4 7 Style and 4 6 4 6 indies ata oe ne esa 4 7 otyle and format eiie Ie ede E 4 8 SUE Bt formate s ss ql dpt do a es tss esu qu aU F 4 5 MAJ aereum G 4 6 PAGE 285 318 188 198 197 208 209 36 296 51 224 223 238 302 188 224 46 263 224 187 239 295 48 227 30 253 250 300 300 300 298 171 260 35 254 250 256 191 191 23 164 185 195 219 285 318 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Style and format examples of 4 7 1 Stylesheet ODE nee 4 6 Supersedutre NOCE tania doutes SPAM IN Dis Supersedure 4 7 9 14 Support information for RPSTL amp TMDE 5 2 25 Support items work pack aves eee e eodeni G 5 10 Support
254. Officer PHASE NUMBERS In the column headed Inspect Phase Nos and adjacent to the sequence number of each inspection requirement there will appear the word ALL or a series of numbers The word ALL indicates that inspection requirement shall be accomplished at each phase or at every insert hours hour interval of the insert number of hours hour cycle The numbers represent the phase number at which that inspection requirement is to be accomplished For example if the numbers insert first number and insert second number are shown this indicates that inspection requirement is to be accomplished at phases insert first number and insert second number only or at every insert appropriate hour hour interval If only one number is indicated then that inspection requirement is accomplished at that phase or at every insert cycle hours hours interval At the completion of phase insert last phase number the cycle starts over again with Phase 1 STATUS SYMBOLS The status column will be used only to enter the status symbol of a fault discovered when performing an inspection requirement The status symbols used are the same as those defined in DA PAM 738 751 The status symbol shall be entered by the person s performing the inspection and is determined by the type of fault that is found Do not enter a horizontal dash on the checklist merely to show a particular inspection requirement is due If an inspection requirement reve
255. PSTL only lt glossary gt A glossary shall be prepared for TMs only when the terms are uncommon and are not adequately defined in the text or in the Army DoD or standard dictionary The glossary shall include a list of terms lt term gt followed by definitions lt def gt The terms shall be listed in alphabetical order If a glossary is required it shall begin on a separate right hand page and immediately precede the alphabetical index if any Page numbers for a glossary shall begin with Glossary 1 Glossary 2 etc 59 MIL STD 4005 1 2 5 2 2 2 Alphabetical index Except RPSTL only lt aindx gt An alphabetical index shall be prepared unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity a The index may be an index of work packages only or it may be a detailed index as applicable b All applicable work package references for each entry shall be indicated regardless of the type of index being prepared Page references may be included in a detailed index c The index shall be located at the end of the TM but shall precede the sample DA Form 2028 Indexes shall begin on a separate right hand page Page numbers for an index shall begin with Index 1 Index 2 etc refer to FIGURE 23 5 2 2 3 Reporting errors and recommending improvements DA Form 2028 lt da2028 gt One filled out sample copy of DA Form 2028 provided by the acquiring activity and a minimum of three blank DA Forms 2028 with the TM number date and title sha
256. RPSTL not within each work package using Arabic numerals beginning with 1 Multisheet RPSTL illustration shall be used as specified by the acquiring activity and shall be numbered as described in previously in the this paragraph and 4 7 27 4 4 4 7 27 4 3 Foldout figure numbering Foldout figures shall be numbered in consecutive ascending numerical sequence within each TM beginning with Arabic number 1 e g FO 1 FO 2 etc Figures are numbered in the order of reference in the text Figure numbers for foldouts shall be placed preceding the figure title under the illustration 4 7 27 4 4 Multisheet numbering Multisheet figures shall be consecutively sheet numbered and the total number of sheets following the title for example Figure 2 Wing Hydraulic Assembly Sheet 1 of 3 or Figure 1 Cable Assembly W12 Wiring Diagram Sheet 1 of 2 Remaining sheets shall be numbered in consecutive order Sheet 2 of x Sheet 3 of x etc where x is the total number of sheets 4 7 27 4 5 Figure titles Each figure except with inline graphics shall have a figure title 4 7 27 4 5 1 Figure title format The figure title format shall a Include Figure in title case followed by the figure number a period two spaces and the title For example Figure 3 Fuel Indicator b Capitalize the first letter of the first and each major word of the title c End with a period following the last word d Identify illustrations applicable
257. S SS QE a A t F 5 3 10 300 Standard MAC Introduction G 5 3 1 319 Storage Of ALECEARL 5 3 12 3 256 Stowage amp data plate guide C 5 2 7 191 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Work package Cont S ppOrtatems z ae G 5 10 Technical description sese idit Ie anro eR e Uo Penn D 5 5 4 Testing and troubleshooting e ree sedet D 5 5 Theory Of Operation dede de ha dete ode B 5 4 CDD Mn G 5 7 Totg e DOLES sse toc uio E 5 3 10 Troubleshooting index neis n ee Un ien D 5 5 5 TrOUDIe SDOOITIS ded D 5 5 8 4 Two level MAC Introduction WP G 5 3 3 Types Of Operator oce eret o ete EN C 5 2 2 Weighing and Toad utu seg eS qoc e EH edel E 5 3 12 4 Wiring cca E 5 3 11 WY GER AC ge eS E e d etd 4 7 23 Additional G 5 11 ass sssass 4 8 1 2 Content of maintenance eas oneri EUH HD GET 5 3 1 Content of troubleshooting o 5 5 1 Content E 12532 Content ua
258. SC the letter and last three numerals represent the DoD Identification Code that is assigned to items that are interchangeable in function and use The eight character DoD ammunition code is used for such ammunition operations as worldwide stock status reporting and requisitioning when specific items are not required 3 34 Depot level maintenance Maintenance that is beyond the capability of the unit direct support and general support activities Depot level maintenance normally consists of overhaul recondition manufacture repair or modification and requires technical assistance beyond lower maintenance level capability 3 35 Depot Maintenance Work Requirement DMWR A maintenance serviceability document for depot maintenance operations The document prescribes the essential factors to ensure that an acceptable and cost effective product is obtained 3 36 Digital graphic form A standard graphics form acceptable for graphics preparation under this standard These forms include Computer Graphics Metafile CGM CALS raster and Initial Graphics Exchange Specification IGES 3 37 Direct support maintenance Maintenance accomplished on a component accessory assembly subassembly plug in unit or other portion either on the system or after it is removed The letter F appearing in the third position of the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code indicates the replace function for this level of maintenance An F appear
259. STORAGE D coPiLoT Lu WING SURVIVAL KIT E PILOT RH NACELLE Q AFT FUSELAGE FIGURE E 13 Example of two chart diagram 278 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E INSPECTION TOTAL WORK TIME P 5 NOSE AREA First aid kits for designated location X X X presence of inspection date tag broken 11 Aircraft forms and records for recorded X or missing seal legible identification discrepancies TM 38 750 markings and security 12 Nose section exterior for damage X 2 1 Seats and mission e uipment securely X X X installed or slowed Copper safety wire 13 Nose compartment interior for cleanliness on armored seat quick release for equipment for damage and loose condition and security connections and door for secure 271 Seats and mission equ pneri ior damage and X atcning postive movement and locking Safety or 7 14 Pilot lube and static ports for obstructions X inet ese by positive and cleanliness and unlocking 141 Disconnect pilot static lines from instrument X 2 7 2 Inspect armored seats for positive recline X pos Remove drain caps from moisture movement traps 142 Purge pilot static system with clean dry air X 2 8 All instruments for cleanliness damage X X X pressure 10 60 PSI Reconnect lines and presence of slippage marks on gage and caps and inspect system for leaks lens utilizing instrument test set 15 Windshields and windows for cleanliness X 2 8 1 All
260. Shaded As Required N N 139 MIL STD 4005 1 2 This page intentionally left blank 140 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE A X TM Requirements Matrix for Aircraft MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content PMS Reference Element Name pos e l Fronteover 5243 Change transmittal page 2 1 4 List of effective pages work packages n 5 2 1 5 lt loepwp gt Title block page with warning data 52 1 6 lt titleblk gt lt gim gt CHAPTER 1 B 5 1 GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION General information A CHAPTER X 5 lt mim gt PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICES MAINTENANCE INFORMATION CHAPTER d Back cover Legen R Required Prohibited Shaded As Required 141 MIL STD 4005 1 2 This page intentionally left blank 142 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE TM Content FRONT MATTER Front cover Warning summary Change transmittal page List of effective pages work packages Title block page with warning data CHAPTER 1 GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X PHASED MAINTENANCE INSPECTION MAINTENANCE INFORMATION IPM INSPECTION WORK PACKAGE General inspection Aircraft area inspection Aircraft power on checks Aircraft final inspection REAR MATTER DA Form 2028 Authentication page Back cover Legend R Required P Prohibit
261. T WORK 6 5 7 Ktoolidwp gt PACKAGE 104 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 12 13 14 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P 14 amp P Reference Element Name REPLACEMENT PARTS G 5 8 a WORK PACKAGE CRITICAL SAFETY ITEMS AND lt _ wp gt LIGHT SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS WORK PACKAGE SUPPORT ITEMS WORK PACKAGE ITEMS WORK SUPPORT ITEMS WORK PACKAGE CKAGE bu 5 10 Ksupitemwp gt ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK INN 5 11 _ PACKAGES REARMATTER RRR Re ee Gos Aphbeicdindx DAForm2028 Rp Authentication page TRUE R RR 52 jm Foldoupages Backeover SRS RSR e pes Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 105 MIL STD 4005 1 2 This page intentionally left blank 106 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 20 30 40 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp P 30 amp P 40 amp P Reference Element Nam MC Promulgation letter Warning summary lt chgsheet gt Change transmittal page List of effective pages work packages lt loepwp gt Excluding pocket TMs and publications with less than eight pages Title block page Table of contents BAVA ATA ala a al raya 2 S 2 l 8 8 2 vig 8 JERE 5 TES V VIV V
262. TENANCE INSTRUCTIONS Preparation for storage or shipment ass kmim AMMUNITION MARKING 25 2 lt ammunitioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MUNITION MARKING 5 3 14 2 ammo pousse INFORMATION WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X 5 3 2 5 INFORMATION 10 THROUGH 14 12 amp P THROUGH 14 amp P NTRODUCTION WORK PACKAGE P R R R 535 fxintrowp gt REPAIR PARTS LIST WORK 5 3 6 Kplwp gt PACKAGE REPAIR PARTS FOR SPECIAL 5 3 7 lt stl_partswp gt TOOLS WORK PACKAGE IT PARTS LIST WORK PACKAGE P BULK ITEM WORK PACKAGE ENSE 539 SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK e 5 2 0 stlwp PACKAGE SN INDEX WORK PACKAGE PP R TN INDEX WORK PACKAGE ee REFERENCE DESIGNATOR me pee WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly REFERENCES WORK PACKAGE R R R R 052 149 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content Reference Element Name INTRODUCTION FOR STANDARD lt macintrowp gt AC WORK PACKAGE FIVE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY OR TWO LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY WORK PACKAGE 6 5 3 4 lt macwp gt FIVE LEVEL MAINTE
263. TENANCE WORK 5 3 14 1 lt ammowp gt IPACKAGE 122 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A V TM Requirements Matrix for AVIM AVUM A VIM 20 30 23 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp P 30 amp P 23 amp P Reference Element Name AMMUNITION MARKING INFORMATION 5 3 14 2 lt ammo markingwp gt WORK PACKAGE FOREIGN AMMUNITION NATO WORK E 5 3 14 3 lt natowp gt F 5 3 2 CHAPTER X lt pim gt PARTS INFORMATION AVUM AVIM AVUM AVIM AVUM amp P AVIM amp P AVUM AVIM amp P stl partswp SUPPORTING INFORMATION NOTE Applicable supporting information work packages shall be arranged in the order in which they are presented here and numbered accordingly REFERENCES WORK PACKAGE je __ INTRODUCTION FOR AVIATION J J lt macintrowp gt IMAC WORK PACKAGE THREE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY IMAC WORK PACKAGE 0 5 3 4 lt macwp gt THREE LEVEL MAINTENANCE ONLY TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST WORK G 5 7 lt toolidwp gt REPLACEMENT PARTS 6 5 5 lt mrplwp gt WORK PACKAGE 123 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A V TM Requirements Matrix for AVUM AVUM AVIM 20 30 23 MIL STD 40051 2 T Content 20 amp P 30 amp P 23 amp P Reference Element Name CRITICAL SAFETY ITEMS CSI AND lt csi fscap wp gt FLIGHT SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS WORK PACKAGE SUPPORT ITEMS WORK PACKAGE ITEMS WORK PACKAGE 0 50 ewiemw ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK NL P
264. TIE eed ieri tete ed ae 5 2 1 6 1 Titles Fig re format oe Mg P a ME 4 7 27 4 5 1 da aa na 4 7 27 4 5 4 7 11 2 Procedural 4 7 12 2 Publication nce tete oL ind A 5 1 1 CT 4 7 13 3 Work packas eu gana oto a 4 7 9 1b 388 PAGE 186 48 96 201 242 29 206 244 198 197 196 197 197 197 200 199 200 200 200 199 200 207 36 36 207 201 164 165 174 174 54 37 57 54 45 45 33 34 93 34 29 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE DIVISIONS 4 72 23 4 7 23 3 1 40 TM number for joint service 8 3221151 50 TM Requirement Matrix e 19 Po ds d o eee TABLE A II 99 T4 and 14 amp a sasa que cdi TABLE A II 99 SOMATIC c 208 B os cot tee ed TABLE A III 107 223 and 2 SO iid Guia TABLE A IV 113 DELE 2A TABLE A IV 113 230 and oU Poo cde n i dieque eut RUN TABLE A III 107 BA NAACP u ii Sua ed dt Et iE TABLE A IV 113 40 and 40 amp dp 107 Areralt Pos EN TABLE A XI 143 Airer tt PMS susan aane uu ae eee et TABLE A X 141 TABLE A IX 139 AMIM 303a0d 3
265. TTN AMXLS AP Redstone Arsenal Al 35898 7466 or emailed to mailto tmss logsa redstone army mil Since contact information can change you may want to verify the currency of this address information using the ASSIST Online database at http www dodssp daps mil MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE HORE W ORD ii L SCOPE LRS a a E ird uocat eu E aS 1 1 1 SCG sot he AME E 1 1 2 Paragraphs with limited applicability 1 1 3 Use of the technical Comte nt 1 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMEN TS csscssscscestesesosssuscebecdostaccatecesssdcoedsessdsvensstostestossdebesddsodccesseeteses 1 2 1 esce 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 Specifications standards and handbooks 1 2 22 Other Government documents and publications 3 2 3 Non Government publications ee BS 5 2 4 precedence 6 3 6 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENIT S 22 4 1 a ended iet desistit eet 22 4 2 Types f technical es eio 22 4 3 Selective application
266. This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific authority of the Department of the Army of the United States that it will be used for military purposes only that individual or corporate rights originating in the information whether patented or not will be respected that the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected compromise and that the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security afforded it by the Department of Defense of the United States Also regardless of any other markings on the document it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the originating United States agency DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and U S DOD contractors only This publication is critical technology as determined on 20 May 1998 Other requests for this document shall be referred to AMSELL LC LM LT Fort Monmouth NJ 07702 5007 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document US ARMY COMMUNICATIONS ELECTRONICS COMMAND FORT MONMOUTH NJ 1 JUNE 1999 FIGURE 14 Example of a NMWR Cover 80 MIL STD 4005 1 2 MANUAL NUMBER LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES WORK PACKAGES NOTE Zero in the Change No column indicates an original page or work package Date of issue for the original manual
267. UMP PUMP ROTARY REGULATOR PRESS WASHER KEY SPACER RING GEAR OIL PUMP BOLT MACHINE CAP SCREW 1 4 20X1 3 8 INCH WASHER LOCK 1 4 IN MEDIUM SAE LOCKWASHER STEEL SCREW COVER COVER PUMP PUMP OIL BSC GEAR DR SHAFT BODY ASSY SHAFT IDLER BODY PUMP Ue eB ee ee O FD NK END FIGURE 0025 3 4 blank FIGURE F 6 Example of indentions next higher assembly 309 0 ITEM SMR NO CODE 1 PAODD 2 PAODD 3 PAOZZ 4 PAOZZ 5 KAOZZ 6 PAOOO 7 KDOZZ 8 PAOZZ 9 KAOZZ PAOZZ 3 NSN 2835 00 906 6766 2835 00 804 8316 5310 00 877 5797 5330 00 263 8030 2910 00 919 2021 5330 00 961 1463 5330 00 961 1463 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F TM X XXX XXXX 24P 0011 4 5 6 7 PART DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CAGEC NUMBER CODE UOC QTY GROUP 15 AUXILIARY POWER UNIT FIG 10 T62T 2A T62T 2A1 GAS TURBINE ENGINE 55820 37688 0 ENGINE GAS TURBINE 62 2 UOC NBA 1 55820 37688 1000 ENGINE GAS TURBINE 62 2 1 UOC NBS 1 96906 MS21044N3 NUT SELF LOCKING UOC NB4 5 2 88044 AN960DDIO WASHER FLAT UOC NB4 5 NB6 2 PACKING PREFORMED PART OF 96906 529512 06 KIT P N 31766 1 10 58220 28022 4 NOZZLE ASSEMBLY STATOR UOC NB4 5 NB6 1 96906 535769 5 2 GASKET PART OF KIT P N 31766 1 UOC NB4 5 NB6 1 71895 970HE1UPPH NOZZLE STATOR UOC NB4 5 NB6 1 55820
268. URE F 13 and FIGURE G 1 through FIGURE G 16 Division or selection of coverage will depend on various factors These factors may include but are not limited to a specific work package that is required by this standard b Aspecific work package that is required by the TM content selection matrix provided by the contract activity 24 MIL STD 4005 1 2 c A WP may be determined by the operational modes complexity of the maintenance action or level s of maintenance covered Separate maintenance WPs may be developed for the same equipment or component for different maintenance levels e g a WP for operator s maintenance and a WP for direct support maintenance for the same item of equipment d Two or more WPs for an identical maintenance task may be required because the task is performed differently due to differences in configurations e More than one WP may be required because the size of the work package will exceed 30 pages It is permissible to divide a set of maintenance tasks for a specific system equipment or component into two or more WPs to comply with the page size limitation e g removal and installation procedures could be placed in one WP and disassembly cleaning repair and reassembly could be placed in a second WP f Development of more than one WP because the reduction in the size of the work package would make it more usable g Confining the information to one WP because dividing the information i
269. Use This Manual information shall begin on the page immediately following the table of contents Information to familiarize the user with special or unusual features of the TM shall be prepared Coverage shall lead the user through the TM and explain important features of the organization and content For example the format is explained operating troubleshooting Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS are explained and repair maintenance instructions and other pertinent information are explained Any peculiarities in the basic arrangement of the TM shall be described How To Use This Manual information shall not repeat instructions given within the chapters and or work packages 58 4 MIL STD 4005 1 2 For all TMs excluding operators the How To Use This Manual information shall include reference to the associated RPSTL and an explanation on how to use the RPSTL in conjunction with the manual For all TMs with a glossary reference to the glossary shall be made and an explanation of its features and use shall be provided For Troubleshooting TMs an explanation on how troubleshooting data is presented in the TM shall be included The explanation shall explain how failure symptom indexes and malfunction codes correspond to maintenance operational checks and troubleshooting procedures for individual systems and components If necessary for multi volume troubleshooting TMs examples of the troubleshooting process
270. VUM Aviation Unit Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts TABLE A V and Special Tools List 23 Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual TABLE A IV 23 amp Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual including TABLE A IV Repair Parts and Special Tools List 23 AVUM AVIM Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Manual TABLE A V 23 amp Aviation Unit and Intermediate Maintenance Manual TABLE A V AVUM AVIM including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 24 Unit Direct Support and General Support Maintenance TABLE A IV Manual 24 amp P Unit Direct Support and General Support Maintenance TABLE A IV Manual including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 30 Direct Support Maintenance Manual TABLE 30 amp P Direct Support Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts TABLE and Special 30 AVIM Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Manual TABLE A V 30 amp P AVIM Aviation Intermediate Maintenance Manual including TABLE A V Repair Parts and Special Tools List 34 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual TABLE A IV 34 amp P Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual TABLE A IV including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 94 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE Publications Type and Title with Associated Context Matrix Table PUBLICATION APPLICABLE TYPE TITLE TABLE 40 General Support Maintenance Manual TABLE 40 amp P General Support Maintenance Manual including Repair TABL
271. WORK IPACKAGE lt torquewp gt AIRCRAFT INVENTORY MASTER 53 12 lt inventorywp gt GUIDE WORK PACKAGE AIRCRAFT ONLY STORAGE OF AIRCRAFT WORK REA eR lt storagewp gt IPACKAGE WORK PACKAGE AIRCRAFT ONLY lt wtloadwp gt CHAPTER X 5 lt mim gt AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT S2 lt auxiliarycategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS lt auxeqpwp gt ILLUSTRATED LIST OF lt manuwp gt MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK IPACKAGE TORQUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE lt torquewp gt 130 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR NMWR DMWR with NMWR with MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content RPSTL RPSTL Reference Element Name WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK E 5 5 11 wiringwp PACKAGE CHAPTER X E mim AMMUNITION 5 2 lt ammunitioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AMMUNITION MAINTENANCE WORK lt ammowp gt AMMUNITION MARKING lt ammo markingwp gt INFORMATION WORK PACKAGE FOREIGN AMMUNITION NATO lt natowp gt WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X 5 3 PARTS INFORMATION DMWR NMWR DMWR WITH RPSTL NMWR WITH RPSTL INTRODUCTION WORK PACKAGE R 53 REPAIR PARTS LIST WORK 53 REPAIR PARTS FOR SPECIAL TOOLS 5 3 WORK PACKAGE KIT PARTS LIST WORK PACKAGE BULK ITEMS WORK PACKAGE BR SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK IPACKAGE INSN INDEX WORK PACKAGE P N INDEX WORK PACKAGE lt pnindxwp gt REFERENCE DESIGNATOR INDEX 5
272. X E A 0 250 DIA 3 HOLES 0 6 0 5 0 3 3 1 NOTES SHIM BLADE MAKE FROM AL ALY SHEET 2024 T3 0 016 THICK QQ A 250 5 NSN 6635 00 232 0543 FINISH CHEMICALLY FILM TREAT PER MIC C 5541 CLASS 1a ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES Shim Blade P N 366 83019 5 FIGURE E 10 Example of an illustrated list of manufactured items 274 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 0321 GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE TORQUE LIMITS TORQUE TABLES How To Use Torque Tables 1 Measure the diameter of the screw you are installing Figure 1 Measuring Screw 2 Count the number of threads per inch or use a pitch grade 3 Under the heading SIZE look down the left hand column until you find the diameter of the screw you are installing There will usually be two lines beginning with the same size 4 Inthe second column under SIZE find the numbers of threads per inch that matches the number of threads you counted in Step 2 Not required for metric screws c9 Q9 amp STANDARD METRIC Figure 2 Capscrew Head Markings NOTE Manufacture s mark may vary Standard are all SAE Grade 5 3 Line Metric screws are of three grades 8 8 10 9 and 12 9 Grades and manufacturer s marks appear on the screw head 5 To Find the grade screw you are installing match the markings on the head to the correct picture of Capscrew Head Markings in Figure 2 preceding the torque table END OF WORK PACKAGE 0321 1 FIGUR
273. X E E 5 2 5 Aircraft maintenance aircraft only lt aviationcategory gt This maintenance category contains the following work packages in specified order unless otherwise indicated a b Service Upon Receipt work package AVUM only lt surwp gt refer to E 5 3 2 Equipment User Fitting Instruction work package lt perseqpwp gt refer to E 5 3 3 The following work packages occur in no specific order 1 Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 5 2 General Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 6 3 Lubrication instructions work package lt lubewp gt refer to E 5 3 7 4 Preventive Maintenance Inspections work package lt pmiwp gt refer to E 5 3 12 1 Illustration List of Manufactured Items work package AVUM level or above only lt manuwp gt refer to E 5 3 9 Torque Limits work package AVUM level or above only lt torquewp gt refer to E 5 3 10 Aircraft Inventory Master Guide work package lt inventorywp gt refer to E 5 3 12 2 Storage of Aircraft work package lt storagewp gt refer to E 5 3 12 3 Weighing and Loading work package AVIM only lt wtloadwp gt refer to E 5 3 12 4 Wiring Diagrams work package AVUM level or above only lt wiringwp gt refer to 5 3 11 5 2 6 Auxiliary equipment maintenance lt auxiliarycategory gt This maintenance category contains the following work packages in specified order a b Auxil
274. X XXX XXXX XX 0440 Table 2 Tools and Test Equipment for T XXX Turbine Engine TOOLS OR TEST EQUIPMENT REF MAINTENANCE NATIONAL STOCK CODE LEVEL NOMENCLATURE NUMBER TOOL NUMBER Sling aircraft maintenance 1730 00 903 5019 LTCT 773 Wrench crowfoot 5120 00 034 6193 LTCT 4810 Wrench socket 5120 00 875 2588 LTCT 393 Wrench spanner 5120 00 886 1794 LTCT 9263 Table 3 Remarks for T XXX Turbine Engine REMARKS Diagnostic inspection using borescope Functional test at AVUM engine in airframe Functional test at AVIM engine in METS Repair at AVIM includes the engine assembly individual line replacement units LRU accessories and modules Replace seal Repair limited to replacement of rotor assembly stator stage 1 nozzle face type seal and combustion liner Repair limited to replacement of external lines hoses and line replacement units LRU accessories Replacement of carbon seal Reset button Water wash Visible inspection without detailed disassembly All repair and replacement of parts performed by AVUM is limited to authorized items listed in TM cite specific TM 20P or 23P END OF WORK PACKAGE 0440 2 FIGURE G 9 Example of aviation MAC tools and test equipment and remarks tables 350 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0441 UNIT MAINTENANCE M198 HOWITZER COMPONENTS OF END ITEM AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists CO
275. a 5 3 5 3 27 Hardness critical process marking 4 7 19 Hazardous materials warnings 4 7 7 5 3 Abbreviated 4 7 7 5 3 2 Format 4 75 31 Signal words Sete n Oud ath toit ena 4 7 7 5 3 2 AC ACIS ce s a uui ta ee cies come 4 7 16 1 E 5 3 5 3 4f How to Use This Manual imformation 5 2 1 9 International standardization agreements 5 2 1 9 T Page numbering ecc orm iP RERO REESE UST CURE RE NASA LES S 4 7 16 2 1 1e Human figure MASE OF ooo e fo enit 4 7 27 3 2 I ace Parade aes tas 4 7 7 5 Abbreviated format hazardous materials warnings with 4 7 7 5 3 2 Development of 4 7 7 5 1 Equipment damage cautions 4 7 7 5 4 Hazardous materials warnings 4 7 7 5 3 1 Safety warnings 4 7 7 5 2 SIa dardiZed rM hutama u 4 7 7 5 Identical assemblies ve n n 5 3 12 4 Identical parts item iu F 5 3 12 3 Identification information WP 4 7 9 1 Illustrated list of manufactured items WP E 5 3 9 Ilustrated loading plan ducet t e tee eine ci tn
276. a i dote elei ee pen Ras Witte dent fie AUQTE Far eoe Wiring diagrams a M M Wiring diagrams work package Work package Aircraft inventory guide Ammunition maintenance WP Ammunition marking ANE Auxiliary equipment s dete ve io D toes d Aviation MAC introduction essere Bull eme uti eim a iu COBIBID Mao autos ee Combined operational checkout amp troubleshooting Component checklist cista pisei Critical safety items CSI and Flight safety critical aircraft parts CES CAP se MRNA RR QQ ASS Su Sa Depot mobilization requirements Description amp use of controls and indicators PARA NUMBER PAGE E 5 3 2 3 4 4 227 20 1 29 32 40 47 2 1 24 ELAT 57 57 19 2019 51 5 2 1 3 1 52 4 7 16 2 1 1b 37 4 7 7 26 4 7 7 5 3 2 28 ad LA 26 41 1 4 27 4 7 7 5 3 1 28 4 7 7 5 3 28 4 1 1 5 27 4 7 7 5 2 28 B 5 2 11 168 5 2 1 1 3 50 E 5 3 12 4 257 E 5 3 12 4 4 257 E 5 3 11 4 253 E 5 3 11 6 253 E 5 3 11 253 G 5 5 336 8 2 3 12 2 255 5 3 14
277. a list of effective pages for a revised manual 83 MIL STD 40051 2 MANUAL NUMBER LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES WORK PACKAGES NOTE Zero in the Change No column indicates an original page or work package Date of issue for the original manual is Original 24 April 1990 TOTAL NUMBER OF VOLUMES IS 3 TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 21 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF WORK PACKAGES IS 30 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING Page WP No VOLUME 1 Title Warning i iii iv blank Chp 1 title page WP 0001 4 pgs WP 0002 10 pgs WP 0003 2 pgs WP 0004 2 pgs Chp2 title page WP 0005 2 pgs WP 0006 8 pgs WP 0007 2 pgs Chp3 title page WP 0008 2 pgs INDEX 1 INDEX 2 VOLUME 2 Title 1 Chp 4 title page WP 0009 12 pgs Chp 5 title page WP 0010 2 pgs WP 0011 2 pgs Chp 6 title page WP 0012 20 pgs WP 0013 30 pgs WP 0014 30 pgs WP 0015 2 pgs WP 0016 4 pgs WP 0017 2 pgs WP 0018 8 pgs WP 0019 12 pgs WP 0020 2 pgs WP 0021 2 pgs INDEX 1 INDEX 4 VOLUME 3 Title 1 Change lt lt C e ee ee e ee eee eee eee ee e gt gt Page WP Chp 7 title page WP 0022 2 pgs WP 0023 4 pgs WP 0024 6 pgs WP 0025 4 pgs WP 0026 4 pgs WP 0027 4 pgs WP 0028 4 pgs WP 0029 4 pgs WP 0030 4 pgs INDEX 1 INDEX 4 Change No gt USAF FIGURE 18 Example of a list of effective
278. a separate document Information for a PMC shall come from the applicable operator s PMCS 234 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 5 Maintenance work packages Not required for aircraft PM and PMS manuals only lt maintwp gt Maintenance information shall be prepared and functionally divided into individual maintenance work packages lt maintwp gt The technical content structure for these work packages shall be consistent from work package to work package Illustrations shall be prepared to identify the location or the process of the task being performed and shall be integrated with the procedures a Each maintenance work package shall include all authorized maintenance tasks lt maintsk gt Tasks shall consist of complete start to finish maintenance procedures in a logical sequence of occurrence Task titles lt title gt shall be identical to FGC titles as used in the applicable MAC and RPSTL Maintenance tasks are described in E 5 3 5 3 b Maintenance instructions shall reference or contain all procedures required for any unusual or critical steps such as specifying Quality Assurance QA checks depot and aviation only care and handling of ESD sensitive items and all hazardous material e g ammunition radioactive components or materials including prevention of deterioration due to rough handling exposure to adverse weather conditions or other hazards Visual inspection and safety criteria shall be prepared to determine item se
279. ability of some requirements is also designated by one of the following statements unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity as when specified by the acquiring activity or when specified by the acquiring or proponent activity 22 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 4 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery Technical manual data prepared and delivered digitally in accordance with this standard shall be Extensible Markup Language XML tagged using the Document Type Definitions DTDs and the XML Stylesheet Language XSL or style sheets in accordance with MIL STD 2361 Refer to 4 6 for information on obtaining or accessing the DTDs and style sheets 4 5 Use of the DTDs Style sheets The DTD referenced in this standard interprets the technical content and structure for the functional requirements contained in this standard and is mandatory for use The XSLs referenced herein interpret the style and format As specified by the contracting activity XSLs or style sheets may be used to produce final reproducible paper copy for all TMs prepared in accordance with this standard For additional information on DTDs and specific XSLs refer to MIL STD 2361 4 6 Obtaining the DTDs Style sheets The DTD style sheets associated tag and attribute descriptions which are XML constructs may be obtained from the Army SGML Registry and Library ASRL The ASRL assets may be obtained using the methods described in MIL STD 2361 as follows a Wor
280. actice for Preferred Metric Units for Use in Electrical and Electronics Science and Technology MIL STD 4005 1 2 Application for copies should be addressed to the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York NY 10017 or copies of these documents are available online at http assist daps dla mil quicksearch or www dodssp daps mil or from the Document Automation and Production Service Building 4 D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia PA 19111 5094 WORLD WIDE WEB CONSORTIUM W3C REC xml 20001006 Extensible Markup Language XML 1 0 Second Edition REC xslt 19991116 XSL Transformations XSLT Version 1 0 Copies of these publications are available from World Wide Web Consortium W3C should be obtained from the Internet address http www w3 org 2 4 Order of precedence In the event of a conflict between the text of this document and the references cited herein the text of this document takes precedence Nothing in this document however supersedes applicable laws and regulations unless a specific exemption has been obtained 3 DEFINITIONS 3 1 Acronyms used in this standard The acronyms used in this standard are defined as follows AAL Additional Authorization List AMC Army Materiel Command AMDF Army Master Data File ANSI American National Standards Institute Ao Operational Availability AOAP Army Oil Analysis Program APD Army Publishing Directorate AQL Acc
281. aft work package lt geninfo gt The following text shall be included verbatim STORAGE OF AIRCRAFT GENERAL INFORMATION Components Involved in an Accident Any component removed for reason of accident shall not be preserved but shall be shipped in the same condition it was in after the accident Categories of Storage 1 Flyable storage no time limit 2 Short term administrative storage 1 to 45 days 3 Intermediate storage 46 to 180 days E 5 3 12 3 4 Flyable storage lt flyable gt short term storage lt short gt and intermediate storage lt intermediate gt a A general discussion shall be prepared for each category of aircraft storage to include considerations for selection of the appropriate category e g ground operation motoring of engines and other required maintenance for which personnel and materials are needed and steps to be taken for care of the aircraft during exceptionally wet weather 256 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E b All essential information for each category of aircraft storage shall be prepared to include all procedures for preparing the complete aircraft for storage and removal from storage excluding any information on when or why the aircraft are stored Each category of storage shall make reference to inspection documents and inspection procedures to be conducted before during and after storage 5 3 12 4 Weighing and loading work package A VIM only lt wtloadwp gt This wor
282. age lt gt 165 5 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 165 5 2 2 Initial setup information lt gt 165 B 5 2 3 lt 8 gt 165 5 2 4 Maintenance forms records reports lt mfrr gt 165 5 2 5 Reporting equipment improvement recommendations lt gt 166 B 5 2 5 1 MC Additional reporting equipment improvement recommendations Marine Corps 167 5 2 6 Hand receipt manuals Unit AVUM or below only lt handreceipt gt 167 5 2 7 Corrosion prevention and control lt gt 167 B 5 2 8 Ozone depleting substances ODS lt odsdata gt 167 5 2 9 Destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use lt destructmat gt 168 B 5 2 10 Preparation for storage or shipment lt gt 168 B 5 2 11 Warranty information lt Wrntyref gt ded de ispecies xoa udine 168 B 5 2 12 Nomenclature cross reference list lt nomenreflist gt 168 B 5 2 13 List of abbreviations acronyms loa 168 B 5 2 14 Quality Assurance QA DMWR NMWR and aviation only qainfo 168 B 5 2 15 Quality of material Unit AVUM and abov
283. aining to the user shall be prepared c Location and contents of end item and major component identification plates shall be illustrated Modification information and warranty plates stencils or location of serial numbers shall be illustrated B 5 3 5 Differences between models lt eqpdiff gt Significant differences affecting interchangeability shall be identified Specifically differences associated with equipment models or units of the same model shall be indicated that would affect operator or maintenance actions These differences shall be related explicitly to equipment model part number or serial number ranges in such a manner that the TM user can identify the specific equipment configuration involved When model differences exist but have no effect on operation or maintenance this fact shall be stated 173 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B B 5 3 6 Equipment data lt eqpdata gt a Performance data shall be prepared including numerical and other standard related data applying to operational and maintenance functions The equipment data shall summarize the specific capabilities and limitations of the equipment and other critical data needed by the TM user for maintenance of the equipment Vehicle and cargo space dimensions and metric and other equivalents shall be included b For systems a list of the environmental control requirements such as limited temperature humidity or other limited conditions shall be prepared Referen
284. al and maintenance procedures and the RPSTLs Examples of line drawings are provided in MIL HDBK 1222 a When index numbers are used to locate and identify equipment components or parts the index numbers shall be assigned in clockwise sequence beginning at 11 o clock b To assist the maintenance technician or operator in locating major components controls and indicators etc locator views may be included 42 MIL STD 4005 1 2 c When the illustration does not adequately or clearly depict the subject matter or part s specific detailed views may be included to support the main illustration 4 7 27 2 2 Multiview and multisheet illustrations Multiview and multisheet illustrations may be used to clarify identify significant features or further detail equipment assemblies subassemblies and detailed parts Refer to MIL HDBK 1222 for examples of multiview and multisheet illustrations 4 7 27 2 3 Photographs Photographs film or digital may be used for illustrations photographs regardless of source shall be delivered as digital photographs The acquiring activity shall determine acceptability of photographs and usage of line drawings 4 7 27 2 3 1 Photograph quality If used photographs shall be detailed and sharp free of heavy shadows distorted objects cluttered foregrounds and backgrounds and of good contrast Photographs shall provide sufficient detail for the user to clearly identify all components 4 7 27 2 3 2 R
285. al features and other like information e g applications limitations which will be helpful in the operation and maintenance of the equipment Unless otherwise directed the information may be in narrative or tabular format a The equipment type shall be stated as shall the following equipment features portability or mobility operational and special environment and remote control b Components and their functions shall not be described unless essential to continuity For functional data reference shall be made to theory of operation 172 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B c When equipment covered varies in scope and application or has several applications within an end item a brief explanation of the multiple usages and a simple diagram showing all aspects of a typical application shall be prepared d For ammunition TMs packing and packaging information shall be prepared including number of rounds per pack B 5 3 4 Location and description of major components Except Conventional Ammunition and Chemical Manuals only lt locdesc gt Equipment location information shall be prepared including external and internal views of the equipment used to show general features and all major components This information shall not duplicate information contained in the equipment data requirements and the equipment characteristics capabilities and features a The equipment and weapon systems configuration shall be described as follows
286. al pa sn Sun qg E 5 3 5 3 30 Adjustment 5 3 5 3 18 Jo ment ea sau ss EE 5 3 5 3 12 Ammunition 5 3 5 3 29 Ammunition marking a E 5 3 5 3 28 Assembly Prep for use E 5 3 5 3 2 ASSEMBLY s sala nu a au au E 5 3 5 3 15 PAGE 229 223 253 223 259 228 227 227 218 250 224 223 224 222 224 227 256 222 252 220 227 257 253 223 235 175 318 165 220 163 184 195 218 317 29 33 248 236 247 244 241 247 247 238 241 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Maintenance tasks Cont Calibration su Gam au enters dite Mamie eue e 5 3 5 3 19 Classification defects iicet E 5 3 5 3 26 CIS8 ing 5 3 5 3 8 us aq h aQ sh E 5 3 5 3 31 Sa NP Sau s umu E 5 3 5 3 7 Ground handling m SQ hoi Sau qa E 5 3 5 3 4 E 5 3 5 3 27 Inspect installed eras me ena e e Uo Poeta E 5 3 5 3 5 e oes caer c 5 3 5 3 16 Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria 5 3 5 3 9 Installation uei eet ashe dien cate elie edness 5 3 5 3 17 5 3 5 3 14 Markina as E 5 3 5 3 23 N destr ctIVe AL N
287. al setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 2 3 Service upon receipt tasks surtsk For equipment that requires extensive service upon receipt this work package shall be further subdivided into the following tasks described in E 5 3 2 3 1 through E 5 3 2 3 11 223 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 2 3 1 Siting lt siting gt Siting instructions peculiar to the equipment shall be prepared as applicable In preparing the instructions operational and maintenance features shall be considered such as the following a Roc Bu 1 Proximity to power sources Effective ranges Terrain requirements to avoid screening reflections ground clutter and other poor operational conditions due to terrain Technical requirements Shelter locations Compensating for adverse siting conditions When the equipment contains large components such as towers and antennas that require orientation to a baseline during siting Mobile equipment oriented during installation E 5 3 2 3 2 Shelter requirements lt shltr gt When equipment normally housed in a permanent or semi permanent shelter other than a military truck van or transportable shelter during use the following information shall be prepared a o Amount of floor wall and height space required A plan for a typical layout Required weight capacity of the building floor Dimensions requ
288. all be provided for each part of the item that requires a critical inspection E 5 3 8 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package Refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 8 2 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information lt wpidinfo gt is required for this work package Refer to 4 7 9 2 5 3 8 2 3 Overhaul Inspection Procedures The OIP shall contain the characteristics being inspected for inspection methods and the acceptance reject criteria that must be met For characteristics having a major quality assurance effect the acronym QA shall be placed immediately preceding the characteristic to which it applies Unless otherwise specified an illustration shall accompany the OIP Illustrations are strongly encouraged for OIPS and shall only be omitted for very simple systems parts A reference letter may be included in the OIP to locate the critical inspection characteristics of the parts on the illustrations The OIPs may be contained in a table or a list refer to FIGURE E 5 References to these OIP work packages shall be included within the applicable maintenance procedural step i e disassembly reassembly testing etc or preshop analysis procedural step where they apply E 5 3 8 3 Depot mobilization requirements work package DMWR NMWR only lt mobilwp gt When specified and provided by the acquiring activity the modifi
289. all be stated clearly 238 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E e Instructions shall be prepared regarding access to any out of the way or unusual places requiring service E 5 3 5 3 4 Ground handling lt groundtsk gt Descriptions instructions and necessary cautions and warnings for ground handling of the aircraft equipment including any information needed in extreme cold heat humidity dust or other unusual or extreme conditions shall be prepared Instructions for folding and unfolding appropriate parts such as rotor blades or wings rudders and fans shall also be included For aircraft instructions shall be prepared that are required for blocking and supporting the aircraft during performance of the operation or procedure involved The following ground handling procedures shall be provided Towing lt tow gt Jacking lt jack gt Parking lt park gt Mooring lt moor gt Covering lt cover gt Hoisting lt hoist gt Sling loading lt sling gt So P External power lt extpwr gt E 5 3 5 3 5 Inspection of installed items lt inspinstitm gt Instructions shall be prepared for inspection of components assemblies or parts installed on the equipment Procedures shall indicate that inspection will be performed with the item in its normally installed position or condition considering accessibility and visibility of the item being inspected The purpose of the inspection to determine if the item is damaged deteriorated
290. alled equipment shall be prepared 5 3 2 3 6 Preliminary checks and adjustment of equipment lt prechkadj gt Instructions for all checks and adjustments to be made on newly installed equipment shall be prepared Information on the location of items such as controls and check points shall be prepared or referenced Instructions shall be prepared for checks and adjustments that must be made before equipment is put into operation and for all other checks required to ensure proper operation of the equipment These instructions shall include the following as applicable a Checks for interconnections b Checks for grounding including earth ground connections earth conditioning for conduction as well as a check of the grounding circuit for negligible resistance c Checks for adequate clearance for rotating or moving devices d Checks of initial settings of all controls that must be preset before power is to be applied All other checks needed to determine that power can be applied without injuring personnel or damaging the equipment 227 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E Firm seating and connection of all plug in parts mating connectors jacks and plugs Cable and wire harness routing dressing and fastening Cautions against damaging transistors diodes and other electrically sensitive items Replacement of all covers inspection and access doors and plates Operation of safety interlocks and switches Operation of v
291. als no fault a status symbol will not be entered The person clearing or correcting the fault shall place his last name initial over the status symbol A red X or a circled red X status symbol will not be initialed over until after the corrective action has been approved and signed off by a Technical inspector or designated supervisor FAULTS AND OR REMARKS Fault entries in the Faults and or Remarks column shall be brief remarks which describe the conditions resulting from the inspection and which require corrective action The initials of the person making the entry will be entered immediately after the entry If no fault was found this column will be left blank ACTION TAKEN a Entries in the Action Taken column shall be brief remarks which describe the action taken to correct the fault described in the adjacent Faults and or Remarks column When faults are assigned a red X status the corrective action shall be inspected and signed off by the Technical Inspector or designated supervisor 180 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B b If no fault was found an appropriate remark shall be entered in the column to indicate that the inspection was accomplished i e Inspected and found If an inspection item is not applicable to the particular inspection phase number in work or to specific equipment installed on an individual aircraft a N A entry is required The initials of the person making the entry shall be entered in the Initial column
292. alwp gt c Component checklist work package lt compchklistwp gt d Operational checkout work packages lt opcheckwp gt e Troubleshooting work packages lt tswp gt f Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting work package lt opcheck tswp gt D 5 4 4 Master index testing and troubleshooting category masterindexcategory When developing TM with a master troubleshooting index chapter the Troubleshooting index work package lt tsindxwp gt shall be developed D 5 5 Testing and troubleshooting work packages Testing and troubleshooting work packages shall be developed for the overall weapon system equipment and each maintainable system subsystem and WRA SRA for each applicable maintenance level as indicated in the approved MAC or maintenance plan D 5 5 1 Work package content Work packages shall include WP identification information initial setup information and all required testing and troubleshooting information When initial setup information differs for specific testing and troubleshooting procedures additional work packages shall be developed Work packages shall stand alone and contain complete start to finish troubleshooting procedures Any follow on maintenance that must be performed after troubleshooting is completed shall be included e g disconnect external power perform operational checks etc When the follow on maintenance is extensive and is contained in a separate work package a reference shall be mad
293. am 281 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E L225 1230 L546 L550 L548 L545 1330 P1 173 TYPICAL PYLON LEFT SIDE R578 R225 R210 R230 R325 R510 R410 R R475 RW11 R190 RIO R200 RW10 R160 R265 R120 365 R115 R345 ES H Imi oe RECS B 3 Ned R545 A LIA OS 2 R330 On Lhe R295 R175 R90 Fed SiGe R140 TYPICAL PYLON RIGHT SIDE FIGURE E 17 Example of inspection access provisions 282 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E RWG 225 T50 4 T335 TO M fy T549 E 1135 1185 55 T290L T250L LN2 LM LN LNG LN5 LWS LW13 LEFT MACELLE pesi PL B200 B250 B85 B60 B330 B545 151 BHR SE a RAS BAUR en a I 22 E f B65R paper RN3 RNS B60R RN B75R B92R Ba5R 8808 his RM RIGHT MACELLE FIGURE E 17 Example of inspection access provisions Continued 283 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F REPAIR PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST RPSTL F 1 SCOPE F 1 1 Scope This appendix establishes the technical content requirements for the preparation of Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists RPSTLs for major weapon systems and their related systems subsystems equipment weapons replacement assemblies WRAs and shop replacement assemblies SRAs This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for
294. and determination of requirements for TMs 3 3 Additional Authorization List AAL items Items are optional discretionary are not essential to operate the end item and are not listed on engineering drawings Items are not turned in with the end item 3 4 Adjust To maintain or regulate within prescribed limits by bringing into proper position or by setting the operating characteristics to specified parameters 3 5 Align To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance 3 6 American National Standards Institute ANSI A private sector organization which plans develops establishes or coordinates standards specifications handbooks or related documents 3 7 Army Master Data File AMDF The files required to record maintain and distribute supply management data between and from Army commands to requiring activities 3 8 Army Oil Analysis Program AOAP Effort to detect impending equipment component failure and determine lubricant condition through periodic analytical evaluation of oil samples 3 9 Assembled item An item source coded AO AF AH AL or AD that is not stocked as an assembly but is assembled from its constituent repair parts 3 10 Assembly Two or more parts or subassemblies joined together to perform a specific function and capable of disassembly e g brake assembly fan assembly audio frequency amplifier Note that the distinction between an asse
295. and all shall follow by the titles given in TABLE A I b If your RPSTL information contains Depot parts special tools the title shall indicate this e g Unit Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual with Repair Parts and Special Tools List including Depot Repair Parts and Special Tools TABLE A I Publications Type and Title with Associated Context Matrix Table PUBLICATION APPLICABLE TYPE TITLE TABLE EXCLUDING CONVENTIAL AND CHEMICAL AMMUNITION 10 Operator s Manual TABLE A II 12 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual TABLE A II 93 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE Publications Type and Title with Associated Context Matrix Table PUBLICATION APPLICABLE TYPE TITLE TABLE 12 amp P Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual including Repair TABLE A II Parts and Special Tools List 13 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual TABLE 13 amp P Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual TABLE including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 14 Operator s Unit Direct Support and General Support TABLE Maintenance Manual 14 amp P Operator s Unit Direct Support and General Support TABLE Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 20 Unit Maintenance Manual TABLE 20 amp P Unit Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts and TABLE Special Tools List 20 AVUM Aviation Unit Maintenance Manual TABLE A V 20 amp P A
296. and retirement schedule aircraft only lt gt 245 E 5 3 5 3 25 Preparation for storage or shipment lt pss gt 246 E 5 3 5 3 26 Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt 246 E 5 3 5 3 27 Handling ammunition lt ammo handlin gt 247 E 5 3 5 3 28 Ammunition markings ammo markings eene 247 E 5 3 5 3 29 Procedures needed to activate ammunition mine etc lt arm gt 247 E 5 3 5 3 30 Additional maintenance task lt other maintsk gt 247 E 5 3 5 3 31 Follow on maintenance task lt followon maintsk gt 247 E 5 3 6 General maintenance work package lt gt 247 E 5 3 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 247 E 5 3 6 2 Initial setup information lt gt 4 nennen 247 E 5 3 6 3 Maintenance tasks lt maintsk gt ieu 248 5 3 7 Lubrication instructions work package lt lubewp gt 248 E 5 3 7 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 248 E5372 Initial setup information wpinfo 248
297. and test equipment requirements immediately following the MAC list the tools and test equipment both special tools and common tool sets required for each maintenance function as referenced from the MAC The remarks immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements contain supplemental instructions and explana tory notes for a particular maintenance function Maintenance Functions Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows 1 Inspect To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical mechanical and or electrical char acteristics with established standards through examination e g by sight sound or feel This includes scheduled inspection and gagings and evaluation of cannon tubes 2 Test To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical pneumatic hydraulic or electrical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a scheuled basis i e load testing of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses 3 Service Operations required periodically o keep an item in proper operating condition e g to clean includes decontaminate when required to preserve to drain to paint or to replenish fuel lubricants chemical fluids or gases This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms 4 Adjust To maintain or regulate within prescribed limits by brining into roper position or by setting the operating
298. ank and each foldout page number shall include a blank page notation e g FP 1 FP 2 blank FP 3 FP 4 blank etc refer to FIGURE 6 37 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 17 Abbreviations and acronyms a The first use of abbreviations and acronyms shall have the word s spelled out completely with the abbreviation or acronym in parentheses immediately after the word s Abbreviations and acronyms which are accepted as words radar sonar laser etc need not be spelled out When a phrase is abbreviated as an acronym capitalize the first letter of each word and do not separate letters in the acronym by periods for example Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL b Abbreviations and acronyms used shall be in accordance with ASME Y 14 38 except that abbreviations may be plural s or possessive s New abbreviations and acronyms shall not duplicate those presently listed in ASME Y 14 38 where possible c All nonstandard abbreviations and acronyms excluding acronyms for Electrostatic Discharge ESD and Hardness Critical Processes HCP shall be defined in the list of abbreviations acronyms paragraph of the general information work package Refer to Appendix B General Information Equipment Description and Theory of Operation d Abbreviations and acronyms used in tables but not found in the text or in any other portion of the TM shall be spelled out in a footnote to the applicable table Abbreviations and acronyms use
299. anual Check that starter cutout override switch is OFF Check that fwd and rear bilge pumps switches are OFF SIO qan Check that smoke screen generator switch is OFF 0003 1 THIS PAGE IS UNCLASSIFIED CONFIDENTIAL FIGURE 7 Example of a page with security classification markings 72 MIL STD 4005 1 2 FIGURE 8 Example of emergency page markings 73 MIL STD 40051 2 MANUAL NUMBER CHANGE HEADQUARTERS NO 1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY WASHINGTON D C 31 AUGUST 1993 TECHNICAL MANUAL OPERATOR S MANUAL FOR TEST SET RADAR AN TPM 22 NSN 4931 00 707 1229 EIC D42 DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A Approved for public release distribution is unlimited TM X XXX XXXX XX 5 June 1987 is updated as follows 1 File this sheet in front of the manual for reference 2 This change is a result of new preventive maintenance checks and service procedures and new expendable durable supplies and materials 3 New or updated text is indicated by a vertical bar in the outer margin of the page 4 Added illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the figure number Changed illustrations are indicated by a miniature pointing hand adjacent to the updated area and a vertical bar adjacent to the figure number 5 Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below Remove Pages Insert Pages athrough d athrough d None e though g h blank 6 Replace the following work packages with
300. applicable support and interface equipment Supporting information requirements are included for the preparation of technical data that supplements the specific operation and maintenance information contained in the TM This supplemental information includes reference data general maintenance and parts information and associated illustrations G 4 2 Maintenance level applicability Requirements contained in this standard are applicable to all maintenance levels unless specifically noted in bold and in parentheses i e Direct Support The labeled requirements shall be applicable to all TMs containing that maintenance level An explanation of all applicable Department of Army maintenance levels is provided in section 3 G 4 3 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery Technical manual data prepared and delivered digitally in accordance with this standard shall be Extensible Markup Language XML tagged using the Document Type Definition DTD for Maintenance Instructions and the XML Stylesheet Language XSL or style sheets in accordance with MIL STD 2361 Refer to 4 6 for information on obtaining or accessing this DTD XML tags used in the modular DTD are noted throughout the text of this standard in bracketed bold characters 1 lt macwp gt as a convenience for the TM author and to ensure that the tags are used correctly when developing a document instance G 4 4 Use of the DTD XSLs The DTD referenced in this standard interpret th
301. aracteristic to which it applies Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity an illustration shall accompany the OIP Illustrations are strongly encouraged for OIPs and shall only be omitted for very simple systems parts A reference letter may be included on the illustration to aid in locating the critical inspection characteristics of the parts The OIPs shall be placed immediately after the maintenance step for which it applies When a maintenance task contains an excessive number of parts requiring OIPs the OIPs may take the form of a consolidated table or list refer to FIGURE E 5 A separate OIP table or list shall be provided for each part of the item that requires a critical inspection OIP tables may be placed in a separate WP refer to E 5 3 8 2 If separate OIP WPs are developed they shall be referenced within the procedural step where they apply E 5 3 5 3 2 Assembly and preparation for use aviation only lt prepforuse gt a Procedures shall be prepared for unpacking assembly and installation When the equipment is shipped or delivered in specially designed containers unpacking instructions shall be prepared If the containers are to be used again kept for future use turned in to supply or require a special disposition method the necessary procedures for reassembly of the container shall be prepared These instructions shall be supported by illustrations As applicable power requirements connections and initial
302. are only a few items the illustrations shall be placed above the tabular listing Method A When there are numerous items the illustrations may be included within the tabular listing for better usability Method B The data described in G 5 4 1 through G 5 4 5 shall be prepared G 5 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 4 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 4 3 Introduction for COEI and lists work package lt intro gt The following introduction shall be prepared and included verbatim Refer also to FIGURE G 10 or FIGURE G 11 COMPONENTS END ITEM COED AND BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LISTS INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists COEI and BII for the insert the short end item name to help you inventory items for safe and efficient operation of the equipment General The COE and information is divided into the following lists Components of End Item COET This list is for information purposes only and is not authority to requisition replacements These items are part of the enter name of end item As part of the end item these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts Items of COEI are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment only when necessary Illust
303. ared see F 5 3 9 f When special tools are listed one or more special tools list work package lt stlwp gt see F 5 3 10 g A National Stock Number NSN index work package lt nsnindxwp gt see F 5 3 11 1 shall be prepared h A part number index work package lt pnindxwp gt see F 5 3 11 2 shall be prepared i When specified by the acquiring activity a reference designator index work package Optional lt refdesindxwp gt see F 5 3 11 3 shall be prepared F 5 3 3 RPSTL work packages requirements When a separate parts manual is not procured and repair parts and or special tools are required the work packages described above shall be prepared as specified in F 5 3 3 1 or F 5 3 3 2 5 3 3 1 RPSTL work packages pim included in a maintenance TM When a separate RPSTL manual pim is not required or authorized RPSTL data shall be included in a separate PIM chapter that precedes the supporting information chapter sim in a maintenance TM Introduction repair parts list kit parts bulk items special tools list and cross reference indexes work packages as described in F 5 3 5 through F 5 3 11 shall be included as specified herein Front and rear matter requirements shall become part of the maintenance TM that includes the RPSTL work packages 5 3 3 2 RPSTL work packages included in DMWR NMWR If an item of equipment is programmed for depot overhaul and no repair parts including modules printed circui
304. ared and included verbatim refer also to FIGURE G 12 ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST AAL INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists additional items you are authorized for the support of the enter short item name 336 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G General This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the enter short item name and that do not have to be turned in with it These items are all authorized to you by CTA MTOE TDA or JTA Explanation of Columns in the AAL Column 1 National Stock Number NSN Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes Column 2 Description Part Number CAGEC Identifies the Federal item name in all capital letters followed by a minimum description when needed The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 3 Usable On Code When applicable gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of equipment Add the following only as applicable Replace Xs with appropriate codes and model numbers These codes are identified below Code Used on XXX Model XXX XXX Model XXXX XXX Model XXXXX Column 4 U I Unit of Issue U D indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column 1 Column 5 Qty Recm Indicates the quantity recommended G 5 5 4 AAL list lt
305. assification of material defect table 270 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E OVERHAUL AND RETIREMENT SCHEDULE CONTINUED PART NAME Clutch Assembly Main Rotor Drive Shaft Main Rotor Drive Plat Nose Gearbox Assembly LH Quill Shaft Assembly Nose Gearbox Assembly RH END OF TASK Table 1 Overhaul and Retirement Schedule OVERHAUL OVERHAUL INTERVAL INTERVAL HOURS NOTES PART NUMBER CAGEC 7 311310003 02771 7 31131003 3 02771 7 31131003 7 02771 7 31131003 9 02771 7 211350021 02781 7 211350021 3 02781 7 211310098 5 02771 7 211310098 7 02771 7 211310098 9 02771 7 211310098 11 02771 7 311320001 3 02831 7 311320001 5 02831 7 211320093 02731 7 311320001 4 02731 7 311320001 6 02731 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0131 2 0131 RETIREMENT RETIREMENT INTERVAL INTERVAL HOURS NOTES FIGURE E 7 Example of an overhaul and retirement schedules 271 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E CROSS SHAFT SPLINES AFT SYNCHRONIZING ENGINE TRANSMISSION END ONLY SHAFT BEARING 1 FITTING LN gt 4 WTR FORWARD SYNCHRONIZING N SHAFT BEARINGS TRANSMISSION OIL 6 FITTINGS 1 PER BEARING COOLING FAN ENGINE CONDITION 1 FITTING CONTROL PANEL 4 wy AFT LANDING GEAR SWIVEL HOUSING 6 FITTINGS 2 PER GEAR SEE NOTE 1 AFT LANDING GEAR TRUNNION 4 FITTINGS 2 PER GEAR NOTES 1 COD
306. ate Therefore the use of special lettering to emphasize mandatory safety of flight inspection items is not to be construed as authority for deferral of other inspections 1 1520 238 dated 28 February 2002 superseded TM 1 1520 238 PM dated 20 June 1994 including all changes DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A Approved for public release distribution is unlimited FIGURE 20 Example of a title block page with warning data for phased maintenance inspection and preventive maintenance services 87 MIL STD 4005 1 2 MANUAL NUMBER TABLE OF CONTENTS WP Sequence No Page No Warning Summary How to Use This Manual Chapter 1 Operator General Information Description and Theory Of Operation Transportation Electronic Shop General Information eese enne WP 0001 Figure 1 Family AN TSM 191 Vehicles suasana Aa r 0001 1 Transportation Electronic Shop Description and Data sss eene tns WP 0002 Figure T Extenor en i a c a P E h pa 0002 2 Figure 2 Interior Components cac peo eti ese etae 0002 2 Table 1 Difference Between Models asua eene 0002 3 Introductions de Ee ee ede me et t ded WP 0003 Powerpack Theory of Operation e eee eret ae eire erede eere damage WP 0004 Fuel System Theory Of Operation e e RR Rer Rr Pel e Ee EUR REO HI Yn er WP 0005 Electrical System Theory of Operation eese EE
307. ation Chart MAC Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Aviation Maintenance Allocation Chart AMAC Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Two Level Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Tools and Test Equipment Requirements for MAC AMAC Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Remarks MAC AMAC Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Expendable and Durable Items List Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Mandatory Replacement Parts List Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Component of End Items COEI List Appendix Technical Manual Supporting Information Basic Issue Items List Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Additional Authorization List AAL Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Tools Identification List Appendix G Technical Manual Supporting Information Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts FSCAP Appendix Technical Manual Supporting Information 35 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 13 6 Footnotes to tables For preferred formatting of numbering footnotes in tables refer to MIL HDBK 1222 4 7 13 7 Tabular information Small amounts of tabular information may be prepared in a two column format without identifying it as a table Each column may have a header 4 7 13 8 Lists Lists may be used in lieu of tables
308. ation data shall be developed and divided into the following types of work packages Nomenclature used to identify the weapon system major equipment components and applicable support and interface equipment shall remain consistent throughout and between all work packages a General information work package lt ginfowp gt b Equipment description and data work package lt descwp gt c Theory of operation work package lt thrywp gt d General information work package Preventive Maintenance Service Manual Only lt pms ginfowp gt e General information work package Phased Maintenance Checklist Manual Only lt pm ginfowp gt B 5 2 General information work package lt ginfowp gt This work package shall contain the requirements provided in B 5 2 1 through B 5 2 26 as applicable for the weapon system equipment B 5 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 B 5 2 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package B 5 2 3 Scope lt scope gt A brief statement shall be prepared to tell what is covered in the TM As applicable the following information shall also be included a Type of manual b Model number s and equipment name s c Purpose of equipment d Special inclusions in the manual such as drill procedures or on vehicle loading plans
309. ation liste publisis ore uerius PR AU 318 G 5 3 Maintenance allocation chart MAC Unit level only 318 G 5 3 1 Introduction for standard format MAC work package macintrowp 319 G 5 3 1 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 319 G 5 3 1 2 Initial setup information Ae secte e saa Pee te 319 G 5 3 1 3 Introduction HH au 319 G 5 3 2 Introduction for three level Army aviation MAC work package lt magi troOWD gt sa 322 G 5 3 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 322 G 5 3 2 2 Initial Set p 13 0245 322 G 5 3 2 3 SIMO osc Qua 322 G 5 3 3 Introduction for two level maintenance format MAC work package 328 G 5 3 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 328 G 5 3 3 2 Initial setup information 328 G 5 3 3 3 a of at ibat iu qa d de 328 G 5 3 4 MAC work package upset tete ce ta HU IO ur US 332 G 5 3 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt
310. aulic or electrical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards on a scheduled basis i e load testing of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses 3 Service Operations required periodically to keep an item in proper operating condition e g to clean includes decontaminate when required to preserve to drain to paint or to replenish fuel lubricants chemical fluids or gases This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms 319 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G 4 Adjust To maintain or regulate within prescribed limits by bringing into proper position or by setting the operating characteristics to specified parameters 5 Align To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance 6 Calibrate To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test measuring and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement Consists of comparisons of two instruments one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared 7 Remove Install To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance functions Install may be the act of emplacing seating or fixing into position a spare repair part or module component or assembly in a manner to allow the proper functio
311. azards is encouraged Approved icons for use in technical manual warnings are contained in FIGURE 2 and FIGURE 3 Additional non standardized warning icons shall be approved by the acquiring activity Equipment damage caution icons shall be approved by the acquiring activity Icons used shall be defined in the General Information Work Package under the list of abbreviations acronyms refer to B 5 2 13 4 7 7 5 1 Development of icons Icons are enclosed in a square or rectangular box refer to FIGURE 2 and FIGURE 3 The signal word s for icons appear outside the box placed to the right or below the icon s These approved icons are available online at http www logsa army mil mil4005 1 menu htm 27 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 7 5 2 Safety warnings with icons lt icon gt The approved safety warning icons provided in FIGURE 2 can be used in conjunction with the WARNING header and description of the hazard For additional information on the use and placement of warnings and icons refer to MIL HDBK 1222 4 7 7 5 3 Hazardous materials warnings lt warning gt Procedures prescribed for the operation and maintenance of equipment shall be consistent with the safety standards established by the Occupational Safety and Health Act OSHA Public Law 91 596 and Executive Order 12196 When exposure to hazardous chemicals or other adverse health factors or use of equipment cannot be eliminated guidance pertaining to the exposure shall be included in the T
312. be entered 262 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 7 Inspection requirements lt requiremnt gt The inspection procedures shall be included in the order of performance for each aircraft inspection area as described in E 5 3 4 14 2 b 2 8 Status lt status gt Status symbols defined in DA PAM 738 751 shall be entered The status symbol of a fault discovered when performing an inspection requirement shall be entered by the person performing the inspection If an inspection reveals no fault a status symbol shall not be entered The person correcting the fault shall place his last name initial over the status symbol A red X or a circled red X symbol will not be initialed over until after the corrective action has been approved and signed of by a technical inspector or designated supervisor 9 Faults and or remarks lt ident fault gt The person performing the inspection shall enter brief remarks which describe the conditions resulting from the inspection and which require corrective action The initials of the person making the entry shall be entered immediately following the remarks If no faults are found no entry is necessary 10 Action taken lt actionreq gt Brief remarks which describe the action to be taken to correct the fault shall be entered by the person that performed the inspection If no faults are found an appropriate statement shall be entered to indicate that the inspection was accomplished such as inspected and fo
313. ble condition will be performed The exemptions and revisions are explained in supporting information work package insert appropriate work package sequence number 170 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B B 5 2 23 Flight safety critical aircraft parts FSCAP Aircraft only lt fscapreq gt following statement shall be included FLIGHT SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS FSCAP A flight safety critical aircraft part is defined as any part assembly or installation whose failure malfunction or absence could cause loss of aircraft serious damage to aircraft death of crewmembers or serious injury to crewmembers A critical characteristic is defined as any feature throughout the life cycle of a FSCAP such as dimension tolerance finish material or assembly manufacturing process inspection process operation field maintenance requirement depot overhaul requirement or other feature that if nonconforming missing or degraded could cause failure or malfunction of a FSCAP B 5 2 24 Cost considerations DMWR NMWR only lt cost gt The following statement shall be included COST CONSIDERATIONS This work requirement shall be the basis for establishing the extent of overhaul while taking into consideration cost factors A determination shall be made on all subassemblies assemblies to replace worn or damaged components which are available in supply if acquisition cost is less than the cost to repair and restore to the
314. cal and chemical NBC decontamination procedures Jamming and electronic lt ecm gt countermeasures ECM procedures Degraded operation procedures EMERGENCY WORK PACKAGE CY WORK EMERGENCY WORK PACKAGE CKAGE C526 2 6 526 xemergencywp gt ISTOWAGE AND DECAL DATA E Br lt stowagewp gt PLATE GUIDE WORK PACKAGE 146 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 14 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P Reference Element Name CHAPTER X kmim IMAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS 52 lt maintenancepmcscategory gt NOTE 22 2 lt maintenancecategory gt Exinig kme P R R R P RR eimi servicing oFequipment Preliminary checks and adjustment of 3 2 3 6 lt prechkadj gt equipment Pini P Ammunition markings 222394 lt ammo markings gt cussion of P Amon nig Procedures io aetate amnion P Aaa sevice upon roowan mames nonoman AINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES R 5 3 5 As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Servicing Ground handling PMCS is required as a minimum in one maintenance chapter SERVICE UPON RECEIPT WORK PACKAGE
315. cal parameters as those in D 5 2 2 2 1 with the additional requirement for special cables or support equipment that may be required D 5 2 2 2 3 Integrated systems requiring the use of common test equipment Testing and troubleshooting procedures shall focus on actual readings or signal requirements so sources of common test equipment will not be restricted D 5 3 Troubleshooting procedures content The procedures shall contain all essential and pertinent information that would be included in any other form of maintenance procedure This includes warnings cautions notes power turn on procedures precheckout procedures reference diagrams and initial switch settings In addition to external causes for malfunctions troubleshooting should also identify symptoms resulting from failure of every spare and repair part authorized for replacement at user level Troubleshooting procedures shall be prepared assuming one malfunction at a time is being corrected The operator technician shall be instructed to perform any applicable self tests alignments and inspections before beginning any other troubleshooting procedures As applicable an operational check shall be specified to be performed after the fault is corrected to ensure correct operation of the system Troubleshooting procedural instructions shall be prepared following these general requirements a concise explanation of the testing and troubleshooting format an explanation on how t
316. cation troubleshooting removal installation disassembly assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage fault malfunction or failure in a part subassembly module component or assembly end item or system NOTE The following definitions are applicable to the repair maintenance function Services Inspect test service adjust align calibrate and or replace Fault location troubleshooting The process of investigating and detecting the case of equipment malfunctioning the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test UUT Disassembly assembly The step by step breakdown taking apart f a spare functional group coded item to the level of its least component that is assigned an SMR code for the level of maintenance under consideration i e identified as maintenance significant Actions Welding grinding riveting straightening facing machining and or resurfacing 11 Overhaul That maintenance effort service action prescribed to restore an item to a completely serviceable operational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical publications Overhaul is normally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army Overhaul des not normally return an item to like new condition 330 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G 12 Rebuild Consists of those services actions necessary for the re
317. cations deletions or additions to the preshop analysis or overhaul procedures required during mobilization shall be included in this WP The data described in E 5 3 8 3 1 through E 5 3 8 3 4 shall be included E 5 3 8 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 8 3 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 8 3 3 Introduction for depot mobilization requirements work package intro The following text shall be included verbatim DEPOT MOBILIZATION REQUIREMENTS INTRODUCTION Scope The purpose of this work package is to streamline and accelerate the overhaul process during the mobilization of the depot Explanation of Mobilization Requirements The mobilization requirements include a list of instructions for modifying preshop analysis and or overhaul procedures The pertinent procedures to be modified are referred to by page and work package number followed by the action to be taken 249 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 8 3 4 Mobilization requirements lt mobilreq gt Mobilization requirements consist of list of actions that shall be in effect during depot mobilization The work packages that are modified by these actions shall be noted This data can be in provided in a table standard information lt mobiltab gt
318. caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field Devices such as integrated circuits and discrete devices e g resistors transistors and other semiconductor devices are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge 3 44 End Item Code EIC A final combination of end products component parts or materials that is ready for its intended use e g tank mobile machine shop aircraft receiver rifle recorder 3 45 Equipment One or more units capable of performing specified functions 3 46 Equipment Improvement Recommendation EIR Solicitation of suggestions from end item users operators for means to improve the operation and effectiveness of equipment The SF 368 is the instrument by which suggested improvements are forwarded to the cognizant agency 3 47 Equipment nomenclature The official name of the equipment as shown in AMDF 3 48 Essential Those systems subsystems components that are required for a designated mission or system operation 3 49 Evacuation A combat service support function which involves the movement of recovered material from a main supply route maintenance collection material may be returned to the user to the supply system for reissue or to property disposal activities 3 50 Expendable items Items other than repair parts that are consumed in use e g paint lubricants wiping rags tape cleaning compounds sandpaper 3 51 Extensible Markup Language XML A subset of SGML It e
319. ce and recoverability SMR codes GENERAL In addition to the Introduction work package this RPSTL is divided into the following work packages 1 Repair Parts List Work Packages Work packages containing lists of spares and repair parts authorized by this RPSTL for use in the performance of maintenance These work packages also include parts which must be removed for replacement of the authorized parts Parts lists are composed of functional groups in ascending alphanumeric sequence with the parts in each group listed in ascending figure and item number sequence Sending units brackets filters and bolts are listed with the component they mount on Bulk materials are listed by item name in FIG BULK at the end of the work packages chose one of the following Repair parts kits are listed separately in their own functional group and work package OR Repair parts kits are listed at the end of the individual work packages Repair parts for reparable special tools are also listed in a separate work package Items listed are shown on the associated illustrations 287 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F 2 Special Tools List Work Packages Work packages containing lists of special tools special TMDE and special support equipment authorized by this RPSTL as indicated by Basis of Issue information in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column Tools that are components of common tool sets and or Class VII are not listed 3 Cross R
320. ce shall be made to the work package s containing information on damage to be expected from exceeding these limits and procedures for minimizing the damage A summary shall be prepared that lists the effects of weather conditions on equipment affecting system capability or causing equipment damage This summary shall include references to any special servicing procedures that must be accomplished because of climatic changes such as adding antifreeze to coolants d Instructions for the use transportation handling storage or disposal of such substances as fuels toxic and hazardous substances chemicals ordnance and munitions shall be prepared These instructions shall meet the applicable requirements of the Federal Environmental Protection Standards standards to be provided by the acquiring activity e The energy efficiency rating shall be included for products that directly consume energy in normal operations and that commonly have a method of expressing energy efficiency B 5 4 Theory of operation work package Except Conventional and Chemical Ammunition only lt thrywp gt Theory of operation shall be prepared to provide the maintenance technician with adequate background information to support and perform maintenance tasks and troubleshooting on the weapon system equipment or components DMWR NMWR shall include this work package s as required by the acquiring activity The amount of detail and complexity of the theory of opera
321. cedures and 4 7 23 3 4 Metric U S Std 4 7 23 8 INSINScS Dart numbers de nT RE ge Pad 4 7 23 6 Oth r Es 2o ite abire 4 7 23 1 Repeating information 4 7 23 4 Specifications and Standards 4 7 23 2 E 4 7 23 3 5 4 7 23 9 TM DIRVISIOS et aed tet vested ad deca te guae 4 23 3 1 hcl in cM 4 7 23 3 2 Within the TM z anun aa Rp 4 7 23 3 Work AC AGES MT 4 7 23 3 3 Remarks un G 5 3 6 Rerioval inei bedaoncte tetti te das ins QU Edad elu uestes de E 5 3 5 3 6 BODIE oon an Uem up e M ER dE 5 3 5 3 11 REP all Dales nis tinge ent ae ea eee 5 2 25 3 Repair parts for special tools 5 3 7 Repair parts list work package 5 3 6 Repeatin e 11T SETAHODS et o og eon es 4 7 15 3 Repeating information ese 4 7 23 4 isses 5 3 5 3 11 Reporting errors 5
322. cedures for ammunition activation Additional maintenance task Follow on maintenance GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK TORQUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE TEST AND INSPECTION MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES Test and inspection MIL STD 40051 2 TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 23 24 23 amp P 24 amp P 159 MIL STD 40051 2 Reference Element Nam E 5 3 5 3 9 lt acptrejinsp gt B 5 3 5 3 00 34 34 amp P lt ndti gt 5 3 5 3 13 lt paint gt lt test inspect gt lt install gt lt adjust gt lt pss gt lt ammo defect gt lt ammo handling gt 5 3 5 3 29 lt arm gt 0 lt torquewp gt lt wiringwp gt lt mim gt w o lt testinspectioncategory gt lt maintwp gt lt test inspect gt 5 5 3 5 2 16 m b MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A XIV TM Requirements Matrix for Chemical Ammunition 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 34 amp P Reference Element Name CHAPTER X 25 mim SHIPMENT MOVEMENT AND 5 2 shipmentmovementstoragec STORAGE MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS lt ammunitioncategory gt MUNITION MARKING INFORMATION 5 3 14 2 ammo markingwp WORK PACKAGE PARTS INFORMATION 10 THROUGH 14 12 amp P THROUGH 14 amp P
323. checks and procedures for inspection of distance measurements e g clearance end play backlash shall be prepared Measurement criteria and tolerances shall reflect the Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment TMDE available to the user For Depot and aviation only test and inspection procedures which have a major quality assurance effect shall be preceded by a statement such as check to identify them E 5 3 5 3 16 1 Inspection and test of conventional and chemical ammunition or components containing radioactive materials DS GS and AVIM only lt test inspect gt The following information shall be prepared a A statement to the effect that inspection criteria are provided to assure that maintenance performed will restore the items to an Acceptable Quality Level AQL shall be included The types of inspection procedures shall at a minimum include a pre maintenance inspection to be conducted during unpacking in process inspections and final acceptance inspection Regulations and technical publications relating to policy responsibility and procedures applicable to ammunition stockpile reliability ammunition surveillance radioactive materials procedures and quality evaluation programs shall be referenced When approved by the acquiring activity these procedures contained in other publications shall be included in the task Instructions shall be prepared for inspection methods or techniques used to detect defective co
324. ckage refer to 4 7 9 1 F 5 3 7 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package F 5 3 7 3 Special tools repair parts items list lt pi category gt The special tools repair parts items list requirements in F 5 3 6 3 2 shall be used except as specified in F 5 3 7 3 1 298 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F F 5 3 7 3 1 Functional group header lt fnegrp gt The functional group header shall precede the first special tools repair part item in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column The functional group number and title fnccode shall be SPECIAL TOOLS REPAIR PARTS appearing on the top line s The next line s below shall be the figure number and the figure title lt fnctitle gt F 5 3 8 Kit parts list work package lt kitswp gt A kits parts work package lt kitswp gt refer to FIGURE 8 shall be prepared when kit parts are listed separately in accordance with F 5 3 6 3 2 5 h 3 Option 2 kits The work package shall follow the last repair parts list work package lt plwp gt or repair parts for special tools list work package stl partswp when provided and shall precede the bulk items list work package bulk itemswps if provided The work package consists of one or more kits part item lists lt pi category gt organized by functional group The work package data requirements are specified in F 5 3 8 1 through F 5 3 8 3 F 5 3 8 1 Work package identification informa
325. compliance The requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The applicable documents in section 2 apply to this appendix F 3 DEFINITIONS The definitions in section 3 apply to this appendix F 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS F 4 1 General The RPSTL provides authorized spares and repair parts special tools special Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment TMDE and other special support equipment required for performance of all levels of maintenance of the weapon system equipment subsystems assemblies and components It authorizes the requisitioning issue and disposition of spares repair parts and special tools in accordance with the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR codes Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity all RPSTL information for all levels of maintenance including depot shall be in a single RPSTL When separate RPSTLs are specified by the acquiring activity they shall be grouped either by system subsystem or by maintenance level Duplication of the RPSTL data should be avoided An explanation of all applicable Department of Army maintenance levels is provided in section 3 F 4 2 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery Technical manual data prepared and delivered digitally in accordance with this standard shall be Extensible Ma
326. components which are authorized for replacement instructions shall be prepared to report or reenter the empty container through supply channels 3 Man hour requirements and total man hours required for unpacking the ammunition b Packing lt ammo packing gt As a minimum the following information shall be prepared 1 Any special sequence of action necessary to protect the ammunition 2 Instructions shall be prepared on how to package defective ammunition 3 Man hour requirements and total man hours required for packing the ammunition E 5 3 2 3 9 4 Procedures needed to activate ammunition mine etc arm Procedures shall be prepared for activation of ammunition mines etc preparatory to detonation E 5 3 2 3 10 Other service upon receipt task lt other surtsk gt Additional service upon receipt task may be developed when the specific type of service upon receipt tasks are not covered as described in E 5 3 2 3 1 through E 5 3 2 3 9 4 If additional service upon receipt tasks are used proponent shall submit to LOGSA the requirements for this service upon receipt task type for possible incorporation within future revisions to this standard E 5 3 2 3 11 Follow on maintenance lt followon maintsk gt See E 5 3 5 3 31 for requirements E 5 3 3 Equipment user fitting instructions work package Unit A VUM or above only lt perseqpwp gt As applicable equipment user fitting instructions for personal use equipment shall b
327. control settings needed for installation purposes shall be prepared For security measures for electronic data instructions shall be prepared for handling loading purging overwriting or unloading classified electronic data under usual conditions Instructions shall meet current security regulations as they pertain to automation security E 5 3 5 3 3 Servicing service a Instructions shall be prepared for replenishment of fuel oil hydraulic or other fluids Oxygen nitrogen other gases and tire pressure plus any other such items and materials except for lubricants required for complete servicing of the equipment Servicing instructions shall be supplemented with a diagram showing locations of regular and emergency servicing points Items located on each side of the equipment which require servicing will be illustrated and identified as right and left side NO STEP areas on walkways leading to any tank in an aircraft shall be indicated and necessary cautions included All expendable and durable items used in the servicing instructions shall be referenced and contained in the expendable and durable items list refer to G 5 6 by military and federal standard nomenclature part number MIL STD and CAGEC A servicing diagram shall be referenced or included to support the procedures when required The warnings and cautions to observe in servicing a particular tank or reservoir e g grounding and prevention of fire hazards sh
328. corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test measuring and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement Consists of comparisons of two instruments one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared 7 Remove Install To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance functions Install may be the act of emplacing seating or fixing into position a spare repair part or module component or assembly in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system 8 Replace To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place Replace is authorized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code 9 Repair The application of maintenance services including fault location troubleshooting removal installation disassembly assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage fault malfunction or failure in a part subassembly module component or assembly end item or system NOTE The following definitions are applicable to the repair maintenance function Services Inspect test service adjust align calibrate and or replace 0439 1 FIGURE G 2 Example of a standard MAC i
329. cratched or blistered surfaces e Mark To restore obliterated identification Adjust To maintain or regulate within prescribed limits by brining into roper position or by setting the operating characteristics to specified parameters Align To adjust specified variable elements of an item to bring about optimum or desired performance Calibrate To determine and cause corrections to be made or to be adjusted on instruments of test measuring and diagnostic equipment used in precision measurement Consists of comparisons of two instruments one of which is a certified standard of known accuracy to detect and adjust any discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being compared Remove install To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance functions Install may be the act of emplacing seating or fixing into position a spare repair part or module component or assembly in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system Paint To prepare and spray color coats of paint so that the ammunition can be identified and protected The color indicating primary use is applied preferably to the entire exterior surface as the background color of the item Other markings are to be repainted as original so as to retain proper ammunition identification Replace To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place Replace is authorized by the MAC
330. croform System AMDF file for detailed packaging information If AMDF does not contain the information that you need you must contact the AMC Packaging Storage and Containerization Center Tobyhanna Army Depot for packaging information b Special instructions Instructions shall be prepared for any special or unique preservation packaging or marking instructions that apply to the equipment These instructions shall include warnings cautions or references concerning ESD nuclear material hazardous substances special marking instructions or any other instructions required that are not covered in the standard packaging and preservation information E 5 3 5 3 24 Overhaul and retirement schedule aircraft only lt orsch gt This maintenance task shall include the following statement in the introduction and associated table standard information 245 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E OVERHAUL AND RETIREMENT SCHEDULE Units of operating equipment that are to be overhauled or retired at the period specified are listed here Unless otherwise specified in TM 1 1500 328 23 Aeronautical Equipment Maintenance Management Policies and Procedures removal of equipment for overhaul may be accomplished at the inspection nearest the time when overhaul is due The overhaul and retirement schedule refer to FIGURE E 7 shall consist of the entries described below The overhaul and retirement schedule may be prepared as a table a Part na
331. ctronic data instructions shall be prepared for handling loading purging overwriting or unloading classified electronic data under usual conditions Instructions shall meet current security regulations as they pertain to automation security E 5 3 2 3 4 2 Installation of the equipment a Installation instructions shall be prepared for all of the following actions including placing mounting and attaching 1 Cable and wiring interconnections 2 Proper use of special tools Installation instructions shall identify all dimensions that must be maintained in placing mounting or attaching items When initial adjustments can be made efficiently during installation such adjustments shall be included For equipment designed and intended for use in more than one type of installation e g field fixed station and mobile instructions shall be prepared for each type of installation involved If performance of any step in the installation instructions requires the assistance of personnel from a higher level of maintenance this shall be stated in a note similar to that below 226 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E NOTE The following installation procedure must be made with the assistance of insert level maintenance personnel include Military Occupational Specialty MOS if applicable f Installation instructions shall be considered complete only when they include instructions for 1 All required installati
332. cycle Support CALS raster Compressed scanned raster images CCITT Group 4 in accordance with MIL PRF 28002 3 22 Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC A five character code assigned to commercial activities that manufacture or supply items used by the Federal Government and to Government activities that control design or are responsible for the development of certain specifications standards or drawings which control the design of Government items CAGE Code assignments are listed in the HA H8 CAGE Publications 3 23 Complete repair Maintenance capacity capability and authority to perform all the corrective maintenance tasks of the repair function in a use or user environment in order to restore serviceability to a failed item Excludes the prescriptive maintenance functions overhaul and rebuild 3 24 Component A constituent part not normally considered capable of independent operation a piece part 3 25 Components of End Item COED Items identified on the engineering drawing tree which are physically separated and distinct from the end item 3 26 Comprehensibility The completeness with which a user in the target audience understands the information in the TM 11 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 27 Continuous Acquisition Life cycle Support CALS A DoD initiative to transition from paper intensive non integrated weapon systems design manufacturing and support processes to a highly automated and integrated mode of operatio
333. d 1 Any special sequence of action necessary to protect the ammunition 2 Instructions shall be prepared on how to package defective ammunition 3 Man hour requirements and total man hours required for packing the ammunition E 5 3 5 3 28 Ammunition markings lt ammo markings gt Instructions shall be prepared for marking ammunition and ammunition containers E 5 3 5 3 29 Procedures needed to activate ammunition mine etc arm Procedures shall be prepared for activation of ammunition mines etc E 5 3 5 3 30 Additional maintenance task lt other maintsk gt Additional maintenance task may be developed when the specific type of maintenance tasks are not covered as described in E 5 3 5 3 2 through E 5 3 5 3 29 If additional maintenance tasks are used proponent shall submit to LOGSA the requirements for this maintenance task type for possible incorporation within future revisions to this standard 5 3 5 3 31 Follow on maintenance task lt followon maintsk gt As applicable instructions shall be prepared for follow on maintenance and shall be the last task in the work package Follow on is a maintenance condition which must be accomplished sometime following the completion of a task to clean up or undo actions performed during the task For example in order to fix a component a task might require that an access panel be removed The panel would then need to be replaced as a follow on action This task might be performed sometim
334. d correctly when developing a document instance E 4 6 Use of the DTD XSLs DTD referenced in this standard interpret the technical content and structure for the functional requirements contained in this standard and are mandatory for use The XSLs referenced herein interpret the style and format As specified by the contracting activity XSLs or style sheets may be used to produce final reproducible paper copy for all TMs prepared in accordance with this standard For additional information on the DTD and specific XSLs refer to MIL STD 2361 E 4 7 Content structure and format The examples provided herein are an accurate representation of the content structure and format requirements contained in this appendix and shall be followed to permit the effective use of the DTD for Maintenance Instructions E 4 8 Style and format This standard provides style and format requirements for the technical content requirements described in this appendix These requirements are considered mandatory and are intended for compliance E 4 9 Work package development Technical manual data developed in accordance with this standard shall be divided into individual stand alone units of information called work packages A work package shall consist of descriptive operational maintenance troubleshooting support or parts information for the weapon system or equipment E 4 10 Safety devices and interlocks Information shall be prepared pertaining to
335. d in a single work package c If the relative complexity of the weapon system equipment is such that it is reasonable to first present the theory of the end item as a unit and then present the theory of its major system subsystems and component it shall be presented in a series of work packages A separate theory of operation work package shall be developed for each aircraft system The work package may contain the functional operation for the system lt systhry gt its subsystems lt ssysthry gt and its components line replacement units LRUs lt lruthry gt and shop replacement units SRUs lt sruthry gt or when necessary for usability or clarity subsystem and component theory of operation may be provided in separate work packages Subsystem component theory of operation may be included in either the subsystem theory of operation work package or in a separate component theory of operation work package Detailed component functional operation common circuitry and wiring diagrams shall not be included unless necessary to understand system subsystem function d Theory narrative shall be to a depth necessary to support the technician in fault isolation to the level directed by the LMI and or maintenance plan The operation of the weapon system and related systems components shall be presented in a logical flow Significant input output and control signals supply voltages and power supply output voltages shall be identified If the equipm
336. d in illustrations or figures but not found in the text or in any other portion of the TM shall be spelled out in a note to the applicable illustration or figure e When abbreviations or acronyms are used as markings on the equipment placarding the same abbreviations or acronyms shall be used in the TM 4 7 18 Symbols 4 7 18 1 General information for symbols All nonstandard symbols shall be defined in the list of abbreviations and acronyms contained in the General Information work package refer to B 5 2 13 New symbols shall not duplicate those presently listed in ASTM F856 ASTM F1000 95 ASME Y32 2 6 where possible 4 7 18 2 Metric symbols Metric symbols shall be in accordance with IEEE 945 1984 4 7 19 Nuclear hardness hardness critical processes marking Hardness Critical Processes shall be marked with the acronym HCP as shown in 4 7 19 b The acronym shall be prepared in boldface type and in the same style and size as the adjacent text The acronym shall not be shown with the titles in the table of contents Use of the acronym is as follows a When the entire task and all subordinate paragraphs and steps relate to establishing nuclear hardness the acronym HCP shall precede the task title For example HCP DISASSEMBLY b When the entire task and all subordinate paragraphs and steps do not contribute to establishing nuclear hardness only those which do contribute shall be annotated with the acronym HCP For
337. d numbered E NE accordingly REARMATTER Gmwy _ C Ameis fej Crewe R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required ur sa Rui 161 MIL STD 4005 1 2 REMARKS FOR TABLE 162 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION B 1 SCOPE B 1 1 Scope This appendix establishes the technical content requirements for the preparation of general information equipment description and theory of operation data for major weapon systems and their related systems subsystems equipment weapons replacement assemblies WRAs and shop replacement assemblies SRAs This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for compliance The requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs B 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The applicable documents in section 2 apply to this Appendix B 3 DEFINITIONS The definitions in section 3 apply to this Appendix B 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS B 4 1 General Descriptive information with theory of operation shall be prepared for weapon systems major equipment components and applicable support and interface equipment Informatio
338. d reading grade level of a document is specified by the acquiring activity For example a level of about ninth grade may be required for materials of a technical nature to be included in maintenance manuals 3 60 Graphic s Any type of presentation or representation which gives a clear visual impression 3 61 Hardness Critical Item A support item that provides the equipment with special protection from electromagnetic pulse EMP damage during a nuclear attack 14 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 62 Hardness Critical Process HCP A process affecting a mission critical item which could degrade system survivability in a nuclear biological or chemical hostile environment if hardness were not considered Nuclear HCPs are processes finishes specifications manufacturing techniques and or procedures which are hardness critical and which if changed could degrade nuclear hardness 3 63 Hardtime intervals Hardtime maintenance is scheduled maintenance conducted at predetermined fixed intervals because of age calendar or usage such as operating time flying hours miles driven or rounds fired 3 64 Header One or more lines of standard text that appear at the top of each page also called heads and running heads 3 65 Horizontal Landscape TM format Positioning of technical manual so that page horizontal width dimensions are greater than vertical height dimensions 3 66 Icon Pictorial representation visual image to gi
339. de those common tool sets not individual tools common TMDE and special tools special TMDE and special support equipment required to perform the designated function Column 6 Remarks Code When applicable this column contains a letter code in alphabetical order which is keyed to the remarks Explanation of Columns in the Tools and Test Equipment Requirements Column 1 Tool or Test Equipment Reference Code The tool or test equipment reference code correlates with a code used in column 5 of the MAC Column 2 Maintenance Level The lowest level of maintenance authorized to use the tool or test equipment Column 3 Nomenclature Name or identification of the tool or test equipment Column 4 National Stock Number NSN The NSN of the tool or test equipment Column 5 Tool Number The manufacturer s part number Explanation of Columns in the Remarks Column 1 Remarks Code The code recorded in column 6 of the MAC Column 2 Remarks This column lists information pertinent to the maintenance function being performed as indicated in the MAC G 5 3 3 Introduction for two level maintenance format MAC work package lt macintrowp gt G 5 3 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt This information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 3 3 2 Initial setup information This initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 3 3 3
340. ded Italicized text shall be replaced with the appropriate information 177 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B PHASED SCHEDULE The phased maintenance inspection checklist contains requirements for inspection of the insert aircraft model aircraft on a phased schedule having a insert flight hour cycle hour flight hours cycle with insert phase hours hour phases Each requirement included herein is designated for accomplishment at least once but not more than insert number of phases times during the insert flight hour cycle hour cycle EXCEEDING THE PHASED SCHEDULE The phased maintenance inspection intervals designated are the maximum and shall not be exceeded except in actual operational emergencies as explained herein It is the Commander s responsibility to determine on an individual aircraft basis when inspection intervals may be exceeded For this purpose operational emergencies are conditions of combat or conditions of disaster which necessitate flight to evacuate aircraft or personnel When aircraft are operated beyond the normal inspection due time because of such emergency situations a circled red X status symbol and an appropriate statement to include authority must be entered in block 16 and 17 of DA Form 2408 13 Aircraft Inspection and Maintenance Record until such time as the inspection is complete When inspections are delayed to meet emergency requirements Commanders will assure that the aircraft status symbol r
341. dels models MEE 535 Keqpdiff gt Equipment data 0000 data R B53 6 3 6 Keapdata gt THEORY OF OPERATION WORK 5 4 CHAPTER X lt opim gt OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND USE OF 5 2 3 lt ctrlindwp gt OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS WORK PACKAGE OPERATION UNDER USUAL 5 2 4 lt opusualwp gt CONDITIONS WORK PACKAGE Security measures for electronic data measures Security measures for electronic data electronic data Initial before use and self tes aa Decals instruction plates Operating auxiliary equipment Preparation for movement Preparation for movement movement Security measures for electronic data measures Security measures for electronic data electronic data C52531 Fording swimming 5 2 5 3 3 Kfording gt Interim nuclear biological and chemical S _ NBC decontamination procedures Jamming and electronic countermeasures Kecm ECM Degraded operation procedures operation procedures 5 2 5 3 6 gt ee _ ISTOWAGE AND DECAL DATA PLATE GUIDE WORK PACKAGE ON VEHICLE EQUIPMENT LOADING 5 2 8 lt eqploadwp gt PLAN WORK PACKAGE 100 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 12 13 14 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P 14 amp P Reference Element Name PROCEDURES NOTE The notation
342. demn and dispose of the item at the direct support level Reparable item When uneconomically reparable condemn and dispose of the item at the general support level Reparable item When beyond lower level repair capability return to depot Condemnation and disposal of item are not authorized below depot level Reparable item Condemnation and disposal not authorized below Specialized Repair Activity SRA Item requires special handling or condemnation procedures because of specific reasons such as precious metal content high dollar value critical material or hazardous material Refer to appropriate manuals directives for specific instructions Filed level reparable item Condemn and dispose at either afloat or ashore intermediate levels Navy only Reparable item Condemnation and disposal to be performed at contractor facility 291 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F NSN Column 3 The NSN for the item is listed in this column CAGEC Column 4 The Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC is a five digit code which is used to identify the manufacturer distributor or Government agency activity that supplies the item PART NUMBER Column 5 Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer individual company firm corporation or Government activity which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means of its engineering drawings specifications standards and inspection requirements to identify a
343. dence to accomplish a set of specific functions 20 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 140 Tags Descriptive markup as in a start tag and end tag 3 141 Tailoring The process of evaluating individual potential requirements to determine their pertinence and cost effectiveness The tailoring of data requirements is limited to the exclusion of information requirement provisions and selecting or specifying applicable requirements 3 142 Task A sequence of user actions with a beginning and an end User tasks relate to installation checkout operation and maintenance of systems or equipment 3 143 Technical Manuals TM Manuals that contain instructions for the installation operation maintenance and support of weapon systems weapon system components and support equipment TM information may be presented according to prior agreement between the contractor and the Government in any form or characteristic including hard printed copy audio and visual displays electronic imbedded media disks other electronic devices or other media They normally include operational and maintenance instructions parts lists and related technical information or procedures exclusive of administrative procedures 3 144 Test To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical pneumatic hydraulic electrical or electronic characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards 3 145 Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment T
344. diagramisu m 41 Repeauno 41 Equipment components and 41 National Stock Numbers NSNs and Part Numbers P Ns 41 Equipment panel markings placardin 41 Metric U S standard measurements eene 41 ua a Ep 41 EDU 41 INOIUIenal tutes on Oi E sa 42 Nomenclature consistency and 42 Official approved nometiclature 42 Military n naam 42 Automatic electronic test and checkout terminology 42 Comprebhensibility 42 SEA ICS wastes 42 Graphic format 42 Types of graphics 42 42 Multiview and multisheet illustrations 43 43 MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE AT 212
345. dures for proper handling blocking and bracing of basic load ammunition when being transported in trucks and other tactical vehicles g Conventional and chemical ammunition only Basic load storage quantity distance class storage compatibility groupings storage temperatures stacking limits and other pertinent storage requirements h For aviation ground support equipment a reference to TM 1 1500 204 23 for general technical information for preparation for storage or shipment E 5 3 5 3 26 Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt Procedures shall be prepared for performing visual inspection of ammunition containers pallets boxes etc and shall include classification and disposition of defective ammunition containers 246 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 5 3 27 Handling ammunition lt ammo handling gt Procedures shall be prepared for handling ammunition a Unpacking lt ammo unpacking gt As a minimum the following information shall be prepared 1 Any special sequence of action necessary to protect the ammunition 2 Ifa special design reusable container is involved for either the end item or components which are authorized for replacement instructions shall be prepared to report or reenter the empty container through supply channels 3 Man hour requirements and total man hours required for unpacking the ammunition b Packing lt ammo packing gt As a minimum the following information shall be prepare
346. e exact and complete e g research of authorized changes Modification Work Orders MWOs additions deletions for special mission requirements shall be included The introduction shall include a reference to DA PAM 738 751 for applicable forms and records E 5 3 12 2 4 Security security It shall be stated here that aircraft inventory records should be unclassified but that any classification of the contents if necessary should be in accordance with the existing security regulations E 5 3 12 2 5 Inventoriable items inventoriable The selection of inventoriable items to be listed is to be without regard to the agency governmental or contractual furnishing the items a Items to be listed are as follows 1 Items essential to the execution of the designated mission of the aircraft such as electronic photographic armament special mission instruments and safety and comfort equipment 2 Loose equipment delivered with the aircraft and items subject to pilferage or readily converted to personal use 3 Modification kits which are reissued or distributed to using organizations for installation and which are not immediately placed in use These shall be recorded on the affected aircraft s DA Form 2408 17 Aircraft Inventory Record and identified as loose equipment until modification is completed 4 Equipment required for operation in a specific environment b Items to be excluded are as follows 1 Nonaccountable items
347. e Unit A VUM level or above only lt torquewp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and information prepared to provide applicable torque values torque expressed in lb ft or Ib in terms data as to bolt grade markings and their proper identification and specific torque sequencing requirements Refer to FIGURE E 11 for an example of the type of information presented in a torque limits work package The torque data described in E 5 3 10 1 through E 5 3 10 4 shall be included E 5 3 10 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 10 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package 252 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 10 3 Introduction lt intro gt Information shall be prepared to include the scope or how to use the work package E 5 3 10 4 Torque instructions lt torqueval gt Specific instructions such as torque limits for dry and wet fasteners fastener sizes and thread patterns etc shall be prepared E 5 3 11 Wiring diagrams work package Unit A VUM level or above only lt wiringwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and include wiring and cable provisions contained in the equipment end item including all systems or equipment which can be installed or removed later e g m
348. e and the Reference Designator Index work package The National Stock Number Index work package refers you to the figure and item number The Part Number Index work package refers you to the figure and item number The Reference Designator Index work package refers you to the figure and item number EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE REPAIR PARTS LIST AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK PACKAGES ITEM NO Column 1 Indicates the number used to identify items called out in the illustration SMR CODE Column 2 The SMR code containing supply requisitioning information maintenance level authorization criteria and disposition instruction as shown in the following breakout Table 1 SMR Code Source Maintenance Recoverability Code Code Code XX XX X Ist two positions 3rd position 4th position 5th position How to get an item Who can install Who can do Who determines replace or use the complete repair on disposition action on item the item unserviceable items Complete Repair Maintenance capacity capability and authority to perform all corrective maintenance tasks of the Repair function ina use user environment in order to restore serviceability to a failed item Source Code The source code tells you how you get an item needed for maintenance repair or overhaul of an end item equip ment Explanations of source codes follow Source Code Application Explanation PA Stock items use the applicable NSN to 0001 1 FIGURE F 2 Example
349. e 2 Item 2 in place within shell Figure 2 Item 6 3 Screw on bushing retaining nut Figure 2 Item 4 to shell Figure 2 Item 7 Tighten busing retaining nut Figure 2 Item 4 4 Install 24 volt connector receptacle WP 0030 END OF TASK END OF WORK PACKAGE 0029 2 FIGURE 1 Example of a maintenance work package continued 63 we b S MIL STD 40051 2 EAR PROTECTION headphones over ears shows that noise level will harm ears ELECTRICAL electrical wire to arm with electricity symbol running through human body shows that shock hazard is present ELECTRICAL electrical wire to hand with electricity symbol running through hand shows that shock hazard is present FALLING PARTS arrow bouncing off human shoulder and head shows that falling parts present a danger to life or limb FLYING PARTICLES arrows bouncing off face shows that particles flying through the air will harm face FLYING PARTICLES arrows bouncing off face with face shield shows that particles flying through the air will harm face HEAVY OBJECT human figure stooping over heavy object shows physical injury potential from improper lifting technique FIGURE 2 List of approved safety warning icons 64 PL be Rec MIL STD 40051 2 HEAVY PARTS hand with heavy object on top shows that heavy parts can crush and harm HEAVY PARTS foot with heavy object on top shows that heavy parts can crush and harm HEAVY
350. e E 16 Example of an inspection area diagram a 281 Figure 17 Example of inspection access provisions 282 Figure F 1 RPSTL page layout scenarios det e Ses Ue Resort ten 303 Figure F 2 Example of an introduction work 304 Figure F 3 Example of Indexed RPSTL Illustration and Legend 305 Figure F 4 Example of a repair parts list illustration eene 306 Figure F 5 Example of a repair parts list work package 308 Figure F 6 Example of indentions next higher assembly eese 309 Figure F 7 Example of kits breakdown option 1 310 Figure F 8 Example of kits breakdown option 2 seen 311 Figure F 9 Example of a bulk material list epit 312 Figure F 10 Example of a special tools list work package 313 Figure F 11 Example of a national stock number index work package 314 Figure F 12 Example of a part number index work package 315 Figure F 13 Example of a reference designator index work package 316 Example f Telere
351. e after the repair task is completed but not immediately after the repair task Other maintenance tasks might be performed in the same area before the follow on task is accomplished E 5 3 6 General maintenance work package lt maintwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and contain common general or standard maintenance procedures e g specific torque wrench usage lockwire procedures ring seal installation external power connections etc applicable to other maintenance work packages contained within the TM that require the general maintenance procedures to complete the tasks Maintenance tasks listed in E 5 3 5 3 may be included as applicable This WP may be referenced in other maintenance work packages E 5 3 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 5 3 6 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 247 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 5 3 6 3 Maintenance tasks lt maintsk gt Maintenance tasks requirements E 5 3 5 3 shall be included E 5 3 7 Lubrication instructions work package lt lubewp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and contain the requirements outlined in E 5 3 7 1 through E 5 3 7 4 E 5 3 7 1 Work package identification informat
352. e and durable items that you will need to operate and maintain the enter equipment end item name This list is for information only and is not authority to requisition the listed items These items are authorized to you by CTA 50 970 Expendable Durable Items Except Medical Class V Repair Parts and Heraldic Items CTA 50 909 Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment or CTA 8 100 Army Medical Department Expendable Durable Items Explanation of Columns in the Expendable Durable Items List Column 1 Item No This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the narrative instructions to identify the item e g Use brake fluid WP 0098 item 5 Column 2 Level This column identifies the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item include as applicable C Operator Crew O Unit AVUM F Direct Support AVIM H General Support D Depot Column 3 National Stock Number NSN This is the NSN assigned to the item which you can use to requisition it Column 4 Item Name Description Part Number CAGEC This column provides the other information you need to identify the item The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 5 U I Unit of Issue U I code shows the physical measurement or count of an item such as gallon dozen gross etc G 5 6 4 Expendable and durable items list lt explist gt This
353. e and surface hardness Process core and surface hardness FIGURE G 16 Example of a flight safety critical aircraft parts table 361 MIL STD 4005 1 2 A AAB TH ee DE a G 5 5 4 AAL work package ice tee e a e ia G 5 5 y ice 4 7 17 Abbreviations 5 2 13 Abbreviations Wiring essere 5 3 11 5 Abbreviations acronyms list 5 2 13 1 amp m 5 3 8 4 9 E 4 7 17 Additional maintenance 5 3 5 3 30 Additional source datas 5 1c Additional work packa ees G 5 11 Adjustmentia Dua eae vente ens sane 5 3 5 3 18 Advertising 5 2 26 2 Aircraft inventory master guide 5 3 12 2 PAH BME M RC E 5 3 5 3 12 Alignment proce dures deer uU S da E 5 3 2 3 8c Ammunition Activation procedures secet rae e EUR E 5 3 2 3 9 4 Activation procedures
354. e as follows 1 Mean Operator Preventive Maintenance Time shall not exceed 0 25 man hours per mission This time shall not be included in organizational preventive maintenance time 2 Maximum operator Corrective Maintenance Time shall not exceed 1 00 man hours per mission without being classified as a mission failure 3 ratio of total corrective and organizational preventive maintenance man hours to operating hours shall not exceed 0 10 4 The ratio of total organizational preventive maintenance man hours to total operating hours shall not exceed 0 04 5 ratio of total corrective maintenance man hours to operating hours shall not exceed 0 06 6 Mean man hours to perform a corrective maintenance action shall not exceed 2 5 7 The Mean Time Between Corrective Maintenance Actions shall not be less than 150 operating hours 8 The engine shall have an 80 percent probability of not requiring replacement in 20 000 miles of operation 9 The gun tube shall have an 80 percent probability of not requiring replacement in 50 000 rounds of operation 10 The truck shall have a 92 percent probability of not requiring replacement in 5 450 miles of operation EXAMPLE OF NARRATIVE RAMDATA FIGURE E 4 Example of tabular and narrative reliability availability and maintainability data 268 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX E 0280 DEPOT MAINTENANCE SPUR GEAR FOR OVERHAUL INSPECTION PROCEDURES INITIAL SETUP References WP 0052
355. e designed to collect and report operations maintenance historical and parts requisition data required for efficient management and support of aviation and non aviation weapon systems and their related systems equipment and components modules 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS 2 1 General The documents listed in this section are specified in sections 3 4 and 5 of this standard This section does not include documents cited in other sections of this multipart standard or recommended for additional information or as examples While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list document users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements documents cited in sections 3 4 and 5 of this standard whether or not they are listed 2 2 Government documents 2 2 1 Specifications standards and handbooks The following specifications standards and handbooks form a part of this document to the extent specified herein Unless otherwise specified the issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract SPECIFICATIONS DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE MIL DTL 24784 Manuals Technical General Acquisition And Development Requirements MIL PRF 28000 Digital Representation for Communication of Product Data IGES Application Subsets and IGES Application Protocols MIL PRF 28002 Raster Graphics Representation in Binary Format Requirements for MIL STD 4005 1 2 MIL PRF 28003 Digital Represe
356. e figure and locate the item number Verify that the item is the one you are looking for ABBREVIATIONS Abbreviation Explanation Include uncommon abbreviations used in the RPSTL List define those not found in ASME Y14 38 F 5 3 5 4 Indexed RPSTL illustration and legend figure When specified by the acquiring activity an indexed RPSTL illustration and legend shall be added to the end of the introduction work package Complex weapon systems have numerous repair parts lists associated to the equipment and the illustration and legend assists in locating the repair parts information The indexed RPSTL illustration shall provide an exploded view of the equipment with index numbers pointing to the major functional groups The illustration shall have a legend that defines the item number major functional group figure title and figure number Refer to FIGURE F 3 F 5 3 6 Repair parts list work package lt plwp gt Each repair parts list work package shall be prepared Refer to FIGURE F 4 and FIGURE F 5 The repair parts list s shall be listed in the format and data requirements in F 5 3 6 1 through F 5 3 6 3 2 8 Refer to FIGURE F 5 For simple equipment or large functional groups multiple repair parts lists can be included in a single work package 5 3 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 F 5 3 6 2 Initial setup infor
357. e frame as prescribed by insert TB 43 0106 Aeronautical Equipment Army Oil Analysis Program AOAP or DA PAM 738 750 Functional Users Guide for the Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS 230 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 3 not available non enrolled statement When component equipment is not enrolled in the AOAP or oil analysis support is not available the following statement shall be inserted This enter name of component equipment is not enrolled in the Army Oil Analysis Program HARDTIME INTERVALS APPLY 4 Warranty hardtime statement The following statement shall be used as applicable For equipment under manufacturer s warranty hardtime oil service intervals shall be followed Intervals shall be shortened if lubricants are known to be contaminated or if operation is under adverse conditions such as longer than usual operating hours extended idling periods extreme dust e When the equipment contains fluids such as lubrication oil or hydraulic fluid leakage criteria shall be prepared for the PMCS introduction as follows and referred to in the NOT READY AVAILABLE IF column FLUID LEAKAGE It is necessary for you to know how fluid leakage affects the status of the enter component equipment name Following are types classes of leakage you need to know to be able to determine the status of the enter component equipment name Learn these leakage definitions and remember when
358. e front cover of all classified and unclassified TMs DMWRs and NMWRSs except those with distribution statement This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific authority of the Department of the Army of the United 50 MIL STD 4005 1 2 States that it will be used for military purposes only that individual or corporate rights originating in the information whether patented or not will be respected that the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected compromise and that the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security afforded it by the Department of Defense of the United States Also regardless of any other markings on the document it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the originating United States agency 5 2 1 1 7 Distribution statement lt dist gt All TMs DMWRs and NMWRs shall have a distribution statement placed on the front cover for each manual or revision refer to FIGURE 10 The appropriate distribution statement shall be provided by the acquiring activity as selected from DOD 5230 24 5 2 1 1 8 Export Control Warning lt export gt For those pubs with export controlled data the following export control notice contained in DOD Directive 5230 24 shall be included WARNING This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export
359. e gt An illustration identifying and locating the on vehicle equipment shall be included External and internal views shall be used if necessary As applicable both tactical and nontactical situation loading configurations shall be shown C 6 NOTES The notes in section 6 apply to this appendix 192 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX C TM 10 0004 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR S CONTROLS AND INDICATORS INTRODUCTION The following tables and illustrations provide the description and use ofthe controls and indicators pertaining to the instrument and auxiliary panels center console steering column floor mounted door mounted seat exterior and M1079 van controls and special purpose kit controls and indicators Some switch locations on the auxiliary panel may be blank depending on the model of your vehicle controls Table 1 Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators o HR DL STEERING WHEEL REMOVED FOR CLARITY 18014011 Figure 1 Instrument Panel Controls and Indicators Key Control Indicator m Radiator Fan Off Switch 2 Lamp Test Switch 3 Ether Start Switch 4 FRONT BRAKE AIR Pressure Gage S Lighted Indicator Display Function When positioned to on radiator fan off switch will illuminate to indicate the radiator fan is disabled Radiator fan off switch will remain in the off position and not illuminated unless otherwise dir
360. e immediately below the text of third level procedural subordinate steps The text is blocked a The fifth level procedural subordinate step letters b etc are immediately below the text of fourth level procedural subordinate steps The text is blocked If additional subordinate step letters are required use aa ab etc after z 4 7 12 2 Procedural step titles Procedural steps shall not have titles 4 7 13 Tables and lists 4 7 13 1 Table locations Tables shall be inserted in the on the same page or as soon after the first reference in the text as possible Full page tables using a horizontal landscape format shall be positioned so that the page must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise to be read The table number and title shall be placed at the top of the table 4 7 13 2 Table numbering Tables shall be numbered consecutively within each WP in the order of their reference starting with Arabic number 1 If only one table is referenced in a WP it shall be numbered 4 7 13 3 Table titles Each table shall have a title The titles shall identify the contents or purpose of the table and distinguish that table from others in the TM Preferred table title format is provided MIL HDBK 1222 4 7 13 4 Table format Tables designated as standard information have no deviations to the number of columns the titles in the column headings and required format The standard information format is automatically generated by t
361. e location of each pertinent terminal which shall be identified by number or other marking if available or by position if neither is available Where appropriate voltage readings shall be annotated 3 All alternate connection patterns required for various modes of operation shall be shown and explained 4 Only one diagram shall be used to illustrate interconnection patterns which appear more than once within the same equipment For installation of plug in items diagrams shall be prepared or referenced showing the location of items that are not installed in the equipment when received Instructions shall be prepared whenever special techniques or connections are required E 5 3 2 3 4 1 Assembly of equipment a Instructions shall be prepared for assembling equipment that has been shipped unassembled When the equipment is to be shelf or rack mounted instructions shall also be prepared for assembly of the rack if necessary and installation of the equipment in the rack As applicable power requirements connections and initial control settings needed for installation purposes shall be included When the equipment is shipped or delivered in specially designed containers unpacking instructions shall be prepared If the containers are to be used again kept for future use turned in to supply or require a special disposition method the necessary procedures to restore the containers shall be included For security measures for ele
362. e made to the breakdown illustration in the RPSTL Instructions drawings charts and tables showing how to assemble assemblies source coded A shall not appear in the RPSTL but shall appear in the narrative maintenance TM 296 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F g Manufactured items All items source coded MO MF or MD shall have the statement in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column desc as follows MAKE FROM enter applicable bulk material or other replaceable item name CAGEC and part number Material that is used to make items shall also be shown in a separate bulk items work package bulk itemswp see F 5 3 8 Instructions drawings charts and tables required to show how items are made shall not be contained in the RPSTL but shall appear in the narrative maintenance TM This is normally specified in the illustrated list of manufactured items lt manuwp gt see E 5 3 9 when it is specified by the acquiring activity h Kits and kit repair parts Kits and repair parts source coded KD or KB shall conform to the format of either option 1 see FIGURE F 7 or option 2 see FIGURE F 8 as specified by the acquiring Activity Only one option is to be used in a weapons systems RPSTL listings 1 Option 1 kits Option 1 kits shall appear at the end of the associated parts list As specified by the acquiring activity the ITEM NO column lt callout gt for kits shall be either left blank or
363. e number of printed pages excluding pocket TMs exceeds 1 500 pages or 750 sheets Each volume shall not exceed 1 500 pages or 750 sheets A pocket TM 4 by 5 1 2 by 4 inches or a pocket TM volume shall not exceed 200 pages or 100 sheets b Each volume of a series shall display the TM number on its cover and all pages that make up the volume Front matter for each volume of a series shall include a title block page and a table of contents The first volume shall contain a complete including all volumes information table of contents c Rear matter for each volume of a series shall contain as a minimum reporting errors and recommending improvements DA Forms 2028 and an authentication page d Separate volumes shall not be used to distinguish between models of equipment e g 10 for basic model 10 1 for model A 10 2 for model B etc 4 7 2 2 Chapters Chapters shall be used to divide TM data into specific functional information Chapter types include General Information Operating Instructions Troubleshooting Information Maintenance Information Parts Information and Supporting Information Each chapter shall be made up of one or more work packages 4 7 2 3 Work packages Work packages shall be used to logically divide TM data into functional descriptive or task oriented information Work packages shall begin on a right hand page Refer to FIGURE 1 for an example of a typical work package 4 7 2 3 1 Work package size To facilitate
364. e only qual mat info 168 B 5 2 16 Safety and handling lt 5 gt 0 4 0 169 B 5 2 17 Nuclear hardness hopes vet 169 B 5 2 18 Calibrdbiod xcalre gt teet tah eae eade uas 170 B 5 2 19 Engineering Change Proposals ECPs DMWR NMWR only lt ecp gt 170 B 5 2 20 Modifications list DMWR NMWR only modification 170 5 2 21 Deviations and exceptions DMWR NMWR only deviation 170 5 2 22 Mobilization requirements DMWR NMWR only mobreq 170 5 2 23 Flight safety critical aircraft parts FSCAP Aircraft only lt fscapreq gt 171 B 5 2 24 Cost considerations DMWR NMWR only lt cost gt 171 B 5 2 25 Supporting information for repair parts special tools TMDE and support equipment Unit AVUM and above only lt supdata gt 171 B 5 2 25 1 _ Common tools and equipment 171 B 5 2 25 2 Special tools TMDE and support equipment 171 835 2 25 gt e o M cr 172 B 5 2 26 Copyrsht eredit a oes etos ma ea eti 172 H3 2220 b aat Se 172 Bo 2262
365. e prepared a Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 b Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 4 Preventive maintenance checks and services PMCS including lubrication instructions Except for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition aircraft TMs DMWR and NMWR only The PMCS shall be prepared and based upon the principles of Reliability Centered Maintenance RCM logic and shall include PMCS information periodic lubrication instruction extensive lubrication instructions shall be included in a lubrication work package refer to E 5 3 7 and applicable scheduled corrosion inspections An introduction WP for PMCS shall also be prepared 5 3 4 1 PMCS introduction work package lt gt This work package shall explain the purpose and use of the PMCS data 229 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 5 3 4 1 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 4 1 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package E 5 3 4 1 3 PMCS data a An explanation shall be prepared for each PMCS entry and any general checks services that are common to the entire piece of equipment The explanation for the item numbers shall detail how the item numbers are used
366. e prepared and titled Master Malfunction Symptom Index preceded by the maintenance level e g Unit Maintenance D 5 5 5 5 System subsystem index lt tsindx system gt This index shall consist of a list of specific systems subsystems assemblies and components lt sysnomen gt requiring troubleshooting referenced to the applicable testing and troubleshooting WP sequence number lt xref gt lt link gt lt extref gt or required corrective action lt action gt D 5 5 6 Preshop analysis work package DMWR NMWR only lt pshopanalwp gt Preshop analysis shall apply when data indicates that an inspection or test is more effective in determining useful life of a system subsystem or component than a mandatory disassembly Preshop analysis shall be prepared in accordance with D 5 5 6 1 through D 5 5 6 5 D 5 5 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 6 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 D 5 5 6 3 Scope scope The purpose and coverage of the preshop analysis shall be stated 202 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 5 6 4 Preparation Procedures lt proc gt a Unpacking and special handling Procedures shall be prepared for removing the item assemblies subassemblies or components from the shipping containers and pac
367. e source code indicates it is made at higher level order the item from the higher level of maintenance Items with these codes are not to be requested requisitioned individually The parts that make up the assembled item must be requisitioned or fabricated and assembled at the level of maintenance indicated by the source code If the 3rd position of the SMR code authorizes you to replace the item but the source code indicates the item is assembled at a higher level order the item from the higher level of maintenance Do not requisition an XA coded item Order the next higher assembly Refer to NOTE below If an item is not available from salvage order it using the CAGEC and part number Installation drawings diagrams instruction sheets field service drawings identified by manufacturer s part number 289 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F Source Code Application Explanation Item is not stocked Order an XD coded item through XD normal supply channels using the CAGEC and part number given if no NSN is available NOTE Cannibalization or controlled exchange when authorized may be used as a source of supply for items with the above source codes except for those items source coded XA or those aircraft support items restricted by requirements of AR 750 1 Maintenance Code Maintenance codes tell you the level s of maintenance authorized to use and repair support items The maintenance codes are entered in the third and
368. e technical content and structure for the functional requirements contained in this standard and are mandatory for use The XSLs referenced herein interpret the style and format As specified by the contracting activity XSLs or style sheets may be used to produce final reproducible paper copy for all TMs prepared in accordance with this standard For additional information on the DTD and specific XSLs refer to MIL STD 2361 317 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G G 4 5 Content structure and format The examples provided herein are an accurate representation of the content structure and format requirements contained in this appendix and shall be followed to permit the effective use of the DTD for Support Information G 4 6 Style and format This standard provides style and format requirements for the technical content requirements described in this appendix These requirements are considered mandatory and are intended for compliance G 4 7 Work package development Technical manual data developed in accordance with this standard shall be divided into individual stand alone units of information called work packages A work package shall consist of descriptive operational maintenance troubleshooting support or parts information for the weapon system or equipment G 4 8 Selective application and tailoring This standard contains some requirements that may not be applicable to the preparation of all technical manuals Selective applicati
369. e to the applicable work package The words END OF WORK PACKAGE shall be placed below the last data item 1 text illustration etc of the work package D 5 5 2 Types of testing and troubleshooting work packages The following types of testing and troubleshooting work packages shall be developed as applicable Refer to FIGURE D 1 through FIGURE D 8 and MIL HDBK 1222 for typical examples of testing and troubleshooting work packages 200 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 5 3 Introduction work package Aircraft Troubleshooting TMs only lt tsintrowp gt This work package shall describe the testing and troubleshooting process used to perform troubleshooting and shall include information on the methods used to perform troubleshooting The general flow of the troubleshooting process shall be described and the general methods used to perform testing and troubleshooting shall be included Any information peculiar to troubleshooting electrical subsystems and electronic equipment shall also be described If a troubleshooting index lt tsindxwp gt is used an explanation of the index shall be provided D 5 5 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 3 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package D 5 5 4 Technical description work packages lt techdescw
370. e work E 5 3 6 General procedures and precautions 2 D 5 5 8 3 4 General procedures and precautions D 5 5 8 4 4 General procedures and precautions D 5 5 8 5 4 G neral purpose ossi aves adeo Qo 5 2 1 1 10 Glossary e 5 2 2 1 4 7 27 Bordervales and a uaa vais 4 7 27 3 1 llic 4 7 27 3 4 SV TANG aeu at nd eo 4 8 1 5 Charts and grapDis dae ns 4 7 27 2 6 redit Des 4 7 27 3 3 DIABEIIS 222 4 7 27 2 5 Diagrams types of iua eve e 4 7 27 2 5 2 Elements OE doles Doreen dude oo 4 7 27 3 Engineering 2121 14 Foldout nuinDers 4 7 27 4 3 FoOrm ti s 27214 H mam ISITE use Db accedere di d edu 4 7 27 3 2 Tridex TUTTI ETS saraqa aya 4 7 27 3 4 1 Leader lines arrowheads 4 7 27 3 42 Legends 4 7 27 3 5 Tie CHA WANES 4 7 27 2 1 Multisheet figure mumbers eiie
371. e work packages that include the corrective actions that will return the equipment to proper operation D 5 5 8 5 4 General procedures and precautions lt proc gt Any general procedures that must be performed prior to checkout and precautions that must be taken during the performance of the checkout procedure shall be included D 5 5 8 5 5 Pretest setup procedures lt hookup gt Procedures for connecting any test and accessory equipment including cable connections shall be included Procedures for the initial setting of controls shall also be provided D 5 5 8 5 6 Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures may be combined in a single procedure or may be prepared as a separate operational checkout procedure and a separate troubleshooting procedure a Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures lt opcheck tsproc gt Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures shall consist of a series of test procedures lt testproc gt steps and substeps which lead to an indication or condition lt indication gt When a normal indication is obtained the operational checkout continues until the complete checkout is completed or until an abnormal condition or indication is observed When the test procedure results in an abnormal indication or condition a malfunction lt malfunc gt or a series of malfunctions is provided For each malfunction the possible corr
372. ecific symptom or to a system assembly or component Work packages related to a system of some complexity may contain more than one set of troubleshooting procedures directed to specific subsystems The information in D 5 5 8 4 1 through D 5 5 8 4 7 shall be included in the work package as applicable D 5 5 8 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 8 4 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 D 5 5 8 4 3 Introduction intro When required an introduction shall be included explaining how the troubleshooting procedures are to be used to perform troubleshooting and how they relate to the associated operational checkout work packages D 5 5 8 4 4 General procedures and precautions proc Any general procedures that must be performed prior to troubleshooting and precautions that must be taken during the performance of the troubleshooting procedure shall be included D 5 5 8 4 5 Pretest setup procedures lt hookup gt Procedures for connecting any test and accessory equipment including cable connections shall be included Procedures for the initial setting of controls shall also be provided 206 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 5 8 4 6 Troubleshooting procedures lt tsproc gt The selection of a troubleshooting type shall be based o
373. ected Tests the lights on high engine temperature and TRANS OIL TEMP indicators on Lighted Indicator Display Injects ether into engine intake system to assist with cold weather starting when switch is pressed Shows air pressure in psi available to operate front brakes Normal air pressure range is 65 120 psi 448 827 kPa Indicator lights to indicate operating characteristics of the vehicle shows all indicators on the Lighted Indicator Display 0004 1 FIGURE C 1 Example of controls and indicators 193 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES D 1 SCOPE D 1 1 Scope This appendix establishes the technical content requirements for the preparation of troubleshooting procedures for major weapon systems and their related systems subsystems equipment weapons replacement assemblies WRAs and shop replacement assemblies SRAs This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for compliance The requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs D 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The applicable documents in section 2 apply to this appendix D 3 DEFINITIONS The definitions in section 3 apply to this appendix D 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS D 4 1 General Troubleshooting procedures shall be prepared for weapon systems major equipment
374. ection section and in proper sequence a The first item of each inspection for each aircraft shall read Inspect aircraft forms and records for recorded discrepancies DA PAM 738 751 Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management System Aviation TAMMS A b Oneof the last items in each preventive maintenance services work package shall be the lubrication requirements and shall be entered as follows LUBRICATION All areas Lubricate in accordance with lubrication chart contained in TM 55 insert TM number c Include the following statements as applicable 1 Windshields and windows for cleanliness 2 Tire for proper pressure visual no cuts blisters or slippage 3 Pitot tubes and static ports for freedom of obstructions and cleanliness 4 Portable fire extinguisher for broken or missing seal pressure indicator in green and extinguisher and brackets secure Fixed fire extinguisher for accessibility broken or missing seal and extinguisher and bracket for security 5 First aid kits for designated location presence of inspection date tag condition of seal and security 6 All visible and all accessible electrical wiring for chafing or damaged insulation and for security of 7 Battery for leakage and security nicad and lead acid Battery compartment interior for cleanliness and corrosion Battery and connections for security cleanliness and corrosion Battery vent for obstructions
375. ective actions lt action gt shall be provided refer to FIGURE D 8 When required the corrective action may include a reference to the work package or paragraph lt xref gt lt link gt that contains the data to perform the corrective action b Separate operational checkout procedures lt opcheckproc gt When it is determined that the operational checkout procedures shall be separate from the troubleshooting procedures the operational checkout procedures shall be included under the heading OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT Operational checkout procedures shall be developed in accordance with D 5 5 8 3 6 208 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D c Separate troubleshooting procedure lt tsproc gt When it is determined that the troubleshooting procedures shall be separate from the operational checkout procedures the troubleshooting procedures shall be included under the heading TROUBLESHOOTING Troubleshooting procedures shall be developed in accordance with D 5 5 8 4 6 D 5 5 8 5 7 Post operational shutdown procedures lt disconnect gt Procedures to return the aircraft aircraft system or equipment to its normal configuration prior to operational checkout or troubleshooting setup if required shall be included Any follow on maintenance shall also be included D 5 5 8 6 Integrated system troubleshooting procedures work packages When specified by the acquiring activity integrated system operational checkout and troubleshooting
376. ectrical and Electronics Engineers Interactive Electronic Technical Manual Initial Graphics Exchange Specification 5 JTA JTCI LAN LMI LOAP LOGSA LRU MAC MEL MOC MOS MTBCM MTBF MTF MTOE MTTR MUX MWO NATO NBC NDTI NHA NIIN NMWR NSN ODS OGL OIP OS OSHA P N PCB PI PMA PM MIL STD 4005 1 2 International Organization for Standardization Joint Table of Allowances Joint Technical Committee for Information Technology Local Area Network Logistics Management Information List of Applicable Publications Logistics Support Activity Line Replacement Unit Maintenance Allocation Chart Maintenance Expenditure Limit Maintenance Operational Checks Military Occupational Specialty Meantime Between Corrective Maintenance Meantime Between Failures Maintenance Test Flight Modified Table of Organization and Equipment Mean Time to Repair Multiplex Modification Work Order North Atlantic Treaty Organization Nuclear Biological and Chemical Nondestructive Testing Inspection Next Higher Assembly National Item Identification Number National Maintenance Work Requirement National Stock Number Ozone Depleting Substances Overall Grade Level Overhaul Inspection Procedure Output Specification Occupational Safety and Health Act Part Number Printed Circuit Boards Parts Information Portable Maintenance Aid Phased Maintenance 5 PMI PMS PSA QA QTY RAM RCM RGL RMS RPSTL S
377. ed Shaded As Required 143 TM Requirements Matrix for MIL STD 40051 2 Aircraft PM Reference Element Name 5 2 1 6 S Sa lug 856 ginfowp gt _ lt checklistcategory gt 9 77 prewe ___ ___ ateainspec gt jj eee p R fna e bs MIL STD 4005 1 2 This intentionally left blank 144 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 5 Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 14 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P Reference Element Name FRONT MATTER h Bee pem omg transmittal page Title block page R r r R Exi lt titleblk gt Table of contents 5 2 1 8 52 7 How to use this manual 2159 Khowtouse gt CHAPTER 1 5 1 lt gim gt GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK PA Eo GE Scpe sd R B523 23 Kop Maintenance forms records and B 5 2 4 lt mfrr gt reports Reporting equipment improvement B5323 lt eir gt recommendations E Hand receipt receipt HR manuals manuals 52 Corrosion prevention and control CPC Ozone depleting substances ODS 5228000 2 0 Kodsdata gt Destruction of Army materiel to 5 2 9 lt destructmat gt prevent ene
378. ed for public release distribution is unlimited HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 28 FEBRUARY 2002 FIGURE 11 Example of a phased maintenance TM front cover 77 MIL STD 4005 1 2 DMWR 11 5895 532 2 DEPOT MAINTENANCE WORK REQUIREMENT FOR INTERROGATOR SETS AN TPX 46 V 1 NSN 5895 00 423 1693 EIC IZA AN TPX 46 V 2 NSN 5895 00 423 1694 EIC IZB AN TPX 46 V 3 NSN 5895 00 423 1696 EIC IZC AN TPX 46 V 4 NSN 5895 00 423 1700 EIC IZD AN TPX 46 V 6 NSN 5895 00 423 1702 EIC IZE AN TPX 46A V 1 NSN 5895 01 163 5237 EIC N A AN TPX 46A V 2 NSN 5895 01 162 5239 EIC N A AN TPX 46A V 3 NSN 5895 01 163 3646 EIC N A AN TPX 46A V 4 NSN 5895 01 162 5240 EIC N A AN TPX 46A V 6 NSN 5895 01 163 1235 EIC N A This publication is not available through the APD distribution center This publication is available through US Army Communications Electronics Command Fort Monmouth NJ 07703 5007 This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific authority of the Department of the Army of the United States that it will be used for military purposes only that individual or corporate rights originating in the information whether patented or not will be respected that the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected compromise and that the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security a
379. ed maintenance level is shown as the fourth position code of the SMR code 3 124 Repair part Those support items that are an integral part of the end item or weapons system which are coded as not repairable 1 consumable items 3 125 Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL The technical document which contains an introduction list of repair parts list of special tools NSN index part number index and reference designator index for a specified equipment item 3 126 Replace To remove an unserviceable spare or repair part and install a serviceable counterpart in its place Replace is authorized by the LMI MAC and the assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the SMR code 3 127 Revision A revision is comprised of corrected updated or additional pages or work packages to the current edition of a manual It consists of replacement work packages that contain new or updated technical information or improves clarifies or corrects existing information in the current edition of the manual 19 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 128 Schematic diagram A graphic representation showing the interrelationship of each component or group of components in the system equipment The essential characteristic of these diagrams is that every maintenance significant functional component is separately represented Also where appropriate voltage readings should be shown 3 129 Service Operations required periodically keeping an
380. eference Indexes Work Packages There are enter applicable number cross reference indexes work packages in this RPSTL the National Stock Number NSN Index work package and the Part Number P N Index work package f reference designator is used enter and the Reference Designator Index work package The National Stock Number Index work package refers you to the figure and item number The Part Number Index work package refers you to the figure and item number f reference designator is used enter The Reference Designator Index work package refers you to the figure and item number EXPLANATION OF COLUMNS IN THE REPAIR PARTS LIST AND SPECIAL TOOLS LIST WORK PACKAGES ITEM NO Column 1 Indicates the number used to identify items called out in the illustration SMR CODE Column 2 The SMR code containing supply requisitioning information maintenance level authorization criteria and disposition instruction as shown in the following breakout TABLE 1 SMR Code Explanation Source Maintenance Recoverability Code Code Code XX XX X Ist two 3rd position 4th position 5th position positions who can install Who can do Who determines How to get an replace or use the complete repair disposition action on item item on the item unserviceable items Complete Repair Maintenance capacity capability and authority to perform all corrective maintenance tasks of the Repair function in a use user environment in order to restore se
381. eight that the floor must support and the area in square feet over which the total weight will be distributed Environmental conditions e g venting Power requirements Unusual requirements specific to equipment such as air conditioning Architectural and engineering data on beam sizes lengths bending moments and required supports shall not be included C 5 2 4 6 Assembly and preparation for use lt prepforuse gt Procedures shall be prepared when unpacking assembly and installation is required When the equipment is shipped or delivered in specially designed containers unpacking instructions shall be prepared If the containers are to be used again kept for future use turned in to supply or if any special disposition is required the necessary procedures shall be prepared Assembly and installation procedures shall be prepared when needed These instructions shall be supported by illustrations As applicable power requirements connections and initial control settings needed for installation purposes shall be included C 5 2 4 7 Initial adjustments before use and self test initial Procedures shall be prepared when any routine checks self test or adjustments that the operator must make before putting the equipment in operation is required C 5 2 4 8 Operating procedures oper Operating instructions shall be prepared As applicable the following operating instructions shall be developed a Allsteps nec
382. embly and preparation for use aviation SEREN only Ground handling 5 3 5 3 4 Inspection of installed items Disassembly 335347 Cleaning 5 3 5 3 8 Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI Repair or replacement ws Assembly lt assem gt Test and inspection lt test inspect gt Radio interference suppression Placing in service 121 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A V TM Requirements Matrix for AVUM AVIM AVUM AVIM 20 30 23 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp 30 amp P 23 amp P Reference Element Name Overhaul and retirement schedule aircraft 5 3 5 3 24 only Procedures for ammunition activation E 5 2 5 29 lt arm gt Additional maintenance task lt other surtsk gt Follow on maintenance lt followon maintsk gt gt GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK IPACKAGE ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK IPACKAGE TORQUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE AIRCRAFT INVENTORY MASTER GUIDE WORK PACKAGE STORAGE OF AIRCRAFT WORK WEIGHING AND LOADING WORK IPACKAGE WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS ILLUSTRATED LIST OF 22 2 lt manuwp gt MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK TORQUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK packa en mim lt ammunitioncategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AMMUNITION MAIN
383. ement Nam EXPENDABLE AND DURABLE ITEMS G 5 6 lt explistwp gt WORK PACKAGE TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST WORK 6 5 7 lt toolidwp gt PACKAGE csi fscap wp REPLACEMENT PARTS WORK PACKAGE CRITICAL SAFETY ITEMS AND FLIGHT SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS WORK PACKAGE EN NEN pus e oe PACKAGES Rx Eun e Ea X x jo j XR jo X 625 L d R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 112 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX A TABLE A IV TM Requirements Matrix for tricone TM Content 23 amp P 24 amp P 34 amp P Reference Element Name FRONT MATTER pee ROT ROR me MO Promulgation letter O Warning summary lt warnsum gt Change transmittal page List of effective pages work packages Excluding pocket TMs and publications with less than eight pages How to use this manual R ER R 52 l 9 lt howtouse gt CHAPTER 1 B 5 1 lt gim gt GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION pe ot B eir PACKAGE Scope Maintenance forms records and reports Reporting equipment improvement recommendations EIR B lt handreceipt gt Hand receipt HR information lt cpcdata gt Corrosion prevention and control CPC B B lt odsdata gt S gt 5 gt X o gt 5 E 42
384. enance required returning the end item assembly subassembly or component to a serviceable condition as specified by the depot level maintenance instructions 3 108 Preventive maintenance scheduled maintenance The performance of scheduled inspections and maintenance functions necessary to keep the equipment in serviceable condition and ready for its primary mission 3 109 Preventive Maintenance Checklist PMC A listing of all before during and after operation preventive maintenance checks including tactical and safety checks that the operator or crew performs to ensure that the equipment is mission capable and in good operating condition 3 110 Preventive maintenance daily aircraft Inspection of aircraft and associated equipment after the last flight of the mission day or before the first flight of the next day Some operational checks and removal of screens panels and inspection plates may be required to accomplish the inspection 3 111 Preventive maintenance services inspection aircraft Special recurring inspection of aircraft and associated equipment after an appointed number of flying hours or days whichever occurs first e g 10 flying hours or 14 days Some operational checks and removal of screens panels and inspection plates may be required to accomplish the inspection 3 112 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS Periodic inspection and maintenance at scheduled intervals to ensure that the equipm
385. ence shall be to the publication number References to pending publication actions shall not be made 4 7 23 2 Government specifications and standards Reference shall be made to the basic number for Government specifications and standards 4 7 23 3 Referencing within the TM Reference within a work package shall be to the appropriate maintenance task title procedure title step number figure number or table number etc References to other work packages shall include the work package sequence number in the reference The work package sequence number shall appear prior to the references title or number 4 7 23 3 1 TM divisions References to any major division of the manual shall be made by name i e Volume 5 Chapter 6 Table of Contents Glossary Index etc or by abbreviation i e Vol 5 Chap 6 TOC etc 4 7 23 3 2 Volumes References to information in another volume within the TM shall include the volume number 4 7 23 3 3 Work packages References to work packages within the same TM shall be to the work package sequence number i e WP 0125 etc 4 7 23 3 4 Maintenance tasks procedures and paragraphs Reference to maintenance tasks procedures and paragraphs shall be by work package sequence number and reference to title as necessary 1 WP 0025 Disassembly or WP 0012 Equipment Data 4 7 23 3 5 Tables Reference shall be made to tables within a work package by table number for example Table 2 Reference shall
386. ency shall be placed within the standard lubrication symbols d Each application symbol and lubricant abbreviation used shall be defined Notes may be used to specify requirements other than normal E 5 3 8 DMWR NMWR specific maintenance work packages E 5 3 8 1 Facilities work package DMWR NMWR only lt facilwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring active A description of all facilities such as test stands test tracks clean rooms shielded rooms or other facilities that are required to do the maintenance work shall be included Reference shall be provided for any specifications or standards that these facilities must meet When approved by the acquiring activity data from these standards may be included in the procedures a Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 b Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 248 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 8 2 Overhaul inspection procedures work package DbMWRs NMWRSs only lt oipwp gt Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity OIPs shall be prepared for items that have parts with specific characteristics wear limits specified performance requirements or fatigue characteristics or tolerances A separate work package shall be provided for each item containing such parts Within each work package a separate OIP sh
387. ent and its components remain mission capable and in good operating condition In aircraft checks are required of mandatory safety of flight items Lubrication is part of PMCS 3 113 Proponent An Army organization or staff which has been assigned primary responsibility for material or subject matter in its area of interest 3 114 Publication Identification Number PIN A number assigned by APD to each publication that can be found in DA PAM 25 30 and is comprised of 6 numerals and a 3 digit change number field that permits ordering a specific change to the publication as in 001 for change 1 023 for change 23 3 115 Publication Number The number shown on the cover of each publication as constructed per DA Pam 25 40 e g TM 1 1520 238 10 18 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 116 Quality Assurance QA A planned and systematic pattern of all actions necessary to provide adequate confidence that the item or product conforms to established technical requirements 3 117 Reading Grade Level RGL A measurement of reading difficulty of text related to grade levels such as ninth grade level fourteenth grade level etc 3 118 Rebuild Consists of those services actions necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing tolerances 3 119 Reference designator Letters or numbers or both used to identify and locate discreet units portions thereof and bas
388. ent operates in more than one mode each mode shall be explained and supported by functional block diagrams Theory of operation shall describe detailed circuitry of all repairable components as directed by the LMI maintenance plan Internal circuits their relationship to each other input and output signals waveforms and time phase relationship to significant waveforms shall be included when required to understand detailed equipment operation Theory shall not be prepared for nonreparable throw away components B 5 5 General information work package Preventive Maintenance Services Manual only lt pms ginfowp gt This work package shall be prepared for Preventive Maintenance Services manuals and shall contain the content requirements provided in B 5 5 1 through 5 5 4 B 5 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 B 5 5 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package B 5 5 3 Maintenance activities lt scope gt The verbatim the text below within the quotation marks except for the information indicated by italicized text shall be included Italicized text shall be replaced with the appropriate information The Preventive Maintenance Services Inspection Checklist work package contains complete requirements for intermediate when applicable and periodic inspectio
389. ente RNa ener dative tuse d nd iu tM eL 217 Figure E 1 Example of checking unpacked equipment table 264 Figure E 2 Example of PMCS table 266 Figure E 3 Example of a PMCS mandatory replacement parts list 267 Figure E 4 Example of tabular and narrative reliability availability and maintainability 268 Figure E 5 Example of an OIP 269 Figure E 6 Example of a classification of material defect table 270 Figure E 7 Example of an overhaul and retirement schedules 271 Figure E 8 Example of a lubrication chart 272 XXV MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS FIGURE PAGE Figure E 9 Example of depot mobilization 273 Figure E 10 Example of an illustrated list of manufactured items 274 Figure 11 Example of torque limits data ense fu digs 275 Figure E 12 Example of an aircraft weighing record DD Form 365 2 2776 Figure E 13 Example of two chart diagram enne 278 Figure E 14 Example preventive maintenance services 279 Figure E 15 Example of area diagram 280 Figur
390. entilating louvers and intake and exhaust ports Operation and content of liquid cooling systems Lubricants and Corrosion Prevention Control CPC procedures Switch and control settings that are preset at installation installer s adjustments Presetting and adjustment of automatic controls Terminal connections Required terminal or capacitor strapping Be Preliminary test measurements Presetting operator s controls Normal operating checks After installation orientation Burn in of parts ESD control standards After operations shutdown checks and inspections ae oe gt E 5 3 2 3 7 Preliminary calibration of equipment lt precal gt Instructions for all calibration to be made on newly installed equipment shall be prepared 5 3 2 3 8 Circuit alignment lt calign gt Instructions shall be prepared for circuit alignment procedures Applicable instructions shall be prepared in the following order a External connections lt extconn gt Connections to external lines required for each installation option shall be included Connection instructions shall conform to the requirements for installing wiring and cabling interconnections b Switch settings patch panel connections and internal control settings lt setconn gt Instructions shall be prepared for all switch settings patch panel connections and internal control settings required for each installation option and mode of operation
391. eptable Quality Level AR Army Regulation ASRL Army SGML Registry and Library ATE Automatic Test Equipment AVIM Aviation Intermediate Maintenance AVUM Aviation Unit Maintenance Basic Issue Items BIT Built in Test BITE Built in Test Equipment BOI Basis of Issue CAGEC Commercial and Government Entity Code CALS Continuous Acquisition Life Cycle Support CD CD ROM CGM COEI COMSEC CPC CSI CTA DMWR DOD DODAC DS DTD DX ECM ECP EDS EIC EIR EMP ESD FAR FDEP FGC FRC FSCAP GL GS GSE HCI HCP HR IEC IEEE IETM IGES MIL STD 40051 2 Compact Disk Compact Disk Read Only Memory Computer Graphics Metafile Components of End Item Communications Security Corrosion Prevention and Control Critical Safety Items Common Table of Allowance Depot Maintenance Work Requirement Department of Defense Department of Defense Ammunition Code Direct Support Document Type Definition Direct Exchange Electronic Countermeasures Engineering Change Proposal Electronic Display System End Item Code Equipment Improvement Recommendation Electromagnetic Pulse Electrostatic Discharge Federal Acquisition Regulations Final Draft Equipment Publication Functional Group Code Final Reproducible Copy Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts Grade Level General Support Ground Support Equipment Hardness Critical Item Hardness Critical Process Hand Receipt International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of El
392. equirements Matrix 151 TABLE A XIV TM Requirements Matrix for 157 xxvli MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS TABLE PAGE This page intentionally left blank xxvili MIL STD 4005 1 2 1 SCOPE 1 1 Scope This standard establishes the technical content style and format requirements for all technical manuals TMs for major weapon systems and their related systems subsystems equipment weapons replacement assemblies WRAs and shop replacement assemblies SRAs The requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs The requirements can be used to develop TMs in paper paged based manuals 1 2 Paragraphs with limited applicability This standard contains paragraphs and specific requirements which are not applicable to all Services Such paragraphs or requirements are prefixed to indicate the Services to which they pertain A Army N Navy MC Marine Corps and F Air Force Portions not prefixed are applicable to all services 1 3 Use of the technical content In addition to using the technical content requirements provided herein for the development of TMs the technical information developed in accordance with this standard and MIL STD 3008 TM can be used to provide the necessary input to other external systems that ar
393. er they have failed or not This includes items based on usage intervals such as miles time rounds fired etc Table 1 Mandatory Replacement Parts List Part Number National Stock CAGEC Number NSN Nomenclature 1 12286941 2940 01 086 1605 Filter assembly part of kit P N 5705132 19207 M83248 1 014 5330 00 166 0990 packing item 54 is part of kit P N 5705132 81349 M83248 1 115 5330 00 166 1066 81349 M83248 1 904 5330 00 020 0203 81349 83248 1 905 5330 00 167 5166 81349 83248 1 906 5330 00 020 0186 81349 83248 1 908 5330 00 020 0105 81349 M83248 1 910 5330 00 020 0067 81349 M83248 1 916 5330 00 165 4565 81349 MS35333 39 5310 00 576 5752 Lockwasher 96906 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0446 1 2 blank FIGURE 15 Example of a mandatory replacement parts list 360 0273 7 113 0273 7 113 0273 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0446 Table 1 Flight Safety Critical Aircraft Parts FSCAP Part Number CAGEC Critical Characteristics 7 211310027 3 Cluster Gear 00029 3 Spur Gear 00121 3 Nut 00141 3 Spindle Carrier Hub Gearshaft Gearshaft Gear END OF WORK PACKAGE 0446 2 Process core and surface hardness Dimensions and contour of root area Process surface hardness Process core hardness Process core and surface hardness Process core and surface hardness Process cor
394. eral commercial products shall be listed followed by the words or equal The same shall apply to manufacturers part numbers or drawing numbers for minor parts where it is impractical to specify the exact requirements If possible the particular characteristics required for the or equal products shall be defined B 5 2 26 2 Advertising Publication material shall not contain advertising matter B 5 3 Equipment description and data work package lt descwp gt This work package shall be prepared and shall contain the descriptive data requirements listed in B 5 3 1 through B 5 3 6 as applicable If the descriptive data is provided in a separate operator s manual a paragraph referencing the equipment description and data in the operator s manual shall suffice Additional equipment description and data required for a higher maintenance level but not included in the operator s manual shall be included This work package shall not contain any operator or maintenance procedures B 5 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 B 5 3 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package B 5 3 3 Equipment characteristics capabilities and features lt eqpinfo gt An overall description of the equipment lt eqpdesc gt shall be prepared including general capabilities speci
395. es tools that are part of components of shop sets authorized to sections teams tools authorized by RPSTL and CTA 50 909 CTA 50 970 special and fabricated tools and items of Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment TMDE Referencing will eliminate the need to repeat or update the part and model numbers throughout the TM 29 MIL STD 4005 1 2 c Materials parts lt mtrlpart gt All expendable items and support materials mandatory parts bulk items and flight safety critical aircraft parts shall be listed by as a minimum name lt name gt quantity qty if applicable and WP containing an overall listing of tools and special tools listed by WP number and item number lt itemref gt if any applicable Referencing will eliminate the need to repeat the part and numbers throughout the TM For example Material Parts Grease WP 0120 Item 5 Range lock WP 0120 Item 10 Frequency Converter WP 0122 Item 3 Bracket Assembly Chemical Alarm WP 0121 Item 4 Clamp Loop TM 11 1520 238 23P Group 110503 d Personnel required persnreq Personnel lt name gt and the number of personnel qty shall be identified if the task requires more than one The Military Occupational Specialty MOS designation mos is not necessary but it may be included For example Personnel Required Artillery Mechanic 68 10 1 Artillery Mechanic 66J30 1 e References ref When necessary other work packages TMs foldouts and other
396. es you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of equipment These codes are identified below Code Used On PAA Model XXX PAB Model XXXX PAC Model XXXXX Column 5 U I Unit of Issue U I indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column 2 Column 6 Qty Rqr Indicates the quantity required 0441 1 FIGURE G 11 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method B 354 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0441 Table 1 Components Of End Item List 2 3 4 Usable On National Stock Number NSN and Illustration Description Part Number CAGEC Code 1005 00 706 8880 MOUNT MACHINE GUN I cal 50 in mount on cupola 7068880 19204 PERISCOPE M27 chief of section stowage box cab wall 7633 132 19200 1240 00 509 2743 PERISCOPE M45 driver s stowage box driver s compartment 8213430 19200 1240 00 864 2930 TELESCOPE PANORAMIC M117 in mount M145 or telescope box 7660400 19200 TELESCOPE ELBOW M118CAI in mount M146 10559855 19200 0441 2 FIGURE G 11 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method B Continued 355 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0441 Table 2 Basic Issue Items 1 2 3 4 Usable On Number National Stock Number NSN and Illustration Description Part Number CAGEC C
397. esent the number of times the item appears in the illustration figure with the associated item number When a definite quantity cannot be determined because the number of uses per equipment or the size length of an item may vary with each equipment the letter V shall be placed in the left position of the QTY column 5 3 6 3 2 MC USMC Quantity per equipment column The number in the USMC QTY Per Equip column shall represent the total number of times the part appears in all the repair parts lists 297 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F F 5 3 6 3 2 9 Mandatory Replacement lt manrep gt Information on mandatory replacement may be included F 5 3 6 3 2 10 Unit of Measure lt um gt The unit of measure for the item may be included F 5 3 6 3 2 11 Unit of Issue ui The unit of issue for the item may be included F 5 3 6 3 2 12 Reference Designator lt refdes gt The reference designator for the item may be included F 5 3 6 3 2 13 Next Higher Assembly nha Informaiton on the next higher assembly may be included F 5 3 6 3 2 14 Parts Breakdown Reference parts breakdown ref A reference to parts breakdown for the item may be included F 5 3 6 3 2 15 Other characteristics lt otherchar gt Any other information not previously covered may be included as required F 5 3 6 4 Basic Issue Items BID repair parts Repair parts for reparable that do not have separate operator TMs but are authorized for the RPSTL shall be
398. esignated function Codes are keyed to the entries in the tools and test equipment table Column 6 Remarks Code When applicable this column contains a letter code in alphabetical order which is keyed to the remarks table entries G 5 3 4 MAC work package lt macwp gt This work package shall be prepared in Functional Group Code FGC sequence to consolidate and identify those groups on the list which involve identified maintenance functions The MAC shall be prepared according to the approved source data provided by the acquiring activity G 5 3 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 3 4 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 3 4 3 MAC entries a The basic entries in the MAC shall be a list of functional groups applicable to the end item which require maintenance The term functional group applies to reparable assemblies and subassemblies i e spares any repairable component required for the maintenance or repair of an end item but not to repair parts any consumable non repairable component required for the maintenance or repair of an end item The end item group shall be numbered 00 or its equivalent AA b Entries shall be item names a basic name and a noun word or phrase modifier e g transformer pulse low power and where app
399. essary to bring the equipment from OFF through STANDBY condition to full operation including all necessary warnings and cautions b Procedures for each mode of operation e g manual automatic local remote etc The use and relative advantage of each mode shall also be described 188 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C Description of the equipment anti jamming and interference reduction features the advantage of each feature and the operating procedures to be followed Supporting illustrations such as indicator displays waveforms etc shall be included which provide typical observations of jamming and interference for evaluation by the operator Operator turn off procedures including all steps necessary to bring the equipment from full operation through STANDBY to OFF condition Operating instructions for misfire hangfire and other procedures applicable to ammunition Operating procedures explaining how the equipment is operated in conjunction with auxiliary equipment or how it operates when integrated with other equipment When specified by the acquiring activity operating procedures containing the identification loading initializing and downloading of applicable operational and diagnostic software shall be included Identification of the software shall include the purpose configuration applicability and version information Procedures that verify that the proper software has been loaded and is operating properly shall also be
400. estr gt tesi aet 51 General purpose notice lt general_ purpose_notice gt 51 Service nomenclature lt servnomen gt 51 TM Publication date sdate aaa sasha 51 For Army communications security COMSEC manuals use 51 MC Promulgation letter lt promulgation gt 51 Warning summary including first aid data lt warnsum gt 51 First Ald THESE us asa kanaa a 52 Change transmittal page lt chgsheet gt 52 List of effective pages work packages lt loepwp gt 52 Types of publications 52 Exempted publiCdtioiis 32 Types of pages to be 1 1 52 Exempted pag eSu 53 Change numbers 53 the Mc PE 53 Numbering the list of effective pages work packages 53 List of effective pages work packages for RPSTLS 25 NIulit setyice aces en eae ee 53 Multi voluide manuals
401. esults Inspection requirements are arranged as nearly as possible according to the manner in which they will be performed The requirements are divided into groups and listed under area headings insert WP and figure number INSPECTION INTERVALS The inspection intervals designated will not be exceeded except in actual operational emergencies as explained herein It is the commander s responsibility to determine on an individual aircraft basis when inspection intervals may be exceeded For this purpose operational emergencies are conditions of combat or conditions of disaster which necessitate flight to evacuate aircraft or personnel When aircraft are operated beyond the normal inspection due time because of such emergency situation a circled red X status symbol and an appropriate statement to include authority must be entered in block 16 and 17 of DA Form 2408 13 Aircraft Status Information Record until such time as the inspection is complete Since safety may be jeopardized when inspections are delayed to meet emergency requirements commanders will assure that the aircraft status symbol reverts to a red and that delayed inspections are accomplished immediately upon termination of the actual emergency When unusual local conditions of environment utilization mission experience of flight crew and maintenance personnel periods of inactivity etc are encountered the maintenance officer will at his discretion increase the sco
402. et POWER switch to ON position CONDITION INDICATION Test set power indicator is illuminated MALFUNCTION CORRECTIVE ACTION If power indicator does not light check power source for 28 VDC STEP 3 Place UUT POWER switch in CP position CONDITION INDICATION CP LEDS momentarily flash MALFUNCTION CORRECTIVE ACTION If LEDS do not flash briefly check test set wiring STEP 4 Place Test Set UUT POWER switchin CP position Quickly press and release the CP BIT button on the system interface card Observe the 10 LEDs the system CCA CONDITION INDICATION BIT test routine runs for 30 seconds During the first 15 seconds the CP LEDs DS 1 DS 10 will flash The second 15 second period is the status reporting period LEDs are OFF during the second 15 second period After the BIT routine is complete all LEDs will return to the original OFF state MALFUNCTION CORRECTIVE ACTION a Tf DSL is illuminated perform DSL testing Referto Table 2 b DS2 is illuminated perform DS2 testing Refer to Table 3 0481 1 FIGURE D 8 Example of content for a combination testing and troubleshooting procedure 217 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS E 1 SCOPE E 1 1 Scope This appendix establishes the technical content requirements for the preparation of maintenance procedures for major weapon systems and their related systems subsystems equipment weapons replacement assemblies WRAs and s
403. etailed assembly and content requirements for all TMs covering operation maintenance and parts information at all maintenance levels through depot 5 2 1 Front matter lt paper frnt gt As applicable material preceding the first text page shall consist of the following in the order specified below a Front cover lt frntcover gt MC Promulgation letter lt promulgation gt Warning summary lt warnsum gt Change transmittal page lt chgsheet gt if applicable List of effective pages work packages lt loepwp gt Title block page lt titleblk gt Table of contents lt contents gt moans h How To Use This Manual information lt howtouse gt 5 2 1 1 Front cover lt frntcover gt A front cover shall be prepared for each TM and DMWR NMWR The formats of the front covers are shown in FIGURE 10 TM FIGURE 11 Phased Maintenance and Preventive Maintenance Services TMs FIGURE 12 and FIGURE 13 DMWR and FIGURE 14 NMWR National Stock Number NSN and End Item Code EIC shall be included on the front cover of equipment publications but may not be required for general equipment and other types of publications Unless otherwise specified the front cover shall contain the following content information in the order listed Additional detailed requirements for the front cover content information are described in 5 2 1 1 1 through 3 221 112 a Security classification when required b TM number single serv
404. etouching Photographic retouching shall be held to a minimum Retouching shall be used only to emphasize detail exclude unwanted detail correct slight photographic defects and eliminate undesirable shadow from that portion of the photograph related to the text only 4 7 27 2 3 3 Use of photographs in place of line drawings For photographs that cannot meet the requirements specified above line drawings shall be prepared 4 7 27 2 4 Engineering drawings Engineering drawings may be used with the approval of the acquiring activity Engineering drawings are controlled documents and when used they shall be used in their entirety without modification They must be reduced or redrawn to meet page size restrictions When the controlled elements of an engineering drawing 1 title block sources of supply revision data etc are removed leaving only the field of the drawing it is treated as a typical line drawing 4 7 27 2 5 Diagrams 4 7 27 2 5 1 Diagram specifications Diagrams shall be prepared in accordance with the specifications listed below Subject Equipment Covered Specification Abbreviations ASME 14 38 Engineering Drawing ASME Y14 100 Graphic Symbols Electrical and Electronic IEEE 315A 1986 IEEE 280 1985 Mechanical ASTM F856 ASTM F1000 95 ASME Y32 2 6 Digital Logic 91 1984 Fluid Power ANSI Y32 10 Unit Symbols All IEEE 260 1 1993 Logic All 91 1984 4 7 27 2 5 2 Types of diagra
405. everts to a red X and that delayed inspections are accomplished immediately upon termination of the actual emergency When unusual local conditions utilization type of mission personnel periods of inactivity environmental conditions etc dictate it is the prerogative and responsibility of the Maintenance Officer to increase the scope and or frequency of maintenance or inspection as necessary to ensure safe operation TM 1 1500 328 23 MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES The inspections prescribed by this checklist will be accomplished at specified phases by Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM activities with assistance of Aviation Intermediate AVIM and Depot Maintenance activities when required LIMITATIONS The checklist does not contain instructions for repair adjustment or other means of rectifying conditions Neither does it contain special tolerances limits or instructions for special troubleshooting to find causes for malfunctions Such data will be obtained from the latest issue of the aircraft insert applicable aircraft technical manuals series Maintenance Manuals CHANGEOVER TO THE PHASED MAINTENANCE SYSTEM Changeover shall be accomplished in accordance with instructions provided in TB 55 1500 337 24 entitled Phased Maintenance System for Army Aircraft The requirements of this TB must be accomplished prior to implementation of Phase 1 inspection requirements specified in this checklist 178 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B PRE
406. example SERVICING 1 2 HCP 38 MIL STD 4005 1 2 c Operating or maintenance actions which could degrade hardness but which are not directly involved in establishing nuclear hardness shall not be annotated with the acronym but shall be preceded by a caution 4 7 20 Electrostatic Discharge ESD sensitive marking All paragraphs addressing handling or maintenance which could damage ESD sensitive parts shall be marked with the acronym ESD as shown below The acronym shall be prepared in boldface type and in the same style and size as the adjacent text The acronym shall not be shown with the titles in the table of contents Use of the acronym is as follows a When the entire task and all subordinate paragraphs and steps relate to ESD sensitive parts the acronym ESD shall precede the task title For example ESD DISASSEMBLY b When the entire task and subordinate paragraphs and steps are not directly related to ESD sensitive parts only those which do apply shall be annotated with the acronym ESD For example REMOVAL 1 2 ESD c Handling or maintenance actions which could damage ESD sensitive parts but which are not directly related to handling or maintenance of ESD sensitive parts shall not be annotated with the acronym ESD but shall be preceded by a caution d Mark figures drawings and schematics with the ESD acronym in accordance with MIL STD 1686 4 7 21 Quality Assurance QA Depot and aviation
407. f contents determine the assembly group to which the item belongs This is necessary since figures are prepared for assembly groups and subassembly groups and lists are divided into the same groups Second Find the figure covering the functional group or the subfunctional group to which the item belongs Third Identify the item on the figure and note the number s Fourth Look in the repair parts list work packages for the figure and item numbers The NSNs and part numbers are on the same line as the associated item numbers 2 When NSN Is Known First If you have the NSN look in the STOCK NUMBER column of the NSN index work package The NSN is arranged in NIIN sequence Note the figure and item number next to the NSN Second Turn to the figure and locate the item number Verify that the item is the one you are looking for 3 When Part Number Is Known First If you have the part number and not the NSN look in the PART NUMBER column of the part number index work package Identify the figure and item number Second Look up the item on the figure in the applicable repair parts list work package Include 4 only if the RPSTL has a reference designator index work package 4 When Reference Designator Is Known First If you know the reference designator look in the REFERENCE DESIGNATOR column of the reference designator index work package Note the figure and item number 294 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F Second Turn to th
408. fforded it by the Department of Defense of the United States Also regardless of any other markings on the document it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the originating United States agency DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and U S DOD contractors only This publication is critical technology as determined on 20 May 1998 Other requests for this document shall be referred to AMSELL LC LM LT Fort Monmouth NJ 07702 5007 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document US ARMY COMMUNICATIONS ELECTRONICS COMMAND FORT MONMOUTH NJ 30 JUNE 1998 FIGURE 12 Example of a DMWR front cover 78 MIL STD 4005 1 2 DMWR X XXXX XXX DEPOT MAINTENANCE WORK REQUIREMENT CONTAINING NATIONAL MAINTENANCE REPAIR STANDARDS FOR INTERROGATOR SETS AN TPX 46 V 1 NSN 5895 00 423 1693 EIC IZA AN TPX 46 V 2 NSN 5895 00 423 1694 EIC IZB This publication is not available through the APD distribution center This publication is available through US Army Communications Electronics Command Fort Monmouth NJ 07703 5007 This information is furnished upon the condition that it will not be released to another nation without the specific authority of the Department of the Army of the United States that it will be used for military purposes only that individual or corporate rights originating i
409. figure lt figure gt illustrating the control or indicator that is being described The figure shall be followed by paragraphs lt ctrlinddesc gt describing each control or indicator shown in the figure The narrative option for controls and indicators shall contain the same itesm as given in paragraph C 5 2 3 3a c above More than one figure and controls and indicators description may be used to improve user understanding C 5 2 4 Operation under usual conditions work package lt opusualwp gt Instructions to operate the weapon system equipment and auxiliary equipment in all modes of operation shall be prepared Any combination of control settings that will create a hazard to personnel or cause damage to equipment shall be preceded by a warning or caution Instructions to ensure proper grounding of equipment shall be prepared The operational tasks lt opertsk gt described in 5 2 4 1 through C 5 2 4 10 shall be included as applicable C 5 2 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 C 5 2 4 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 C 5 2 4 3 Security measures for electronic data lt secref gt Instructions for handling loading purging overwriting or unloading classified electronic data under usual conditions These instructions shall be deve
410. for requirements on labeling with ESD Actions which could damage ESD sensitive parts but which are not directly related to handling or operation of ESD sensitive parts shall not be annotated with the ESD acronym but shall be preceded by a caution statement C 4 10 Nuclear hardness If the weapon system equipment has nuclear survivability requirements for example over pressure and burst thermal radiation electromagnetic pulse or transient radiation effects on electronics cautions and Hardness Critical Processes HCP labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure the hardness of the equipment is not degraded during handling or operation Refer to 4 7 19 for requirements on labeling with HCP Actions which could degrade hardness but which are not directly involved in establishing nuclear hardness shall not be annotated with the acronym but shall be preceded by a caution statement C 4 11 Selective application and tailoring This standard contains some requirements that may not be applicable to the preparation of all technical manuals Selective application and tailoring of requirements contained in this standard are the responsibility of the acquiring activity and shall be accomplished using Appendix A Technical Manual Content Selection Matrixes The applicability of some requirements is also designated by one of the following statements unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity as or when s
411. ge lt tswp gt 206 D 5 5 8 4 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo 206 D 5 5 8 4 2 Initial setup information wpinfo sese 206 D 53 8 4 3 LA OTN SIBU022 qY 206 D 5 5 8 4 4 General procedures and precautions proc 206 D 5 5 8 4 5 Pretest setup procedures lt hookup gt 206 D 5 5 8 4 6 Troubleshooting procedures lt gt 207 D 5 5 8 4 7 Post operational shutdown procedures lt disconnect gt 208 D 5 5 8 5 Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting work package opchecketSwpios us ipea see 208 D 5 5 8 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 208 D 5 5 8 5 2 Initial setup information wpinfo ener 208 D 5 5 8 5 3 Introduction lt intro gt oet dac ie 208 D 5 5 8 5 4 General procedures and precautions proc 208 D 5 5 8 5 5 Pretest setup procedures hookupz ated etre teet pese 208 D 5 5 8 5 6 Operational checkout and troubleshooting
412. ge refer to 4 7 9 2 5 3 14 1 3 Care and handling lt ammo handling gt All procedures required for care and handling of ammunition including hazard distances storage special requirements prevention of deterioration due to rough handling exposure to adverse weather conditions or other hazards Visual inspection criteria shall be prepared to determine item serviceability E 5 3 14 1 4 Defective lt ammo defect gt Procedures shall be prepared for disposition of defective ammunition E 5 3 14 1 5 Cleaning and painting lt service gt Use of cleaning materials and paint authorized for use in the specified maintenance operations 5 3 14 2 Ammunition marking information work package Unit AVUM or above only lt ammo markingwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and shall provide applicable information on ammunition marking lt ammo markings gt classification identification lt ammotype gt care and handling lt ammo handling gt preservation transportation authorized rounds preparation for firing fuzes and packing lt ammo packing gt Reusable original packaging and containers shall be identified for return or temporary storage of ammunition in its original configuration Information on classifying identifying caring for handling etc non ammunition Class V items shall be prepared when applicable Individual paragraphs shall be prepared for each ammunition type classification a
413. ges lt genwp gt When specified by the acquiring the activity additional work packages shall be prepared when the work packages previously described herein do not support the data information to be presented a Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 b Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 6 NOTES The notes in section 6 apply to this appendix 341 5 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX G TM NUMBER 0438 UNIT MAINTENANCE REFERENCES This work package lists all field manuals forms technical manuals and miscellaneous publications referenced in this manual FIELD MANUALS M 3 3 M 3 19 M 4 25 11 M 9 207 M 20 22 M 31 70 M 31 71 M 90 3 M 90 6 Per ier EE FORMS DA Form 2028 DA Form 2062 DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 DA Form 2408 4 DA Form 2408 9 DA Form 2408 14 DA Form 2408 20 DD 518 SF 91 SF 368 TECHNICAL MANUALS TM 9 1300 200 TM 11 5695 286 14 TM 750 244 6 END OF WORK PACKAGE NBC Decontamination Avoidance NBC Reconnaissance First Aid for Soldiers Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Material in Cold Weather Vehicle Recovery Operations Basic Cold Weather Manual Northern Operations Desert Operation Mountain Operations Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms Hand Receipt Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet Equipment Log Assembly
414. gleg shaped lines unless absolutely necessary Arrowheads may be added for clarity Do not allow leader lines to touch the callout Do not allow arrowheads to enter the object to which they apply If it is necessary to enter the object to provide for greater clarity a breakoff symbol shall be used in lieu of an arrowhead 4 7 27 3 5 Illustration legends When necessary for clarity legends shall be prepared to identify index numbers on illustrations Legends shall be a part of the illustration and shall not be placed in the text area Examples of legends are provided in MIL HDBK 1222 4 7 27 3 6 Procedures on illustrations Procedural steps shall not be placed on illustrations 4 7 27 4 Graphic techniques In addition to the graphic techniques provided 4 7 27 4 1 through 4 7 27 4 8 refer to MIL HDBK 1222 for suggested graphic techniques used for the preparation of TMs 4 7 27 4 1 Figure numbers Figure numbers shall be included on all illustrations except inline graphics example equation Figures shall be numbered using Arabic numbers sequentially within each work package starting with the Arabic numeral 1 The figure number shall precede the title The figure number and title shall not be an integral part of the figure The figure number and title shall be separated from the graphic so the text can have the capability of being searched 4 7 27 4 2 RPSTL figure numbering Figures for RPSTL shall be numbered sequentially within the
415. graphs and subparagraphs within a WP shall be unnumbered 4 7 11 2 Paragraphs and subparagraph titles Paragraphs and subparagraphs shall have titles The title shall begin at the left margin Paragraph requirements shall be as follows a Primary paragraph plus 4 subparagraph levels b Multiple primary paragraphs in a WP c Multiple blocks of text under a title are allowed 4 7 11 2 1 Format a Primary Paragraph Paragraph shall be flush left Title shall be bold and capital case Block text shall start on a separate line and shall have a blank line between title and text block b Subparagraph Level 1 Paragraph shall be flush left Title shall be bold and title case Block text shall start on a separate line and shall have a blank line between title and text block c Subparagraph Level 2 Paragraph shall be flush left Title shall be bold title case and end with a period Block text shall start immediately after the title d Subparagraph Level 3 Paragraph shall indent first line 5 spaces and the remaining text flush left Title shall be bold title case and end with a period Block text shall start immediately after the title e Subparagraph Level 4 Paragraph shall indent first line 10 spaces and the remaining text flush left Title shall be bold title case and end with a period Block text shall start immediately after the title 4 7 12 Procedural steps Procedural steps shall be used to present detailed step by step i
416. hall contain one or more of the following maintenance categories 5 2 1 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS Except for aircraft TMs DMWR and NMWR only pmcscategory This maintenance category contains only the PMCS requirements with the remaining maintenance tasks contained in later chapter s The PMCS category contains the following work packages in specified order a PMCS Introduction work package pmcsintrowp refer to E 5 3 4 1 b PMCS work package pmcswp refer to E 5 3 4 2 E 5 2 2 Weapon system equipment component assembly subassembly and software maintenance with required PMCS Except for aircraft TMs DMWR and NMWR only lt maintenancepmcscategory gt This maintenance category contains the following work packages in specified order unless otherwise indicated a Service Upon Receipt work package Unit only lt surwp gt refer to E 5 3 2 Equipment User Fitting Instruction work package lt perseqpwp gt refer to E 5 3 3 PMCS Introduction work package pmcsintrowp refer to E 5 3 4 1 PMCS work package pmcswp refer to E 5 3 4 2 The following work packages occur in no specific order aos 1 Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 5 2 General Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 6 3 Lubrication instructions work package lt lubewp gt refer to E 5 3 7 f Illustration List of Manufactured Items work package Unit level or above on
417. he applicable style sheet The DTD provides for non standard tables the data required in Appendix B through Appendix G shall be included regardless of format used Preferred style and format for all non standard tables is provided in MIL HDBK 1222 For non standard tables the data required in Appendix B through Appendix G shall be included regardless of format used 34 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 13 5 Standard information tables A list of tables that contain standard information is provided below Controls and Indicators Appendix C Operator Instructions Checking Unpacked Equipment Appendix E Maintenance Instructions Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS Appendix E Maintenance Instructions Classification of Material Defects Appendix E Maintenance Instructions Overhaul and Retirement Schedule Appendix E Maintenance Instructions Depot Mobilization Requirements Appendix E Maintenance Instructions Repair Parts List Appendix F Parts Information and Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL Special Tools List Appendix F Parts Information and Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL NSN Index Appendix F Parts Information and Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL Part Number Index Appendix F Parts Information and Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL Reference Designator Index Appendix F Parts Information and Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL Standard Maintenance Alloc
418. heading ON BOARD SPARES shall be used A list of the on board spares shall appear in the same format as required for the basic list G 5 4 5 list bii This tabular list standard information shall be prepared in the same format and include similar content tailored to the applicable as required for the COEI list The stowage location of BII shall also be included in the description column refer to G 5 4 4 and FIGURE G 10 or FIGURE G 11 As noted in AR 25 30 Ensure that equipment publications for operators are listed in the basic issue items list G 5 5 AAL work package operator only aalwp This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and shall list all AAL items 1 items not issued with the end item not listed on the end item engineering drawing as part of the end item National Stock Number NSN configuration not required to be turned in with the end item separately authorized by MTOE TDA or JTA and provided for information only The data described in G 5 5 1 and G 5 5 4 shall be prepared G 5 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 5 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 5 3 Introduction intro The following introduction text below within the quotation marks shall be prep
419. hooting WP detenti D 5 5 8 4 3 Twoslevel MAC o stan lacy vaso a aaa Needle ERE G 5 3 3 Wing diagrams Ts E 5 3 11 3 Introduction work package D 5 5 3 Inventoriable 16m ieu e eei 5 3 12 2 5 HCHIDAHIe S SS F 5 3 6 3 2 6b Item number column RPSTL qose todo F 5 3 6 3 2 1 Hbri c E 5 3 4 2 3 1a Items to be checked serviced E 5 3 4 2 3 1d J sa as t E 5 3 5 3 4b C 522 5 3 5 Joint service TMs number 5 2 1 1 1 Joint USE dena 4 7 9 K Kit parts list WP nios ale eter adel eae nai iie 5 3 8 5 3 11 5 5 3 6 3 2 6 Sau C 5 3 8 3 2 a garan au una F 5 3 8 3 Part item GUAT F 5 3 8 3 3 L Leader HES 4 7 27 3 4 2 4 7 27 3 5 Lec Oba WIS etus dn 4 7 27 2 1 Photographs T5 place Of d bee eon tuia petas fette
420. hop replacement assemblies SRAs This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for compliance The requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including Maintenance Procedures National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWR and Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs E 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The applicable documents in section 2 apply to this appendix E 3 DEFINITIONS The definitions in section 3 apply to this appendix E 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS E 4 1 General Maintenance instructions shall be prepared for major weapon systems equipment components and applicable support and interface equipment Maintenance procedures and supporting illustrations shall be prepared so that maintenance personnel can perform all required operator through depot level overhaul maintenance E 4 2 Development of maintenance instructions Maintenance instructions shall be prepared for all items comprising the weapon system equipment such as assemblies subassemblies components wiring junction boxes and accessories Tasks shall be presented in the order in which they are performed Sound engineering principles and techniques approved Logistics Management Information LMI service experience performance data on similar equipment and all other reliability maintainability and supportability RMS and operational availability Ao data available shall be used in the pre
421. ial used for replacement repair or modification must meet the requirements of this insert manual If quality of material requirements are not stated in this insert manual the material must meet the requirements of the drawings standards specifications or approved engineering change proposals applicable to the subject equipment 168 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B B 5 2 16 Safety care and handling lt sftyinfo gt The following general precautions and safety regulations shall be prepared a Ammunition TMs Information shall be prepared to comply with DA PAM 385 63 References to applicable Army Regulations ARs for range safety and danger zones during training and combat shall be included Explanations and official definitions shall be prepared for such safety related terms as misfire hangfire and cook off which describe characteristics associated with the specific items s covered by the TM under preparation A reference to AR 385 64 and DA PAM 385 64 shall be made for general ammunition care handling and safety For TMs covering equipment with radioactive parts or components information shall be prepared to comply with Nuclear Regulatory Commission provisions and references to applicable ARs and safety TMs on radioactive materials shall be included If additional coverage on radioactive materials is needed but is not included in applicable TMs instructions shall be prepared as required In addition the f
422. iary Equipment Maintenance work package lt auxeqwp gt refer to E 5 3 13 Illustration List of Manufactured Items work package Unit AVUM level or above only lt manuwp gt refer to E 5 3 9 Torque Limits work package Unit AVUM level or above only lt torquewp gt refer to 5 3 10 Wiring Diagrams work package Unit AVUM level or above only lt wiringwp gt refer to E 5 3 11 E 5 2 7 Ammunition maintenance lt ammunitioncategory gt This maintenance category contains the following work packages in no specified order a b Ammunition Maintenance work package lt ammowp gt refer to E 5 3 14 1 Ammunition Marking Information work package Unit AVUM or above only lt ammo markingwp gt refer to E 5 3 14 2 Foreign Ammunition NATO work package Unit AVUM or above only lt natowp gt refer to 5 3 14 3 E 5 2 8 Test and inspection maintenance Conventional and chemical ammunition only lt testinspectioncategory gt This maintenance category contain Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 5 E 5 2 9 Shipment movement and storage maintenance Conventional and chemical ammunition only lt shipmentmovementstoragecategory gt This maintenance category contain Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 5 222 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 2 10 Ammunition marking maintenance Conventional and chemical ammunition only Unit AVUM or above only lt ammomarkingcategory gt This
423. ic parts of a specific equipment assembly or subassembly 3 120 Reliability Maintainability and Supportability RMS and Operational Availability Ao Requirements imposed on materiel systems to ensure that they are operationally ready for use when needed will successfully perform assigned functions and can be economically operated and maintained within the scope of logistic concepts and policies 3 121 Reliability Centered Maintenance RCM A systematic approach for identifying preventive maintenance tasks for an equipment end item in accordance with a specified set of procedures and for establishing intervals between maintenance tasks 3 122 Remove install To remove and install the same item when required to perform service or other maintenance functions Install may be the act of emplacing seating or fixing into position a spare repair part or module component or assembly in a manner to allow the proper functioning of equipment or a system 3 123 Repair The application of maintenance services inspect test service adjust align calibrate and or replace including fault location troubleshooting removal installation and disassembly assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage fault malfunction or failure in a part subassembly module component or assembly end item or system Repair is authorized by the LMI MAC and the assign
424. ical Department Expendable Durable Items Explanations of Columns in the Expendable Durable Items List Column 1 Item No This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the narrative instructions to identify the item e g Use brake fluid WP 0098 Item 5 Column 2 Level This column includes the lowest level of maintenance that requires the listed item C 2 Operator Crew Column 3 National Stock Number NSN This is the NSN assigned to the item which you can use to requisition it Column 4 Item Name Description Part Number CAGEC This column provides the other information you need to identify the item The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 5 U I Unit of Issue U I code shows the physical measurement or count of an item such as gallon dozen gross etc Table 1 Expendable and Durable Items List 2 3 4 Item National Stock No Level Number NSN Item Name Description Part Number CAGEC 6810 00 201 0906 Alcohol denatured Grade 16 ounce bottle O E 760 81348 8030 01 138 1666 Antiseize Compound 250 gram tube MIL T 5544 81349 6515 00 059 5235 Applicator disposable package of 1000 A A 30016 58536 8020 00 224 8024 Brush artist MTL ferrule round tapered point Type I camel hair H B 118 81348 9150 01 054 6453 Cleaner Lubricant amp Preservation CLP 1
425. ice lt tmno gt or joint service lt tminfono gt National Overhaul Standard Statement DMWRs NMWRSs with NMP Overhaul Standards Only TM title lt prtitle gt National stock number NSN nsn for item s covered when required f End Item Code EIC eic as specified in the Army Master Data File AMDF when required g Subtitle when required lt stitle gt e 49 MIL STD 4005 1 2 h Weapon system name when required lt weaponsystem gt Equipment illustration when required lt graphic gt Availability statement lt avail gt DMWR NMWR only Supersedure notice for revisions only super Disclosure notice when required lt disclos gt Distribution statement dist Export control notice warning when required export Destruction notice when required lt destr gt General purpose notices when required general purpose notice d m 6 BE E ees Service nomenclature lt servnomen gt r TM Publication date 5 2 1 1 1 TM number for joint service TMs lt tminfono gt If the manual is jointly used each Service s number shall be placed on the front cover and title block page and only the proponent activity s TM number shall be placed on each page within the TM The numbers shall be prefixed with the word Air Force Army Marine Corps or Navy NAVSEA or NAVAIR as applicable The acquiring activity s proponent activity s name lt servbranch gt and manual number lt
426. ification List 2 3 4 5 National Stock Part Number Item Name Number NSN CAGEC Reference apter socket wrench 1 2 inch 3 4 inch 5120 00 114 5207 11655788 3 TM 9 2350 252 20P 1 81349 apter socket wrench 3 8 inch 1 2 inch 5120 00 240 8703 EX503B TM 9 2350 252 20 1 81349 apter test 4910 01 138 9334 11629693 1 TM 9 1250 252 20P 1 81349 apter test 4910 01 138 9335 11629693 2 TM 9 2350 252 20P 1 81349 apter torque wrench 1 2 inch drive 1 2 inch 5120 00 399 1157 2588756 TM 9 2350 252 20 1 81349 apter torque wrench 1 2 inch drive 3 4 inch 5120 00 399 1154 2588757 TM 9 2350 252 20P 1 81349 apter torque wrench 1 2 inch drive 5 16 inch 5120 01 115 1891 12298105 1 TM 9 2350 252 20P 1 81349 apter torque wrench 1 2 inch drive 15 16 inch 5120 00 2 15 8200 11663358 2 TM 9 2350 252 20 1 81349 Adjusting tool belt 4910 01 128 2670 3375058 TM 9 2350 252 20P 1 81349 Bit screwdriver 1 4 inch drive 5120 00 3 16 9228 105 9 2350 252 20 1 81349 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0444 1 2 blank FIGURE G 14 Example of a tool identification list 359 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0446 UNIT MAINTENANCE MANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST MANDATORY REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST This work package includes a list of all mandatory replacement parts referenced in the task initial setups and procedures These are items that must be replaced during maintenance wheth
427. in current air mobile tool and shop sets Evacuate unserviceable modules components and end items beyond the repair capability of AVUM to the support AVIM 2 Lessthan Company Size Aviation Units Aviation elements organic to brigade group battalion headquarters and detachment size units are normally small and have less than 10 aircraft assigned Maintenance tasks performed by these units will be those which can be accomplished by the aircraft crew chief or assigned aircraft repairman and will normally be limited to preventive maintenance inspections servicing spot painting module component fault diagnosis and replacement of selected modules components Repair functions will normally be accomplished by the support AVIM unit Aviation Intermediate Maintenance AVIM 1 Provides mobile responsive one stop maintenance support Maintenance functions which are not conducive to sustaining air mobility will be assigned to depot maintenance 2 May perform all maintenance functions authorized to be done at AVUM Repair of equipment for return to user will emphasize support of operational readiness requirements Authorized maintenance includes replacement and repair of modules components and end items which can be accomplished efficiently with available skills tools and equipment 3 Establishes the Direct Exchange DX program for AVUM units by repairing selected items for return to stock when such repairs cannot be accomplished at the AVUM level
428. in doubt notify your supervisor CAUTION Equipment operation is allowed with minor leakage s Class I or ID Consideration must be given to fluid capacity in the item system being checked inspected When in doubt notify your supervisor When operating with Class I or II leaks continue to check fluid levels as required in the PMCS Class III leaks should be reported immediately to your supervisor 1 ClassI Seepage of fluid as indicated by wetness or discoloration not great enough to form drops 2 Class II Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops but not enough to cause drops to drip from item being checked inspected 3 Class Leakage of fluid great enough to form drops that fall from item being checked inspected E 5 3 4 2 PMCS work package pmcswp E 5 3 4 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 4 2 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 231 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 4 2 3 PMCS procedures The PMCS procedures shall include the checks and services data described in E 5 3 4 2 3 and when specified by the acquiring activity an illustration of the equipment shall be included See MIL HDBK 1222 for example of PMCS information This illustration shall include a routing diagram by which the PMCS will be pe
429. included Examples of specific types of data that may be applicable to these work packages are 1 Descriptions of screen data and interpretation of message formats 2 Operator actions based on screen display 3 Data entry by the Operator 4 Saving or purging data 5 Processing of messages 6 Software transfer procedures 7 Reviewing message and entry formats C 5 2 4 8 1 Operating procedure considerations The following considerations should be taken into account when preparing operating procedures a Initial safety requirements actions inspections and emergency turn off procedures If a particular operating procedure or step is assigned to a specific crew served position e g gunner the assignment must be indicated Connection of any accessory equipment not permanently connected Instructions for obtaining or confirming the presence of all critical inputs such as power coolant air signal air conditioning etc Specific values for critical inputs power coolant air etc shall also be included Procedures for setting controls and making adjustments which must be accomplished by the operator prior to equipment turn on Procedures for determining operational readiness and the acceptable indications expected from built in indicators such as meters lamps gages displays and recorder readouts Milestones in the operational status of the equipment indicated by brief statements such as The generato
430. ing Manual DOD 5230 24 Distribution Statements on Technical Documents DOD 5400 7 R DoD Freedom of Information Act Program Copies of DOD 5200 1 R are available from the National Technical Information Service U S Department of Commerce 5285 Port Royal Road Springfield VA 22161 Copies of DOD 5220 22 M are available from the U S Government Printing Office ATTN Superintendent of Documents Washington DC 20402 0001 Copies of DOD 5230 24 are available copies of these documents are available online at http assist daps dla mil quicksearch or http www dodssp daps mil or from the Document Automation and Production Service Building 4 D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia PA 19111 5094 Copies of DOD 5400 7 R are available from Washington Headquarters Services WHS at http www dtic mil whs directives corres html 54007r htm EO12196 EO12856 EO12958 FM 3 04 500 FM 4 25 11 Joint Pub 1 02 SB 11 573 SB 742 1 TB 43 0118 TB 43 0209 TM 1 1500 204 23 TM 1 1500 328 23 TM 1 1500 335 23 TM 1 1500 343 23 TM 43 0139 TM 55 1500 342 23 TM 55 1500 345 23 MIL STD 40051 2 Occupational Safety and Health Programs for Federal Employees Federal Compliance with Right To Know Laws and Pollution Prevention Requirements Classified National Security Information Army Aviation Maintenance First Aid Department of Defense Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms Painting and Preservation of Supplies A
431. ing in the fourth position of the SMR code indicates complete repair is possible at the direct support maintenance level 12 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 38 Disassemble The step by step taking apart or breakdown of a spare or functional group coded item to the level of its least componency identified as maintenance significant 1 assigned an SMR code for the category of maintenance under consideration 3 39 Document instance The instance is the actual document text and its accompanying SGML XML tags conforming to the specifications and restrictions set forth in the DTD 3 40 Document Type Definition DTD The definition of the markup rules for a given class of documents A DTD or reference to one should be contained in any SGML XML conforming document 3 41 Effectivity The act or process of identifying weapon systems or end items and their hardware and software system and subsystems by their associated usable on code UOC serial number model number part number CAGEC NSN end item code EIC software version or modification work order MWO Effectivity is included to signify that certain configuration or modifications apply to a given weapon system equipment 3 42 Electronic Countermeasures ECM Electronic surveillance equipment for detecting and adverting threatening enemy weapons systems 3 43 Electrostatic Discharge ESD Static electricity A transfer of electrostatic charge between objects of different potentials
432. ing information y M Sen G 5 5 J G 5 4 Critical safety items CSI and Flight safety critical aircraft parts ESCAP mec En G 5 9 Expendable and durable items G 5 6 tob es dr G 5 3 Mandatory replacement patrts ed ode iu tec G 5 8 rai E E Mi UE E G 5 1 c G 5 2 Support items WP 0 5 10 0 5 7 5 25359 S Witch SEDES E 5 3 2 3 8b bete Satuka 4 7 18 General information e dodici a ced a aeree 4 7 18 1 Meles DEREN 4 7 18 2 0 PAN aloe 4 7 21 System subsystem index D 5 5 5 5 T contents hei a aq sss 5 2 1 8 4 7 16 2 1 le Ei ec saa 4 7 13 FPOOMOLES ME 4 7 13 6 flocci Decide uf usd uis 4 7 13 4 porci mE 4 7 13 1 litis oue 4 7 13 2 P 4 7 23 3 5 Standard a 4 7 13 5 jb c hae Ons a 4 7 13 3 Tabular informati n
433. ining and technical assistance through the use of mobile maintenance contact teams 7 Maintains authorized operational readiness float aircraft Provides collection and classification services for serviceable unserviceable materiel 9 Operates a cannibalization activity in accordance with AR 710 2 Supply Policy Below the Wholesale Level and DA PAM 710 2 2 Supply Support Activity System Manual Procedures The aircraft maintenance company within the maintenance battalion of a division will perform AVIM functions consistent with air mobility requirements and conservation of personnel and equipment resources Additional intermediate maintenance support will be provided by the supporting nondivisional AVIM unit Use of the MAC NOTE Approved item names are used throughout this MAC Generic terms nomenclature if any are expressed in parentheses and are not to be considered as official terminology This MAC assigns maintenance functions to the lowest level of maintenance based on past experience and the following considerations Skills available Work time required 324 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G Tools and test equipment required and or available Only the lowest level of maintenance authorized to perform a maintenance function is indicated If the lowest maintenance level cannot perform all tasks of any single maintenance function e g test repair then the higher maintenance level s that can accomplish additional
434. intenance usually characterized by the capability to perform maintenance functions requiring specialized skills disciplined quality control highly sophisticated and expensive special tools and TMDE Its phases normally consist of adjustments calibration alignment testing troubleshooting assembly disassembly fault isolation and repair of unserviceable parts modules and printed circuit boards PCB 3 135 Standard Generalized Markup Language SGML A language for document representation that formalizes markup and frees it of system and processing dependencies 3 136 Subassembly Two or more parts that form a portion of an assembly or a component replaceable as a whole but having a part or parts that are individually replaceable e g gun mount stand window recoil mechanism floating piston intermediate frequency strip mounting board with mounted parts 3 137 Supply Catalog SC The DA publication which is the configuration control document that provides the user identification of Sets Kits and Outfits SKO and its components It also provides user supply management data and is an accountability aid 3 138 Sustainment Maintenance Sustainment is off system maintenance and is mainly repair of defective equipment parts Sustainment maintenance returns repaired equipment parts to supply system It covers selected DS tasks GS and Depot maintenance 3 139 System A group of items united or regulated by interaction or interdepen
435. ion lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 7 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 7 3 Lubrication instructions Lubrication schedules shall be prepared to present all applications and procedures lubricants and lubrication points to completely lubricate equipment E 5 3 7 4 Lubrication charts a Lubrication charts shall consist of a main drawing prepared as a three dimensional diagram and such enlarged or detailed views as are considered necessary to identify items which otherwise would be obscured They shall show all lubrication requirements for all parts of the equipment requiring periodic lubrication other than those lubricated by the main engine oil system The charts shall also indicate type of lubricant method of application and frequency refer to FIGURE E b Use of black silhouette figures representing a likeness of the tool used in the application oil can grease gun brush or hand shall be the accepted means of presenting application methods on the lubrication chart c Abbreviations as specified in MIL HDBK 275 shall be used to present lubricant types In the event a lubricant does not have an abbreviation listed in MIL HDBK 275 the abbreviation shall be provided by the procuring activity Assigned application symbols type abbreviations and frequ
436. ion of installed items Removal Disassembly Cleaning Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria Repair or replacement Alignment Painting Lubrication Assembly Test and inspection Installation Adjustment Calibration Radio interference suppression Placing in service Testing Preservation packaging and marking R Overhaul and retirement schedule aircraft only 2 227 H c lt 1 ga eus 2 un B 2 Z m 129 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR NMWR DMWR with NMWR with MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content RPSTL RPSTL Reference Element Name Preparation for storage or shipment lt pss gt Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt Handling ammunition lt ammo handling gt Ammunition markings lt ammo markings gt Procedures for ammunition activation lt arm gt Additional maintenance task lt other maintsk gt Follow on maintenance lt followon maintsk gt GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK 45 2 lt maintwp gt IPACKAGE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS lt lubewp gt WORK PACKAGE OVERHAUL INSPECTION RERA lt oipwp gt PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGE DEPOT MOBILIZATION 3 38 lt mobilwp gt REQUIREMENTS WORK PACKAGE QUALITY ASSURANCE 8 38 lt qawp gt REQUIREMENTS WORK PACKAGE ILLUSTRATED LIST OF ert lt manuwp gt MANUFACTURED ITEMS
437. ions are applicable to the repair maintenance function Services Inspect test service adjust align calibrate and or replace Fault location troubleshooting The process of investigating and detecting the cause of equipment malfunctioning the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test UUT 0437 1 FIGURE G 4 Example of 2 Level Maintenance MAC Introduction 345 GROUP 0101 010101 010102 2 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0440 UNIT MAINTENANCE TSEC ST 34 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC Table 1 MAC for TSEC ST 34 MAINTENANCE LEVEL Ew DIRECT GENERAL TOOLS AND COMPONENT MAINTENANCE UNIT SUPPORT SUPPORT DEPOT EQUIPMENT REMARKS TSEC ST 34 FUNCTION F H D REFCODE CODE Inspect Service Replace Test Repair Repair Repair Overhaul POWER UNIT STP 34 Inspect PRINT CIRCUIT BOARDS STP 34 1 SWITCHING ASSEMBLY Test Repair 1 2 Repair 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Inspect Test 1 2 Test 1 2 3 6 7 8 Replace 1 Repair 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 Inspect 1 Replace 1 Test 1 2 3 6 7 8 Repair 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 LOGIC UNIT STB 34 Inspect Test Repair 1 2 2 0 Repair 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 2 0 Repair 1 2 3 4 5 0440 1 FIGURE G 5 Example of a standard MAC 346 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0440 UNIT MAINTENANCE AVIATION MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC Table 1 Maintenance Allocation
438. ions shall be prepared for lockwiring installing cotter pins use of sealing compounds lubricants or corrosion prevention compounds and similar operations with applicable references to the expendable and durable items list b Procedures shall not be prepared for separation of bonded press fitted soldered welded or riveted parts or the removal of electronic circuitry parts unless such removal is necessary to clean inspect or test separately c If servicing 1 pressurizing and charging with gas lubrication etc is required upon completion of a maintenance task include this information as part of the task d Warnings and cautions shall be included whenever chemicals or cleaning compounds are used or combined which may result in a dangerous or hazardous mixture Whether the danger is to personnel or equipment it shall be identified and the effect e g gases fumes caustic and fire shall be stated e For aircraft instructions shall be prepared for cleaning and washing the entire aircraft Instructions shall be prepared for the removal of the battery relief tube power plant and armament exhaust deposits or other items or material as necessary Instructions shall also be prepared regarding components which require relubrication after the aircraft has been washed or steam cleaned f Torque requirements values and sequences shall be indicated Only critical torques lt torque gt shall be indicated in task steps All no
439. ipment GSE facilities required authorized manning strength and critical skills available The range and quantity of authorized spare modules components will be consistent with the mobility requirements dictated by the air mobility concept Assignments of maintenance tasks to divisional company size aviation units will consider the overall maintenance capability of the division the requirement to conserve personnel and equipment resources and air mobility requirements 1 Company Size Aviation Units Perform those tasks which consist primarily of preventive maintenance and maintenance repair and replacement functions associated with sustaining a high level of aircraft operational readiness Perform maintenance inspections and servicing to include preflight daily intermediate periodic or phased and special inspections as authorized by the MAC or higher headquarters Identify the cause of equipment system malfunctions using applicable technical manual troubleshooting instructions Built In Test Equipment BITE installed aircraft instruments or Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment TMDE Replace worn or damaged modules components that do not require complex adjustments or system alignment and which can be removed installed with available skills tools and ground support equipment Perform operational and continuity checks and make minor repairs to the electrical system Inspect service and make operational capacity and pres
440. iption Part Number CAGEC Identifies the Federal item name in all capital letters followed by a minimum description when needed The stowage location of COEI and BII is also included in this column The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 4 Usable on Code When applicable gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of equipment These codes are identified below Code Used On PAA Model XXX PAB Model XXXX PAC Model XXXXX Column 5 Unit of Issue indicates the physical measurement or count of the item as issued per the National Stock Number shown in column 2 Column 6 Qty Rqr Indicates the quantity required 0441 1 FIGURE G 10 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method A 351 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0441 Table 1 Components Of End Item List 1 2 3 4 National Stock Usable On Number Number NSN Description Part Number CAGEC Code 1005 00 706 8880 MOUNT MACHINE GUN I cal 50 in mount on cupola 7068880 19204 1240 00 344 4643 PERISCOPE M27 chief of section stowage box cab wall 7633132 19200 1240 00 509 2743 PERISCOPE M45 driver s stowage box driver s compartment 8213430 19200 1240 00 864 2930 TELESCOPE PANORAMIC M117 in mount M145 or telescope box 7660400 19200 1240 00 49 1 9676 TELES
441. ired for installed equipment Total weights that the floor must support and the area in square feet over which the total weight will be distributed Environmental conditions e g venting Power requirements Unusual requirements specific to equipment such as air conditioning Architectural and engineering data on beam sizes lengths bending moments and required supports shall not be included E 5 3 2 3 3 Service upon receipt of materiel lt surmat gt The following instructions shall be prepared a Unpacking lt unpack gt As a minimum the following information shall be prepared 1 Any special sequence of action necessary to protect the equipment 2 Ifa special design reusable container is involved for either the end item or components which are authorized for replacement instructions shall be prepared to report or reenter the empty container through supply channels Instructions shall be prepared on how to package the unserviceable component in the empty container in the same manner that the new component was packaged if a component is being replaced 3 Man hour requirements and total man hours required for unpacking the equipment 224 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E b Checking unpacked equipment lt chkeqp gt Instructions shall be prepared for a condition check of the shipment including that of pallets containers boxes and legibility of markings The following data shall be included These instructions ma
442. is Original 13 July 1998 TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 20 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF WORK PACKAGES IS 35 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING Page WP No Change No Page WP No Change No Title Warning i iii iv blank Chp title page WP 0001 4 pgs WP 0002 10 pgs WP 0003 2 pgs WP 0004 2 pgs Chp2 title page WP 0005 2 pgs WP 0006 8 pgs WP 0007 2 pgs Chp3 title page WP 0008 2 pgs Chp4 title page WP 0009 12 pgs Chp 5 title page WP 0010 2 pgs WP 0011 2 pgs Chp 6 title page WP 0012 20 pgs WP 0013 30 pgs WP 0014 30 pgs WP 0015 2 pgs WP 0016 4 pgs WP 0017 2 pgs WP 0018 8 pgs WP 0019 12 pgs WP 0020 2 pgs WP 0021 2 pgs Chp 7 title page WP 0022 2 pgs WP 0023 4 pgs WP 0024 6 pgs WP 0025 4 pgs WP 0026 4 pgs WP 0027 4 pgs WP 0028 4 pgs WP 0029 4 pgs WP 0030 4 pgs gt WP 0031 6 pgs WP 0032 6 pgs WP 0033 2 pgs WP 0034 2 pgs WP 0035 2 pgs INDEX 1 INDEX 14 2 2 2 S C C lt lt 5 lt lt 5 lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt C C lt lt C C C lt FIGURE 15 Example of a list of effective pages for a new publication 81 2 gt MIL STD 4005 1 2 MANUAL NUMBER INSERT LATEST CHANGED PAGES WORK PACKAGES DESTROY SUPERSEDED DATA LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES WORK PACKAGES NOTE The portion of text affected by the changes is indicated by a
443. is not required for this work package C 5 2 7 3 Introduction intro A brief scope statement shall be prepared explaining the purpose of the work package 5 2 7 4 Stowage guide lt stowinfo gt Data on the location of applicable COEI and AAL items shall be prepared An illustration shall be included to facilitate the location of the items C 5 2 7 5 Decal data plate guide lt decalinfo gt Data on the location of all decals and data plates shall be prepared As applicable illustrations detailing the locations of the decals and data plates shall be included 5 2 8 On vehicle equipment loading plan work package lt eqploadwp gt This work package shall be prepared when applicable to the equipment The loading plan shall include information provided by the acquiring activity The data described in C 5 2 8 1 through C 5 2 8 4 shall be included 191 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C C 5 2 8 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 C 5 2 8 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package C 5 2 8 3 Introduction lt intro gt A brief scope statement shall be prepared explaining the purpose of the loading plan and identifying the equipment covered by the on vehicle equipment loading plan work package C 5 2 8 4 Illustrated loading plan list s lt loaddes
444. is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 F 5 3 11 2 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package 5 3 11 2 3 Part number index lt pnindx gt Each line entry lt pnindxrow gt shall list each part numbers assigned to applicable repair part or special tool items figure number and item number lt callout gt The part number lt partno gt line entry shall identify the first figure number and item number lt callout gt for which the part number is applicable The part number shall not be repeated on the same page of the index for each additional figure number and item number lt callout gt identified by that part number When part number references carry over to another page the carried over part number entry shall appear at the top of the list F 5 3 11 3 Reference designator index work package lt refdesindxwp gt A reference designator work package refer to FIGURE F 13 shall be prepared as required The index standard information shall be in alphanumeric sequence by reference designators This index shall be listed in the format and data requirement in F 5 3 11 3 1 through F 5 3 11 3 3 F 5 3 11 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 5 3 11 3 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package 301 MIL STD 4005 1
445. ission related systems equipment Applicability of diagrams shall be explained in relation to equipment configuration At a minimum the wiring data described in E 5 3 11 1 through E 5 3 11 6 shall be included E 5 3 11 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 11 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 11 3 Introduction intro Information shall be prepared to include the scope of the work package A statement shall be included explaining that wiring diagrams and essential wiring information are provided for all electrical and electronic systems and circuits 5 3 11 4 Wire identification lt wireid gt Identification of wires by number shall be explained list of circuit designators and a wire identification diagram shall be prepared E 5 3 11 5 Abbreviations lt abbrev gt A statement shall be prepared that abbreviations are in accordance with ASME Y 14 38 except when the abbreviation stands for a marking actually found in the equipment E 5 3 11 6 Wiring diagrams lt wiringdiag gt Wiring diagrams shall be prepared for all electrical and electronic systems and circuits E 5 3 12 Aircraft specific maintenance work packages E 5 3 12 1 Preventive maintenance inspections work package aircraft only lt pmiwp gt This work
446. isted standard column headings in quotes by their nomenclature lt name gt Nomenclature part number lt partno gt and Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC lt cageno gt Part Number CAGEC and critical characteristic desc Critical Characteristic refer to FIGURE G 16 Throughout the work package warnings shall be included emphasizing critical instructions to be followed These warnings are FSCAP warnings and inserted whenever necessary G 5 10 Support items work package lt supitemwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and shall combine any the supporting lists described in G 5 4 through G 5 9 as applicable This work package shall be developed when the data contained in these supporting lists are minimal and creating a separate work package for each list is unnecessary The work package may include an introduction and the applicable lists described in G 5 4 through G 5 9 G 5 10 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 10 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 10 3 Introduction intro The work package may include an introduction to the information G 5 10 4 Support items lists The work package shall include the applicable lists described in G 5 4 through G 5 9 G 5 11 Additional work packa
447. it appears in the figure referenced in the adjacent figure number column Include 3 if reference designator index is used 3 Reference Designator Index Work Package Reference designators in this index are listed in ascending alphanumeric sequence vertical arrangement of letter and number combination which places the first letter or digit of each group in order A through Z followed by the numbers 0 through 9 and each following letter or digit in like order REFERENCE DESIGNATOR Column Indicates the reference designator assigned to the item FIG Column This column lists the number of the figure where the item is identified located in the repair parts list or special tools list work package ITEM Column The item number is the number assigned to the item as it appears in the figure referenced in the adjacent figure number column SPECIAL INFORMATION UOC The UOC appears in the lower left corner of the Description Column heading Usable on codes are shown as in the Description Column justified left on the first line under the applicable item nomenclature Uncoded items are applicable to all models Identification of the UOCS used in the RPSTL are Code Used On PAA Model M114 PAB Model M114A Model M114B Include appropriate UOC content as applicable Fabrication Instructions Bulk materials required to manufacture items are listed in the bulk material functional group of this RPSTL Part numbers
448. items etc maintenance TMs or maintenance requirements cards are not procured for peculiar equipment furnished by the contractor maintenance instructions shall be prepared E 5 3 13 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 13 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 13 3 Auxiliary equipment procedures lt maintsk gt lt proc gt Concise step by step procedures shall be prepared for proper care of auxiliary equipment while in and out of service These procedures shall include instructions for storage preventive maintenance lubrication operating checks and adjustments as applicable Maintenance instructions lt maintsk gt refer to E 5 3 5 3 shall also be included as applicable for special tools that have been fabricated refer to E 5 3 9 E 5 3 14 Ammunition specific work package E 5 3 14 1 Ammunition maintenance work package lt ammowp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and reference or contain the following 5 3 14 1 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 14 1 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work packa
449. ith 1 and continue in numerical sequence as needed If the WPs already have point sequence numbers an additional point level shall be added to create a new sequence number that follows the same criteria For example to insert three WPs between WPs 0010 and 0011 the numbers 0010 1 0010 2 and 0010 3 shall be used For example to insert a WP between 0010 and 0010 1 the number 0010 0 1 shall be used For example to insert two WPs between 0010 2 and 0010 3 the numbers 0010 2 1 and 0010 2 2 shall be used For example to insert a WP between 0010 3 and 0011 the number 0010 4 shall be used 4 7 9 3 2 Assignment of work package sequence numbers in volumized TMs When a TM is divided into two or more volumes the WP sequence number shall continue in sequence The first volume shall contain as many WPs as necessary beginning with 0001 The work packages contained in the second and subsequent volumes shall be numbered consecutively beginning with the number immediately following the last work package sequence number in the preceding volume 31 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 9 4 Work package page numbering Each work package shall be page numbered consecutively using the four digit work package sequence number followed by 1 2 3 etc e g 0001 1 0001 2 etc Page numbers shall be centered at the bottom of the page Even numbers shall be assigned to the left hand pages and odd numbers to right hand pages refer to FIGURE 1 4 7 9 5 Work
450. ivided by crew station assignment or auxiliary equipment work packages shall be developed to support each crew served station Refer to MIL HBK 1222 for typical examples of operating instructions work packages a Description and use of controls and indicators work package lt ctrlindwp gt b Operation under usual conditions work package s lt opusualwp gt c Operation under unusual conditions work package s lt opunuwp gt d Emergency work package s lt emergencywp gt e Stowage and decal data plate guide work package lt stowagewp gt f On vehicle equipment loading plan work package lt eqploadwp gt C 5 2 3 Description and use of controls and indicators work package lt ctrlindwp gt Information shall be prepared for the description and use of all system or equipment controls and indicators A description and use of controls and indicators shall be prepared for each equipment assembly or control panel having controls and indicators Controls and indicators shall be described using one of the two following options see C 5 2 3 3 or C 5 2 3 4 and shall be used through out the work package C 5 2 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 C 5 2 3 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package 186 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C C 5 2 3 3 Contr
451. jection criteria lt acptrejinsp gt a Inspection requirements shall be prepared to include acceptance and rejection information sufficient to determine that new repaired and used components assemblies and subassemblies conform to wear limits fits and tolerances established DMWR NMWR and aviation only Inspection procedures that have a quality impact shall be highlighted This can be done using a statement such as check preceding the procedure or by any other means that would emphasize quality assurance Instructions shall be prepared for tagging all rejected parts other than mandatory replacement parts and listing the reasons for rejection Visual inspection procedures shall be prepared to detect defects such as burrs cracks bends or dents Accurate and measurable accept or reject requirements and standards shall be prepared which allow the user to determine if the item under inspection conforms to the tolerances wear limits fit or other standards and requirements presented E 5 3 5 3 10 Nondestructive Testing Inspection NDTI lt ndti gt a Aircraft only When specified by the acquiring activity 1 1500 335 23 shall be the only NDTI document referenced in the NDTI procedures and technical provisions of this TM shall be followed Aircraft only Individual NDTI procedures shall be specified for each part requiring NDTI In order to satisfy this requirement the following shall be prepared for airc
452. k package shall be prepared and provide description information and procedures for aircraft weighing balancing and loading The data described in E 5 3 12 4 1 through E 5 3 12 4 5 shall be included 5 3 12 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 12 4 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 5 3 12 4 3 General information lt geninfo gt The following text shall be included verbatim WEIGHING AND LOADING AVIM GENERAL INFORMATION Scope This work package contains description information and procedures for aircraft weighing and loading This information replaces the Chart E Loading Data and Special Weighing Instructions placed in the individual aircraft weight and balance files by the aircraft manufacturer Chart E in the aircraft file will no longer be required 5 3 12 4 4 Weighing information lt formchart gt Instructions for preparing the aircraft weighing the aircraft in the basic weight condition performing calculations and using and recording data on DD Form 365 1 Basic Weight Checklist and DD Form 365 2 Aircraft Weighing Record shall be included Refer to FIGURE E 12 for an example of DD Form 365 2 Instructions shall include initial setup requirements procedures for positioning the aircraft in the weighi
453. kaging material Instructions shall be prepared on any needed handling requirements for hazardous material electrostatic sensitive devices precious metal content classified material or critical material Instructions shall also be prepared for any special condemnation procedures for the item and its assemblies and subassemblies Checking attached documents Instructions shall be prepared for checking all tags forms and documents attached to the item to determine the reason for its return and to identify any other obvious faults or damage External inspection Procedures shall be prepared for external inspection of the item to determine if it is complete and if there is any obvious external damage Cleaning and preservation Instructions shall be prepared for cleaning the item to prepare it for preshop analysis testing They shall include the procedures for any temporary preservation or corrosion protection measures needed to protect the item until the work required is started D 5 5 6 5 Preshop analysis procedures lt pshopanal gt Detailed procedures shall be prepared for performing a preshop analysis The acquiring activity shall determine if the preshop analysis procedures shall be a narrative or be structured as a checklist A checklist permits the inclusion of the name and signature of the person performing the analysis and any remarks that are required based on the results of the analysis a Narrative procedures lt proc gt P
454. l Content Selection Matrixes The applicability of some requirements is also designated by one of the following statements unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity as or when specified by the acquiring activity B 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS B 5 1 Preparation of general information equipment description and theory of operation General information equipment description and theory of operation chapter shall be prepared and subdivided into individual work packages to provide the user with information for general requirements descriptive data about the weapon system or equipment and an explanation of how the weapon system or equipment works Weapon system and equipment description and theory of operation data shall be developed in narrative or tabular form or by whatever method is most simple or effective to convey the specific TM application Descriptive information shall not contain any procedural data or warnings cautions or notes When necessary for clarity or 164 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B improved understanding illustrations shall be used to support the narrative or tabular information Refer to 4 7 9 1 for description of work package identification information requirements See MIL HDBK 1222 for examples of work package identification information format B 5 1 1 Required general information equipment description and theory of operation data work packages General information equipment description and theory of oper
455. l be prepared for recording the results of the testing testing procedures that have a major quality assurance effect shall be preceded by a statement such as check to identify them b DMWR NMWR only Information shall be prepared for final testing of the highest assembly or equipment end item involved to assure that the parameters of reliability availability maintainability and durability are met The following procedures shall be prepared 1 Inspection Inspection procedures shall be prepared that are required prior to final testing to assure that the item is complete and ready for final testing Instructions shall be prepared for any minor preparation tasks needed prior to final testing 2 Lubrication Any final lubrication procedures that need to be done prior to final testing shall be prepared 244 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 3 Final test procedures Test procedures performance standards and tolerances shall be prepared to establish that the equipment is adequately overhauled and ready for issue without qualifications The procedures shall list all tools TMDE jigs fixtures and other support items required for the test in the initial setup information Operating instructions shall be prepared for special test equipment where necessary Procedures shall be prepared for minor adjustments that can be done without disassembling equipment Complete procedures shall be prepared for burn in or run in tests 4
456. l of maintenance will provide technical supervision and inspection of the function being performed at the lower level Maintenance Functions Maintenance functions will be limited to and defined as follows 1 Inspect To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical mechanical and or electrical characteristics with established standards through examination e g by sight sound or feel This includes scheduled inspection and gagings and evaluation of cannon tubes 2 Test To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical pneumatic hydraulic or electrical characteristics of an item and comparing those characteristics with prescribed standards a scheduled basis i e load testing of lift devices and hydrostatic testing of pressure hoses 3 Service Operations required periodically o keep an item in proper operating condition e g to clean includes decontaminate when required to preserve to drain to paint or to replenish fuel lubricants chemical fluids or gases This includes scheduled exercising and purging of recoil mechanisms The following are examples of service functions a Unpack To remove from packing box for service or when required for the performance of maintenance operations b Repack To return item to packing box after service and other maintenance operations 325 10 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G c Clean To rid the item of contamination d Touch up To spot paint s
457. l or corporate rights originating in the information whether patented or not will be respected that the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected compromise and that the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security afforded it by the Department of Defense of the United States Also regardless of any other markings on the document it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the originating United States agency DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C Distribution authorized to U S government agencies and their contractors This publication is Administrative Operational Use required for administrative and operational purposes as determined on 22 October 1990 Other requests for this document must be referred to Commander U S Army Chemical Research Development and Engineering Center ATTN SMCRR MAT Aberdeen Proving Ground MD 21010 5423 WARNING This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act Title 22 U S C Sec 2751 et seq or the Export Administration Act of 1979 as amended Title 50 U S C App 2401 et seq Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DoD Directive 5230 25 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document FIGURE 19 Example of a title block page con
458. l preventive maintenance service items indicated in the pertinent inspection column The types of inspections are defined as follows I Intermediate inspection which is performed at insert flying hours as specified by the aircraft maintenance schedule flying hours after completion of the periodic inspection P Periodic inspection is performed every insert flying hours as specified by the aircraft maintenance schedule flying hours b Work time requirements to accomplish each inspection are stated at top of the checklist The work time requirements for individual items within the checklist are stated in the W T column opposite the pertinent item INSPECTION AREAS Inspection areas are shown in WP enter WP number and figure number B 5 6 General information work package Phased Maintenance Inspection Manual only lt pm ginfowp gt This work package shall be prepared for Preventive Maintenance Inspection manuals and shall contain the content requirements provided in B 5 6 1 through B 5 6 3 B 5 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 B 5 6 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package B 5 6 3 General information lt geninfo gt The verbatim the text below within the quotation marks except for the information indicated by italicized text shall be inclu
459. l remain on file in the aircraft historical records until Phase 1 Cycle 2 is completed INSPECTION AREAS WP insert WP number and figure number reflects the inspection areas of the insert applicable aircraft model aircraft Those areas are titled as shown Figure insert number shows the location of access doors and panels which require removal at various phased maintenance inspections B 6 NOTES The notes in section 6 apply to this appendix 182 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B 95 0 BE RIGHT FORWARD AVIONICS BAY RIGHT AFT FS584 69 AVIONICS BAY 38 0 0 0 CL HELICOPTER 38 0 63 0 BL 63 00 FS 370 00 je BL 66 5 98 0 BL 96 00 FS 544 69 FS 576 54 LEFT FORWARD AVIONICS BAY PYLON FWD LUG STATION ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES INBOARD 1844 BL BUTT LINE OUTBOARD 186 5 CL CENTERLINE FS FUSELAGE PYLONS M NOSE ics 199 0 FS 55995 FS 596 18 BAY PILOT FLOOR AMMO BAY 222 ROTOR CL AFT FUEL TANK WL2422 LEFT AFT STORAGE BAY 2159 SURVIVAL KIT BAY 183 0 164 0 FS 0 00 145 5 1292 1040 799 FS 35 50 FS 91 70 FS 154 30 FS 230 00 FS 370 00 FS 450 00 FS 547 15 FS 330 00 FS 57 50 FS 115 00 FS 176 00 FS 280 00 FS 310 00 FS 409 90 FS 503 20 FS 295 00 FWD FUEL TANK F 0 0 35 0 80 5 135 0 1883 2300 280 0 330 0 383 0 436 5 489 0 547 1 596 1 FIGURE B 1 Example of a station diagram 183 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS C 1 SCOPE C 1 1 Scope This appe
460. l shall contain its own table of contents and shall reference companion volumes for the same TM Volume 1 shall contain a complete table of contents covering the entire set Entries shall indicate the volume in which the referenced material appears for example Operator Instructions Vol 1 The following requirements are applicable to RPSTL entries refer to FIGURE 22 1 The RPSTL introduction work package lt introwp gt shall be the first work package listed in the parts information 2 Titles of RPSTL work packages including the Functional Group Codes FGCs as applicable shall be listed by the same nomenclature and in the same sequence in which they appear in the first tabular listing in the work package The WP sequence number shall be referenced with each WP title The figure number may be included in the work package title 3 When multiple functional groups are under a single RPSTL work package each functional group tabular list title may be included as a subordinate table of content entry 4 NSN Part Number and as applicable reference designator cross reference indexes shall be listed 5 2 1 9 How To Use This Manual information Except RPSTLs and DMWRs NMWRs only lt howtouse gt How to use this manual information shall be prepared for all TMs and shall include as applicable a How to Use This Manual information shall be located after the table of contents and before the first chapter of the TM How to
461. ld Wide Web WWW ASRL homepage Uniform Resource Locator URL http www asrl com b U S Mail Requested files will be mailed on CD ROM DOS formatted or UNIX tar formatted Requests may be submitted as follows Written request Director APD Army Publishing Directorate ATTN JDPSO PAT S 2461 Eisenhower Avenue Alexandria VA 22331 0302 Telephone Request Commercial 703 325 6231 DSN 221 6231 4 7 Style and format Style and format requirements for the technical content contained in TMs are provided in 4 7 1 through 4 7 27 4 8 See MIL HDBK 1222 for additional information and examples 4 7 1 Examples of style and format The examples provided at the rear of this standard are an accurate interpretation of the technical content style and format requirements contained herein and shall be followed to ensure that the conforming Document Type Definition DTD can be used to develop digital data in accordance with MIL STD 2361 4 7 2 TM divisions The hierarchical breakdown of a TM is volumes if required chapters and work packages WPs paragraphs subparagraphs and steps Each division used should have at least two occurrences for example where there is a Volume 1 there should be a Volume 2 where there is a Chapter 1 there should be a Chapter 2 etc Multiple volumes should be partitioned only between chapters 23 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 2 1 Volume size and content a Division into volumes shall occur when th
462. less specified otherwise by the acquiring activity black and shades of black one color shall be used for TMs Prior approval for color will be obtained by the acquiring activity from the Army Publishing Directorate APD The acquiring activity will provide written approval designating color s to be used 4 8 Changes Revisions When updates to technical manuals are ordered the deliverable product shall be changed pages work packages or a complete revision of the TM The acquiring activity will determine the type of update required 4 8 1 Changes for TMs A change is used to incorporate appropriate new information for example MAC changes Modification Work Orders MWO engineering drawing changes DA Forms 2028 etc into the basic TM or previous edition or clarifies corrects or improves existing information in the TM The change will be written in the same style and format as the basic manual 4 8 1 1 Changes Changes shall consist of a change transmittal page and the applicable change pages and or work packages For the content and format of a change transmittal page refer to FIGURE 9 a Each change to a TM shall be numbered in sequence beginning with 1 b Front matter work package and rear matter change pages shall conform to the style and format of the basic TM and shall incorporate all approved information c Changes to front and rear matter pages and all pages of a changed work package shall include the applicable change
463. licable type designators without stock or part numbers P Ns if possible in order to minimize need for subsequent change however entries shall contain positive identification Parts that are not subject to maintenance shall not be listed in the MAC c Allitem names of MAC functional groups shall be official nomenclature in accordance with the RPSTL nomenclature or other source as specified by the acquiring activity Reverse word order shall be used in the MAC d The maintenance code entered in the third position of the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code in the RPSTL shall be used to identify the lowest category of maintenance that is authorized to remove replace and use the spare or repair parts SMR codes are further defined in Appendix F Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL 332 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G If the maintenance function is a replace function only for a repair part the repair part shall not be listed in the MAC unless not listing the repair part would result in omission of the Next Higher Assembly NHA group number in this case the part shall be listed in order to list the NHA functional group number All items in the MAC shall specify the maintenance level s to which a function is authorized Exception is authorized to ammunition MACs to permit use of maintenance function headings that better describe or identify ammunition peculiar maintenance functions The headings used and thei
464. ll be included and shall precede the authentication page of every unclassified TM except for oversize TMs pocket size TMs and TMs with less than eight pages The filled out sample shall include guidelines for completing the form 5 2 2 4 Authentication page lt authent gt The authentication page provided by the acquiring activity shall be the last printed text page of the TM or if there are foldout pages the authentication page shall be the last printed text page prior to the foldout pages For changes the authentication block shall be included on the change transmittal sheet s The authentication block shall be placed after all of the other information on the change transmittal sheet s Refer to FIGURE 24 5 2 2 5 Foldout pages Except RPSTL only lt foldsect gt If foldout pages are approved by the acquiring activity they shall be the last printed material in the manual or volume Foldout pages shall not be included in a RPSTL 5 2 2 6 Back cover lt back gt The outside back cover shall be blank except for pocket size TMs and classified TMs For pocket size TMs the outside back cover shall include the TM number For classified TMs security classification markings shall be included on the back cover When applicable a metric conversion table covering applicable units included in the TM shall be placed on the inside back cover 6 NOTES This section contains information of a general or explanatory nature that may be
465. loped when the systems are classified or have non volatile on board memory that requires to be cleared prior to transportation or other action that allows the data to be accessed by unauthorized personnel Instructions shall meet the requirements of current regulations as they pertain to automation security C 5 2 4 4 Siting requirements site When siting instructions peculiar to the equipment exist those requirements shall be prepared Operational features shall be considered such as the following a Location 187 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C b Proximity to power sources Effective ranges Terrain requirements to avoid screening reflections ground clutter and other poor operational conditions due to terrain Technical requirements Shelter locations Compensating for adverse siting conditions m When the equipment contains large components such as towers and antennas that require orientation to a baseline during siting i Mobile equipment oriented during installation C 5 2 4 5 Shelter requirements lt shelter gt When equipment normally housed in a permanent or semi permanent shelter other than a military truck van or transportable shelter during use the following information shall be prepared a Amount of floor wall and height space required A plan for a typical layout Required weight capacity of the building floor Dimensions required for installed equipment Total w
466. losophy D 5 1 Semi automatic or automatic bo ou D 5 2 1 2 Types AD Lom cant D 5 2 2 Using built in test equipment D 5 2 1 5 ufo disco cuc NR c D 5 5 Testing and troubleshooting Adone abe D 5 4 1 DMWR NMWR category 5 4 3 Master index category NUR Ve PESE RS e ena e E Rena D 5 4 4 standdrid CALE SONY Me D 5 4 2 TS DOR boa coo passa essa dc c tea Coen D 5 4 D 5 5 2 Text Method of troubleshooting D 5 5 8 4 6b Placementdn pocket 4 7 15 2 Placement OI enses i eed eu as 4 7 14 Text logic method of troubleshootin g D 5 5 8 4 6a Theory GEODOFIUODE sa ated elt dues Ein e OE D 5 5 4 5 e cou 5 1 Required M ES esie petit disc a ids B 5 1 1 WY GER PACKAGES rana 5 4 Theory presentation inei tec serta erae Y B 5 4 3 Title block otia RSS SSS 5 2 1 6 Page TU TINS SUN ada is aa 4 7 16 2 1 le PMS and PMI warning data 5 2 1 7 Reporting errors SUIT
467. lt terefs gt shall be listed in column 5 of the MAC These reference numbers shall correspond to the appropriate tools test equipment listed in the tools and test equipment table Reference letters for applicable remarks lt remarkrefs gt shall be listed in column 6 of the MAC These reference letters shall correspond to the appropriate remarks listed in the remarks table G 5 3 5 Tools and test equipment requirements lt tereqtab gt A tabular list standard information of all tools and test equipment both special and common required to maintain the equipment shall be prepared in accordance with the format shown in FIGURE G 8 or FIGURE G 9 as applicable Common tools shall not be included on this list when they are part of an existing set kit or outfit authorized to the intended user however the authorized set kit or outfit which contains the prescribed common tools shall be listed G 5 3 6 Remarks lt remarktab gt Remarks standard information pertinent to maintenance functions shall be prepared in accordance with the format shown in FIGURE G 8 or FIGURE G 9 as applicable 333 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G G 5 4 Components of end item COED and basic issue items BID lists work package operator only lt coeibiiwp gt This work package shall be prepared as an inventory for the equipment to ensure safe and efficient operation The format of the COEI and BII shall be based on the number of items and usability When there
468. ly lt manuwp gt refer to E 5 3 9 g Torque Limits work package Unit level or above only lt torquewp gt refer to E 5 3 10 220 h MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E Wiring Diagrams work package Unit level or above only lt wiringwp gt refer to E 5 3 11 E 5 2 3 Weapon system equipment component assembly subassembly and software maintenance without PMCS Except for aircraft TMs DMWR and NMWR only lt maintenancecategory gt This maintenance category shall require either the PMCS or maintenance with PMCS category to be developed also This maintenance category contains the following work packages in specified order unless otherwise indicated a b Service Upon Receipt work package Unit only lt surwp gt refer to E 5 3 2 Equipment User Fitting Instruction work package lt perseqpwp gt refer to E 5 3 3 The following work packages occur in no specific order 1 Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 5 2 General Maintenance work package lt maintwp gt refer to E 5 3 6 3 Lubrication instructions work package lt lubewp gt refer to E 5 3 7 Illustration List of Manufactured Items work package Unit level or above only lt manuwp gt refer to E 5 3 9 Torque Limits work package Unit level or above only lt torquewp gt refer to E 5 3 10 Wiring Diagrams work package Unit level or above only lt wiringwp gt refer to E 5 3 11 E 5 2 4 Depot weapon system equipment
469. maintenance category contain Ammunition Marking Information work package lt ammo markingwp gt refer to E 5 3 14 2 E 5 2 11 Preventive maintenance services Aircraft preventive maintenance services only lt pmscategory gt This maintenance category contains Preventive Maintenance Services Inspection work packages lt pms inspecwp gt refer to E 5 3 15 5 2 12 Phased maintenance inspections Aircraft phased maintenance inspection only lt checklistcategory gt This maintenance category contains Phased Maintenance Inspection work package lt pmi cklistwp gt refer to E 5 3 16 E 5 3 Maintenance work packages Individual maintenance work packages shall be developed for the overall weapon system equipment and each maintainable system subsystem and WRA SRA for each applicable maintenance level as indicated in the approved MAC or maintenance plan E 5 3 1 Work package content Work packages shall include WP identification information initial setup information and all maintenance tasks such as remove inspect service test install replace disassemble assemble repair clean adjust align etc When initial setup information differs for specific maintenance tasks additional work packages shall be developed Work packages shall stand alone and contain complete start to finish maintenance procedures Any follow on maintenance that must be performed after maintenance procedures are completed shall be included e g disconnect e
470. maintenance procedures which have a major quality assurance effect shall be identified by the symbol in boldface letters preceding the text Only procedures at the step level shall be labeled with QA For example 1 QA 4 7 22 Security classification emergency page and protective markings 4 7 22 1 Security classification markings When specified by the acquiring activity a classified TM shall be prepared The security classification markings for classified TMs titles of parts chapters work packages appendixes paragraphs illustrations tables and their contents shall be identified in accordance with DOD 5200 1 R and DOD 5220 22 M and Executive Order 12958 For guidance on classification and handling restrictive markings on Compact Disk Read Only Memory CD ROM refer to MIL HDBK 9660 Downgrading declassification shall be done in accordance with DOD 5200 1 R Additional instructions applicable to security classification markings are described in 4 7 22 2 through 4 7 22 6 4 7 22 2 Overall security classification The overall security classification assigned to a TM shall agree with the highest security classification assigned to any portion within and shall be marked accordingly at the top and bottom of the front cover title block page and rear cover sheets The security classification markings for pages including those for unclassified pages shall be bold and at the top and bottom center of each page refer to FIGURE
471. mation Initial setup information is not required for this work package F 5 3 6 3 Repair parts list lt pi category gt The repair parts lists shall have a figure figure and a list of repair part items lt pi item gt as specified in F 5 3 6 3 1 and 5 3 6 3 2 F 5 3 6 3 1 Repair parts figure title title When available figure titles shall be taken from provisioning documentation The RPSTL figure title the functional group title and the applicable MAC title shall be the same When there is no provisioning documentation the acquiring activity or contractor shall develop a title This title shall be used consistently throughout the TM F 5 3 6 3 2 Repair part item lt pi item gt Each repair part shall include the column requirements in F 5 3 6 3 2 1 through F 5 3 6 3 2 8 Each repair may also include the optional items in F 5 3 6 3 2 9 through F 5 3 6 3 2 15 F 5 3 6 3 2 1 Item number column lt callout gt Items shall be listed on the repair parts list in the ITEM NO column by the same callout number shown on the associated figure The items shall be listed in ascending alphanumeric sequence 5 3 6 3 2 2 SMR code column lt smr gt The SMR code column shall include SMR codes assigned to the applicable items When developed as a multiple service TM each service shall have identified the appropriate SMR code When services share the same SMR code for an item the SMR code shall be listed for each service F 5 3 6 3 2 3
472. mbly and subassembly is determined by the individual application An assembly in one instance may be a subassembly in another where it forms a portion of an assembly 3 11 Auxiliary equipment Equipment accessories or devices which when used with basic equipment extend or increase its capability e g Modified Table of Organization and Equipment MTOE items etc 3 12 Aviation Intermediate Maintenance AVIM The next higher maintenance level after Unit Aircraft maintenance at this level is the responsibility of and is performed by designated maintenance activities for direct support of the using organizations Its phases normally consist of calibration repair or replacement of damaged or unserviceable parts components or assemblies emergency manufacture of non available parts and technical assistance to using organizations 3 13 Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM Aircraft maintenance which is the responsibility of and is performed by the using organization on its assigned equipment Its phases normally consist of inspecting servicing lubricating adjusting and replacing parts minor assemblies and subassemblies 10 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 14 Basic Issue Items BID The minimum essential items not listed in the drawings but required to place the equipment in operation to operate it and to perform emergency repairs Although shipped separately packaged basic issue items must be with the equipment during operation and
473. me The name of the part shall be listed An asterisk shall precede the part name if the part is an indentured subassembly b Part number The official part number of the part listed Overhaul interval hours The maximum operating time allowed on the part before it is to be overhauled d Overhaul interval notes Any additional information required on the part s overhaul interval e Retirement interval hours Maximum operating time allowed on the part before it is removed and condemned f Retirement interval notes Any additional information required on the part s retirement interval E 5 3 5 3 25 Preparation for storage or shipment lt pss gt As applicable the following instructions shall be prepared a Security procedures and special transportation requirements for sensitive items security terrorists etc b Special preservation packaging packing marking ESD protective and control measures and shipping instructions including use of special design reusable containers c Instructions on special use of corrosion preventive compounds moisture barriers and desiccant materials d Instructions for applying special identifying shipping and cautionary markings to shipping containers including security classification special temperature requirements and shelf life e Instructions will be provided by the proponent activity for placing equipment in and for removing it from administrative storage f Proce
474. messages or bit code words lt messageword gt with message word description lt para gt Based on the message or bit code word a corrective lt action gt shall be stated This corrective action can either be stated as a specific remedy or can be a reference lt xref gt lt link gt to a detailed troubleshooting procedure work package c Fault code reference index lt faultreports gt The fault code reference index shall consist of fault code s lt messageword gt that leads to a corrective action lt action gt This corrective action can either be stated as a specific remedy or can be a reference lt xref gt lt link gt to a maintenance work package If applicable additional follow on operational testing procedures lt follow on gt shall be included based on the corrective action D 5 5 8 3 7 Post operational shutdown procedures lt disconnect gt Procedures to return the aircraft aircraft system or equipment to its normal configuration prior to operational checkout setup if required shall be included Any follow on maintenance shall also be included D 5 5 8 4 Troubleshooting work package lt tswp gt Troubleshooting procedures for detecting isolating and correcting aircraft aircraft systems or other types of weapon system and their subsystems and equipment failures and malfunctions shall be developed Troubleshooting for DMWRs NMWRs shall be developed as specified by acquiring activity Work packages will relate either to a sp
475. mple of kits breakdown option 2 31 2 ITEM SMR NO CODE 1 PAOZZ 2 XBOZZ 3 PAOZZ 4 PAOZZ 5 PAOZZ 6 PFOZZ 7 PAFZZ 8 XBOZZ 9 PAFZZ 10 PAOZZ 11 PAOZZ 12 PAOZZ 13 PAOZZ 14 XBOZZ 15 PAOZZ 16 PAOZZ 17 XBOZZ 18 PAFZZ 19 PAFZZ 20 PAOZZ 21 PAOZZ 22 PAOZZ 23 PAOZZ 24 PAOZZ 25 PAFZZ 26 PAOZZ 27 PAOZZ 28 PAOZZ 29 PAOZZ 30 XBOZZ 31 PAOZZ 32 XBOZZ 33 PAFZZ 34 PAOZZ 35 PAOZZ 36 PAOZZ 37 PAOZZ 3 NSN 5330 00 982 5130 5975 00 285 0907 9340 00 142 6860 9340 00 285 6775 4720 00 809 2429 4720 00 001 0093 4720 00 999 8994 4720 00 95 1 2433 4720 01 009 9058 4720 00 683 8830 4720 00 999 4044 9390 00 488 2106 5330 00 333 0313 5330 01 040 8923 5330 01 082 3792 5330 01 082 3793 5365 00 944 1871 4710 00 234 0701 4710 00 277 5524 4710 00 277 5526 4710 00 006 1647 4710 00 203 3174 4710 00 335 2610 4710 00 277 4515 4710 00 203 3172 4720 00 462 7494 6145 00 705 6674 6145 00 254 6117 6145 00 161 1609 9505 00 555 8648 4 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F TM X XXX XXXX 24P 5 PART CAGEC NUMBER 81349 19207 97030 19207 19200 30299 81349 85757 01276 96909 85757 81349 11083 81349 19207 81348 19207 19207 19207 19207 19204 19207 19207 91340 81348 16236 81349 81346 17590 19207 19200 19207 19207 81349 81349 81349 96906 MILC7637TYP2 RRC271 LOOM 11633348 8635931 FT3548 5 MIL H 13531 3250 0610 303 8 MS521301A229R 3250 1010 MIL H 8788 4 3R7752 MIL I 1451
476. mponents or end items being processed Classification of Material Defects tables standard information lt defect tab gt shall be prepared for ammunition components and packaging and packing material refer to FIGURE E 6 The tabulated data shall include the following entries 1 A list of categories of defects lt defecttype gt minor major critical by the defects attributable to each component lt condition gt 2 The corrective action to be taken lt actionreq gt or a reference lt xref gt lt link gt to the corrective action 3 The inspection methods lt insp method gt used to determine if corrective action was accomplished 242 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 4 The acceptable quality level lt acceptqual gt established for each defect Visual inspection criteria shall be prepared for the packing of the items in conformance with the inspection criteria noted in E 5 3 5 3 16 1a Detailed procedures and criteria shall be prepared for function testing When test fixtures must be fabricated diagrams and instructions for the fabrication shall be prepared Where ammunition is required for function testing weapons it shall be identified by Department of Defense Ammunition Code DODAC NSN and nomenclature to include dummy rounds Instructions shall be prepared to establish a uniform system of examination for deterioration or damage Definitions shall be prepared to explain minor major and critical defects Lower mai
477. ms The following types of diagrams may be included in the TM Refer to MIL HDBK 1222 for examples of types of diagrams a Block diagrams b Schematic diagrams c Pictorial diagrams 43 MIL STD 4005 1 2 d Cutaway diagrams e Digital diagrams f Wiring diagrams wire lists g Cable diagrams h Piping diagrams Test setup diagrams 4 7 27 2 6 Charts and graphs Charts and graphs shall be prepared as illustrations Instructions shall be provided for use and interpretation of complex graphs 4 7 27 2 7 Tools and test equipment illustrations Only uncommon or unusual uses and connections for test purposes shall be illustrated if it is essential to do so to avoid misunderstanding Unusual operations shall also be illustrated Special tools and test equipment shall be illustrated as applicable Standard tools and test equipment shall not be illustrated nor shall self evident or generally known uses be shown 4 7 27 3 Elements of illustrations 4 7 27 3 1 Border rules and boxes Border rules and boxes shall not be used for single illustrations but are used to separate multi section illustrations on the same page or for locator detail views Refer to MIL HDBK 1222 for an example of border rules and boxes 4 7 27 3 2 Use of the human figure When necessary illustrations may include a human figure or parts of the body The use of the human figures in illustrations shall be done in accordance with MIL DTL 24784 4
478. my use unius for storage or shipment Leer TIT pans oe Tsay car and bazis Re Supporting information for repair pee o 5 2 25 c parts special tools TMDE and support equipment Copyright credit line 5 2 26 lt gt 145 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for Conventional and Chemical Ammunition 14 MIL STD 40051 2 Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P Reference Element Name QUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND lt descwp gt DATA WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities B3223 and features Location and description of major 5 3 4 _ components Differences between models Equipment data 00000 data R 5 3 6 Keqpdata gt Cd opim OPERATOR INSTRUCTIONS DESCRIPTION AND USE OF OPERATOR CONTROLS AND NDICATORS WORK PACKAGE Security measures for electronic data measures Security measures for electronic data electronic data C 5243 Siting requirements TUM 5 2 4 4 Shelter requirements 5 2 4 5 Assembly and preparation for use 5 2 4 6 Initial adjustments before use and self test gc auxiliary equipment TUTEMEER 5 2 4 9 Preparation for movement for movement 5 2 4102 Fording and swimming Interim nuclear biologi
479. n This transition will be facilitated by acquiring managing and using technical data in standardized digital form 3 28 Computer Graphics Metafile CGM A standard digital graphic form for graphics preparation as defined by MIL PRF 28003 3 29 Continuous tone photographs or drawings Continuous tone photographs or drawings have a continuous gradation of tonal values ranging from light white to dark black including gray Lines or dots do not create these tonal values 3 30 Corrosion Prevention and Control CPC Systematic maintenance steps procedures taken to prevent or retard the gradual destruction and or pitting of a metal surface or other materials such as rubber and plastic due to chemical attack 3 31 Degradation The reduction in systems subsystems components performance capability 3 32 Department of Defense DoD The Office of the Secretary of Defense OSD including all boards and councils the Military Departments Army Navy and Air Force the Organization of the Joint Chiefs of Staff OJCS the Unified and Specified Commands the National Security Agency NSA and the Defense Agencies 3 33 Department of Defense Ammunition Code DODAC An eight character code developed to indicate interchangeability of ammunition and explosive items in Federal Supply Classification FSC Group 13 This eight character code is divided into two parts The two parts are separated by a hyphen The first four digits represent the F
480. n refer to FIGURE D 2 If the procedure is too complex or lengthy to be included in the checklist a reference to the WP where the procedures or actions are provided shall be included in the checklist 203 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 5 7 Component checklist work package DMWR NMWR only lt compchklistwp gt component checklist work package shall be prepared when required to support the preshop analysis procedures This work package shall consist of the data described in D 5 5 7 1 through D 5 5 7 4 D 5 5 7 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 7 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 D 5 5 7 3 Introduction intro When necessary the checklist shall be preceded by a brief explanation of its use D 5 5 7 4 Component checklist lt compchklist gt The checklist refer to FIGURE D 3 shall contain the following data as applicable a Name nomenclature of the equipment item lt name gt Serial number lt serialno gt Date received lt daterec gt Received from identify unit lt recfrom gt Component name lt compname gt NSN nsn Part number CAGEC lt partno gt lt cageno gt ro Quantity required lt qty gt Quantity received lt qtyrec gt j Visual damage found lt damage gt
481. n the requirement to conserve personnel and equipment resources and air mobility requirements 1 Company Size Aviation Units Perform those tasks which consist primarily of preventive maintenance and main tenance repair and replacement functions associated with sustaining a high level of aircraft operational readiness Perform maintenance inspections and servicing to include preflight daily intermediate periodic or phased and special inspections as authorized by the MAC or higher headquarters Identify the cause of equipment system mal functions using applicable technical manual troubleshooting instructions Built In Test Equipment BITE installed aircraft instruments or Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment TMDE Replace worn or damaged mod ules components that do not require complex adjustments or system alignment and which can be removed installed with available skills tools and ground support equipment Perform operational and continuity checks and make minor repairs to the electrical system Inspect service and make operational capacity and pressure checks to hydraulic systems Perform servicing functional adjustments and minor repair replacement to the flight control propulsion power train and fuel systems Accomplish airframe repair that does not require extensive disassembly jigging or alignment The manufacture of airframe parts will be limited to those items which can be fabricated with tools and equipment found
482. n E 5 3 16 1 through E 5 3 16 7 5 3 16 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 261 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 16 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 16 3 Inspection area diagrams lt figure gt Diagrams locating the inspection areas and the access doors and panels which require removal at various phased maintenance inspections of the aircraft shall be included refer to FIGURE E 16 and FIGURE E 17 E 5 3 16 4 Phased maintenance checklist The following information shall be developed for the phased maintenance checklist a The work package shall begin with the following note NOTE Prior to start of the Phased Maintenance Inspection it is recommended that a pre inspection maintenance test flight MTF be conducted Accomplishment of the MTF shall be determined by the unit maintenance officer The pre inspection MTF should be conducted by a maintenance test pilot following a review of the aircraft forms and records and a briefing from the crew of the aircraft The MTF is recommended to assess the aircraft performance and identify deficiencies that should be corrected while the aircraft is undergoing phased maintenance inspections b The checklist shall consist of the following specific types of data entries Fo
483. n for insert aircraft model aircraft It does not contain instructions for repair adjustment or other means of rectifying conditions nor does it contain instruction for troubleshooting to find causes for malfunctioning Specific tolerances limits etc can be found in the applicable maintenance manuals Use of the alphabetical index in the applicable manuals will facilitate locating the required information 175 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B The inspections prescribed in the Preventive Maintenance Services Inspection Checklist work package will be performed at a specific period by Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM activities with assistance of Aviation Intermediate Maintenance AVIM and Depot Maintenance activities when required B 5 5 4 General information lt geninfo gt The verbatim the text below within the quotation marks except for the information indicated by italicized text shall be included Italicized text shall be replaced with the appropriate information INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS The inspection requirements contained in the Preventive Maintenance Services Inspection Checklist work package are stated in such a manner as to establish when certain equipment is to be inspected and what conditions are desired undesired insert WP and figure number Compliance with the provisions outlined herein is required in order to ensure that latent defects are discovered and corrected before malfunctioning or serious trouble r
484. n for mandatory replacement parts work package intro 340 Mandatory replacement parts list mprl eee 340 Critical safety items CSI and flight safety critical aircraft parts FSCAP work package lt csi fscap wp gt a 340 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 340 Initial setup 340 Critical safety tems CSI 68b 341 Flight safety critical aircraft parts FSCAP aviation only lt fscap gt 341 Support items work package lt supitemwp gt 341 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 341 Initial Setup Information Acasa ete dala e eb dudes coh ee oon aab aee as 341 Introduction 341 SUpport tems StS un tU es 341 Additional work packages lt genwp gt 341 ME TET MRNA 341 N 341 xxiv MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS FIGURE PAGE Figure 1 Example of a maintenance work 62 Figure 2 List of approved safety warning icons 2 64 Figure 3 List of approved hazardous materials warning
485. n initial setup instructions When no initial setup instructions are required to perform operating tasks the title INITIAL SETUP shall be included with the words Not Applicable It provides the maintenance technician with general information equipment parts material and authorized personnel required to perform and complete all the operating tasks included in the work package As appropriate referencing shall be established for all supporting information items Setup information requirements are described below a Test equipment lt testeqp gt All test equipment required to perform the procedure shall be listed by name lt name gt WP containing an overall listing of tools and special tools listed by WP number and item number or document number lt itemref gt Referencing will eliminate the need to repeat or update the part and model numbers throughout the TM Tools and special tools lt tools gt The tool kit box assigned to the mechanic on a 1 per mechanic by MOS basis to be used in maintenance of a particular equipment shall be listed by name lt name gt WP containing an overall listing of tools and special tools listed by WP number and item number or supply catalog SC or TM number lt itemref gt No tool in the kit shall be further identified Other tools required for performance of all tasks for the maintenance levels covered in the work package shall also be identified in the initial setup Other tools includ
486. n item or range of items NOTE When you use an NSN to requisition an item the item you receive may have a different part number from the number listed DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC Column 6 This column includes the following information 1 The federal item name and when required a minimum description to identify the item 2 Part numbers of bulk materials are referenced in this column in the line entry to be manufactured or fabricated 3 Hardness Critical Item HCI A support item that provides the equipment with special protection from electromagnetic pulse EMP damage during a nuclear attack 4 The statement END OF FIGURE appears just below the last item description in column 6 for a given figure in both the repair parts list and special tools list work packages QTY Column 7 The QTY quantity per figure column indicates the quantity of the item used in the breakout shown on the illustration figure which is prepared for a functional group subfunctional group an assembly V appearing in this column instead of a quantity indicates that the quantity is variable and quantity may change from application to application MC Include for Marine Corps manuals only USMC QTY per Equip Column 8 This column accommodates the Marine Corps quantity per equipment requirement EXPLANATION OF CROSS REFERENCE INDEXES WORK PACKAGES FORMAT AND COLUMNS 1 National Stock Number NSN Index Work Package
487. n item or range of items The manufacturer s Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC is also included Column 5 Reference This column identifies the authorizing supply catalog or RPSTL for items listed in this work package Not required for DMWRs NMWRs 339 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G G 5 7 4 Tool identification list lt toolidlist gt Applicable information for this tabular list standard information shall be prepared formatted as shown in FIGURE G 14 and include the following information a Item number b Item name or nomenclature c National Stock Number NSN d Part Number e Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC f Reference Item names shall be in alphabetical order A lead in paragraph to the tool identification list may be included G 5 8 Mandatory replacement parts work package Unit A VUM level or above only lt mrplwp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and shall list all mandatory replacement parts referenced in the task initial setups and procedures For DMWRs NMWRs a mandatory replacement parts list consisting of all items that must be replaced during the repair and overhaul of the equipment whether or not they have been disturbed or not shall be developed When an item or component is not disassembled based on preshop analysis PSA the item will not be disassembled for the sole purpose to add a mandatory part All items that must be replaced during
488. n listed in column 3 by indicating work time required expressed as manhours in whole hours or decimals in the appropriate subcolumn This work time figure represents the active time required to perform that maintenance function at the indicated level of maintenance If the number or complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function varies at different maintenance levels appropriate work time figures are to be shown for each level The work time figure represents the average time required to restore an item assembly subassembly component module end item or system to a serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions This time includes preparation time including any necessary disassembly assembly time troubleshooting fault location time and quality assurance time in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the MAC The symbol designations for the various maintenance levels are as follows C Operator or crew maintenance Unit maintenance Direct support maintenance O F L Specialized repair activity SRA H General support maintenance D Depot maintenance NOTE The L maintenance level is not included in column 4 of the MAC Functions to this level of maintenance are identified by a work time figure in the H column of column 4 and an associated reference code is used in the REMARKS column 6 This code is keyed to the
489. n required to provide the user with a physical description and functionally explain how the weapon system or equipment operates shall be included B 4 2 Maintenance level applicability Requirements contained in this standard are applicable to all maintenance levels unless specifically noted in bold and in parentheses 1 Direct Support The labeled requirements shall be applicable to all TMs containing that maintenance level An explanation of all applicable Department of Army maintenance levels is provided in section 3 B 4 3 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery Technical manual data prepared and delivered digitally in accordance with this standard shall be Extensible Markup Language XML tagged using the Document Type Definition DTD for Maintenance Instructions and the XML Stylesheet Language XSL or style sheets in accordance with MIL STD 2361 Refer to 4 6 for information on obtaining or accessing this DTD XML tags used in the modular DTD are noted throughout the text of this standard in bracketed bold characters i e lt descwp gt as a convenience for the TM author and to ensure that the tags are used correctly when developing a document instance B 4 4 Use of the DTD XSLs The DTD referenced in this standard interpret the technical content and structure for the functional requirements contained in this standard and are mandatory for use The XSLs referenced herein interpret the style and format As specified by the
490. n statement D 4 12 Selective application and tailoring This standard contains some requirements that may not be applicable to the preparation of all technical manuals Selective application and tailoring of requirements contained in this standard are the responsibility of the acquiring activity and shall be accomplished using Appendix A The applicability of some requirements is also designated by one of the following statements unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity as when specified by the acquiring activity or when specified by the acquiring activity D 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS D 5 1 Testing and troubleshooting philosophy Testing and troubleshooting data shall be developed to the extent required to maintain aircraft and other major weapon systems equipment components and support equipment at the authorized maintenance level in accordance with the Logistics Management Information LMI Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC or Maintenance Plan and the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR codes developed for the weapon system equipment Other factors to be considered in the development of troubleshooting procedures include but are not limited to the following a Technical experience target audience User environment System quick turnaround requirements Test equipment requirements and availability Automated versus manual testing Replaceable component and part reliability Ease of testing
491. n the information whether patented or not will be respected that the recipient will report promptly to the United States any known or suspected compromise and that the information will be provided substantially the same degree of security afforded it by the Department of Defense of the United States Also regardless of any other markings on the document it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the originating United States agency DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D Distribution authorized to the Department of Defense and U S DOD contractors only This publication is critical technology as determined on 20 May 1998 Other requests for this document shall be referred to AMSELL LC LM LT Fort Monmouth NJ 07702 5007 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document US ARMY COMMUNICATIONS ELECTRONICS COMMAND FORT MONMOUTH NJ 1 JUNE 1999 FIGURE 13 Example of a DMWR cover for a DMWR with Overhaul Standards 79 MIL STD 4005 1 2 NMWR X XXXX XXX NATIONAL MAINTENANCE WORK REQUIREMENT CONTAINING NATIONAL MAINTENANCE REPAIR STANDARDS FOR INTERROGATOR SETS AN TPX 46 V 1 NSN 5895 00 423 1693 EIC IZA AN TPX 46 V 2 NSN 5895 00 423 1694 EIC IZB This publication is not available through the APD distribution center This publication is available through US Army Communications Electronics Command Fort Monmouth NJ 07703 5007
492. n the type of system equipment or assembly subassembly being addressed the target audience description and the maintenance level of the operator technician Based on the complexity of the troubleshooting to be performed troubleshooting procedures can be structured differently and therefore contain different content elements The following methods shall be used to prepare troubleshooting procedures Once selected the troubleshooting method shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements specified by this document a Method A Text Logic lt logicproc gt Troubleshooting procedures for specific fault symptoms shall combine text and logic and consist of a series of steps and substeps lt test gt which lead to an indication or condition lt indication gt usually stated in the form of a question Based on these indications or conditions a YES or NO response lt answer gt is provided that will guide the technician to either the next step or a series of steps lt test gt or to a malfunction lt malfunc gt and corrective action lt action gt refer to FIGURE D 5 This process is continued until the entire troubleshooting procedure is completed When required the corrective action may include a reference to the work package or paragraph lt xref gt lt link gt that contains the data to perform the corrective action Functional Flow Tree Troubleshooting Procedures Graphical functional flow tree troubleshooting is shown in MIL
493. nables generic SGML to be served received and processed on the Web in the way that is now possible with HTML XML has been designed for ease of implementation and for interoperability with both SGML and HTML 13 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 52 Field Maintenance Field maintenance is on system maintenance and is mainly replacement of defective parts and preventative maintenance Field maintenance returns repaired equipment to the soldier It covers crew unit and selected DS maintenance tasks Some off system maintenance can be done at field level if based on task analysis it is simple to complete or it is critical to mission readiness 3 53 Final Reproducible Copy FRC The final document ready for reproduction and publication as an authenticated TM including all necessary changes made as a result of validation verification and acquisition activity conditions of acceptance or approval The delivery media includes but is not limited to reproducible camera ready copy direct image copies negatives disks tapes etc as specified For Army FRC equates to Final Draft Equipment Publication FDEP 3 54 Follow on maintenance Follow on is a maintenance condition which must be accomplished sometime following the completion of a task to clean up or undo actions performed during the task 3 55 Footer One or more lines of standard text that appear at the bottom of each page also called feet and running feet 3 56 Functional diagram
494. nal checkout work package may include test set hookup and disconnect procedures index of test set message words a reference index of test set or BIT BITE fault codes and related actions and further testing procedures related to the message words and fault codes The words END OF WORK PACKAGE shall be placed below the last item i e text illustration etc in any work package containing the operational checkout procedures The information in D 5 5 8 3 1 through D 5 5 8 3 7 shall be included in the work package as applicable D 5 5 8 3 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 8 3 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 D 5 5 8 3 3 Introduction intro When required an introduction shall be included explaining how the operational checkout procedures are to be used to perform testing and how they relate to the associated troubleshooting work packages D 5 5 8 3 4 General procedures and precautions proc Any general procedures that must be performed prior to checkout and precautions that must be taken during the performance of the checkout procedure shall be included D 5 5 8 3 5 Pretest setup procedures lt hookup gt Procedures for connecting any test and accessory equipment including cable connections shall be included Procedu
495. nance through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs All requirements throughout this standard for depot maintenance or DMWRs shall be followed for NMWRs Style and format requirements are provided in 4 7 Specific functional technical content requirements are provided in the following appendixes Appendix General Information Equipment Description and Theory of Operation AppendixC Operator Instructions Appendix D Troubleshooting Procedures AppendixE Maintenance Instructions Appendix Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL Appendix G Technical Manuals Supporting Information 4 2 Types of technical manuals Appendix A Content Selection Matrixes lists specific technical content requirements for each type of maintenance manual including multilevel TMs covered by this standard Each type of TM shall provide in detail the maintenance coverage prescribed for the applicable maintenance level s by the Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC and SMR coded items 4 3 Selective application and tailoring This standard contains some requirements that may not be applicable to the preparation of all technical manuals Selective application and tailoring of requirements contained in this standard are the responsibility of the acquiring activity and shall be accomplished through the use of the matrixes provided in Appendix A The applic
496. nce Element Name EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA lt descwp gt WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities and features Equipment data 000000 data 85365 THEORY OF OPERATION WORK E u o PACKAGE CHAPTER X 5 gt TROUBLESHOOTING 0 5 4 4 lt masterindexcategory gt MASTER INDEX TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK D 5 5 5 lt tsindxwp gt PACKAGE CHAPTER 5 lt tim gt TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES D 5 4 2 NOTE The notation indicates that at least one of the these content items shall be included TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT WORK TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGE COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS SERVICE UPON RECEIPT WORK Preliminary checks and adjustment of equipment Preliminary calibration of equipment 120 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A V TM Requirements Matrix for AVUM AVUM AVI 20 30 23 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 20 amp P O amp P 23 Reference Element Name Circuit alignment P lt calign gt EQUIPMENT USER FITTING INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE PERSONAL USE EQUIPMENT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE E 5 3 12 1 lt pmiwp gt INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES R R R ES35 lt maintwp gt NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Ass
497. nce Manual including Repair TABLE Parts and Special Tools List A 5 1 2 Technical content tables TABLE through TABLE A XIV simplifies tailoring the technical content requirements of technical manuals prepared using this standard as a guide The tables indicate which portions of this standard are applicable and list the content requirements for each type of TM The content requirements for each applicable TM shall be arranged in the order presented in the tables Inclusion of the applicable tables of this appendix is mandatory and is intended for compliance A 5 2 Intended use First determine the types of TMs required for each acquisition and then duplicate the table s that contains the content requirements for those types of TMs Indicate the types of TMs needed by filling in the blank after Requirements Matrix for at the top of each matrix For each type of TM selected indicate in the open blocks the content desired by entering an for REQUIRED content or a for content that is PROHIBITED blocks for the selected TM types in TABLE through TABLE A XIV must be completed with or a for each TM acquisition The blocks that already contain an are required and cannot be changed The blocks containing are prohibited for that type of TM and shall not be included The blocks that are shaded is content shall be required when needed to supp
498. ncritical torques will be covered by the Torque Limits work package and a reference thereto Torque values shall be given for all structural attaching hardware fluid couplings fuel oil hydraulic pneumatic etc and connections Torque values shall include torque correction factors when crowfoot extensions thread lubricants and cadmium plated screws or nuts are used Torque values identified in the tasks must reflect torque wrenches authorized to personnel targeted to perform tasks Upon completion of torque action instructions shall be prepared on use of an orientation mark striping g Such terms as reverse the disassembly procedures or installation is the reverse of removal shall not be used in any maintenance task h Maintenance procedures or steps that have a major quality assurance effect shall be preceded by a statement such as QA check to identify them 237 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E DMWRs NMWRSs only For items that have parts with specific characteristics wear limits specified performance requirements or fatigue characteristics or tolerances overhaul inspection procedures OIP shall be included in any applicable maintenance task The OIP shall consist of the characteristics being inspected for inspection methods and the acceptance reject criteria that must be met For characteristics having a major quality assurance effect a statement such as QA check shall be placed immediately preceding the ch
499. nd rejection criteria Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI 5 lt mim gt lt maintenancepmcscategory gt lt maintenancecategory gt SERVICE UPON RECEIPT WORK IPACKAGE sss C Fee P sa Ce B 5 3 2 3 3 lt preserv gt 5 3 2 3 6 lt prechkadj gt P P 65328 6532391 kammomarkings gt 6532392 P 6532393 gt P jsa2394 jem P jpx32310 P Essos qdelowonmmsio E 5 5 3 lt perseqpwp gt E333 lt maintwp gt lt groundtsk gt MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A IV Repair or replacement GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK IPACKAGE LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK PACKAGE WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE CHAPTER X AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGE ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK PACKAGE TORQUE LIMITS WORK PACKAGE WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE 116 Requirements Matrix for 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 23 amp P 24 amp P 34 amp P Reference Element Name repair rplc lt ammo defect gt lt ammo handling gt lt other maintsk gt E 5 3 5 3 31 lt followon maintsk gt lt lubewp gt d T 9 5 2 lt mim gt 5 2 6 lt auxiliarycategory gt lt auxeqpwp gt
500. nd when established by maintenance engineering shall include critical measurement factors such as Meantime Between Failures MTBF Meantime Between Corrective Maintenance MTBCM Maximum Time to Repair MTTR availability and maintenance ratio The reliability and availability portion of the table shall give the minimum acceptable values while the maintainability portion shall provide the maximum allowable rates Availability may be expressed as a probability versus a qualified number When specified by maintenance engineering of the acquiring activity the RAM information may be prepared in a narrative format refer to FIGURE E 4 235 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 5 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 5 3 Maintenance tasks lt maintsk gt Maintenance tasks shall be prepared for each authorized maintenance level in the general order listed below For each maintenance task illustrations shall be used to support or clarify the text including schematics wiring diagrams parts location drawings and other visual aids Assembly and preparation for use aviation only lt prepforuse gt Servicing lt service gt Ground handling lt groundtsk gt Inspection of installed items lt in
501. ndix establishes the technical content requirements for the preparation of operator instructions for major weapon systems and their related systems subsystems equipment weapons replacement assemblies WRAs and shop replacement assemblies SRAs This Appendix is a mandatory part of this standard The information contained herein is intended for compliance The requirements are applicable for all maintenance levels through overhaul depot including Depot Maintenance Work Requirements DMWRs and National Maintenance Work Requirements NMWRs C 2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The applicable documents in section 2 apply to this appendix C 3 DEFINITIONS The definitions in section 3 apply to this appendix C 4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS C 4 1 General Operator instructions shall be prepared for weapon systems major equipment components and applicable support and interface equipment Operating instructions shall describe the operation authorized for the operator crew Procedures and supporting illustrations shall be prepared so that personnel can prepare the weapon system equipment for operation identify and locate operational controls and indicators and operate the weapon system equipment safely and efficiently in both normal and emergency conditions Unless otherwise specified an operator instructions chapter shall be used for operator data Multiple chapters should only be used for equipment that is very complex or that has multiple configurations
502. ng area and assembly of the aircraft weighing equipment Illustrations shall be prepared to support the text including a two view chart diagram refer to FIGURE E 13 E 5 3 12 4 5 Loading information lt weightinst gt Descriptions and instructions shall be prepared for aircraft loading and computing weight and balance information Sufficient information and data shall be provided so that an aviator knowing the basic weight and moment of the aircraft can compute any combination of weight and balance using the prescribed charts and forms Reference shall be made to AR 95 1 Aviation General Provisions Training Standardization and Resource Management DA PAM 738 751 and TM 55 1500 342 23 for additional information governing weight and balance of aircraft forms and records Data shall include fundamental principles of loading An illustration of aircraft compartments and stations shall be included Reference shall be made to DD Form 365 1 for a more complete listing of compartments and equipment that comprise the basic weight of the aircraft Loading information shall include weight and balance characteristics center of gravity limits weight balance and loading and weight and moment tables for load items such as crew fuel cargo and armament 257 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 13 Auxiliary equipment maintenance work package lt auxeqpwp gt When auxiliary equipment e g Modified Tables of Organization and Equipment
503. ng inspection data entries shall be included as applicable The information entries shall be placed in a table standard information lt pmi pecul tab gt 1 Aircraft serial or tail number lt serialno gt 2 Date of inspection lt date gt 3 Area number lt areano gt 4 Inspection number lt itemno gt 5 Inspection interval lt interval gt 6 Name of component being inspected lt compname gt 254 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 7 Inspection procedure lt proc gt E 5 3 12 2 Aircraft inventory master guide work package aircraft only lt inventorywp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by acquiring activity and information shall be prepared on standard inventory procedures to allow determination of inventoriable items of installed and loose equipment authorized and required by the specific aircraft in performance of its mission The inventory data described in E 5 3 12 2 1 through E 5 3 12 2 6 shall be included 5 3 12 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 12 2 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 12 2 3 Introduction intro A short explanation of the scope and purpose of the work package shall be prepared Information pertaining to necessary steps to ensure the list is accurat
504. nical content preparation Technical manual data developed in accordance with this standard shall be task oriented and fully consistent with the maintenance concepts derived from the baseline documents described below a Logistic Management Information LMI The technical data and instructions developed by the requirements of Logistic Management Information and Department of Defense DoD Requirements for a Logistic Management Information LMI including the maintenance allocation chart MAC shall be used as the baseline to prepare TMs 48 MIL STD 4005 1 2 b MAC For equipment that does not have LMI data available either a Preliminary Maintenance Allocation Chart PMAC or the MAC shall be used as the baseline to prepare TMs c Additional source data Available engineering drawings shall be used with the other required data Sound engineering principles and techniques available engineering analyses service experience performance data on the item and on similar items and all other Reliability Maintainability Supportability RMS and Operational Availability Ao data available shall be used in the preparation of specific instructions 5 2 Preparation of front and rear matter Requirements for the preparation of front and rear matter necessary to supplement the technical content chapters and associated work packages in Appendix B through Appendix G are provided in 5 2 1 and 5 2 2 Appendix A Content Selection Matrixes provides d
505. ning of an equipment or system 8 Replace To remove an unserviceable item and install a serviceable counterpart in its place Replace is authorized by the MAC and assigned maintenance level is shown as the third position code of the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR code 9 Repair The application of maintenance services including fault location troubleshooting removal installation disassembly assembly procedures and maintenance actions to identify troubles and restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage fault malfunction or failure in a part subassembly module component or assembly end item or system NOTE The following definitions are applicable to the repair maintenance function Services Inspect test service adjust align calibrate and or replace Fault location troubleshooting The process of investigating and detecting the cause of equipment malfunctioning the act of isolating a fault within a system or Unit Under Test UUT Disassembly assembly The step by step breakdown taking apart of a spare functional group coded item to the level of its least component that is assigned an SMR code for the level of maintenance under consideration 1 identified as maintenance significant Actions Welding grinding riveting straightening facing machining and or resurfacing 10 Overhaul That maintenance effort service action prescribed to restore an item to
506. nition work package E 5 3 14 3 FOr At Anson LL D E 4 7 Abbreviations amp Acronyms esee enne enne enne 4 7 17 Morir tpa MU 4 7 2 2 4 7 8 Descriptive 1 4 7 10 Examples 4 7 1 Fig reslitle D cm 4 7 27 4 5 1 Loldout pases EN e 4 7 5 4 7 6 Graphies 4 7 27 1 4 7 15 Kits list work package layout 5 3 4 iom G 5 3 4 4 368 333 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE Format Cont Maimtenance LAS KS aa asss una A 4 7 10 99 Marsi 4 7 16 36 Page size and orte t dllOED seinen cr Tate pri sedi eot en doro 4 7 4 25 undue mue eee a 4 7 11 2 1 33 Patastaplis 4 7 11 33 Procedural Step levels S 4 7 12 1 33 Procedural StEPS m 4 7 12 33 Protective security 4 7 22 39 Repair parts list work package 5 3 4 287 Special tools list work package layout
507. not described in FM 4 25 11 shall be described in this section 5 2 1 4 Change transmittal page lt chgsheet gt A change transmittal page shall be prepared for each change to a TM and shall be included in the change package refer to FIGURE 9 The change transmittal page shall not be numbered and shall be located following the warning summary refer to FIGURE 9 When updates are prepared the change number and date shall be shown on the change transmittal page Unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity the change date shall be the date at which the material to be included was received copy freeze date provided by the acquiring activity 5 2 1 5 List of effective pages work packages lt loepwp gt A list of effective pages work packages refer to FIGURE 15 through FIGURE 18 shall be prepared as in accordance with 5 2 1 5 1 through 5 2 1 5 11 The list of effective pages work packages shall be prepared and transmitted with the basic version of the TM and each subsequent change or revision The list of effective pages work packages shall immediately follow the warning summary When included in a change it shall immediately follow the change transmittal sheet if the warning summary is not included in the change 5 2 1 5 1 Types of publications The following types of publications shall have a list of effective pages work packages a Technical Manuals TMs Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists RPSTLs Depot Maintenance Work Requi
508. nserts Figure 1 Item 3 from bushing Figure 1 Item 2 Figure 1 24 Volt Connector Receptacle END OF TASK REPAIR 1 Using soldering iron heat insert Figure 2 Item 5 and pull from wires Figure 2 Item 3 2 Pullout 12 wires Figure 2 Item 3 3 Position wires in bushing Figure 2 Item 2 according to chart Figure 2 Item 1 4 Push wires all the way through holes in bushing Figure 2 Item 2 5 Using wire stripper strip insulation back 4 inch 0029 1 FIGURE 1 Example of a maintenance work package 62 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM X XXX XXXX XX 0029 REPAIR CONTINUED 6 Slip an insert Figure 2 Item 5 over each wire and solder using non acid solder and soldering iron Terminal Circuit Terrninal Circuit Designation No Designation No 248484 H 490 22 amp 41 J 22840 24645 218 483 L F 2 N 58 Figure 2 24 Volt Connector Receptacle Wiring Diagram END OF TASK REASSEMBLY NOTE Make sure wire ends are clean before soldering If necessary clean with cleaning solvent and stiff fiber brush Solder must be non acid type use rosin flux Wires and soldering iron must be pre tinned for good connection and maximum transfer of heat After soldering clean all solder joints with an acid swabbing brush and alcohol 1 Push wires Figure 2 Item 3 and inserts Figure 2 Item 5 into bushing Figure 2 Item 2 until inserts Figure 2 Item 5 are seated 2 Put bushing Figur
509. nspection item is not to be performed during each inspection the interval frequency shall be stated within in the procedure 1 perform only every 2nd inspection 3 Worktime The time it took to perform each of the inspection procedures shall be entered by the person performing the inspection 4 Inspection Total Work Time The total time it took to perform the entire inspection interval i e daily intermediate periodic etc Shall be entered by the person performing the inspection 259 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 5 3 15 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 15 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 15 3 Mandatory safety of flight inspection items Mandatory safety of flight inspection items shall be highlighted This can be done by using the statement FSCAP preceding the procedure to emphasize mandatory safety of flight inspection items E 5 3 15 4 Area diagram Area diagram of the aircraft showing sequences for inspection by area shall be included The area identified shall include all surfaces material components and equipment pertaining to that specific location refer to FIGURE E 15 E 5 3 15 5 Standard checklist statements The following statements shall be included in the applicable insp
510. nstructions for performing an operational or maintenance task Subordinate steps may be used to differentiate an expert step from a novice step When subordinate steps are used in combination with an expert step the subordinate steps should appear indented under the expert step 4 7 12 1 Procedural step levels When required procedural steps shall be divided into no more than six levels The following demonstrates by example how procedural steps and subordinate steps levels shall be formatted and numbered 33 MIL STD 4005 1 2 EXAMPLE 1 Primary procedural step number 1 2 3 etc is flush left Text begins two spaces after the period following the numeral The text is blocked a The first level procedural subordinate step letters a b c etc are immediately below the text of the first level procedural steps The text is blocked If additional subordinate step letters are required use aa ab etc after z 1 The second level procedural subordinate step numbers 1 2 3 etc are immediately below the text of first level procedural subordinate steps The text is blocked a The third level procedural subordinate step letters a b c etc are immediately below the text of second level procedural subordinate steps The text is blocked If additional subordinate step letters are required use aa ab etc after z 1 The fourth level procedural subordinate step numbers 1 2 3 etc ar
511. nt covered in the TM has nuclear survivability requirements 1 overpressure and burst thermal radiation electromagnetic pulse or transient radiation effects on electronics it shall be so stated Refer to 4 7 19 for marking Hardness Critical Process HCP procedures The following statement shall be included NUCLEAR HARDNESS All hardness critical procedures in this manual are marked with the acronym HCP as follows 1 When an entire task including all paragraphs and procedures is considered hardness critical only the task title will be marked by the acronym HCP placed before the title 169 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B 2 When only certain processes and steps within the work package are hardness critical only the applicable processes and steps will be marked by placement of the acronym HCP between each applicable step number and the text B 5 2 18 Calibration lt calref gt Equipment requiring calibration shall be identified and reference shall be made to the publication containing the applicable calibration procedure B 5 2 19 Engineering Change Proposals ECPs DMWR NMWR only lt ecp gt The following statement shall be included ENGINEERING CHANGE PROPOSALS Engineering Change Proposals ECPs will be submitted in accordance with AR 70 1 directly to enter the name and address of the responsible command or activity A reply will be furnished to you B 5 2 20 Modifications list DMWR NMWR only
512. ntation for Communication of Illustration Data CGM Application Profile STANDARDS DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE MIL STD 1309 Definition of Terms for Testing Measurement and Diagnostics MIL STD 1686 Electrostatic Discharge Control Program for Protection of Electrical and Electronic Parts Assemblies and Equipment Excluding Electrically Initiated Explosive Devices Metric MIL STD 2361 Digital Publications Development HANDBOOKS DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE MIL HDBK 113 Guide for the Selection of Lubricants Functional Fluids Preservatives and Specialty Products for use in Ground Equipment Systems MIL HDBK 263 Electrostatic Discharge Control Handbook for Protection of Electrical and Electronic Parts Assemblies and Equipment Excluding Electrically Initiated Explosive Devices Metric MIL HDBK 275 Guide for Selection of Lubricants Fluids and Compounds for Use in Flight Vehicles and Components MIL HDBK 1222 Guide to the General Style and Format of U S Army Work Package Technical Manuals MIL HDBK 9660 Handbook for DoD Produced CD ROM Products Copies of these documents are available online at http assist daps dla mil quicksearch http www dodssp daps mil or from the Document Automation and Production Service Building 4 D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia PA 19111 5094 H4 H8 Cataloging Handbook Commercial and Government Entity Code United States and Canada Name to Code H6 Federal Suppl
513. ntenance levels shall be included when appropriate A classification of defects 1 minor major or critical for both functioning and nonfunctioning categories shall be included The criteria shall conform to the publications noted in E 5 3 5 3 16 1b above Instructions for disposition of lots shall be prepared and shall be as specified by the acquiring activity The following statements shall be included in the TM verbatim 1 Each lot of material shall be inspected and screened 100 percent if one critical nonfunctioning defect is observed If a critical functioning defect occurs save remaining pieces and components suspend the lot from local issue and use Submit malfunction reports as prescribed in AR 75 1 Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives Disposition instructions will be furnished by the US Army Materiel Command 2 A lot of materiel is acceptable for issue if the acceptable criteria as indicated in insert applicable table number are met 3 Report all lots of materiel rejected under applicable serviceability table for disposition instructions to Commander US Army Armament and Chemical Logistics Activity ATTN AMSMC DSM Rock Island IL 61299 6000 Include a statement describing the capability and workload situation of your organization as to whether you are capable of reworking demilitarizing the item E 5 3 5 3 16 2 Pre embarkation inspection of material in units alerted for overseas m
514. nterchangeability The intent purpose of this specification is to allow fully innovative fixes repairs to the aircraft This includes minor modifications that can be made to achieve interchangeability Capable of being put or used in place of each other 3 73 Landscape mode To print an image sideways on the page so that the longest edge of the form corresponds to the horizontal axis 3 74 Leak rate The speed or rate of flow of accidental escape of fluid or gas from a system which is caused by damage processes The leak rate is influenced by such factors as the hole size internal external pressures and fluid level 15 MIL STD 4005 1 2 3 75 Legend A tabular listing and explanation of the numbers or symbols on a figure or an illustration 3 76 Limited repair Scope of corrective repair authorized to be performed by a level of maintenance lower than the level of authorized complete repair 3 77 Line Replacement Unit LRU An item normally removed and replaced as a single unit to correct a deficiency or malfunction on a weapon system or end item of equipment 3 78 List of Applicable Publications LOAP A separate listing of publications which are related to a specific piece of equipment group of equipment or system 3 79 Logic diagram Diagram comprised of a branching series of questions resulting in a yes or no answer leading to determination and resolution of problem 3 80 Logistics Management Information
515. ntesz 342 Figure G 2 Example of a standard MAC introduction 343 Figure G 3 Example of an aviation MAC introduction 344 Figure G 4 Example of 2 Level Maintenance MAC Introduction 345 Figure G 5 Example of standard toit lee uasa ae 346 Figure 4 6 Example of an aviation MAC eae sa Us 347 Figure G 7 Example of two level iie tech 348 Figure G 8 Example of a standard and two level MAC tools and test equipment and remarks S 349 Figure G 9 Example of aviation MAC tools and test equipment and remarks tables 350 Figure G 10 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method than ages tists amy Acto pu d aae 351 Figure G 11 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method B a 354 Figure G 12 Example of an additional authorization list esses 357 Figure G 13 Example of a expendable and durable items list esses 358 Figure G 14 Example of a tool identification list 359 Figure G 15 Example of a mandatory replacement parts list 360 Fig
516. nto several work packages would degrade the usability h Separate WPs due to different initial setup information for a set of maintenance tasks for a repairable component If the support equipment tools materials and personnel used to perform removal and installation is very different than the support equipment tools materials and personnel used to perform disassembly and reassembly for the same system or component it may be better to separate this information into two WPs i Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity the supporting information work packages may as necessary exceed 30 pages 4 7 3 Type size and style Type style size and spacing shall be in accordance with best commercial practices for technical publications However the minimum font size for a regular manual is 8 point logbook is 6 point pocket manual is 6 point and the minimal for a graphic is 6 point Type shall be proportionally spaced non mono spaced Fonts shall be selected for a balance between readability and economy of space Setting text in all capital letters shall be limited to appropriate uses such as major headings acronyms and equipment markings 4 7 4 Page size and orientation The TM shall be prepared in a size selected from TABLE I and specified by the acquiring activity Orientation of pages either vertical portrait or horizontal landscape shall be consistent throughout a given manual for ease of use The growing prevalence of T
517. ntroduction 343 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0439 UNIT MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC INTRODUCTION Aviation Maintenance System MAC This MAC assigns maintenance functions in accordance with the Aviation Maintenance concept for Army aviation These maintenance levels Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM Aviation Intermediate Maintenance AVIM and depot maintenance are depicted in the MAC as AVUM corresponds to code in the Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL AVIM corresponds to F code in the RPSTL DEPOT corresponds to D code in the RPSTL The maintenance to be performed below depot and in the field is described as follows Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM AVUM activities will be staffed and equipped to perform high frequency On Aircraft maintenance tasks required to retain or return aircraft systems to a serviceable condition The maintenance capability of the AVUM will be governed by the Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC and limited by the amount and complexity of Ground Support Equipment GSE facilities required authorized manning strength and critical skills available The range and quantity of authorized spare modules components will be consistent with the mobility requirements dictated by the air mobility concept Assignments of maintenance tasks to divisional company size aviation units will consider the overall maintenance capability of the divisio
518. nuity exist between 191 7012 pins 3 and 4 DECISION NO Step 7 YES Step 3 1264 1 FIGURE D 5 Example of content for a troubleshooting procedure Method 214 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX D TM X XXX XXXX XX 0251 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES INITIAL SETUP Personnel Required References cont Mechanic 3 WP 0040 References WP 0041 WP 0039 WP 0047 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SYMPTOM Engine oil press gauge is in red zone MALFUNCTION ENGINE OIL LOW PRESS indicator light is flashing CORRECTIVE ACTION STEP 1 If indicator light 15 flashing stop engine immediately WP 0039 WARNING Hot power unitcan burn you Usecare when working near power unit 5 TEP2 Check engine oil level WP 0047 STEP 3 Check bilge for oil a Tf oil is present check engine hoses clamps and fittings for leaks STEP 4 Start engine WP 0039 5 5 Check if ENGINE OIL PRESS gauge is still in the red zone Stop engine immediately WP 0039 Notify unit maintenance MALFUNCTION ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE IS IN RED ZONE CORRECTIVE ACTION STEP 1 Check if COOLANT LOW LEVEL indicator light is flashing a If COOLANT LOW LEVEL indicator light is off b Press TEST SENSOR BUTTON 1 If COOLANT LOW LEVEL indicator does not flash notify unit maintenance 2 If COOLANT LOW LEVEL indicator light is flashing Stop engine immediately WP 0039 WARNING Hot coolant can burn you
519. number located on the outer edge of the page opposite the binding side 4 8 1 2 Changed work packages When updates to a work package are made the entire work package shall be revised and included in the TM change package 46 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 8 1 3 Changed front and rear matter pages When updates to the front and rear matter of a TM are required all pages that share the same page number style e g a z or 1 1 shall be revised and reissued and included in the TM change package 4 8 1 4 Change symbols for text and tables Change symbols shall be inserted to identify technical updates in text and tables a Updates to the text and tables shall be indicated by a vertical bar opposite the updated deleted or added text except as noted below change bar shall be placed to the left of the table title only if the table title is changed or a new table is added Change symbols from a previous revision shall be deleted when a page is subsequently updated Symbols shall show current updates only Change symbols are not required for correction of minor inaccuracies such as spelling punctuation relocation of material renumbering etc unless such correction changes the meaning of the information 4 8 1 5 Change symbols for illustrations Unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity a miniature pointing hand may be used for illustrations other than diagrams and schematics to highlight the area containing the
520. numeric order along with the name of the part lt name gt for all items illustrated in this work package If applicable the illustration figure number lt figno gt containing the manufacturing data shall be included E 5 3 9 5 Illustrations of manufactured items graphic The following information shall be prepared a Illustrations shall be prepared which contain sufficient views to portray all features of the item refer to FIGURE E 10 b All instructions explanatory text and list of bulk materials needed by maintenance personnel to manufacture the item refer to FIGURE E 10 shall supplement the illustrations and shall contain the following data 1 All dimensional location and processing instructions needed to manufacture the item shall be included e g 30 in long top surface primer coating 2 description of the item to be manufactured including the P N and name 3 list of bulk materials needed to manufacture the item shall be prepared The list of bulk materials shall consist of the P N CAGE number and NSN or specification number of the raw bulk material to be used in manufacture of the item and shall cite the technical characteristics 1 standards specifications conditions dimensions and any other pertinent data 4 When applicable reference shall be made to the associated parts information PI RPSTL TM or Repair Parts List work package for combined TMs E 5 3 10 Torque limits work packag
521. o eiecit e ate lecto Dei die tau 2 9 4 9 Work package development 219 E 4 10 Safety devices and interloeKkS u 2 9 E 4 11 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts 219 E 4 12 Nuclear hardness ose needles densi ie tun dnobus is 2 9 4 13 Selective application and tatlorimg eue terea t eade diodes 220 ES DETAILED REQUIREMENIT S 220 E 5 1 Preparation of maintenance 220 B52 OP INMATE NANCE 2 4 220 E 5 2 1 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS Except for aircraft TMs DMWR and NMWR only lt pmcscategory gt 220 E 5 2 2 Weapon system equipment component assembly subassembly and software maintenance with required PMCS Except for aircraft TMs DMWR and NMWR only lt maintenancepmcscategory gt 220 5 2 3 Weapon system equipment component assembly subassembly and software maintenance without PMCS Except for aircraft TMs DMWR NMWR lt maintenancecategory gt 221 5 2 4 Depot weapon system equipment component assembly and subassembly maintenance lt gt 221 E 5 2 5 Aircraft maintenance aircraft only lt aviationcategory gt
522. o perform the testing and troubleshooting procedures If ATE is used and a Test Program Set has been developed the operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures contained in the Test Program Set shall not be duplicated A reference to the Test Program Set shall be provided 204 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 5 8 2 Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedure work package development Operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures shall be combined and contained in the same WP Based on the following factors operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures may be combined into a single work package or may be developed in a separate operational checkout and a separate troubleshooting work package refer to D 5 5 8 5 a Complexity of the system equipment b The type of test equipment used c System equipment self test or BIT capability d Complexity of the test and troubleshooting procedures as determined by the task analysis e Clarity and usability D 5 5 8 3 Operational checkout work package lt opcheckwp gt Operational checkout procedures that subject an aircraft or other type of major weapon system or their systems subsystems components accessories and items of equipment to prescribed conditions to determine that they will function in accordance with predetermined test parameters shall be developed Operational checkout for DMWRs NMWRs shall be developed as specified by acquiring activity An operatio
523. o use the testing and troubleshooting procedures with the malfunction symptom index when applicable b The location for each component accessory connector or junction box in the system under test shall be provided or a reference to the equipment description and data work package shall be included The text shall also identify every test connector or other test point to be used in the test 198 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D A complete list of test options shall be stipulated by the troubleshooting procedure List any self tests that are associated with the system Self test schemes shall be described as the prime troubleshooting tool with manual troubleshooting prepared to supplement the instructions where the self test leaves off or fails to locate the malfunction Build the procedure using system self tests before using external test equipment Test setup procedures and post test teardown procedures Complete step by step and troubleshooting procedures including instructions required for use and application of installed on line testing equipment Procedures shall take into account controls test point accessibility indicator displays and the feasibility of using BITE or automated test equipment where available Test procedures e g system turn on identification of time required to run and complete the system test and an indication of any possible mid test interruptions or stoppages and how to respond to them Backup diagrams
524. ode LIGHT AIMING POST M14 7197188 19200 LUBRICATING GUN HAND high pressure in tool bag 102758 36251 MITTENS CLOTH pair M1942 in oddment tray 11655982 19207 HAND steel pump type spout 9 lg in left cab door stowage box 328 72798 PAIL UTILITY 14 qt capability on vehicle floor RRP35 81348 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0441 3 4 blank FIGURE G 11 Example of components of end item and basic issue items lists Method B Continued 356 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0442 UNIT MAINTENANCE NBCRS FOX M93A1 ADDITIONAL AUTHORIZATION LIST AAL INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists additional items you are authorized for the support of the NBCRS FOX M93A1 General This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the NBCRS FOX M93AI and that do not have to be turned in with it These items are all authorized to you by CTA MTOE TDA or JTA Explanation of Columns in the AAL Column 1 National Stock Number NSN Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes Column 2 Description Part Number CAGEC Identifies the Federal item name in all capital letters followed by a minimum description when needed The last line below the description is the part number and Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 3 Usable On Code When applicable gives you a code if the item you need is
525. of an introduction work package 304 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F 0001 INDEX NO FIGURE TITLE FIGURE NO 1 Door Installation Nose Section 4 2 Door Installation Crew Nose Section 5 3 Gunners Window 13 4 Window Panel Jettisonable Cargo Door UH 60Q 26 5 Door Installation Troop Cargo 25 6 Stabilator Installation Tail Rotor Pylon Horizontal 42 7 Stabilator Installation Tail Rotor Pylon Horizontal 56 8 Windshield Installation Cockpit 65 9 Instrument Installation Cockpit 66 10 Instrument Panel Installation UH 60Q 67 11 Console Installation Overhead 78 12 PM Equipment Bay Lower 99 13 FLIR Turret Installation 109 14 FLIR Installation 110 15 Tail Cone Assembly 187 16 Tail Rotor Pylon Assembly 200 17 Seat Installation Pilot And Copilot 213 18 Seat Installation Troop And Gunner 230 19 Battery Installation 279 Figure 1 Exploded View UH 60A UH 60L UH 60Q HH 60L and EH 60A Helicopter Airframe 0001 2 FIGURE F 3 Example of an Indexed RPSTL Illustration and Legend 305 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F TM X XXX XXXX 24P 0092 DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT RACK FMT 3234023 100 0092 1 FIGURE F 4 Example of a repair parts list illustration 306 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F 0092 Figure 91 Electrical Equipment Rack FMT 3234023 100 0092 2 FIGURE F 4 Example of a repair parts list illustration Continued 307 D 2 ITEM SMR NO CODE 1 PAOZZ 2 PAOZZ 3 PAOZZ 4 PAOZZ 5 PAOZZ
526. of contents o R CHAPTER 1 R R GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK PACKAGE SS Mainan forms _ recommendations EIR Ozone depleting substances ODS Destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use 8 Warranty information Safety care and handling Mobilization requirements Flight safety critical aircraft parts Aircraft only Cost considerations 127 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR NMWR DMWR with NMWR with MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content RPSTL RPSTL Reference Supporting information for repair parts 5 2 25 special tools and support equipment Copyright credit line B 5 2 26 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND B 5 3 DATA WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities B 5 3 3 and features Location and description of major B 5 3 4 components Differences between models 5 3 5 THEORY OF OPERATION WORK PACKAGES PROCEDURES TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK 0 5 5 3 IPRESHOP ANALYSIS WORK 0 5 5 6 COMPONENT CHECKLIST WORK 5 5 7 OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT WORK 5 5 8 3 PACKAGES TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES D 5 5 8 4 WORK PACKAGES COMBI
527. of the data All existing changes to the basic manual will be merged All change dates and change symbols will be removed and if necessary all work packages will be assigned new WP sequence numbers in consecutive order If point numbers were added to the WP sequence numbers for expansion during a previous change cycle they should be recycled to the basic four digit WP sequence numbers i e if WP 0034 1 and WP 0034 2 were inserted between WP 0034 and WP 0035 WP 0034 1 should be renumbered 0035 WP 0034 2 should be renumbered 0036 and WP 0035 should be renumbered 0037 The total number of pages in the WP or other division 1 warning summary TOC etc is counted when determining the total number of pages in the proposed change and applying the following rules a Bound publications Bound publications shall be revised when a proposed change to a publication would alter 25 percent or more of its printed pages or would alter 50 percent or more of its printed paragraphs If the publication is eight or fewer pages it shall always be revised b Loose leaf publications Loose leaf publications which have 32 or fewer printed pages including changes shall be revised when a proposed change would replace 50 percent or more of those pages Loose leaf publications which have more than 32 printed pages including changes shall be revised when a proposed change would replace 75 percent or more of those pages 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS 5 1 Tech
528. ollowing information shall be prepared for inclusion throughout the TM 1 Nuclear warning notices shall be placed at the beginning of any instruction covering procedures that will expose personnel to a nuclear radiation hazard 2 Procedures to be followed prior to maintenance actions or in the event of breakage of radioactive parts or components including safety care and handling instructions 3 Radioactive parts or components shall be shown and identified on a parts location diagram or illustration and warning notices 4 list of radioactive parts or components and the type and quantity of radioactive material involved shall be included as part of equipment data refer to 5 3 5 Instructions for the disposal of radioactive material such as the requirement to double bag all broken tritium sources in plastic Electrostatic Discharge ESD control standards for the protection of electrical and electronic parts assemblies and equipment shall be prepared The ESD classes shall be identified Refer to MIL STD 1686 and MIL HDBK 263 which contains ESD control procedures and material necessary to protect these items For classifications of ESD marking procedures refer to 4 7 20 DMWRs NMWRs only When applicable reference shall be made to the electromagnetic compatibility standards e g MIL STD 461 and MIL STD 462 that apply to the equipment covered in the DMWR NMWR B 5 2 17 Nuclear hardness lt gt If equipme
529. ols and indicators description tabular option This option shall describe each control and indicator in a tabular format refer to FIGURE C 1 The work package shall start with a short introduction lt intro gt that identifies the basic system area or other breakdown The introduction shall be followed by one or more controls and indicators standard information lt ctrlindtab gt with an associated illustration lt figure gt for each control and indicator The number of controls and indicators standard information tables required is dependent on several factors These factors include but are not limited to system complexity different users crew members stations or configuration differences For each control and indicator the following entries shall be provided a index number key is used on the illustration to locate and identify the control or indicator on the illustration b The name nomenclature lt ctrlind gt of the control or indicator as it appears on the equipment Controls and indicators that are not labeled such as the accelerator or brake pedals shall be identified Each control and indicator shall be clearly labeled as it appears on the equipment c The function of the control or indicator lt function gt shall be described C 5 2 3 4 Controls and indicators description narrative option This option provides a narrative approach to describe each control and indicator This textual approach shall begin with a
530. on Testing and troubleshooting information includes fault reporting fault isolation data and detailed testing and troubleshooting procedures for each weapon system equipment systems components and support equipment When applicable integrated system testing and troubleshooting for aircraft and major weapon systems shall also be included D 5 2 2 1 Fault reporting fault isolation information Fault reporting information provides crew members or other operating personnel with a standardized means for reporting malfunctions and fault symptoms Fault isolation information is designed for use in rapid isolation of faults revealed during an operational mission or when the aircraft weapon system is in an operational configuration on the ground This data shall instruct maintenance personnel as to what maintenance actions to perform and or what procedures to use to correct reported faults Fault reporting information and the fault isolation data are designed to be used together Fault isolation information coverage shall be limited to faults identified in the fault reporting data which require specific procedures to isolate the cause Fault reporting data shall reference the fault isolation data to the maximum extent practical for isolation of indicated malfunctions 197 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 2 2 2 Integrated system testing and troubleshooting When several systems are dependent upon each other for proper operation the interdependent sys
531. on and data lt gt 201 Controls and indicators lt ctrlindproc gt 201 Theory of operation lt thry proc gt edo peto red 201 Troubleshooting index work package lt tsindxwp gt 201 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 201 Initial setup information wpinfo esee ene 201 Malfunction symptom index lt tsindx symptom gt lt tsindx messageword gt 202 Master malfunction symptom index lt tsindx symptom gt 202 System subsystem index lt tsindx system gt 202 Preshop analysis work package DMWR NMWR only lt pshopanalwp gt 202 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 202 Initial setup information lt gt 202 CODE CSCODO cu etr Qu Deut dh ne UM 202 Preparation Procedures lt proc gt pend ed 203 Preshop analysis procedures lt pshopanal gt 203 Component checklist work package DMWR NMWR only lt compchklisStWD gt 204 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt
532. on and tailoring of requirements contained in this standard are the responsibility of the acquiring activity and shall be accomplished using Appendix A Technical Manual Content Selection Matrixes The applicability of some requirements is also designated by one of the following statements unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity as or when specified by the acquiring activity G 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS G 5 1 Preparation of supporting information Supporting information shall be developed as work packages Supporting information work packages are described in G 5 2 through G 5 11 Supporting information work packages shall be placed in a single chapter called Supporting Information These work packages shall be placed in the TM in the order in which they are presented herein as applicable G 5 2 References work package lt refwp gt This work package shall be prepared and list all publications referenced in the TM and required by the user to operate and or maintain the equipment It shall consist of a scope and publication list s G 5 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt This information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 2 2 Initial setup information This initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 2 3 Scope scope Information concerning the use and content of the references work package shall be prepared refer to FIGURE G 1 G 5
533. on options e g Electrostatic Discharge ESD control requirements 2 Accessory items 3 Auxiliary items those that extend or increase equipment capability 4 Grounding of the equipment for both safety and proper operation 5 Torque requirements E 5 3 2 3 4 3 Special applications Installation instructions which are common to all special applications of a system shall be prepared Details resulting from the installation but peculiar only to the equipment into which the system is being installed shall be omitted e g special treatment required when installing the system in a vehicle or aircraft E 5 3 2 3 4 4 Van and shelter installations The following information shall be prepared only to the extent required for the applicable level of maintenance a Instructions shall be prepared for the removal and replacement of each nonpermanent unit b Installation instructions shall not be prepared when the equipment is permanently installed in vans or shelters c Diagrams and instructions shall be prepared which pertain to electrical and interconnection wiring exclusive of wiring peculiar to the equipment on which the installation is being made e g headlight ignition wiring d Instructions shall be prepared for cable run locations equipment locations circuit breaker panels and other similar details E 5 3 2 3 5 Preliminary servicing of equipment lt preserv gt Instructions for all lubrication required on newly inst
534. only Preparation for storage or shipment Classification of defects lt ammo defect gt Handling ammunition lt ammo handling gt Ammunition markings Procedures for ammunition activation lt arm gt Additional maintenance task ES3 5330 lt other maintsk gt lt followon maintsk gt Follow on maintenance 135 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR with DMWR with Overhaul Overhaul Standards MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content Standards with RPSTL Reference Element Name GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGE x Je LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK E 5 3 7 lt lubewp gt FACILITIES WORK PACKAGE E 5 3 8 1 facilwp OVERHAUL INSPECTION PROCEDURES E 5 3 8 2 lt oipwp gt WORK PACKAGE IDEPOT MOBILIZATION REQUIREMENTS E5383 lt mobilwp gt WORK PACKAGE QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS E 5 3 8 4 lt qawp gt WORK PACKAGE ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED E 5 5 9 lt manuwp gt ITEMS WORK PACKAGE AIRCRAFT INVENTORY MASTER GUIDE 53 122 lt inventorywp gt WORK PACKAGE AIRCRAFT ONLY STORAGE OF AIRCRAFT WORK PACKAGE E 5 3 42 3 lt storagewp gt WORK PACKAGE AIRCRAFT ONLY WEIGHING AND LOADING WORK PACKAGE 5 3 12 4 lt wtloadwp gt AIRCRAFT ONLY WIRING DIAGRAMS WORK PACKAGE uuu Jj CHAPTER 5 2 lt mim gt AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT lt auxiliarycategory gt MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGE
535. opying one list for each item the information required must be completed on the checklist prior to the preshop analysis COMPONENT CHECKLIST Name nomenclature of the equipment item Serial number Date received Received from identify unit Component name NSN Part number Quantity required Quantity received Visual damage found END OF WORK PACKAGE 0080 1 2 blank FIGURE D 3 Example of a component checklist 212 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX D TM X XXX XXXX XX 0145 DIRECT SUPPORT MAINTENANCE ARRESTING GEAR SYSTEM OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT INITIAL SETUP Personnel Required Equipment Condition Maintainer 2 Door 103 is Installed WP 0061 References WP 0010 3 WP 0050 WP 0079 ARRESTING GEAR SYSTEM OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT STEP 1 Make sure door 103 is installed WP 006 2 Make sure arresting HOOK manual control lever is set to up 3 Read record and reset nose wheelwell DDI WP 0050 CONDITION INDICATION No maintenance code exists CORRECTIVE ACTION Perform troubleshooting WP 0010 3 Maintenance Code 916 STEP 4 If arresting hook is not up manually raise and latch arresting hook CONDITION INDICATION Arresting hook latches in up position CORRECTIVE ACTION Do arresting hook push pull control assembly rigging or replace push pull control assembly WP 0079 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0145 1 2 blank FIGURE D 4 Example of content for an operational checkout procedure 213 MIL STD 40
536. or all TMs prepared in accordance with this standard For additional information on the DTD and specific XSLs refer to MIL STD 2361 C 4 5 Content structure and format The examples provided herein are an accurate representation of the content structure and format requirements contained in this appendix and shall be followed to permit the effective use of the DTD for Operator Instructions C 4 6 Style and format This standard provides style and format requirements for the technical content requirements described in this appendix These requirements are considered mandatory and are intended for compliance C 4 7 Work package development Technical manual data developed in accordance with this standard shall be divided into individual stand alone units of information called work packages A work package shall consist of descriptive operational maintenance troubleshooting support or parts information for the weapon system or equipment C 4 8 Safety devices and interlocks Information shall be prepared pertaining to the purpose and location of all safety devices and interlocks in conjunction with the pertinent procedures C 4 9 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts If the equipment contains ESD sensitive parts components or circuits cautions and ESD labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure ESD sensitive parts are not damaged or degraded during maintenance and operation Refer to 4 7 20
537. or equipment name by the specific malfunction symptom 207 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 5 5 8 4 7 Post operational shutdown procedures lt disconnect gt Procedures to return the aircraft aircraft system or equipment to its normal configuration prior to troubleshooting setup if required shall be included Any follow on maintenance shall also be included D 5 5 8 5 Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting work package lt opcheck tswp gt Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures to verify proper operation to prescribed standards and for detecting isolating and correcting system and equipment failures and malfunctions shall be developed Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting for DMWRs NMWRSs shall be developed as specified by acquiring activity The following information in D 5 5 8 5 1 through D 5 5 8 5 7 shall be included as applicable D 5 5 8 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 8 5 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 D 5 5 8 5 3 Introduction lt intro gt When required an introduction shall be included explaining how the operational checkout and troubleshooting procedures are to be used to perform checkout and troubleshooting and how they relate to the associated maintenanc
538. or table in the work package is added or deleted prior to the referenced table or illustration the use of point illustration or table number is permitted and shall be in accordance with the LMI plan 4 8 1 6 Changes to RPSTL work packages Requirements shall apply with the following exceptions a Inserted or deleted figures and items When figures and items have been inserted or deleted the cross reference index work packages shall be changed as necessary 47 MIL STD 4005 1 2 b Item changes Unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity an asterisk shall be placed to the left of the item number column in the list adjacent to the line item indicating that an update has been made to the item and is reflected in the associated text illustration P N index or reference designator index c Deleted work package When a RPSTL work package is deleted remaining RPSTL figure numbers shall not be changed to reflect the deleted work package and associated figure until the next revision d Inserted work package When a RPSTL work package is inserted before the last RPSTL work package the RPSTL figure number shall have point figure numbers in accordance with the LMI plan e g Insert between Figure 234 and Figure 235 would be Figure 234A The remaining RPSTL figure numbers shall not be changed until the next revision 4 8 2 Complete TM revisions A complete revision requires rewrite and reorganization of the technical content
539. ork package geninfo 256 Flyable storage lt flyable gt short term storage short and intermediate storage intermediate tUe HORREA PR PR RA S Ue 256 Weighing and loading work package AVIM only wtloadwp 257 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 257 Initial setup information wpinfo sees 257 General information lt gt 257 Weighing information lt gt 257 Loading information lt gt 257 Auxiliary equipment maintenance work package auxeqpwp 258 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 258 Initial setup information lt gt 258 Auxiliary equipment procedures lt maintsk gt lt proc gt 258 Ammunition specific work packa e 258 Ammunition maintenance work package lt ammowp gt 258 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 258 Initial setup information lt gt 258 Care and handling lt ammo handlin gt 258 Detective lt
540. ork package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 7 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 7 3 Introduction for tool identification list work package lt intro gt The following introduction text below within the quotation marks shall be prepared and included verbatim refer to FIGURE G 14 TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists all common tools and supplements and special tools fixtures needed to maintain the insert equipment name OR This work package lists special tools and equipment needed to maintain the insert equipment DMWRs NMWRSs only Explanation of Columns in the Tool Identification List Column 1 Item No This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the initial setup to identify the item e g Extractor WP 0090 item 32 Column 2 Item Name This column lists the item by noun nomenclature and other descriptive features e g Gage belt tension Column 3 National Stock Number NSN This is the National Stock Number NSN assigned to the item use it to requisition the item Column 4 Part Number CAGEC Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer individual company firm corporation or Government activity which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means of its engineering drawings specifications standards and inspection requirements to identify a
541. ort the equipment The blocks that are blank shall be filled in with or shading Shading may be changed to or The notation Chapter X in the matrix means that if required at least one of these chapters shall be in the TM If more than one of these chapters 15 needed then a required content item listed within the Chapter X matrix portion shall be in one of the chapters and may be in the others For example if there are more than two Maintenance 96 MIL STD 4005 1 2 Instructions chapters only one of them needs a PMCS Work Package The remarks page can be used to provide the contractor additional instructions A 5 3 Acquisition requirements The properly executed Technical Manual content Selection Matrix table becomes contractually binding when it is made part of the contract statement of work or any other contractual instrument 97 MIL STD 4005 1 2 This page intentionally left blank 98 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for TM Content 10 12 amp P 13 amp P 14 amp P Reference Element Name FRONTMATTER Ry RR C Warning summary Change transmittal page 5214 2 Kehgsheet gt List of effective pages work packages 5 2 1 5 Excluding pocket TMs and publications with less than eight pages Tiebockpge 5 8
542. oser than inch to edge of board or adjoining split The board must be secured by at least one nail on each side of the split when it extends to the end of the board Inoperative or loose Nails screws and fasteners Broken or missing cleats and handles Splits more than 3 inches but no closer than 1 inch to edge of board or adjoining split or 2 inch wide That be repaired by use of corrugated fasteners None None Damage that requires disassembly of box Splits closer than 1 inch to edge of board or adjoining split or over 2 inch wide Fiber Containers Metal Ends Body and Cap Minor rust cracks indentations or splits that would not impair water proofing or serviceability of container No leaks cuts or gouges Cuts tears or gouges not closer than 1 inch to closure less than 1 2 square inch in area and unpenetrated layers that can be spot painted 0109 1 FIGURE E 1 Example of checking unpacked equipment table 264 Perforations excessive rust or ends which are crushed or not securely crimped to body Cuts tears or gouges closer than 1 inch to closure more than 1 2 square inch in area or through all impregnated layers MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 0109 CHECKING UNPACKED EQUIPMENT CONTINUED Table 2 M29 and M30 Control Surfaces and Containers LOCATION ITEM ACTION REMARKS Components 1 Inspect for rust fungus paint damage
543. other timeframe as appropriate The warranty starts on the date found in block 23 of DA Form 2408 9 Equipment Control Record Report all defects to your supervisor who will take appropriate action B 5 2 12 Nomenclature cross reference list lt nomenreflist gt A cross reference list shall be prepared when unofficial nomenclature common name is approved by the proponent activity B 5 2 13 List of abbreviations acronyms lt loa gt A list shall be prepared consisting of all abbreviations acronyms signs or symbols used in the manual For aircraft only a statement shall be prepared that abbreviations in accordance with ASME Y 14 38 except when the abbreviation stands for a marking actually found in the aircraft B 5 2 14 Quality Assurance QA DMWR NMWR and aviation only lt qainfo gt When specified by the acquiring activity reference shall be made to the pertinent QA or include the appropriate general QA information If QA information is not referenced but is included in the manual it shall be stated that the text of each quality assurance procedure or step in the manual is preceded and highlighted by the addition of check For aircraft maintenance TMs include a reference to FM 3 04 500 The abbreviation shall be defined either in a note or in the text B 5 2 15 Quality of material Unit A VUM and above only lt qual mat info gt A statement s similar to the following shall be included Mater
544. ours shall be stated to the nearest 10th of an hour d Item to be checked or serviced checked The items listed ITEM TO BE CHECKED OR SERVICED shall be identified in as few words as possible to clearly identify the item Usually the common name e g bumper gas can and mounting bracket front axle etc will be enough 232 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E Procedures lt pmesproc gt The procedure PROCEDURE by which each check is to be performed as well as any information required to accomplish each check or service including lubrication appropriate tolerances adjustment limits and instrument gage readings shall be provided Illustrations shall be prepared to identify the location or the process of the task being performed and shall be integrated with the procedures Whenever replacement or repair is recommended the maintenance task shall be included or the applicable maintenance instruction work package may be referenced Any periodic scheduled lubrication procedures required for the equipment shall be included in the PMCS procedures and shall meet the following requirements 1 2 3 4 5 6 Lubrication procedures shall be prepared including information on authorized lubricants lubrication intervals man hour requirements and the AOAP Lubrication instructions shall be prepared so as to enable the user to receive lubricate and return to an acceptable performance standard all components of the equi
545. ovement lt test inspect gt Pre embarkation inspection procedures shall be prepared if applicable and shall be as specified by the acquiring activity E 5 3 5 3 17 Installation lt install gt Procedures shall be prepared for installation of the item Illustrations shall be used to support and clarify the text a Instructions shall be prepared for painting refinishing and marking the item prior to its installation in the next higher assembly of the equipment Inspection procedures shall be prepared for checking alignment and adjustment of the item during the installation sequence These instructions shall include a statement that adjustment servicing testing and or an operational check is required Instructions such as reverse the removal procedure shall not be used Peculiar instructions shall be prepared for lockwiring installing cotter pins use of sealing compounds lubricants or corrosion prevention compounds and similar operations with applicable references to the expendable and durable items list 243 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E e Information shall be prepared for shelf life items mandatory replacement parts etc f Instructions shall be prepared for pressurizing and charging with gas including all safety requirements E 5 3 5 3 18 Adjustment lt adjust gt Adjustment instructions shall be prepared that may be required before operating the part system or end item E 5 3 5 3 19 Calibration
546. over Front covers shall be unnumbered b Warning summary The pages of the warning summary shall be numbered consecutively using lowercase letters 1 a b etc c Change transmittal page The change transmittal page shall be unnumbered d List of effective pages work packages When a list of effective pages work packages is prepared it shall be numbered with upper case letters 1 A etc e Title block page Table of contents List of tables List of illustrations and the How to Use This Manual section These pages shall be numbered consecutively using lower case Roman numerals beginning with i i e i ii iii etc Numbering shall be continuous and shall not start over with 1 for the table of contents or How to Use This Manual information 4 7 16 2 1 2 Rear matter DA Form 2028s authentication pages metric conversion charts on the inside of the back cover and back covers shall be unnumbered 4 7 16 2 1 3 Blank pages A blank page shall be assigned a number but it shall appear on the preceding or following page For example if page 0001 10 of a work package is blank page 0001 9 shall have the number 0001 9 10 blank or if page 0001 1 of a work package is blank page 0001 2 shall have the number 0001 1 blank 2 4 7 16 2 1 4 Foldout page numbers Foldout page numbers shall be numbered consecutively using Arabic numbers prefixed by the letters The reverse side of foldout pages shall be bl
547. own shall be prepared Emergency work package shall be marked as specified in 4 7 22 4 C 5 2 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 C 5 2 6 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 C 5 2 6 3 Emergency operation emergency Procedures covering operation of the equipment during emergency conditions control failure air failure lube oil failure loss of cooling water etc Emergency operating instructions shall be included Warning or caution to return the equipment to proper operation when the emergency is over shall also be included C 5 2 6 4 Emergency shutdown emergency Procedures to turn the equipment off during an emergency fire water smoke hazard to personnel loss of coolant normal power etc C 5 2 7 Stowage and decal data plate guide work package lt stowagewp gt This work package shall be prepared as directed by the acquiring activity The guide plan shall include information provided by the acquiring activity The data described in C 5 2 7 1 through C 5 2 7 5 shall be included C 5 2 7 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 C 5 2 7 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information
548. owp PACKAGE PMCS INCLUDING LUBRICATION 5 3 4 2 lt pmcswp gt INSTRUCTIONS WORK PACKAGE AINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES 5 35 Kmaintwp gt NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Inspection of installed items Inspection acceptance and rejection 353 39 lt acptrejinsp gt criteria Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI Repair or replacement 102 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for TM Content 10 I12 amp P 13 amp P 14 amp P Reference Element Name Radio interference suppression GENERAL MAINTENANCE WORK 5 3 6 lt maintwp gt PACKAGE UBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS WORK 52 2 m PACKAGE LLUSTRATED LIST OF 5 3 9 B NE ANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK TORQUE WORK P ume mim Kauxiliarycategory MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT p 5 3 13 lt auxeqpwp gt AINTENANCE WORK PACKAGE LLUSTRATED LIST OF 8 5 3 9 lt manuwp gt ANUFACTURED ITEMS WORK TORQUE TING DEANS WORK PACKAGE ems mim lt ammunitioncategory gt AMMUNITION MAINTENANCE WORK 5 3 14 1 lt ammowp gt PACKAGE MUNITION MARKING 5 3 14 2 lt ammo markingwp gt INFORMATION WORK PACKAGE OREIGN AMMUNITION NATO 5 3 14 3 lt gt WORK PACKAGE 103 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABL
549. p gt Aircraft Troubleshooting Manuals only A technical description work package may be developed for each system and subsystem of the weapon system as applicable The work package shall as applicable include the following information in D 5 5 4 1 through D 5 5 4 5 D 5 5 4 1 Work package identification information wpidinfo Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 D 5 5 4 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package D 5 5 4 3 Equipment description and data descproc When equipment description and data is required to support the testing and troubleshooting procedures it shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements provided in B 5 3 3 through B 5 3 6 Equipment Description as applicable If this information is provided in another TM a reference to the TM may be included in lieu of including the descriptive data D 5 5 4 4 Controls and indicators lt ctrlindproc gt When it is necessary to provide information concerning the description and use of the controls and indicators to support the testing and troubleshooting procedures it shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements provided in 5 2 3 3 or C 5 2 3 4 Control and Indicator Description as applicable If this information is provided in another TM a reference to the TM may be included in lieu of including the controls and indicator data
550. pair of equipment for return to user will emphasize support of operational readiness requirements Authorized maintenance includes replacement and repair of modules components and end items which can be accomplished efficiently with available skills tools and equipment 3 Establishes the Direct Exchange DX program for AVUM units by repairing selected items for return to stock when such repairs cannot be accomplished at the AVUM level 4 Inspects troubleshoots performs diagnostic tests repairs adjusts calibrates and aligns aircraft system modules components AVIM units will have capability to determine the serviceability of specified modules components removed prior to the expiration of the Time Between Overhaul TBO or finite life Module component disassembly and repair will support the DX program and will normally be limited to tasks requiring cleaning and the replacement of seals fittings and items of common hardware Airframe repair and fabrication of parts will be limited to those maintenance tasks which can be performed with available tools and test equipment Unserviceable reparable modules components and end items which are beyond the capability of AVIM to repair will be evacuated to depot maintenance 5 Performs aircraft weight and balance inspections and other special inspections which exceed AVUM capability 6 Provides quick response maintenance support including aircraft recovery and air evacuation on the job tra
551. paration of specific maintenance instructions E 4 3 Maintenance level applicability Requirements contained in this standard are applicable to all maintenance levels unless specifically noted in bold and in parentheses i e Direct Support The labeled requirements shall be applicable to all TMs containing that maintenance level An explanation of all applicable Department of Army maintenance levels is provided in section 3 E 4 4 Depot Maintenance Work Requirement DMWR and National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWR When the contracting activity specifies that DMWR or NMWR shall be prepared to the best commercial practices the depot requirements contained in this standard shall be used only as a guide therefore the conforming modular DTD for maintenance instructions cannot be used 218 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 4 5 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery Technical manual data prepared and delivered digitally in accordance with this standard shall be Extensible Markup Language XML tagged using the Document Type Definition DTD for Maintenance Instructions and the XML Stylesheet Language XSL or style sheets in accordance with MIL STD 2361 Refer to 4 6 for information on obtaining or accessing this DTD XML tags used in the modular DTD are noted throughout the text of this standard in bracketed bold characters i e lt maintwp gt as a convenience for the TM author and to ensure that the tags are use
552. pe and or frequency of maintenance of inspections as necessary to ensure safe flight SPECIFIC NON INSTALLED EQUIPMENT ON AIRCRAFT The Preventive Maintenance Services Inspection Checklist work package may contain inspection requirements applicable to specific equipment not installed on your aircraft Those requirements should be disregarded 176 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B DA FORMS DA Form 2408 13 will be used to record all deficiencies or shortcomings discovered during the daily inspection DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet will be used as a work sheet to record all deficiencies or shortcomings discovered during accomplishment of the intermediate or periodic inspection Upon completion of the inspection all uncorrected deficiencies or shortcomings listed on DA Form 2404 will be entered on DA Form 2408 13 prepared for that date or DA Form 2408 14 Uncorrected Fault Record Aircraft For intermediate and periodic inspection SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS a The columns headed I and P are used to indicate the requirements for Intermediate when applicable and Periodic inspections respectively When item is required with a frequency other than that indicated by these column headings the proper frequency is indicated in the appropriate column For example when a given item is required at each 3rd intermediate inspection 3rd is entered in the I column opposite the pertinent item To use the chart perform al
553. pecified by the acquiring activity 185 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C C 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS C 5 1 Preparation of operator instructions Operator instructions shall be prepared and subdivided into individual work packages that provide the operator of the weapon system equipment with descriptions and use of controls and indicators and operation of the weapon system equipment under usual unusual and emergency conditions Weapon system and equipment operator data shall be developed in narrative or tabular form or by whatever method is most simple or effective to convey the specific TM application C 5 2 Operator instructions work packages 5 2 1 Work package content Work packages shall include WP identification information initial setup information and all required operator instruction information When initial setup information differs for specific operator instructions additional work packages shall be developed Work packages shall stand alone and contain complete start to finish operator procedures The words END OF WORK PACKAGE shall be placed below the last data item 1 text illustration etc of the work package The operator instructions work packages described in C 5 2 2 shall be prepared as applicable C 5 2 2 Types of operator instructions work packages The following types of operator instructions work packages shall be developed as applicable Note however in cases where operating instructions are d
554. pint bottle with sprayer MIL L 63640 81349 END OF WORK PACKAGE 0059 1 2 blank FIGURE G 13 Example of a expendable and durable items list 358 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX G TM X XXX XXXX XX 0444 UNIT MAINTENANCE MICLIC TOOL IDENTIFICATION LIST INTRODUCTION Scope This work package lists all common tools and supplements and special tools fixtures needed to maintain the MICLIC Explanation of Columns in the Tool Identification List Column 1 Item No This number is assigned to the entry in the list and is referenced in the initial setup to identify the item e g Extractor WP 0090 Item 32 Column 2 Item Name This column lists the item by noun nomenclature and other descriptive features e g Gage belt tension Column 3 National Stock Number NSN This is the National Stock Number NSN assigned to the item use it to requisition the item Column 4 Part Number CAGEC Indicates the primary number used by the manufacturer individual company firm corporation or Government activity which controls the design and characteristics of the item by means of its engineering drawings specifications standards and inspection requirements to identify an item or range of items The manufacturer s Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC is also included Column 5 Reference This column identifies the authorizing supply catalog or RPSTL for items listed in this work package Table 1 MICLIC Tool Ident
555. pment in a minimum of time with the skills tools test equipment and spare parts authorized by the LMI or MAC Information shall be included for any special lubrication required under extreme temperature altitude and humidity conditions within the limits established by the design specification for the equipment Lubricant types and abbreviations for flight vehicles and components shall be identified by standard military symbols as specified in MIL HDBK 275 lubricant types and abbreviations for ground equipment systems lubricants functional fluids preservatives and specialty products shall be identified by standard military symbols in accordance with MIL HDBK 113 Required abbreviations not covered in the appropriate handbook will be provided by the acquiring activity Lubrication instructions shall include all applications procedures lubricants and lubrication points When grouped lubrication points require the same lubricant at the same interval the type and number of points shall be identified and described by one of the following methods a Multi headed arrows Multi headed solid shafted arrows shall point to each of the lubrication points b Lubrication point notes Lubrication point notes shall contain instructions for applying lubricants taking into account the following factors type grade availability and properties of the prescribed lubricant expected temperature lubrication guns and tools available to authori
556. pot level RPSTL does not exist and items are maintained at depot level they shall be identified with a D in the third position of the SMR code in the highest level RPSTL prepared F 5 3 10 3 4 Basis of Issue boi BOI boi shall be placed on the last line under the item description in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column for individual items sets or kits The BOI shall indicate the quantity of the items 1 sets or kits authorized to support a quantity of end items assembly s or a specific military unit For example BOI 1 auth for 1 12 equip or BOI 1 per BN HQ when BN has SVC CO 5 3 10 3 5 Quantity column The QTY column shall be left blank F 5 3 10 3 6 Components list lt kititem gt Components of special tool sets and kits in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column shall be listed in figure and item number sequence lt callout gt The component shall be indented two positions and listed by item name lt name gt the figure number and the item numbers lt callout gt Quantities of components qty shall be included in BOI statement see F 5 3 10 3 3 300 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F 5 3 11 Cross reference index work packages F 5 3 11 1 National stock number NSN index work package lt nsnindxwp gt This work package Refer to FIGURE F 11 shall be prepared The index standard information shall be in ascending numeric sequence by the National Item Identification
557. ppacKI e 5 3 5 3 27 Unusual environment weather 55 23 22 sable 5 3 6 3 2 6 390 29 333 253 253 239 52 194 196 197 201 196 198 202 197 202 197 207 196 198 207 197 197 202 207 207 200 197 197 206 200 207 25 52 52 298 298 224 229 247 190 296 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX Van and shelter installations eee eene Volumes yC u Size and contet s ext EH te died W Warning data PMID Deom E Et i e PMS aga ma naga bEsnppA uL s Gee p o Ret Mares Das at osx tuya su Pape numbering a braun Abbreviated format hazardous materials DEITONAS sro ded tuta detta a suu uem voco HR TR Hazardous materials with icons format for Hazardous materials IC OBS n ns awa m Aa E t u am s Warranty information ien Weapon system Weighing and loading work package eese Weighing information crece teen t i p
558. pt for pocket size TM the outside back cover has the TM number 36 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 16 1 Headers Headers shall consist of the TM number centered at the top of each page and the WP sequence number refer to 4 7 9 3 placed at the extreme top right of each page refer to FIGURE 1 If the manual is jointly used by two or more Services only the acquiring activity s TM number shall be placed on each page TM numbers for pocket TMs are required on front and back covers only For pocket manuals only the WP sequence number may be placed only on the first page of the work package providing it is included as part of the page number on all pages of the work package 4 7 16 2 Footers Footers shall include the security classification markings refer to 4 7 22 if any the page numbers refer to FIGURE 1 and other information as specified by the acquiring activity 1 change designator 4 7 16 2 1 Page numbering Except for foldout pages all TM page numbers shall be centered at the bottom of the page Even numbers shall be assigned to left hand pages and odd numbers to right hand pages For horizontal TMs the upper pages shall have even numbers and the lower pages shall have odd numbers Page numbers shall be in boldface type Page numbering for RPSTLs shall also be in accordance with this paragraph and 4 7 16 2 1 1 through 4 7 16 2 1 3 4 7 16 2 1 1 Front matter Page numbering for front matter shall be as follows a Front c
559. que limits WP E 5 3 10 TYPES OL Nc 5 2 Van and shelteransuallatlOlg s uoces E 5 3 2 3 4 4 Weighing and loading work package E 5 3 12 4 Mire diagrams WP us addet e ER VS 5 3 11 Work packages E 5 3 F535 oe en Vat a vay aa wa B 5 5 3 Maintenance allocation chart 5 5 Maintenance forms records and reports B 5 2 4 Maintenance instructions preparation of 5 1 Maintenance level applicability B 4 2 Maintenance level applicability Maintenance level applicability D 4 3 Maintenance level applicability E 4 3 Maintenance level applicability G 4 2 Maintenance levels a nuan 4 7 9 1a Maintenance i a tm Sit 4 7 10 IVA ARIE ANIC CVA apod esed u E 5 3 6 3 Mamtena getasKSi a uns tado amet 5 3 5 3 Additon
560. r definitions shall be included in the appropriate ammunition TM s G 5 3 4 4 MAC format The MAC standard information shall be prepared in the format shown in FIGURE G 5 standard mac FIGURE G 6 aviation lt avmac gt or FIGURE G 7 two level maintenance lt mac gt as applicable a For an explanation of data to be listed in columns of the MAC refer to the introduction information presented in G 5 3 1 G 5 3 2 or G 5 3 3 as applicable The group number lt groupno gt shall be entered in column 1 the nomenclature of the spare component assembly lt compassem gt shall be entered in column 2 and the maintenance function lt maintfunc gt shall be listed in column 3 of the MAC Column 4 of the standard MAC shall be divided into four main headings one for each level of maintenance lt maintclass gt 1 unit lt unit gt direct support lt direct gt general support lt gensup gt and depot lt depot gt Also for two level maintenance add the heading Field above Unit and DS and add the heading Sustainment above GS and Depot Column 4 of the three level aviation MAC lt avmaintclass gt shall be divided into three main headings 1 AVUM or unit lt avum gt AVIM or intermediate lt avim gt and depot lt depot gt A work time figure must appear in the subcolumn for the maintenance level authorized to perform the maintenance listed in column 3 Reference numbers for all required tools and test equipment
561. r en tav dns C 5 2 8 4 Illustration identification numbers 4 7 27 4 6 Of manufactured Iems 54 5 aig E5395 Placement 4 7 15 IndentiOns oie 5 3 6 3 2 6 36 45 302 45 45 44 42 46 239 167 229 247 38 28 28 28 28 37 239 58 59 37 44 27 28 27 28 28 28 24 302 302 28 251 192 46 252 36 296 MIL STD 4005 1 2 INDEX PARA NUMBER Index ee 5 2 2 2 Index uu eet us aki 4 7 27 3 4 1 4 7 23 3 8 Index of manufactured items 5 3 9 4 Initial adjustments before C 5 2 4 7 Initial setup information holed 4 7 9 2 4 7 9 2 Equipment conditions tee 4 7 9 21 Estimated time to complete the task 4 7 9 21 4 7 9 2 Personnel omens 4 7 9 24 References ius dotar ur delen d cate 4 7 9 2 Special environment 4 7 9 25 ae eee eine eat 4 7 9 2a Tools and special tools u a 4 7 9 2b In process inspections
562. r fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent A reply will be furnished to you 3 Multi Service The following statements shall be included only for multi service technical publication and use only applicable services e g if the Navy does not use the publication do not include a statement for that Service REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Reports as applicable by the requiring Service should be submitted as follows a A Army Mail your letter or DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent b MC Marine Corps By NAVMC form 10772 directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and commercial number of proponent Our e mail address is insert address of proponent c N Navy By letter directly to name and address of proponent You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is insert DSN and
563. r is now in STANDBY Visual or audible observations which occur as a result of an operator action such as boom lowering sweep rotation blower motor running etc 189 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C C 5 2 4 8 2 Decals and instruction plates lt instructplt gt Decals and operating instruction plates located on the equipment which are essential for operation shall be clearly illustrated so that all information is legible Related warning and caution decals and plates shall be included An illustration s shall be prepared to show the location of all applicable decals and plates C 5 2 4 9 Operating auxiliary equipment lt operaux gt If applicable procedures shall be prepared for putting the auxiliary equipment into operation operating it and putting it in standby or shutdown status If these procedures are published in another TM covering the auxiliary equipment reference shall be made to that TM in accordance with 4 7 23 1 C 5 2 4 10 Preparation for movement lt prepmove gt Preparation for movement procedures shall be prepared if the equipment is designed for movement and it can be readied for movement by the operator Procedures shall be prepared for actions such as disassembly folding and telescoping Illustrations shall be prepared as required to support the text This information shall not duplicate the assembly and preparation for use requirements contained in C 5 2 4 6 C 5 2 5 Operation under unusual conditions wo
564. r paged based TMs the checklist data shall be contained in a table 1 2 3 4 5 6 Phase number lt phaseno gt The inspection phase number shall be entered by the person planning phased inspection Area name and number lt inspect area gt The following types of inspections shall be entered as applicable a General inspection lt geninspec gt items specified by the acquiring activity b Aircraft area inspection lt areainspec gt items approved by the acquiring activity List shall be a logical sequence requiring a minimum of time and motion on the part of the individual performing the inspection c Aircraft Power On Checks lt pwron inspec gt as approved by the acquiring activity d Aircraft final inspection lt finalinspec gt requirements as specified by the acquiring activity Aircraft serial number lt serialno gt The aircraft serial number shall be entered by the person performing the inspection Date lt date gt The date the phased maintenance check was performed shall be entered by the person performing the inspection Total hours this area lt totalhrs gt The total hours it took to complete the specific type of inspection shall be entered by the person performing the inspection Inspect phase number lt inspecphase gt Enter the phase number or numbers at which the inspection requirement is to be accomplished If the inspection shall be done at each phase the word ALL shall
565. raft TMs 1 If penetrant is required identification of the particular TM 1 1500 335 23 process that is applicable 2 If magnetic particle inspection is required the specific TM 1 1500 335 23 method the type of magnetization and amount of current or ampere turns The reject criteria shall be specified in all cases This shall be done by means of a blanket statement individual criteria for a part or a combination of both 240 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E d Instructions for use of visible dye penetrants shall not be included as part of NDTI instructions unless specified otherwise by the proponent activity When required refer to TM 1 1500 335 23 for preparation of those instructions e When several NDTI methods are permitted the relative order of preference shall be specified f Instructions shall be prepared for removing primer and or paint for TMs that require the removal process as part of NDTI procedures If a part requires a special process this procedure must be contained within the NDTI procedure for that part g Cleaning requirements prior to during and after NDTI shall be specified If a part has built in bearing then a procedure shall be prepared to ensure protection of the bearing for the NDTI procedure E 5 3 5 3 11 Repair or replacement lt repair rple gt Instructions shall be prepared for repair or replacement to restore an item to a completely serviceable or fully mission capable status E 5 3 5 3
566. rations are furnished to help you find and identify the items Basic Issue Items These essential items are required to place the enter name of end item in operation operate it and to do emergency repairs Although shipped separately packaged BII must be with the enter name of end item during operation and when it is transferred between property accounts Listing these items is your authority to request requisition them for replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE MTOE Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items Explanation of Columns in the COEI List and BII List Select method A text Column 1 Illus Number Gives you the number of the item illustrated Column 2 National Stock Number NSN Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes 334 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G Column 3 Description Part Number CAGEC Identifies the Federal item name in all capital letters followed by a minimum description when needed The stowage location of COEI and is also included in this column The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 4 Usable On Code When applicable gives you a code if the item you need is not the same for different models of equipment Add the following only as applicable Replace Xs with appropriate codes and model numbers These codes
567. rd KITS or SETS as applicable Refer to F 5 3 6 3 2 5 h 3 F 5 3 12 Illustrations Additional RPSTL specific illustration requirements are described in 5 3 12 1 through 5 3 12 4 5 3 12 1 Arrangement of illustrations All illustrations prepared for spares repair parts special tools special TMDE and other special support equipment shall be arranged in figure number sequence They shall precede their companion parts list on the left hand page preceding the parts list or at the top of the same page of the parts list Illustrations shall not be duplicated to provide facing page illustrations for the second and subsequent pages of the RPSTL Illustrations shall not be duplicated to show different models or configurations of an assembly when UOCs can be assigned to indicate differences in configurations F 5 3 12 2 Use of illustrations Foldout and foldout foldup illustrations shall not be used in RPSTLs References to illustrations in other TMs or to illustrations in the narrative portion of a combined maintenance TM with a RPSTL shall not be made Landscape pages shall not be prepared except for RPSTLs supporting nuclear weapons regulated by the Department of Energy Defense Nuclear Agency For clarity multisheet illustrations may be used F 5 3 12 3 Identical parts item numbers Identical parts same part number appearing in a figure illustration having only one FGC shall have the same item number If a figure has two or more
568. refer to D 5 2 2 2 shall be developed Troubleshooting procedures which involve more than one system or more than one major subsystem and which cannot be logically placed in one of the individual system subsystem troubleshooting information work packages shall be covered in this type of work package The content and structure of this work package shall be as described in D 5 5 8 3 and D 5 5 8 4 or D 5 5 8 5 D 6 NOTES The notes in section 6 apply to this appendix 209 MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX D TM X XXX XXXX XX 0079 PRESHOP ANALYSIS FOR P N Serial No NSN MW Os Required Reason s for Overhaul Repair Unpacking Secondary Items Required Reviewed Tags Reviewed Forms Name please print Signature Date 0079 2 FIGURE D 1 Example of a cover sheet for preshop analysis checklist 210 1 Pump Housing 2 Equipment Data Plate and Pump Markings 3 Pressure Regulating Valve TYPE I 4 Check Valve TYPE 5 Check Valve TYPE 6 Pressure Relief Valve TYPE IV 7 Check Valve TYPE V 8 Filter Bypass Valve TYPE VI 9 Programming Valve TYPE VII 10 Filter Bypass Valve TYPE 11 Temperature Sensor TYPE IX 12 Oil Pressure Sensor TYPE X 13 Magnetic Particle Detector Assembly FIGURE D 2 Example of a preshop analysis checklist MIL STD 4005 1 2 Table 1 Inspect for obvious damage signs of leakage overheating
569. reference list B 5 2 12 Nondestructive testing E 5 3 5 3 10 AOE E 4 7 7 obesse a 4 1 1 3 DISplay Of EN 4 1 1 4 NSN column nn P I RRN 5 3 6 3 2 3 NSN index work packa e F 5 3 11 1 Nuclear Hardness ene n e iH B 4 10 Nuclear HardilesS acute oti t Mot bud fioc side B 5 2 17 Nuclear C 4 10 Nuclear hardness a d des d Eee eU D 4 12 INU leat ia o ota itus opas E 4 12 Nuclear hardnesssmarkingss o depen 4 7 19 Numbering Blank PAGES MAN M ME 4 7 16 2 1 3 Change for list of effective pages work 5 2 1 5 4 Chapters 5 4 7 8 2 al vsti D EUR se 4 7 27 4 1 Foldo tfigureS _ 4 7 27 4 3 boldout pag s 4 7 16 2 1 4 Front Matter gerettet 4 7 16 2 1 1 4 7 27 4 6 J int Service LN S ous oto d ose iig 5 2 1 1 List of effective pages work packages 5 2 1 5 6 M ltisheet He
570. rements DMWRs National Maintenance Work Requirement NMWRs Preventive Maintenance Services PMS Manuals Preventive Maintenance Inspections PMI Manuals g Aircraft Troubleshooting Manuals 5 2 1 5 2 Exempted publications The following types of publications shall not have a list of effective pages work packages a Pocketbook TMs b TMs less than 8 pages 5 2 1 5 3 Types of pages to be included The following types of pages shall be included in a list of effective pages work packages 32 MIL STD 4005 1 2 a All front matter pages to include cover warning summary title block table of contents and how to use this manual info b Chapter title pages c All WPs with their page counts d Glossary pages e Index pages f Foldout pages g Back cover 5 2 1 5 4 Exempted pages The following types of pages shall not be included in a list of effective pages work packages a Change transmittal page b List of effective pages c DA Forms 2028 d Authentication page 5 2 1 5 5 Change numbers For new publications the change number is always 0 the list of effective pages work packages shall have all zeros See FIGURE 16 for a sample of a new publication list of effective pages When a change is prepared the appropriate change number shall be placed in the change number column See FIGURE 16 for a sample of a change publication list of effective pages When a publication is revised the
571. res cie udis 4 7 27 4 4 Pates ioone a ayu uma 4 7 16 2 1 Paragraphs e 4 7 11 1 Reat Matter 4 7 16 2 1 2 RPSTUTIBUIBS a hae OE 4 7 27 4 2 Tables tas npa anu m ates 4 7 13 2 Work Package Identification 4 7 9 5 Work package pages eee rete t Inte 4 7 9 4 Work package sequential New tora CAINS Cale sh Sette cea dei u la ci 4 7 9 3 1 Volumized TMS cet ce eed e Renee 4 7 9 3 2 Work package sequential 4 7 9 3 379 PAGE 127 127 42 42 42 42 42 168 240 26 27 27 295 301 164 169 185 196 219 38 37 53 28 45 45 37 37 46 50 53 45 37 33 37 45 34 32 32 31 31 31 MIL STD 4005 1 2 42 191 189 188 190 187 205 208 206 205 204 186 186 186 229 39 245 249 167 225 229 247 52 37 37 37 37 37 25 25 241 258 33 33 33 239 296 301 INDEX PARA NUMBER PAGE O Official approved nomenclature 4 7 25 2 On vehicle loading plan WP a C 5 2 8 Operating procedure considerations C 5 2 4 8 1 Operating procedures sei RII SER e Sdn RH ASA
572. res for the initial setting of controls shall also be provided D 5 5 8 3 6 Operational checkout procedures lt opcheckproc gt The selection of an operational checkout type shall be based on the type of system equipment or assembly subassembly being addressed the target audience and the maintenance level of the operator technician Based on the complexity of the operational checkout to be performed operational checkout procedures can be structured differently and therefore contain different content elements The following methods shall be used to prepare operational checkout procedures Once selected the operational checkout method shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements outlined below 205 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D a Operational checkout test procedure lt opcheck gt Operational checkout procedures lt testproc gt shall consist of a series of numbered steps and substeps lt step1 gt which lead to an indication or condition lt indication gt Based on the indications or conditions a corrective action lt action gt is provided refer to FIGURE D 4 This corrective action can either be stated as a specific remedy or can be a reference lt xref gt lt link gt to a detailed troubleshooting procedure work package This process is continued until the complete operational checkout procedure is completed b Test set message word index lt messageindx gt The message word index shall consist of a series of test set
573. reshop analysis text shall be presented in procedural format Test and analysis procedures shall be presented in a logical sequence not to cause any unnecessary disassembly and in the order in which they should be done Each procedure shall be identified by a step number Procedures shall be arranged in groups by major components assemblies and subassemblies Each group shall be headed with an applicable title Checklist lt chklist gt The checklist shall include the following data 1 Cover sheet frame lt coverpage gt The cover sheet frame refer to FIGURE D 1 shall contain an area to record the following item information part number lt partno gt serial number lt serialno gt NSN lt nsn gt modifications required modreq reason for overhaul or repair reason unpacking of secondary items required lt secitem gt review of tags lt revtag gt or forms lt revform gt with the item name name and signature sig of person doing the analysis and date date 2 Introduction intro When necessary the table of tests and inspections shall be preceded by a brief explanation of its use 3 Table of tests and inspections lt pshopckk tab gt This table shall have an entry for each test and inspection procedure Each entry shall have as a minimum the following information inspection point the item or area to be inspected condition action remarks and identification of the personnel performing the inspectio
574. revised information a Changes continued to the same general area shall be indicated only once on the illustration A vertical bar next to changed callouts on illustrations may be used in lieu of a pointing hand A vertical bar shall be placed next to graphic if the miniature pointing hand is not used As specified by the acquiring activity screens shading screened shaded boxes or miniature pointing hands should be used to highlight updated areas of diagrams and schematics If a callout is deleted from an illustration the word DELETED may be placed after the appropriate number in the legend if applicable If a callout is deleted from an illustration without a legend such as those used to supplement a RPSTL the word DELETED may be placed on the illustration at the end of the leader line When an illustration is changed index numbers added between existing numbers may be the same as the preceding index number with added alpha characters e g 22A 22B This system may also be used in basic manuals when errors are discovered so late in preparation that renumbering of all following index numbers would delay submittal Index numbers with added alpha characters shall be eliminated for a complete revision When an illustration contains embedded references this practice is highly discouraged to other illustrations or tables the referenced table and illustration numbers shall not be changed When an illustration
575. rformed E 5 3 4 2 3 1 PMCS data preparation lt gt PMCS data shall consist of the entries described below These checks and services data entries shall be in the form of standard information refer to FIGURE 2 a Item number lt itemno gt Item numbers ITEM NO shall be assigned to the PMCS procedures The PMCS procedures shall be arranged in a logical sequence requiring minimum time and motion on the part of the person s performing them and shall be so arranged that there will be minimum interference between persons performing the checks simultaneously on the same end item b Intervals interval The designated interval INTER AL i e before during 29 66 after weekly etc when each check is to be performed shall be included Procedures done first or most frequently i e before checks and services shall appear prior to during and after checks and services When more advantageous to the user intervals shall be subgrouped by crewmember s The core PMCS intervals which be used are as follows Before During After Daily Weekly Monthly Quarterly Semiannually Annually Periodic Intermediate Aviation only Manhour day Aviation only Phased Aviation only Other c Man hours lt manhours gt When specified by the acquiring activity man hours MAN HOUR required to complete all prescribed lubrication services shall be included Man h
576. rk package lt opunuwp gt Instructions shall be prepared for operation under unusual conditions Preventive or protective measures to be taken beyond the operator s capabilities shall be identified Instructions to ensure proper grounding of equipment shall be prepared as applicable C 5 2 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 C 5 2 5 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 C 5 2 5 3 Operations under unusual tasks lt opunutsk gt The operational tasks described in C 5 2 5 1 through C 5 2 5 3 6 shall be included as applicable C 5 2 5 3 1 Security measures for electronic data lt secref gt Instructions for handling loading purging overwriting or unloading classified electronic data under unusual conditions These instructions shall be developed when the systems are classified or have non volatile on board memory that requires to be cleared prior to transportation or other action that allows the data to be accessed by unauthorized personnel Instructions shall meet the requirements of current regulations as they pertain to automation security C 5 2 5 3 2 Unusual environment weather lt unusualenv gt Procedures shall be prepared for operation under conditions of extreme moist heat extreme dry heat extreme cold salt air sea spray du
577. rkup Language XML tagged using the Document Type Definition DTD for RPSTL and the XML Stylesheet Language XSL or style sheets in accordance with MIL STD 2361 Refer to 4 6 for information on obtaining or accessing this DTD XML tags used in the DTD are noted throughout the text of this standard in bracketed bold characters 1 lt plwp gt as a convenience for the TM author and to ensure that the tags are used correctly when developing a document instance F 4 3 Use of the DTD XSLs The DTD referenced in this standard interpret the technical content and structure for the functional requirements contained in this standard and are mandatory for use The XSLs referenced herein interpret the style and format As specified by the contracting activity XSLs or style sheets may be used to produce final reproducible paper copy for all TMs prepared in accordance with this standard For additional information on the DTD and specific XSLs refer to MIL STD 2361 284 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F F 4 4 Content structure and format The examples provided herein are an accurate representation of the content structure and format requirements contained in this appendix and shall be followed to permit the effective use of the DTD for RPSTL F 4 5 Style and format This standard provides style and format requirements for the technical content requirements described in this appendix These requirements are considered mandatory and are intended for
578. roduction G 5 3 2 ENES aaa SS E G 5 3 4 3 Igor aias G 5 3 4 4 Remarks 26 G 5 3 6 Standard mirodue On dae QS G 5 3 1 Tools and test equipment G 5 3 5 Two level MAC introduction 5 3 3 Work m G 5 3 4 Maintenance Additional maintenance task E 5 3 5 3 30 Aircraft inventory guide RENNES Ra PEOR eque 5 3 12 2 Ammunition activation a E 5 3 2 3 9 4 ua aS ag E 5 2 7 Ammunition Maintenance WP E 5 3 14 1 Ammunition marking category 5 2 10 Ammunition marking info 2 0 000 5 3 14 2 Ammunition markings 5 3 2 3 9 1 PASSE MID LY of 5 3 2 3 4 1 Auxiliary equipment category 240 00 0 entente E 5 2 6 Auxiliary equipment 5 3 13 ANTSUOIL 5
579. ron Printing Area 8 x 11 45 11 36 x 10 11x 82 11x45 10 x 36 4 7 6 Final reproducible copy FRC FRC shall be a direct output of the contractor s digital TM files The master copy of any TM is a set of digital files not the hard copy results There are no particular layout requirements for FRC distinct from those for non final drafts or proofs The only special criterion for FRC is reproducibility Its resolution and contrast must be sufficient for creation of offset plates or raster page images without loss of detail that would be noticeable to users 4 7 7 Warnings cautions and notes 4 7 7 1 Warning warning A warning identifies a clear danger to the person doing that procedure 4 7 7 2 Caution caution A caution identifies risk of damage to the equipment 26 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 7 3 Notes lt note gt A note is used to highlight essential procedures conditions or statements or convey important instructional data to the user 4 7 7 4 Display of warnings cautions and notes a 1 Warnings cautions and notes shall appear as follows 1 For tasks they shall follow the title of the associated task 2 For procedures they shall follow the title of the associated procedure 3 For steps they shall precede the associated step If multiple warnings cautions and notes apply to the same text warnings shall appear first and cautions shall appear second and notes shall appear last
580. ropriate work time figures are to be shown for each level The work time figure represents the average time required to restore an item assembly subassembly component module end item or system to a serviceable condition under typical field operating conditions This time includes preparation time including any necessary disassembly assembly time troubleshooting fault location time and quality assurance time in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the MAC The symbol designations for the various maintenance levels are as follows Field C Operator or Crew maintenance O Unit maintenance F Direct Support maintenance Sustainment L Specialized Repair Activity H General Support maintenance D Depot maintenance 331 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G NOTE The L maintenance level is not included in column 4 of the MAC Functions to this level of maintenance are identified by work time figure in the column of column 4 and an associated reference code is used in the REMARKS column 6 This code is keyed to the remarks and the SRA complete repair application is explained there Column 5 Tools and Equipment Reference Code Column 5 specifies by code those common tool sets not individual tools common Test Measurement and Diagnostic Equipment and special tools special TMDE and special support equipment required to perform the d
581. roubleshooting eene 197 D 5 2 1 2 Semi automatic or automatic testing and troubleshooting 197 D 5 2 1 3 Testing and troubleshooting using built in test equipment 197 D 5 2 1 4 Sensor derived mated 197 5 2 1 5 interpretation js USE 197 D 5 2 2 Types of testing and troubleshooting information 197 D 5 2 2 1 Fault reporting fault isolation 197 D 5 2 2 2 Integrated system testing and troubleshooting eee 198 D 5 2 2 2 1 Integrated systems having self test or built in test capability 198 D 5 2 2 2 2 Integrated systems requiring the use of system peculiar test sets 198 xii D 5 2 2 2 3 D 5 3 D 5 4 D 5 4 1 D 5 4 2 D 5 4 3 D 5 4 4 D 5 5 D 5 5 1 D 5 5 2 D 5 5 3 D 5 5 3 1 D 5 5 3 2 D 5 5 4 D 5 5 4 1 D 5 5 4 2 D 5 5 4 3 D 5 5 4 4 D 5 5 4 5 D 5 5 5 D 5 5 5 1 D 5 5 5 2 D 5 5 5 3 D 5 5 5 4 D 5 5 5 5 D 5 5 6 D 5 5 6 1 D 5 5 6 2 D 5 5 6 3 D 5 5 6 4 D 5 5 6 5 D 5 5 7 D 5 5 7 1 D 5 5 7 2 D 5 5 7 3 D 5 5 7 4 D 5 5 8 D 5 5 8 1 MIL STD 40051 2 CONTENTS PAGE Integrated systems requiring the use of common test equipment 198 Troubleshooting procedures content
582. rt and General Support Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 20 Unit Maintenance Manual 95 TABLE TABLE A VIII TABLE TABLE TABLE A VI TABLE A IX TABLE A IX TABLE A IX TABLE A X TABLE TABLE A XII TABLE A XII TABLE A XII TABLE A XII TABLE A XII TABLE A XII TABLE A XII TABLE MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE Publications Type and Title with Associated Context Matrix Table PUBLICATION APPLICABLE TYPE TITLE TABLE 20 amp P Unit Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts and TABLE A XIII Special Tools List 23 Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual TABLE A XIV 23 amp Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual including TABLE A XIV Repair Parts and Special Tools List 24 Unit Direct Support and General Support Maintenance TABLE A XIV Manual 24 amp P Unit Direct Support and General Support Maintenance TABLE A XIV Manual including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 30 Direct Support Maintenance Manual TABLE 30 amp P Direct Support Maintenance Manual including Repair Parts TABLE A XIII and Special Tools List 34 Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual TABLE A XIV 34 amp P Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual TABLE A XIV including Repair Parts and Special Tools List 40 General Support Maintenance Manual TABLE 40 amp P General Support Maintena
583. rviceability Instructions shall also contain procedures for disposition of defective ammunition Procedures shall be prepared for use of cleaning materials and paint authorized for use in the specified maintenance operations Tools shall be described only when the tool or procedure is peculiar or abnormal c When peculiar to the equipment applicable Corrosion Prevention and Control CPC procedures shall be included or the work package shall reference applicable CPC publications d National Stock Numbers NSNs shall not be used in procedural steps illustrations or legends of maintenance work packages e Part numbers shall not be used in procedural steps illustrations or legends except when essential for identification f Aviation maintenance TMs shall reference procedures in TM 1 1500 204 23 as applicable g The maintenance instructions shall be prepared to include required environmental control data and information Instructions shall be prepared for information on any special maintenance required under extreme temperature altitude and humidity conditions within the limits established by the design specification for the equipment h DMWRs NMWRSs only A Reliability Availability and Maintainability RAM table shall be prepared listing the pertinent measurable RAM ranges for the major overhauled components refer to FIGURE E 4 The RAM requirements shall be prescribed by maintenance engineering of the acquiring activity a
584. rviceability to a failed item Source Code The source code tells you how you get an item needed for maintenance repair or overhaul of an end item equipment Explanations of source codes follow 288 Source Code PA PB PC PD PE PF PG PH PR PZ KD KF KB at unit AVUM level MF Made at DS AVIM level MH Made at GS level ML Made at SRA MD Made at depot MG Navy only AO Assembled by unit AVUM level AF Assembled by DS AVIM level AH Assembled by GS level AL Assembled by SRA AD Assembled by depot AG Navy only XA XB XC MIL STD 40051 2 APPENDIX F Application Explanation NOTE Items coded PC are subject to deterioration Stock items use the applicable NSN to requisition request items with these source codes They are authorized to the level indicated by the code entered in the 3rd position of the SMR code Items with these codes are not to be requested requisitioned individually They are part of a kit which is authorized to the maintenance level indicated in the 3rd position of the SMR code The complete kit must be requisitioned and applied Items with these codes are not to be requisitioned requested individually They must be made from bulk material which is identified by the part number in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column and listed in the bulk material group work package of the RPSTL If the item is authorized to you by the 3rd position code of the SMR code but th
585. s some requirements that may not be applicable to the preparation of all technical manuals Selective application and tailoring of requirements contained in this standard are the responsibility of the acquiring activity and shall be accomplished using Appendix A Technical Manual Content Selection Matrixes The applicability of some requirements is also designated by one of the following statements unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity as or when specified by the acquiring activity E 5 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS E 5 1 Preparation of maintenance instructions Maintenance instructions shall be prepared and subdivided into individual work packages that provide maintenance information to enable a technician to receive process inspect clean service test and repair the weapon system equipment and associated weapons replacement assemblies shop replacement assemblies WRAs SRAs to an acceptable performance standard Maintenance tasks shall be developed in accordance with the LMI Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC or Maintenance Plan and the Source Maintenance and Recoverability SMR codes developed for the weapon system equipment and components Maintenance work packages shall be arranged to coincide with the Functional Group Code FGC sequence followed in the MAC or Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL E 5 2 Types of maintenance Depending on the type and complexity of the weapon system equipment the TM DMWR or NMWR s
586. should be submitted as follows a Army Address your correspondence to name and address of proponent b MC Marine Corps Address your correspondence to name and address of proponent c N Navy Address your correspondence to name and address of proponent d F Air Force Address your correspondence to name and address of proponent When dealing with classified information make sure that your correspondence is properly marked and is handled in accordance with current security regulations 5 2 1 7 Preventive maintenance services and phased maintenance inspection manuals title block page with warning data Aviation only For preventive maintenance services and phased maintenance inspection only the warning data page shall include the reporting errors and recommending improvement statement and the following additional verbatim statement refer to FIGURE 20 WARNING Certain inspections are Mandatory Safety of Flight requirements and the inspection intervals cannot be exceeded In the event these inspections cannot be accomplished at the specified interval the aircraft condition status symbol will be changed to a red X Mandatory Safety of Flight inspection items are printed in bold face type NOTE Inspection items contained in this manual are considered the minimum requirements for performing phased maintenance and must be performed The cumulative effects of inspection deferrals are unknown and could result in
587. showing all test points input and output signals logic charts schematics signal flow diagrams tables and other illustrations as required for comprehensible understanding of the procedures Include any information that will aid the operator technician such as waveforms resistance data fluid pressures voltage levels references to test diagrams functional diagrams text etc and alignment procedures checkout procedures or other scheduled maintenance procedures Connector numbers pin designations etc shall be identified Special attention shall be given to interface wiring fault isolation procedures Wiring fault isolation procedures shall include the following types of data as applicable 1 Specific wire reading access points and resistances for wiring components where practical 2 Wire to wire and wire to ground criteria for circuit integrity 3 Special wire definition where required including interconnecting criteria for proper sealing or terminal application and special notations where wire harnesses should be completely replaced and not repaired 4 Itis also essential when developing fault isolation procedures to provide or refer to ground stud tables which include type location and wires connected charts for both connectors and terminal boards and a wire number log to identify any wire to its prime wiring diagram D 5 4 Types of testing and troubleshooting Depending on the type and complexity of the
588. skills required by processing personnel 2 caustic corrosive and or toxic material used during processing shall be identified and applicable warnings and cautions given 3 Instructions on safe disposal of waste products generated during processing actions 4 Man hour requirements and total man hours required for processing the equipment E 5 3 2 3 4 Installation instructions lt install gt Instructions shall be prepared to install the equipment properly including use of tools to make the necessary interconnections and to lubricate calibrate and adjust the equipment a Cable diagrams shall be included or referenced as necessary When cable assemblies are not supplied but are required for bench test setup instructions shall be prepared for fabricating interconnecting cable assemblies from spares and bulk supplies The part number drawing number and manufacturer or designer for each part of the cable assembly shall be shown and wires connectors pin connections and letters or other designators shall be identified 1 Instructions shall be prepared for any mating connectors that call for a special procedure either to make the proper connection or to prevent damage to the connector Cautions shall be included where necessary 225 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 2 A wiring diagram shall be prepared which fully identifies each wire to be connected by color code or wire number if applicable This diagram shall show th
589. spinstitm gt Removal lt remove gt Disassembly lt dissassem gt Cleaning lt clean gt Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria lt acptrejinsp gt Nondestructive Testing Inspection NDTI lt ndti gt Repair or replacement repair rplc Alignment align Painting paint Lubrication lube Assembly assem Test and inspection DS GS and AVIM only lt test inspect gt Installation install Adjustment adjust Calibration calibration Radio interference suppression ris Placing in service pis Testing lt test pass gt Preservation packaging and marking DMWR NMWR only ppm Overhaul and retirement schedule aircraft only lt orsch gt Preparation for storage or shipment pss Ammunition markings lt ammo markings gt Classification of ammunition defects lt ammo defect gt Handling ammunition lt ammo handling gt 236 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E Procedures for ammunition activation lt arm gt Additional maintenance task lt other maintsk gt Follow on maintenance lt followon maintsk gt E 5 3 5 3 1 Maintenance task requirements Additional mandatory or unique technical information or additional explanations may be required to be included in the maintenance tasks listed in E 5 3 5 3 above This information is described in E 5 3 5 3 2 through E 5 3 5 3 31 The following general requirements apply to most of the maintenance tasks in E 5 3 5 3 above a Peculiar instruct
590. st line of a page or column Widows and orphans are not allowed 4 7 15 Placement of illustrations Illustrations shall be placed as close to their reference in text as possible Illustrations may float on a page to reduce the white space on a page Whenever possible place illustrations on the same or facing page of associated text Foldout illustrations shall not be included in work packages but shall follow the last work package the glossary or the alphabetical index whichever forms the last portion of the manual or volume 4 7 15 1 Rotating illustrations When necessary illustrations may be placed sideways on a page rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise 4 7 15 2 Placement of text and related illustrations for pocket TMs Place text for pocket size manuals on the right hand pages with supporting illustration on the facing left hand pages 4 7 15 3 Repeating illustrations Illustrations are not repeated unless necessary to support multi page descriptions of tasks or to support a different requirement in another part of the TM 4 7 16 Margin data Margin data usually headers and footers shall be placed outside the area of the page used for either text full page tabular data or full page illustrations but within the printing area dimensions of the page refer to 4 7 16 1 and 4 7 16 2 Complete headers and footers shall be prepared for all pages except TM covers and title block pages and transmittal and rear matter pages exce
591. st storms sand storms high altitudes snow mud and other similar conditions Ranges of environmental weather operating conditions considered for the system addressed shall be defined C 5 2 5 3 3 Fording and swimming lt fording gt If applicable procedures for fording and swimming the equipment shall be provided C 5 2 5 3 4 Interim Nuclear Biological and Chemical NBC decontamination procedures lt decon gt As applicable and specified by the acquiring activity interim general NBC decontamination procedures to be performed until NBC decontamination facilities are available shall be prepared Other decontamination TMs shall be referenced only when necessary 190 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX C 5 2 5 3 5 Jamming and Electronic Countermeasures ECM procedures lt ecm gt As applicable procedures shall be prepared for operation of the equipment in an ECM environment through transmitted and reflected deception signals and through transmitted and reflected jamming C 5 2 5 3 6 Degraded operation procedures lt degraded gt When operation of the equipment in a degraded condition is required procedures shall be prepared for temporarily adapting the equipment and the operating procedures to meet the reduction of power partial failure failure of a portion of the equipment or similar conditions C 5 2 6 Emergency work package lt emergencywp gt As applicable emergency procedures using but not limited to the operating and shutd
592. stances ODS for new acquisitions has been curtailed by Executive Order 12856 3 August 1993 other relevant public laws and DOD and Army policy For systems procured and fielded prior to the issuance of the above EO that use any ODS a listing of those substances required to operate and maintain the system shall be included in the manual This requirement applies to any system procured or fielded after the issuance of the above EO that requires the use of an ODS and the use of the ODS has been properly documented and waived The procuring activity will provide a list of ODS on request 167 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B B 5 2 9 Destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use lt destructmat gt Reference shall be made to the appropriate TM s covering the destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use as provided by the proponent activity B 5 2 10 Preparation for storage or shipment lt pssref gt Reference shall be made to the preparation for storage or shipment procedures including packaging and administrative storage found in the applicable maintenance instructions work package B 5 2 11 Warranty information lt wrntyref gt When the TM covers equipment that is under warranty and a Warranty Technical Bulletin WTB is published the applicable WTB shall be referenced When a WTB is not published the following statement shall be included WARRANTY INFORMATION The insert name of equipment is warranted for insert miles or
593. storation of unserviceable equipment to a like new condition in accordance with original manufacturing standards Rebuild is the highest degree of material maintenance applied to Army equipment The rebuild operation includes the act of returning to zero those age measurements e g hours miles considered in classifying Army equipment components Explanation of Columns in the MAC Column 1 Group Number Column 1 lists FGC numbers the purpose of which is to identify maintenance significant components assemblies subassemblies and modules with the Next Higher Assembly Column 2 Component Assembly Column 2 contains the item names of components assemblies subassemblies and modules for which maintenance is authorized Column 3 Maintenance Function Column 3 lists the functions to be performed on the item listed in column 2 For a detailed explanation of these functions refer to Maintenance Functions outlined above Column 4 Maintenance Level Column 4 specifies each level of maintenance authorized to perform each function listed in column 3 by indicating work time required expressed as manhours in whole hours or decimals in the appropriate subcolumn This work time figure represents the active time required to perform that maintenance function at the indicated level of maintenance If the number or complexity of the tasks within the listed maintenance function varies at different maintenance levels app
594. sure checks to hydraulic systems Perform servicing functional adjustments and minor repair replacement to the flight control propulsion power train and fuel systems Accomplish airframe repair that does not require extensive disassembly jigging or alignment The manufacture of airframe parts will be limited to those items which can be fabricated with tools and equipment found in current air mobile tool and shop sets Evacuate unserviceable modules components and end items beyond the repair capability of AVUM to the support AVIM 2 Less than Company Size Aviation Units Aviation elements organic to brigade group battalion headquarters and detachment size units are normally small and have less than 10 aircraft assigned Maintenance tasks performed by these units will be those which can be accomplished by the aircraft crew chief or assigned aircraft repairman and will normally be limited to preventive maintenance inspections servicing spot painting module component fault diagnosis and replacement of selected modules components Repair functions will normally be accomplished by the support AVIM unit Aviation Intermediate Maintenance A VIM 1 Provides mobile responsive one stop maintenance support Maintenance functions which are not conducive to sustaining air mobility will be assigned to depot maintenance 323 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G 2 May perform all maintenance functions authorized to be done at AVUM Re
595. t TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES NOTE The notation indicates that at least one of the these content items shall be included TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX WORK OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT WORK PACKAGES TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES 5 3 8 3 lt opcheckwp gt lt opcheck tswp gt 134 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWKR with DMWR with Overhaul Overhaul Standards MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content Standards with RPSTL Reference Element Name R MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS MAINTENANCE WORK PACKAGES 55 lt maintwp gt NOTE As applicable the following maintenance tasks shall be presented in the general order listed below Assembly and preparation for use aviation only lt prepforuse gt Servicing lt service gt Inspection of installed items Inspection acceptance and rejection criteria E S 25 39 lt ndti gt Nondestructive testing inspection NDTI lt repair rplc gt Painting lt paint gt Test and inspection lt test inspect gt Repair or replacement Alignment Installation 5 3 53 17 lt install gt Esis3i7 Radio interference suppression Placing in service Preservation packaging and marking 1535323 Fm Overhaul and retirement schedule aircraft
596. t SAFETY CRITICAL AIRCRAFT PARTS FSCAP WORK PACKAGE eee ee _ ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING WORK G 5 11 lt genwp gt PACKAGES x O x O 7 137 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for DMWR with DMWR with Overhaul Overhaul Standards MIL STD 40051 2 DMWR NMWR Content Standards with RPSTL Reference Element Name Foldout pages 224 lt foldsect gt Legend R Required P Prohibited Shaded As Required 138 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM Content Troubleshooting Reference Element Name List of effective pages work packages VAE 2 2 lt tim gt TABLE A IX TM Requirements Matrix for m ta fo N j N lt troubleaviationcategory gt TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES NOTE The notation indicates that at least one of the these content items shall be included Equipment description and data 5 5 4 lt descproc gt TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK 3 PACKAGES COMBINED OPERATIONAL CHECKOUT AND 5 58 lt opcheck tswp gt TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES WORK PACKAGES ta Ln ta Cn M in En UA In oo A z 3 V N N lt glossary gt ATA UAB N 1 2 22 3 lt 4 2028 gt Authentication page 5 2 2 4 Back cover 2 2 2 6 lt back gt Legend R Required P Prohibited
597. t concept To meet the objectives of reduced maintenance downtime and decreased fault detection time malfunction symptoms shall be identified to specific points of entry into the testing troubleshooting cycle Every effort shall be employed to avoid repetition of the time consuming end to end test D 5 2 1 2 Semi automatic or automatic testing and troubleshooting Many high performance systems have been designed to accept the use of semi automatic automatic test equipment These systems are designed and programmed for rapid electronic test in the interest of reducing maintenance downtime to fault isolate and repair D 5 2 1 3 Testing and troubleshooting using built in test equipment Built in test BIT capabilities are designed to operate in various formats One of these formats is built in test using diagnostic software another is the incorporation of electronically controlled sensors within the systems to be tested Testing procedures shall identify the software required for test performance D 5 2 1 4 Sensor derived failures Sensors installed at critical points shall be used to detect discrepancies in system operation D 5 2 1 5 Failure interpretation Lookup tables for manually tested systems or software coding for semi automatic and automatic systems shall be prepared so the maintenance technician may properly interpret these displays and isolate and correct malfunctions D 5 2 2 Types of testing and troubleshooting informati
598. t icon gt gt The equipment damage caution icons can be used in conjunction with the CAUTION header and description of the equipment damage For additional information on the use and placement of cautions and icons refer to the requirements specified in 4 7 7 4 4 7 8 Chapters 4 7 8 1 Chapter title page lt titlepg gt Each chapter shall begin with a chapter title page See FIGURE 4 for an example of a chapter title page A chapter title page shall always be a right hand page A separate chapter title page is not required for pocket size manuals For pocket manuals the chapter number and title may be placed on the top of the first page of the first work package of the chapter 4 7 8 2 Chapter numbering Chapters shall be numbered in sequential order throughout the TM using Arabic numerals Chapters shall not be renumbered in separate volumes 4 7 9 Work packages 4 7 9 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt All work packages shall include the identification information entries in the following sequential order as applicable refer to FIGURE 5 28 MIL STD 4005 1 2 Maintenance levels lt maintlvl gt The maintenance level s shall be included 1 Direct support maintenance WP title lt title gt The title of the individual work package shall be listed i e M144 Shop Van Semitrailer General Information Effectivity notice lt appconfig gt If applicable an effectivity notice shall be included
599. t of effective pages for a manual with changes 82 MIL STD 4005 1 2 MANUAL NUMBER LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES WORK PACKAGES NOTE This manual supersedes TM X XXX XXX dated 15 March 1998 Zero in the Change No column indicates an original page or work package Date of issue for revision is Original 16 September 1998 TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 20 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF WORK PACKAGES IS 35 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING Page WP No Change No Page WP No Change No Title Warning i iii iv blank Chp 1 title page WP 0001 4 pgs WP 0002 10 pgs WP 0003 2 pgs WP 0004 2 pgs Chp2 title page WP 0005 2 pgs WP 0006 8 pgs WP 0007 2 pgs Chp3 title page WP 0008 2 pgs Chp4 title page WP 0009 12 pgs Chp 5 title page WP 0010 2 pgs WP 0011 2 pgs Chp 6 title page WP 0012 20 pgs WP 0013 30 pgs WP 0014 30 pgs WP 0015 2 pgs WP 0016 4 pgs WP 0017 2 pgs WP 0018 8 pgs WP 0019 12 pgs WP 0020 2 pgs WP 0021 2 pgs Chp 7 title page WP 0022 2 pgs WP 0023 4 pgs WP 0024 6 pgs WP 0025 4 pgs WP 0026 4 pgs WP 0027 4 pgs WP 0028 4 pgs WP 0029 4 pgs gt WP 0030 4 pgs 0 WP 0031 6 pgs WP 0032 6 pgs WP 0033 2 pgs WP 0034 2 pgs WP 0035 2 pgs INDEX 1 INDEX 14 2 gt S C C lt Z lt lt amp lt Ce C C C C C C C CC C C C lt FIGURE 17 Example of
600. t right hand page following the figure s Refer to FIGURE F 1 for possible layout scenarios Refer to F 5 3 12 1 for the figure layout requirements F 5 3 5 Introduction work package lt introwp gt The introduction work package shall be prepared to the requirements contained in F 5 3 5 1 through F 5 3 5 4 Refer to FIGURE F 2 F 5 3 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 F 5 3 5 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package F 5 3 5 3 Introduction intro The verbatim text below within the quotation marks shall be included The italicized text shall be replaced with the required system specific information or select the corresponding phrase for the specific system The publication list shall identify the publication number and title in numerical sequence If the publication is non government the source shall be given and shall be listed alphabetically by title INTRODUCTION SCOPE This RPSTL lists and authorizes spares and repair parts special tools special test measurement and diagnostic equipment TMDE and other special support equipment required for performance of enter maintenance level maintenance of the enter item name It authorizes the requisitioning issue and disposition of spares repair parts and special tools as indicated by the source maintenan
601. tasks will also be indicated A maintenance function assigned to a maintenance level will automatically be authorized to be performed at any higher maintenance level A maintenance function that cannot be performed at the assigned level of maintenance for any reason may be evacuated to the next higher maintenance level Higher maintenance levels will perform the maintenance functions of lower maintenance levels when required by the commander who has the authority to direct such tasking The assignment of a maintenance function will not be construed as authorization to carry the related repair parts or spares in stock Information to requisition or otherwise secure the necessary repair parts will be as specified in the associated RPSTL Normally there will be no deviation from the assigned level of maintenance In cases of operational necessity at the request of a lower maintenance level and on a one time basis transfer of maintenance functions to the lower level may be accomplished by specific authorization of the maintenance officer of the higher level of maintenance to which the function is assigned The special tools equipment etc required by the lower level of maintenance to perform this function will be furnished by the maintenance level to which the function is assigned This transfer of a maintenance function to a lower maintenance level does not relieve the higher maintenance level of the responsibility for the function The higher leve
602. te nomenclature cross reference list shall be prepared for the TM refer to Appendix B Shortened versions of the approved nomenclature are not considered deviations Approved nomenclature shall be used wherever the use of a common name might be ambiguous 4 7 25 3 Military terms Military terms used shall be in accordance with Joint Pub 1 02 or any approved dictionary or glossary of Army military terms 4 7 25 4 Automatic electronic test and checkout terminology Terms used for automatic electronic test and checkout shall be in accordance with MIL STD 1309 4 7 26 Comprehensibility Technical manuals shall be written for the target audience Reading grade level RGL shall be as specified by the acquiring activity Refer to MIL HDBK 1222 for guidance on calculating the RGL for TMs 4 7 27 Graphics 4 7 27 1 Graphic format Graphics format shall be as specified by the acquiring activity in accordance with AR 25 30 A list of preferred formats is in MIL HDBK 1222 4 7 27 2 Types of graphics As applicable the following types of graphics shall be used in the preparation of TMs Preferred format of these graphics and typical examples are provided in MIL HDBK 1222 a Line drawings Photographs Engineering drawings Diagrams Charts and graphs f Tools and test equipment illustrations 4 7 27 2 1 Line drawings Line drawings including exploded views locator views and detailed views shall be used to support the operation
603. tems as a unit are identified as an integrated system The testing of an integrated system is a checkout of the interdependent systems and shall reflect the assumption that the technician performing the check is qualified and is familiar with its systems and subsystems Development and content of testing and troubleshooting for integrated systems shall be determined based on the systems having self test or built in test capabilities or requiring the use of a system peculiar test set or common test equipment These compound applications require more specifics on the criteria of which components or signals are tested by which method In addition to coverage of the integrated system the associated systems making up the integrated system shall be covered separately D 5 2 2 2 1 Integrated systems having self test or built in test capability Testing and troubleshooting procedures shall include what components or functions are tested and what inputs are required for proper testing power parameters signals motion air hydraulic etc If wiring tests are included they should have defined testing parameters which wires are tested resistance tolerances open definitions wire to wire and wire to ground resistances and any peculiar wire criteria and what fault verification is required for a failure indication D 5 2 2 2 2 Integrated systems requiring the use of system peculiar test sets Testing and troubleshooting procedures shall include identi
604. tenance System concept The MAC immediately following the introduction designates overall authority and responsibility for the performance of maintenance functions on the identified end item or component The application of the maintenance functions to the end item or component shall be consistent with the capacities and capabilities of the designated maintenance levels which are shown on the MAC in column 4 as Unit includes two subcolumns C operator crew and O unit maintenance Direct Support includes an subcolumn General Support includes an H subcolumn Depot includes a D subcolumn The tools and test equipment requirements immediately following the MAC list the tools and test equipment both special tools and common tool sets required for each maintenance function as referenced from the MAC The remarks immediately following the tools and test equipment requirements contain supplemental instructions and explanatory notes for a particular maintenance function Maintenance Functions Maintenance functions are limited to and defined as follows 1 Inspect To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical mechanical and or electrical characteristics with established standards through examination e g by sight sound or feel This includes scheduled inspection and gagings and evaluation of cannon tubes 2 Test To verify serviceability by measuring the mechanical pneumatic hydr
605. tering the following data 1 The number of the maintenance inspection phase being performed 2 Aircraft serial number 3 Date of the inspection 4 Total hours Block provided for local use b Foreach inspection item a column is provided for entering the following data 1 Status of the aircraft as the result of the inspection requirement 2 Aircraft fault and or remarks indicated by the inspection requirement 3 Action taken to correct the fault 4 Initials of person performing the corrective action 2 The checklist is formatted to eliminate the requirements to use DA Form 2404 as temporary records during phased inspections This checklist pertains to all insert applicable aircraft aircraft and may therefore contain inspection requirements applicable to specific equipment not installed on individual aircraft When this situation is encountered those requirements that are not applicable need not be performed 179 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B 3 A Supplemental Checklist Sheet form DA Form 4676 R is to be used for local reproduction Copies of this form will be used to write up faults remarks and corrective actions when additional space is required These supplemental sheets will be used instead of DA Form 2404 in the accomplishment of the phase maintenance inspections 4 Faults and remarks on the DA Form 2408 13 and DA Form 2408 14 may be transcribed to this checklist at the discretion of the unit Maintenance
606. the Army supply system 3 92 National Stock Number NSN 13 digit number assigned to a repair part to be used for requisitioning purposes 3 93 Next Higher Assembly NHA Assembly or subassembly of which subject component s or subassembly are a subpart 3 94 Nomenclature The approved name or alphanumeric identifier assigned to an item equipment or component in agreement with an organized designation system 3 95 Nondestructive Testing Inspection NDTI Testing of a nature which does not impair the usability of the item 3 96 Nuclear Biological and Chemical NBC Reference to decontamination procedures performed on equipment and or personnel exposed to nuclear biological and chemical weapons 3 97 Operator maintenance Consists of inspecting servicing lubricating adjusting replacing and repairing those items authorized by Logistic Management Information LMI and or Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC 3 98 Orphan Last line of a paragraph pushed to a new page stranded alone orphaned at the top of the page without the rest of its paragraph 3 99 Overall Grade Level OGL Computed average reading comprehensibility of specified number of document text samples 3 100 Overhaul That maintenance effort service action prescribed to restore an item to a completely serviceable operational condition as required by maintenance standards in appropriate technical publications Overhaul does not normally return an item to like
607. the entire inspection The Power On items shall be grouped together under the heading Power On and shall follow after completion of the last Power Off requirement for the entire aircraft Power On items shall fall in the proper numerical area and the first item number shall be the next higher number following the last item number of the Power Off requirement b All communications and navigation electrical equipment inspections black boxes etc which are the inspection and repair responsibility of avionics personnel shall be included in a separate grouping following Power On inspection requirements and shall not appear in the normal inspection sequence Note for avionics equipment inspection the following statement shall be included Perform avionics inspections check and test electrical equipment as required in TM 11 insert TM number DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Worksheet shall also be used to record results of inspections by avionics personnel c The requirements contained in E 5 3 15 1 through E 5 3 15 5 apply to all inspection interval work packages as applicable For each major aircraft area the following inspection data entries shall be included 1 Sequence Number Each inspection shall be assigned a sequence number and if applicable an area location number 2 Item and Procedure Enter the area of the aircraft to be inspected and all procedures required to perform each of the required inspections When an i
608. the purpose and location of all safety devices and interlocks in conjunction with the pertinent procedures E 4 11 Electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts If the equipment contains ESD sensitive parts components or circuits cautions and ESD labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure ESD sensitive parts are not damaged or degraded during maintenance and operation Refer to 4 7 20 for requirements on labeling with ESD Actions which could damage ESD sensitive parts but which are not directly related to handling or operation of ESD sensitive parts shall not be annotated with the ESD acronym but shall be preceded by a caution statement E 4 12 Nuclear hardness If the weapon system equipment has nuclear survivability requirements for example over pressure and burst thermal radiation electromagnetic pulse or transient radiation effects on electronics cautions and Hardness Critical Processes HCP labels shall be incorporated into the applicable tasks and procedures to ensure the hardness of the equipment is not degraded during handling or operation Refer to 4 7 19 for requirements on labeling with HCP Actions which could degrade hardness but which are not directly involved in establishing nuclear hardness shall not be annotated with the acronym but shall be preceded by a caution statement 219 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E E 4 13 Selective application and tailoring This standard contain
609. tials entered shall be registered on the Signature Sheet adjacent to that person s signature E 5 3 16 7 Signature sheet All personnel performing inspection and or maintenance tasks shall place their signatures and initials on the signature sheet The purpose of the signature sheet is to provide a correlation between initials entered on the individual checklist sheets and the actual names of the personnel accomplishing these tasks E 6 NOTES The notes in section 6 apply to this appendix 263 INITIAL SETUP Tools and Special Tools MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E UNIT MAINTENANCE SERVICE UPON RECEIPT Measuring Tape WP 0240 Item 3 References WP 0125 Checking Unpacked Equipment Inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment References cont WP 0128 0109 SF 361 Transportation Discrepancy Report If the equipment has been damaged report the damage on SF 361 Transportation Discrepancy Report Check the equipment against the packing slip to see if the shipment is complete Report all discrepancies in accordance with applicable service instructions e g for Army instructions see DA PAM 738 750 Check to see whether the equipment has been modified COMPONENT Table 1 Inspection Criteria for Packaging ACCEPTABLE REPARABLE NONREPARABLE Wooden Boxes and Crates Hardware Operative and tight Nails screws and fasteners Free from damage Splits less than 3 inches long no cl
610. tinued 86 MIL STD 4005 1 2 1 1520 238 HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY WASHINGTON D C 28 FEBRUARY 2002 TECHNICAL MANUAL PHASED MAINTENANCE INSPECTION CHECKLIST ARMY AH 64A HELICOPTER REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS You can help improve this manual If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures please let us know Mail your letter DA Form 2028 Rec ommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms directly to Commander U S Army Aviation and Missile Command ATTN AMSAM MMC MA NP Redstone Arse nal AL 35898 5230 You may also send in your recommended changes via electronic mail or by fax Our fax number is FAX 256 999 9999 or FAX DSN 999 9999 Our e mail address is 2028 redstone army mil A reply will be furnished to you WARNING Certain inspections are mandatory safety of flight requirements and the inspection intervals cannot be exceeded In the event these inspections cannot be accomplished at the specified interval the aircraft condition status symbol will be immediately changed to a red X Mandatory safety of flight inspection items are printed in bold face type NOTE Inspection items contained in this manual are considered the minimum requirements for performing phased maintenance and must be performed The cumulative effects of inspection deferrals are unknown and could result in catastrophic failure or increased maintenance at a later d
611. tion lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 F 5 3 8 2 Initial setup information Initial setup information is not required for this work package F 5 3 8 3 Kits part items list lt pi category gt The kits part items list shall be listed alphanumerically by part number in the PART NUMBER column The requirements defined in 5 3 6 3 shall be used except as specified in F 5 3 8 3 1 through F 5 3 8 3 3 F 5 3 8 3 1 Functional group header lt fnegrp gt The functional group header shall precede the first bulk item in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column The functional group number and title lt fnecode gt shall be REPAIR KITS appearing on the top line s The next line s below shall be the figure number and the figure title lt fnctitle gt F 5 3 8 3 2 Kit part item group lt kititem gt Parts in the kit group in the DESCRIPTION AND USABLE ON CODE UOC column shall be indented two positions and listed alphabetically by item name or in item number sequence under their kit name Kit parts shall be listed by item names name the quantity in parentheses qty the figure number and the item numbers lt callout gt that appear in the basic parts list F 5 3 8 3 3 Kits part item quantity qty The QTY column entry for kits part shall contain a V variable when the exact quantity may vary 5 3 9 Bulk items work package bulk itemswp
612. tion presentation shall be in accordance with the Logistics Management Information LMI maintenance concept the Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC or an approved maintenance plan Theory of operation shall be provided as described in B 5 4 1 through B 5 4 3 This work package shall not contain any operator or maintenance procedures B 5 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 B 5 4 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is not required for this work package B 5 4 3 Theory presentation Theory of operation shall consist of a functional narrative to explain the weapon system equipment and component operation electrical electronic hydraulic pneumatic and mechanical Block diagrams functional flow diagrams schematics and other illustrations shall be included to support the text Basic theory normally found in textbooks shall not be included If the TM covers more than one model of equipment or more than one configuration of weapon system differences shall be explained or separate work packages may be used Additional theory requirements are outlined below a When necessary introductory general information lt intro gt may precede the theory of operation narrative 174 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B b For simple systems or equipment components all theory lt systhry gt may be include
613. tmno gt shall be placed first The TM number s for the other Services shall be in alphabetical sequence following the acquiring activity s name and manual number For example ARMY TM 11 1510 204 34 AIR FORCE TO 21M LGM30G 12 MARINE CORPS TM 12345A 15 1 NAVY NAVAIR AI FI8AA WRM 070 NAVY NAVSEA SE211 FA MMA 010 SPS 10A 5 2 1 1 2 National Overhaul Standards statement NMWR DMWR with NMP Overhaul Standards Only The following shall be added to the title of NMWRs DMWRSs which document national overhaul standards for the National Maintenance Program Containing National Overhaul standards for See FIGURE 13 and FIGURE 14 for examples 5 2 1 1 3 Weapon system name weapon system When required the name of the weapon system to which this publication applies shall be included 5 2 1 1 4 Availability statement DMWR NMWR only avail For DMWRs NMWRSs only the front cover shall contain the following availability statement This publication is not available through the APD distribution center This publication is available through insert the name and address of the proponent activity 5 2 1 1 5 Supersedure notice for revisions only super When a supersedure notice is included an asterisk shall prefix the supersedure notice and the TM number refer to FIGURE 11 5 2 1 1 6 Disclosure notice lt disclos gt Unless specified otherwise by the acquiring activity the following disclosure notice shall be placed on th
614. to one Service in a joint service TM For example Figure 3 Fuel Indicator Army Only e Identify illustrations applicable to more than one Service in a joint service TM For example Figure 3 Fuel Indicator Army and Air Force Only 45 MIL STD 4005 1 2 4 7 27 4 5 2 Figure title placement Figure title placement shall a Center the figure title on the graphic image area below the graphic b Begin the title on the same line with the figure number c When too long to fit on one line align the second line with the first letter of the title 4 7 27 4 6 Illustration identification numbers Each illustration shall be assigned a unique identification number provided by the proponent activity a Contractor s identification number may be used when approved by the proponent activity b When the identification number is to be printed in the TM such number shall be approximately 4 to 6 point type and placed in the lower right hand corner of the illustration within the graphics area sufficiently removed to avoid being confused as part of the illustration 4 7 27 4 7 Portraying signal flow Signal flow especially for electrical and electronic equipment critically affects the understandability of diagrams To assist the TM user in following the diagram where possible major signal or pressure flow shall be from left to right and feedback or return flow shall be from right to left 4 7 27 4 8 Color in illustrations Un
615. to required schematics etc Troubleshooting data shall be test and fault isolation oriented Troubleshooting instructions shall include detailed inspection and troubleshooting information Instructions shall include or reference to functional descriptions of subsystems being diagnosed to aid the operator technician The method used for identifying system equipment test points including the requirements and methods of determining defects through visual inspection shall be explained 194 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D D 4 3 Maintenance level applicability Requirements contained in this standard are applicable to all maintenance levels unless specifically noted in bold and in parentheses i e Direct Support The labeled requirements shall be applicable to all TMs containing that maintenance level An explanation of all applicable Department of Army maintenance levels is provided in section 3 D 4 4 Preparation of digital data for electronic delivery Technical manual data prepared and delivered digitally in accordance with this standard shall be Extensible Markup Language XML tagged using the Document Type Definition DTD for Troubleshooting Procedures and the XML Stylesheet Language XSL or style sheets in accordance with MIL STD 2361 Refer to 4 6 for information on obtaining or accessing this DTD and style sheets XML tags used in the DTD are noted throughout the text of this standard in bracketed bold characters 1 lt tswp gt
616. trols and indicators description tabular option 187 C 5 2 3 4 Controls and indicators description narrative option 187 C 5 2 4 Operation under usual conditions work package opusualwp 187 C 5 2 4 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 187 C 5 2 4 2 Initial setup information wpinfo sees 187 C 5 2 4 3 Security measures for electronic data lt secref gt 187 5 2 4 4 187 5 2 4 5 Shelter requirements lt shelter gt 188 5 2 4 6 Assembly and preparation for use lt prepforuse gt 188 C 5 2 4 7 Initial adjustments before use and self test lt initlal gt 188 C 5 2 4 8 Operating procedures Opere iso reae ees eaae 188 C 5 2 4 8 1 Operating procedure considerations 189 C 5 2 4 8 2 Decals and instruction plates lt instructplt gt 190 C 5 2 4 9 Operating auxiliary equipment lt operaux gt 190 C 5 2 4 10 Preparation for movement lt prepmove gt 190 5 2 5 Operation under un
617. ts These items are part of the M198 howitzer As part of the end item these items must be with the end item whenever it is issued or transferred between property accounts Items of COEI are removed and separately packaged for transportation or shipment only when necessary Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items Basic Issue Items BII These essential items are required to place the M198 howitzer in operation operate it and to do emergency repairs Although shipped separately packaged BII must be with the M198 howitzer during operation and when it is transferred between property accounts Listing these items is your authority to request requisition them for replacement based on authorization of the end item by the TOE MTOE Illustrations are furnished to help you find and identify the items Explanation of Columns in the COEI List and BII List Column 1 Illus Number Gives you the number of the item illustrated Column 2 National Stock Number NSN Identifies the stock number of the item to be used for requisitioning purposes Column 3 Description Part Number CAGEC Identifies the Federal item name in all capital letters followed by a minimum description when needed The stowage location of COEI and BII is also included in this column The last line below the description is the part number and the Commercial and Government Entity Code CAGEC in parentheses Column 4 Usable on Code When applicable giv
618. ts and components are authorized for replacement at a level below depot maintenance authorized repair parts data shall appear in the applicable DMWR NMWR Introduction repair parts list kit parts bulk items special tools list and cross reference indexes work packages as described in F 5 3 5 through F 5 3 11 shall be included as specified herein F 5 3 3 2 1 Depot repair parts Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity depot level repair parts shall be included in the single RPSTL see 4 1 When the acquiring activity specifies a depot DMWR NMWR level RPSTL only depot level parts shall appear in the depot RPSTL Figure s in the lower maintenance level RPSTL that contain both depot coded and non depot coded parts shall identify all parts The appropriate SMR code shall identify the repair level If the RPSTL TM includes depot repair parts the statement Including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts shall be added to the title of the RPSTL TM 286 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX F F 5 3 4 Repair parts list special tools and kits work package layout Parts lists special tools list and kit work packages shall start on a right hand page in accordance with 4 7 2 3 The first page shall contain the work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt and when practicable the figure and parts list is placed on the first page When the figure and parts list cannot be included on a single page the part list shall begin on the nex
619. ts RSRS R How to use this manual R R R CHAPTER 1 B 5 1 lt gim gt GENERAL INFORMATION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND THEORY OF OPERATION GENERAL INFORMATION WORK B 5 2 lt ginfowp gt PACKAGE lt eir gt Maintenance forms records and reports R Reporting equipment improvement 5 2 5 recommendations EIR Hand receipt HR information 5 2 6 lt handreceipt gt Corrosion prevention and control CPC R R R B 5 2 7 R R 529 Destruction of Army materiel to prevent R enemy use Preparation for storage or shipment R R R Warranty information su Listofabbreviations R 58 special tools TMDE support equipment 157 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TABLE A XIV TM Requirements Matrix for Chemical Ammunition 23 24 34 MIL STD 40051 2 TM Content 34 amp P Reference Element Nam EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION AND DATA 5 3 lt descwp gt WORK PACKAGE Equipment characteristics capabilities and 5 3 3 lt eqpinfo gt features Location and description of major 5 3 4 lt locdesc gt components Differences between models lt eqpdiff gt lt mim gt lt maintenancepmcscategory gt lt maintenancecategory gt y pun C Re C lt preserv gt P Es3232 P CEs32391 P 6532392 ammodefec gt P 2532393 P fem E 5 3
620. tute Inc 25 West 43rd Street New York NY 10036 AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS ASME Y 14 38 Abbreviations for Use on Drawings and in Text 14 100 Engineering Drawing Practices ASME Y32 2 6 Graphic Symbols for Heat Power Apparatus Application for copies should be addressed to the American Society of Mechanical Engineers 3 Park Avenue New York NY 10016 5990 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS ASTM ASTM F856 Standard Practice for Mechanical Symbols Shipboard Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning HVAC ASTM F1000 95 Standard Practice for Piping System Drawing Symbols Applications for copies should be addressed to the American Society for Testing Material 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken PA 19428 2959 online www astm org or copies of these documents are available online at http assist daps dla mil quicksearch or http www dodssp daps mil or from the Document Automation and Production Service Building 4 D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia PA 19111 5094 INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 91 1984 Graphic Symbols for Logic Functions IEEE 260 1 1993 Standard Letter Symbols for Units of Measurement IEEE 280 1985 Letter Symbols for Use in Electrical Science and Electrical Engineering IEEE 315A 1986 Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronic Diagrams IEEE 945 1984 Recommended Pr
621. ud sa uade pU a UR e EE 285 5 3 2 Parts information chapter lt gt 285 F 5 3 3 RPSTL work packages requirements 286 F 5 3 3 1 RPSTL work packages pim included in a maintenance TM 286 5 3 3 2 RPSTL work packages included DMWR NMWR 286 286 5 3 4 Repair parts list special tools and kits work package layout 287 5 3 5 Introduction work package introwp 2 2222 287 5 3 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 287 5 3 5 2 Initial setup Information 287 5 3 5 3 Introduction e IEEO 287 F 5 3 5 4 Indexed RPSTL illustration and legend lt figure gt 295 5 3 6 Repair parts list work package lt plwp gt 295 F 5 3 6 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 295 5 3 6 2 Initial setup Information eves eec e pi eee 295 XX MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS PARAGRAPH PAGE 5 3 6 3 Repair parts list lt 1 gt ERR ERE SH EAS UNES 295 F 5 3 63 1
622. uired it shall be so stated If tools are to be fabricated reference to the Illustrated List of Manufactured Items work package shall be made 171 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX B B 5 2 25 3 Repair parts One of the two following statements shall be included Repair parts are listed and illustrated in the repair parts and special tools list insert TM number of RPSTL or Repair parts are listed and illustrated in parts information work package insert appropriate work package sequence number of this manual B 5 2 26 Copyright credit line lt copyrt gt TMs should not contain copyrighted material except as specified in the Federal Acquisition Regulations FAR and Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation DFAR Supplement When copyrighted material is included in a TM the TM author shall obtain prior written permission from the copyright owner or authorized agent for its use The written permission shall contain a statement declaring whether or not a copyright credit line is required When a copyright credit line is required the information shall appear as the last paragraph of the general information work package B 5 2 26 1 Proprietary names Trade names copyrighted names or other proprietary names applying exclusively to the product of one company shall not be used unless the items cannot be adequately described because of the technical involvement construction or composition In such instances lone and if possible sev
623. uired for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 9 2 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initial setup information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 2 E 5 3 9 3 Introduction for illustrated list of manufactured items work package lt intro gt The following introduction text below within the quotation marks shall be prepared and included verbatim ILLUSTRATED LIST OF MANUFACTURED ITEMS INTRODUCTION Scope This work package includes complete instructions for making items authorized to be manufactured or fabricated at the enter applicable maintenance level 251 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E How to Use the Index of Manufactured Items A part number index in alphanumeric order is provided for cross referencing the part number of the item to be manufactured to the page which covers fabrication criteria Explanation of the Illustrations of Manufactured Items All instructions needed by maintenance personnel to manufacture the item are included on the illustrations When applicable a reference to the associated RPSTL TM or RPSTL work package shall be entered here All bulk materials needed for manufacture of an item are listed by part number or specification number in a tabular list on the illustration E 5 3 9 4 Index of manufactured items lt manuindx gt A index of part numbers or drawing numbers shall be prepared which lists part numbers lt partno gt and or drawing numbers dwgno in alpha
624. und If an inspection is not applicable to the inspection phase being performed N A shall be entered 11 Initials lt initials gt Initials of the person performing the action to correct the indicated fault shall be entered E 5 3 16 5 MTF form and rotor smoothing record When all required inspections have been accomplished and initialed in accordance with the above procedure a daily inspection in accordance with the TM specified in the inspection checklist work package will be performed on the aircraft to permit performance of a maintenance test flight MTF The MTF shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the applicable aircraft technical manuals and TM 1 1500 328 23 using the MTF form in the MTF technical manual E 5 3 16 6 Final records check After all corrective actions have been completed and following completion of the phased inspection the Technical Inspector or designated supervisor shall verify that all applicable forms and records have been properly updated All uncorrected faults shall be entered on DA Form 2408 13 prepared for that date or to the DA Form 2408 14 A Final Records Checklist shall be used to ensure forms and records have been inspected for completeness and accuracy prior to release of the aircraft from the phased maintenance inspection The inspector verifying the final records check shall enter his initials adjacent to the indicated form or record on the Final Records Checklist The ini
625. ure G 16 Example of a flight safety critical aircraft parts table 361 xxvi MIL STD 4005 1 2 CONTENTS TABLE PAGE TABLE I Manual styles and trim s1Z6S 26 TABLE Foldout maximum page sizes in 26 TABLE A I Publications Type and Title with Associated Context Matrix Table 93 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for huele eese anas 99 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix 107 TABLE A IV TM Requirements Matrix for 113 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for naa 119 TABLE A VI TM Requirements Matrix for etie lace eed aco eu 125 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for 127 TABLE DMWR NMWR Requirements Matrix for 133 TABLE A IX TM Requirements Matrix for eee 139 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 141 TABLE A XI TM Requirements Matrix for 440 143 TABLE TM Requirements Matrix for 145 TABLE A XIII TM R
626. usability or the revision process work packages should not exceed 30 pages A series of maintenance tasks can be divided into two or more work packages unless it is determined that separating the task information would degrade usability 1 removal and installation of the gun turret in one work package disassembly and reassembly of the gun turret in a second work package 4 7 2 3 2 Work package content Work packages refer to FIGURE 1 shall contain a title block initial setups descriptive information operating tasks and maintenance tasks These data types can be further divided into paragraphs procedural steps tables lists warnings cautions and notes and supporting illustrations Refer to Appendix B through Appendix G for the specific content requirements for each of the functional work package types 1 description information operator s instructions maintenance troubleshooting repair parts and supporting information 4 7 2 3 3 Development of individual work packages Ideally each WP in a manual will be an independent stand alone data unit It may be required to group some information or maintenance tasks in one work package and divide others into several WPs of suitable length Typical examples of page based technical content work packages are provided in MIL HDBK 1222 and partial and complete examples are shown in FIGURE 1 FIGURE C 1 FIGURE D 1 through FIGURE D 8 FIGURE E 1 through FIGURE E 11 FIGURE F 2 through FIG
627. usual conditions work package lt gt 190 5 2 5 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 190 C 5 2 5 2 Initial setup information wpinfo eese enne 190 5 2 5 3 Operations under unusual tasks lt opunutsk gt 190 C 5 2 5 3 1 Security measures for electronic data lt secref gt 190 C 5 2 5 3 2 Unusual environment weather lt unusualenv gt 190 5 2 5 3 3 Fording and swimming lt fordin gt 190 C 5 2 5 3 4 Interim Nuclear Biological and Chemical NBC decontamination procedures ese IDUR GEM 190 C 5 2 5 3 5 Jamming and Electronic Countermeasures ECM procedures lt ecm gt 191 C 5 2 5 3 6 Degraded operation procedures lt degraded gt b 191 5 2 6 Emergency work package lt emergencywp gt 191 C5261 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt 191 C 5 2 6 2 Initial setup information wpinfo essere 191 5 2 6 3 Emergency operation lt emergency gt 191 5 2 6 4 Emergency shutdown
628. vailable for Field Use for Electronics Command Equipment Inspection of Supplies and Equipment Ammunition Surveillance Procedures Field Instructions for Painting and Preserving Electronics Command Equipment Including Camouflage Patterns Painting of Electronics Equipment Shelters Color Marking and Camouflage Painting of Military Vehicles Construction Equipment and Materials Handling Equipment Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM and Aviation Intermediate Maintenance AVIM Manual for General Aircraft Maintenance Consists of ten volumes Aeronautical Equipment Maintenance Management Policies and Procedures Nondestructive Inspection Methods Avionic Cleaning and Corrosion Prevention Control Painting Instructions for Army Materiel Army Aviation Engineering Manual Weight and Balance Painting and Marking of Army Aircraft Copies of these publications are available from the APD Distribution Operations Facility APD DOF 1655 Woodson Road St Louis MO 63114 6128 MIL STD 4005 1 2 2 3 Non Government publications The following documents form a part of this document to the extent specified therein Unless otherwise specified the issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or contract AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANSI ANSI Y32 10 Diagrams Fluid Power Graphic Symbols for ISO 9000 Series Quality Application for copies should be addressed to the American National Standards Insti
629. ve immediate recognition of a hazard or to provide essential information 3 67 Illustration A general term meaning graphic presentations of all types Illustrations include pictorials functional diagrams and line graphs This term is used synonymously with figure graphic drawing diagram and artwork 3 68 Initial Graphics Exchange Specification IGES A standard digital graphic form for graphics preparation as defined by MIL PRF 28000 3 69 Inspect To determine the serviceability of an item by comparing its physical mechanical and or electrical characteristics with established standards through examination e g by sight sound or feel 3 70 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE Membership organization that includes engineers scientists and students in electronics and allied fields Founded in 1963 it has over 300 000 members and is involved with setting standards for computers and communications 3 71 International Organization for Standardization ISO Organization that sets international standards founded in 1946 and headquartered in Geneva It deals with all fields except electrical and electronics which is governed by the older International Electrotechnical Commission IEC also in Geneva With regard to information processing ISO and IEC created JTCI the Joint Technical Committee for Information Technology 3 72 Interchangeability Defined in this specification as above the scope of classic i
630. vertical bar in the outer margins of the page Changes to illustrations are indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the title Zero in the Change No column indicates an original page or work package Date of issue for the original manual and changed pages work packages are Original 13 July 1998 Change 1 10 December 1998 Change 2 2 March 1999 TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES FOR FRONT AND REAR MATTER IS 20 AND TOTAL NUMBER OF WORK PACKAGES IS 35 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING Page WP No Change No Page WP No Change No Title 0 WP 0024 6 pgs 1 Warning 0 WP 0025 4 pgs 1 i iii 0 WP 0026 4 pgs 0 iv blank 0 WP 0027 4 pgs Deleted 2 Chp title page 0 WP 0028 4 pgs 0 WP 0001 4 pgs 1 WP 0029 4 pgs 0 WP 0002 10 pgs 1 WP 0030 4 pgs 1 WP 0003 2 pgs 0 WP 0031 6 pgs 2 WP 0004 2 pgs 2 WP 0032 6 pgs 0 Chp 2 title page 0 WP 0033 2 pgs 1 WP 0005 2 pgs 1 WP 0034 2 pgs 0 WP 0006 8 pgs 0 WP 0034 1 4 pgs Added 2 WP 0007 2 pgs 0 WP 0035 2 pgs 2 Chp 3 title page 0 INDEX 1 INDEX 14 0 WP 0008 2 pgs 0 Chp4 title page 0 WP 0009 12 pgs 0 Chp 5 title page 0 WP 0010 2 pgs 0 WP 0011 2 pgs 1 Chp 6 title page 0 WP 0012 20 pgs 2 WP 0013 30 pgs 0 WP 0014 30 pgs 2 WP 0015 2 pgs 0 WP 0016 4 pgs 0 WP 0017 2 pgs 1 WP 0018 8 pgs 1 WP 0019 12 pgs 1 WP 0020 2 pgs 2 WP 0021 2 pgs 0 Chp 7 title page 0 WP 0022 2 pgs 0 WP 0023 4 pgs 2 A Change No 2 FIGURE 16 Example of a lis
631. viation MAC work package lt macintrowp gt G 5 3 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt This information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 G 5 3 2 2 Initial setup information This initial setup information is not required for this work package G 5 3 2 3 Introduction lt intro gt The following text shall be prepared and included verbatim refer to FIGURE 3 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART MAC INTRODUCTION Aviation Maintenance Allocation Chart This MAC assigns maintenance functions in accordance with the Aviation Maintenance concept for Army aviation These maintenance levels Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM Aviation Intermediate Maintenance AVIM and depot maintenance are depicted in the MAC as AVUM corresponds to an O code in the Repair Parts and Special Tools List RPSTL AVIM corresponds to an F code in the RPSTL DEPOT corresponds to a code in the RPSTL The maintenance to be performed below depot and in the field is described as follows 322 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX G Aviation Unit Maintenance AVUM AVUM activities will be staffed and equipped to perform high frequency On Aircraft maintenance tasks required to retain or return aircraft systems to a serviceable condition The maintenance capability of the AVUM will be governed by the Maintenance Allocation Chart MAC and limited by the amount and complexity of Ground Support Equ
632. weapon system equipment the TM may contain the following testing and troubleshooting categories D 5 4 1 Aviation testing and troubleshooting category Aircraft Troubleshooting TMs only lt troubleaviationcategory gt When developing Aircraft Troubleshooting TMs the following work packages shall be developed as applicable Introduction work package lt tsintrowp gt b Technical description work package lt techdescwp gt Troubleshooting index work package lt tsindxwp gt d Operational checkout work packages lt opcheckwp gt 199 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX D e Troubleshooting work packages lt tswp gt f Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting work package lt opcheck tswp gt D 5 4 2 Standard testing and troubleshooting category lt troublecategory gt When developing TMs with maintenance level below depot the following work packages shall be developed as applicable a Troubleshooting index work package lt tsindxwp gt b Operational checkout work packages lt opcheckwp gt c Troubleshooting work packages lt tswp gt d Combined operational checkout and troubleshooting work package lt opcheck tswp gt D 5 4 3 DMWR NMWR testing and troubleshooting category depot only lt troubledmwrnmwrcategory gt When developing DMWR NMWR the following work packages shall be developed as applicable a Troubleshooting index work package lt tsindxwp gt b Preshop analysis work package lt pshopan
633. when recording results of PMCS on DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet General statement s shall be prepared which apply to the overall understanding of lubrication requirements Lubricants shall be identified by standard military symbols in accordance with MIL HDBK 113 and MIL HDBK 275 The following lubrication interval symbols shall be used as applicable D daily B biennially W weekly H hours operated M monthly MI miles operated Q quarterly KM kilometers operated S semiannually RDS rounds fired A annually OC on condition MRA maintenance repair action statement concerning Corrosion Prevention and Control CPC shall be prepared This statement shall contain maintenance instructions or reference CPC requirements contained in the applicable maintenance instructions In addition if the inclusion of such instructions are applicable a statement shall be prepared which states that the instructions are mandatory 1 filter statement As applicable the following statement shall be included verbatim Oil filters shall be serviced cleaned changed as applicable when They are known to be contaminated or clogged Service is recommended by AOAP laboratory analysis or At prescribed hardtime intervals 2 AOAP sampling interval statement The following statement shall be inserted Engine oil transmission oil hydraulic fluids must be sampled at insert applicable hour mileage tim
634. would be grouped into each related area All fault symptoms of a communications nature would fall into the communications group The symptoms may be further divided into functions within the communications group that would be common The same would be done for radar data link display and tracking systems This index shall include the following data a List all fault symptoms or known malfunctions in alphabetical order by malfunction symptom lt malfunc gt or by built in test code fault message word lt messageword gt and reference this information to the applicable testing and troubleshooting WP sequence number lt xref gt lt link gt lt extref gt or the required corrective action lt action gt b For complex systems list symptoms by subsystem categories lt tsindx symptom category gt lt tsindx messagewor category gt if necessary and use codes that help identify specific items Subsystem categories shall be listed in alphabetical order or by code c Catalog malfunctions symptoms by method of detection if this aids usability d Fault symptom descriptions titles shall be standardized between malfunction symptom index work packages and troubleshooting procedures work packages D 5 5 5 4 Master malfunction symptom index lt tsindx symptom gt When applicable one troubleshooting malfunction symptom index work package refer D 5 4 4 shall be prepared for all troubleshooting for the system equipment A chapter title page shall b
635. xternal power perform operational checks etc When the follow on maintenance is extensive and is contained in a separate work package a reference shall be made to the applicable work package The words END OF WORK PACKAGE shall be placed below the last data item i e text illustration etc of the work package containing the maintenance procedure The maintenance work packages described in E 5 3 2 through E 5 3 16 shall be prepared as applicable See MIL HDBK 1222 for examples of work package identification information format E 5 3 2 Service upon receipt work package Unit A VUM only lt surwp gt This work package shall be prepared and contain information required for the user to ensure that the equipment will be adequately inspected serviced and operationally tested before it is subjected to use Procedures shall be prepared for performing visual inspection of ammunition received from the ammunition supply facility This inspection shall include verification that ammunition received was that requisitioned Instructions shall be prepared for a condition check of the shipment pallets containers boxes and legibility of markings Instructions shall be prepared to note the quantity of each lot for recording purposes E 5 3 2 1 Work package identification information lt wpidinfo gt Work package identification information is required for this work package refer to 4 7 9 1 E 5 3 22 Initial setup information lt wpinfo gt Initi
636. y Cataloging Handbook Copies of Handbooks H4 H8 and H6 are available from the Commander Defense Logistics Services Center Battle Creek MI 49017 3084 MIL STD 4005 1 2 2 2 2 Other Government documents and publications The following other Government documents and publications form a part of this document to the extent specified herein Unless specified otherwise the issues are those cited in the solicitation or contract AR 25 30 The Army Publishing Program AR 75 1 Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives RCS CSGLD 1961 MD AR 95 1 Aviation Flight Regulations AR 385 64 U S Army Explosives Safety Program CTA 50 909 Field and Garrison Furnishings and Equipment CTA 50 970 Expendable Durable Items Except Medical Class V Repair Parts and Heraldic Items DA PAM 25 30 Consolidated Army Publications and Forms Index DA PAM 25 40 Army Publishing DA PAM 385 63 Range Safety DA PAM 385 64 Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards DA PAM 738 750 Functional Users Manual for The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS DA PAM 738 751 Functional Users Manual for The Army Maintenance Management System Aviation TAMMS A Application for copies should be addressed to APD Distribution Operations Facility APD DOF 1655 Woodson Road St Louis MO 63114 6128 DOD 5200 1 R DoD Information Security Program DOD 5220 22 M National Industrial Security Program Operat
637. y be contained in a table standard information 1 Packaging material lt crit insp tab gt For each item lt eqpitem gt of a component requiring inspection acceptable lt accept gt reparable lt repairable gt and nonreparable lt nonrepairable gt conditions shall be provided 2 Equipment components lt pecul insp tab gt A table shall be provided that lists by location lt location gt each item lt eqpitem gt of a component lt compntassem gt requiring inspection For each of these items an action lt step1 gt shall be provided and if applicable a reference remarks made to another work package refer to FIGURE 1 3 In addition the following shall be inserted exactly as stated here Inspect the equipment for damage incurred during shipment If the equipment has been damaged report the damage on SF 361 Transportation Discrepancy Report Check the equipment against the packing slip to see if the shipment is complete Report all discrepancies in accordance with applicable service instructions e g for Army instructions see DA PAM 738 750 Check to see whether the equipment has been modified Processing unpacked equipment lt processeqp gt Instructions shall be prepared for processing the unpacked equipment e g removing excess lubricant from a new rifle as long as they do not conflict with any warranty provisions The following information shall be prepared as applicable 1 Any special
638. y other markings on the document it will not be downgraded or declassified without written approval of the originating United States agency DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT Distribution authorized to U S government agencies and their contractors This publication is Administrative Operational Use required for administrative and operational purposes as determined 22 October 1990 Other requests for this document must be referred to Commander U S Army Chemical Research Development and Engineering Center ATTN SMCRR MAT Aberdeen Proving Ground MD 21010 5423 WARNING This document contains technical data whose export is restricted by the Arms Export Control Act Title 22 U S C Sec 2751 et seq or the Export Administration Act of 1979 as amended Title 50 U S C App 2401 et seq Violations of these export laws are subject to severe criminal penalties Disseminate in accordance with provisions of DoD Directive 5230 25 DESTRUCTION NOTICE Destroy by any method that will prevent disclosure of contents or reconstruction of the document HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY 1 JUNE 1996 FIGURE 10 Example of a TM front cover Continued 76 MIL STD 4005 1 2 TM 1 1520 238 TECHNICAL MANUAL PHASED MAINTENANCE INSPECTION CHECKLIST FOR ARMY AH 64A HELICOPTER 1 1520 238 dated 28 February 2002 superseded TM 1 1520 238 dated 20 June 1994 including all changes DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A Approv
639. yt tus 4 2 Preparation for delivery 0 4 3 E 5 3 5 3 7 Disclosure notice sees uska E asss 5 2 1 1 6 Distribution statement iesu ener ence 5 2 1 1 7 DMWR PS VAT ADV ROC 5 2 1 1 4 Component checklist work 19 25 57 Depot mobilization requirements WP 5 3 8 3 National Overhaul Standard 5 2 1 1 2 OIP Work DICkage ann tet e u E 5 3 8 2 Preshop analysis work package D 5 5 6 OA requirements WP etos E 5 3 8 4 DALES osse oO PRU GRO M Va ubivis oae ORES 5 3 3 2 1 RPSTL L a 5 3 3 2 Testing and troubleshooting aec i a erra ade D 5 4 3 DMWR Requirement Matrix DMWR with Overhaul Standards with RPSTL TABLE A VIII DMWR with Overhaul Standards TABLE A VIII DMAVR with RPS TD odd tte eoi dou teet dut unes TABLE A VII DMWR TABLE A VII DMWR statement for National Overhaul Standard 5 2 1 1 2 Drawinps TEquired oa wie
640. zed use 15 W 40 OE HDO 15 40 when available and applicable temperature range exists or NOTE 15W 40 oil is not authorized in this particular enter component name f Equipment not ready available if lt eqpnotavail gt A brief statement of the condition EQUIPMENT NOT READY AVAILABLE IF e g malfunction shortage that would cause the equipment to be less than fully ready to perform its assigned mission shall be provided If the procedure contains detail steps the statement shall be placed opposite the applicable step E 5 3 4 2 4 Mandatory replacement parts mrplpart items that must be replaced during PMCS whether they have failed or not shall be identified a When mandatory replacement parts are required the information entries shall be placed in a table refer to FIGURE E 3 The table shall follow the PMCS 1 Interval lt title gt 2 Item number lt itemno gt 3 Part number lt partno gt Commercial and Government Equipment Code CAGEC lt cageno gt 4 National stock number NSN lt nsn gt 5 Nomenclature lt name gt 6 Quantity lt qty gt b If there no mandatory replacement parts for your PMCS the following statement shall be included in lieu of parts information There are no replacement parts required for these PMCS procedures E 5 3 4 3 Preventive Maintenance Checklist PMC operator only When specified by the acquiring activity a PMC shall be prepared as
641. zed maintenance level types of lubrication fittings and possible ill effects of excessive or insufficient lubrication Caution shall be stressed where over or under lubrication of a part will damage that part or closely associated parts Disassembly and hand packing instructions shall be prepared for medium and high speed antifriction bearings that are sensitive to the amount of lubrication applied and do not have bleed holes or relief valves Cleaning disassembling and assembling instructions required before or after lubrication shall be prepared or referenced Instructions shall be prepared for washing and natural drying of finely machined and dirt sensitive parts before relubricating Use of compressed air jets or temperatures above 212 F shall not be prescribed 233 MIL STD 4005 1 2 APPENDIX E 7 Instructions shall not specify a coating of preservative material either before or after packing parts that are lubricated with grease nor shall they specify an application of oil solvent or additional grease to a sealed for life or prepackaged antifriction bearing 8 Where applicable the statement For Arctic operation refer to FM 9 207 Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Materiel in Cold Weather 0 to 65 F shall be inserted as a note When specific restrictions preferred grades of lubricant and other conditions exist notes shall be made For example NOTE When MIL L 2104 lubricant is authori

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Groupes motopompes pour huile  OM 1190-1 Daikin MD4 VFD - McQuay International Home Page  （除雪ドーザ（18t級）購入）  Jarra de Anaerobiosis de 2,5 L  StarTech.com 4-to-1 USB Data Switch  NanoPhotometer P-Class PVC Installation and User Manual  Comment développer vos pouvoirs intérieurs - Libérez  Epson AP-60 Product Support Bulletin  funciones básicas del o rokr uso del o rokr para reproducir  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file